Home

Model 9500B

1. Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square DC Voltage Function Final Width 215mm 10 5 4 DC Square Square Calibration 10 5 4 1 Introduction This section is a guide to calibrating the Model 9500B s DC Square Function Square Waveform using its front panel controls The following topics are covered 10 5 4 2 Calibration Equipment Requirements 10 5 4 3 Interconnections 10 5 4 4 Calibration Setup 10 5 4 5 Calibration Procedure 10 5 4 2 Calibration Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e A high resolution Standards DMM with RMS AC Voltage accuracy of 0 01 or better from 2 5mV to 35V at 1kHz For example Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads For example a Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor Final Width 215mm e Short high quality 4mm leads 10 5 8 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square Function Square Waveforms 10 5 4 3 Interconnections Standards DMM C Guard Q Guard Final Width 215mm 230V PK MAXI _ Active Head WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 10 5 4 1 DC Square Square Waveform Calibration Interconnections Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square Function Square Waveforms 10 5 9 Final Width 215mm 10 5 4 4 Calibration Setup 1 2 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Standar
2. 1 Onthe Present Settings screen to transfer to the Current language screen press the SELECT LANG screen key 2 To change the Procedure mode language press the required language screen key on the right 3 Press EXIT toreturn to the second Present Settings menu screen The new language will be used the next time that Procedure mode is entered 3 4 3 16 Border line Test Point Specifications Borderline Reporting For users who wish to know when a UUT is drifting towards the limits of while still within the manufacturer s specification it is useful to provide some borderline indication This can be expressed as a percentage of the manufacturer s specification for each test point beyond which the indication will be given In the figure the pass borderline and fail regions of the specification tolerance are indicated at the test point A Upper 100 Spec Limit Borderline Percentage Nominal Test_ Point Value Borderline Percentage Lower 100 Spec Limit UUT Indicated Value Actual UUT Input Value Actual Test Point Value 9500 Indicates Fail E 9500 Indicates Borderline 9500 Indicates Pass When in Procedure mode the direct printing certificate Style 1 and the data on the Results card will report Borderline test results Users have access via Configuration mode to set the percentage for borderline reporting 1
3. 5 3 3 3 Is Your Name on the List If you are on the list use cursor keys to select your name then press the OK screen key If Your Name is NOT on the List Use the alpha numeric keypad to write your name 12 characters max on the screen It will appear at the bottom of the screen as you type together with a shift key icon Then press the key or the OK screen key after which the screen will change to select the manufacturer or model to be tested except that further progress will require a procedure card to be inserted into PCMCIA SLOT 1 refer to paras 5 3 3 4 The list can be cleared only by entering CONFIG Mode using the password and pressing the MORE screen key then using the CLEAR USER LIST facility 1 Writing Alphabetical Characters For alphabetical characters there are two shift keys A blue left and red right on the bottom row of the keypad The numeric keys have colour coded alphabetical characters printed on left and right Press and release the appropriate shift key then the alphabetic character key in order to spell out the words Only UPPER CASE characters are available from the keypad Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Access Guide 5 3 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 5 3 3 4 Select and Insert the Procedure Card which contains the Procedure for the Subject UUT Model a No Procedure Card in Slot an
4. PARanet er DC GROund lt cpd gt ON CF 1 0 MCHannel lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 SQUare POLarity lt cpd gt POSi ti ve NEGati ve SYMvet ri cal GROund lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 EDGe TRANsi ti on lt cpd gt RI Si ng FALLI ng SPEed lt dnpd gt MARKer WAVEf or m lt cpd gt SQuar e PULSe TRI ang e LI NE HI GHI i ght lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 OPULse AMPLI t ude lt dnpd gt ENERgy lt dnpd gt POWr DURati on EXECut e TRI Gger lt cpd gt SI NG e CONTI nuous RAMP TI ME lt dnpd gt TRI Gger lt cpd gt STARt M DDI e SKEW ALI Gnrent lt cpd gt DEFaul t PRECI si on TELevi si on LI NE lt dnpd gt SYNC lt cpd gt COMPosi t e FRAME LEVel lt cpd gt BLACk GREY VHI Te POLarity lt cpd gt POSi ti ve NEGati ve LEAKage STATe lt cpd gt OPEN CLOSe TRI Gger lt cpd gt SI NG e CONTI nuous EXTer nal VOLTage LEVel Medi ate AMPLI t ude lt dnpd gt CURRent LEVel Medi ate AMPLI t ude lt dnpd gt FREQuency CW FI Xed lt dnpd gt PERi od CW FI Xed lt dnpd gt W Dth CW FI Xed lt dnpd gt Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 7 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 5 SOURce Subsystem Contd 6 6 5 2 SOUR FUNC SHAP
5. J TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL KEA Ona 77 SELECT 1B Both polarities of DC Voltage output are listed merely as different waveforms As anexample pressing the fF key from the setup shown above will present the DC function screen showing negative values selected of course the frequency parameter has disappeared from the screen _ OFF nee nee x10 500 mvidiv x4 20 000 mv 7 Deviation 90 00 A O P Amplitude 20 000 mV TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL ERM FORM 777 SELECT R 5 Once into DC function it is not necessary to change the waveform to change polarity Pressing the screen key toggles between positive and negative DC Voltage The polarity selection is shown by the function icon in the top left corner confirmed by the or sign on the O P Amplitude value 4 5 7 2 Value Editing Amplitude At maximum and minimum output voltages the screen settings of the contributors values units division scaling multiplier and deviation are limited by the output voltage itself For example Contributor Qoan 1MQ Qroap 50Q Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Output Voltage 888 00UuVDC Limit 222 4V p p 888 00uVDC 5 56V Units Division 0 20mV div 50V div 0 20mV div 2V div Scaling Multiplier 1 Deviation 11 20 11 20 1 10 11 20 11 20
6. soft key on the bottom of the screen 4 17 6 4 Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope Input Leakage Test points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide Follow the sequence of test stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 7 at each stage 1 9500B c If the scope requires a repetitive trigger press the AUTO TRIG soft key at the bottom right corner of the screen UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the test point Select the correct range for the test point If required adjust the sweep speed and trigger level 9500B Set Output ON b Press the 5 screen key to select short circuit output and provide a one shot trigger to the UUT 4 UUT Scope Adjust the Y position control to place the display on the zero axis 5 9500B Press the screen key to select open circuit output and provide a one shot trigger to the UUT 6 UUT Response Record the UUT Scope Y deflection at the test point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide 7 9500B Set Output OFF eae tN pw 4 17 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Input Leakage Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 18 4 18 1 This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B to generate variable width pulses for the testing trigger timing circuitry within an Oscilloscope Pulse Width Function Introduction
7. 5 2 5 2 3 General Notes Output Slewing 52 2 5 2 4 Printing Setup 5 2 4 1 Printer Type 5 2 2 5 2 4 2 Certificate Formatting and Data Presentation 5 2 2 5 2 4 3 Enable Printing 5 2 2 5 2 5 Saving Results on Memory Cards 5 2 3 5 2 5 1 Results Card Enabling and MESEDE LO EE E 5 2 3 5 2 5 2 Stage by Stage Results Saving 5 2 3 5 2 5 3 Results Memory Space 0 5 2 3 5 2 5 4 Static RAM Card Non Rechargeable Battery Condition oes 5 2 3 5 2 5 5 Static RAM Card Re chargeable Battery 5 2 3 5 2 2 Safety Features The Model 9500B incorporates safety mechanisms in all its internal programming For example a user must make an extra confirming key press in order to raise a voltage at the terminals above a pre determined value High Voltage Warning Take Care After pressing OK or REPEAT PREV keys If the procedure writer has not conformed strictly to the procedure writing guidelines HIGH VOLTAGES MAY APPEAR WITHOUT WARNING AT ANY POINT IN THE PROCEDURE ANY WARNING BEEPS SHOULD BE TAKEN VERY SERIOUSLY Emergency Action Use of OUTPUT OFF Button Inemergency the most effective way of turning output off other than pulling the line power plug is to press the OUTPUT OFF button on the right of the front panel This may sound obvious but a special feature of the OFF button operation is that as well
8. Check the last section of this manual for an Addendum that describes any additional Active Head models Any one of the fitted heads can be used to provide triggers for the UUT oscilloscope instead of signals However a Trigger Cable SMC to BNC is shipped with the 9500B to provide triggers to a separate trigger input on the UUT oscilloscope with a mix of up to four active heads 2 The following accessories are shipped with the instrument Pt No Description 401297 Current Loop Assembly for use in Current Function 630477 Trigger Cable for trigger purposes only in place of an Active Head 3 The available options for the 9500B are as follows Option 60 Carry Case Option 90 Rack Mounting Kit Line Voltage The 9500B is configured for use at the correct voltage at the shipment point The 9500B can be reconfigured for a different line voltage requiring a different power fuse Refer to Section 2 paras 2 7 4 and 2 7 5 1 4 Section 1 Introducing the Model 9500B Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 2 2 1 Installing the Model 9500B About Section 2 2 2 Lifting and Carrying the 9500B Section 2 contains information and instructions for unpacking and Caution The 9500B weighs in excess of 12kg so take special installing the Model 9500B Universal Calibration System It is divided care when lifting and carrying the instrument into the following sub sections p pae 2 2 1 Lifting and Carrying from Ben
9. OFF nore CHANNEL 1 gt 9560 6 4Ghz 70ps PAAL CHANNEL 2 gt 9560 6 4Ghz 70ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9560 6 4Ghz 70ps SIGNAL CHANNEL 4 gt 9560 6 4Ghz 70ps CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt _Trigger Cable O P Amplitude 20 000 mV SIGNAL CH5 MULTI TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL TRIGGER LOM EXIT CHANNEL 50Q RUY 4 5 8 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Whenever the DC waveform is selected within the DC Square function an extra Soft Key is available in the CHANNEL SELECT sub menu Please note that Multi Channel DC Output may only be configured to drive a UUT input impedance of IMQ This key toggles Multi Channel capability ON and OFF Whilst OFF the operation of Channel Selection is unchanged and is as previously described Refer para 4 5 3 1 Whilst ON highlighted each of the above Softkeys may be toggled ON or OFF to select Output from any or all channels 4 5 8 Using the 9500B DC Function to Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 5 8 1 Introduction Two types of procedures for amplitude calibration are given a Using the 9500B as a fixed source where the oscilloscope can be adjusted b Using the 9500B as an adjustable source reading oscilloscope deviations via the 9500B screen 4 5 8 2 Interconnections a Use the appropriate active head to connect from the required 9500B cha
10. Tables 10 5 4 2 and 10 5 4 3 overleaf gt Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square Function Square Waveforms 10 5 11 Final Width 215mm Table 10 5 4 2 DC Square Square Waveform Negative Hardware Configurations and Calibration Targets Function Waveshape Default Frequency Target Minimum Maximum Hardware Configuration Span Target 1 low Target 2 high Default Maximum Default Minimum Maximum gE CONDOR WP e o 1k 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 0 9500BkHz 1 0500kHz 596 04 pV 2 10mV 2 10mV 5 56mV 5 56mV 21 00mV 21 00mV 55 60mV 55 60mV 210 00mV 210 00mV 556 00mV 556 00mV 2 10V 2 10V 5 56V 5 56V 22 24V 22 24V 55 60V 55 60V 222 40V 800 00 2 3000mV 6 0000mV 23 000mV 60 000mV 230 00mV 600 00mV 2 3000 6 0000 23 000 60 000 744 00uV 2 1390mV 5 5800mV 21 390mV 55 800mV 213 90mV 558 00mV 2 1390V 5 5800V 21 390V 55 800V 856 00 2 4610mV 6 4200mV 24 610mV 64 200mV 246 10mV 642 00mV 2 4610V 6 4200V 24 610V 64 200V 1 9000mV 5 0000mV 19 000mV 50 000mV 190 00mV 500 00mV 1 9000V 5 0000V 19 000V 50 000V 190 00V 1 7
11. 4 2 2 1 Connections to the 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Two connections are used for each head An 18 way connector and cable provides power supplies control and sense signals whereas a separate coaxial connector and cable carries the signal or clock The output signal is delivered directly to the UUT oscilloscope s input channel through the single BNC or PC3 5 connection Caution The A symbol shown on the 9500B front panel and heads draws attention to information contained in this handbook regarding maximum output voltages and currents For details refer to Section 7 Specifications 4 2 2 2 Head Signal Processing Signal processing in the head modules can be summarized by considering the 9500B functions a Ly DC Square The signal is routed directly via switched attenuators to the output BNC or PC3 5 socket Sensing from the output is passed back to the mainframe effectively providing a 4 wire delivery b NU Sine The sinewave at its final frequency is passed through the input SMA coaxial cable Sinewave amplitude is set in the mainframe but sensing for sinewave levelling takes place in the head itself returning the levelling control signal to the mainframe The levelled signal is routed via attenuators to the output BNC or PC3 5 socket c Edge Pulse levels and timing originate in the mainframe and pass to the head for control of the edge generating circuitry Pulses with 500ps edge are routed via the
12. 4 4 3 Scope Mode 4 4 3 1 Introduction In Scope mode once the C key has selected the required variable the cursor can take one of two forms triangular and barred The triangular form operates in the same way as in Direct mode and permits editing using Numeric Entry as well as Digit Edit Note that the Units Division and Multiplier fields are used in Scope mode corresponding to similar arrangements in UUT oscilloscopes 4 4 3 2 Cursor Controls Triangular Cursor For the triangular cursor the main controls used to manipulate the cursor are the same as for Direct mode except that the two keypad shift keys have no effect as the only variable which uses the triangular cursor is Deviation whose resolution is constant Barred Cursor Two pairs of horizontal lines enclosing a value indicate that for that value neither Digit Edit nor Numeric Entry is available The value can be adjusted only within a preferred step sequence Numeric Entry editing is not available for numbers with a Barred cursor V div x4 20 000 mVoo With this form of cursor the and gt keys are inactive The A V keys and the spinwheel increase or decrease the whole value using the preferred sequence for that parameter refer to Section 3 subsection 3 3 The controls used for the barred cursor are highlighted in Fig 4 4 13 Fig 4 4 13 Barred Cursor Control Keys 4 4 3 3 Use of Sequence Scroll Having already
13. ii Cursor on Multiplier A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Eat Press to select falling edge Function icon follows Function icon follows F Press to select rising edge iii Cursor on Deviation A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Pat Press to select falling edge Function icon follows ae Press to select rising edge Function icon follows AV Press to set Deviation value in absolute units A Press to set Deviation value in percent of set value iv Cursor on Frequency Period X10 Multiplies the marked value by ten 10 Divides the marked value by ten A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero EB Press to select falling edge Function icon follows E Press to select rising edge Function icon follows a Press to change display from V Frequency to Period f Press to change display from Period I to Frequency Cursor on Fast T50p Press to select 150ps pulse function 150ps Function icon follows ops Press to select 70ps pulse function P Function icon follows _ 25ps Press to select 25ps pulse function P Function icon follows continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edge Function 4 7 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 7 3 4 7 3 3 Menu Selections Conzd Right Side Screen Ke
14. sas 5 22 1 7670mV 2 0330mV 4 6500mV 5 3500mV 17 670mV 20 330mV 46 500mV 53 500mV 176 70mV 203 30mV 465 00mV 535 00mV 1 7670V 2 0330V 4 6500V 5 3500V 17 670V 20 330V 46 500V 53 500V 176 70V 203 30V DC Square DC Voltage Negative Hardware Configurations and Calibration Targets Function Waveshape Hardware Configuration Span Target 1 low Target 2 high Default Minimum Maximum Default Minimum Maximum OONDONBR WP i 2 888 00pV 2 10mV 2 10mV 5 56mV 5 56mV 21 00mV 21 00mV 55 60mV 55 60mV 210 00mV 210 00mV 556 00mV 556 00mV 2 10V 2 10V 5 56V 5 56V 22 24V 22 24V 55 60V 55 60V 222 40 1 0000mV 2 3000mV 6 0000mV 23 000mV 60 000mV 230 00mV 600 00mV 2 3000 6 0000 23 000 60 000 V V V Vv 0 9300mV 1 0700 2 1390mV 2 4610 5 5800mV 6 4200 21 390mV 24 610 55 800mV 64 200 213 90mV 246 10 558 00mV 642 00 2 1390V 2 4610 5 5800V 6 42 21 390V 24 61 55 800V 64 200 1 9000mV 5 0000mV 19 000mV 50 000mV 190 00mV 500 00mV 1 9000V 5 0000V 19 000V 50 000V 190 00V 1 7670mV 2 0330mV 4 6500mV 5 3500mV 17 670mV 20 330mV 46 500mV 83 500mV 176 70mV 203 30mV 465 00mV 535 00mV 1 7670V 2 0330V 4 6500V 5 3500V 17 670V 20 330V 46 500V 53 500V 176 70V 203 30V
15. Purpose These command selects the type of UUT triggers associated with the overload function Triggers are only produced if the output is on A settings conflict error will be reported if the OPULse function has not been selected lt cpd gt SINGle Generates one trigger coincident with the start of the overload pulse CONTinuous Selects a free running 100 Hz trigger signal For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 13 Overload Pulse Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected trigger type 6 6 10 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 5 14 SOUR PAR RAMP TIME lt dnpd gt Purpose This command selects the rise time of the ramp Note that it does not set the frequency of the signal this is three times the ramp time A settings conflict will be reported if the RAMP function has not been selected lt dnpd gt ims to 1s is rounded to the nearest decade point For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 12 Linear Ramp Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the rounded lt dnpd gt 6 6 5 15 SOUR PAR RAMP TRIG 2 lt cpd gt STARt MIDDle Purpose This command selects the type of triggers associated with the Ramp function Triggers are produced only when the Output
16. Water Ingress IP65 Altitude lt 2000m 6500ft lt 12000m 40000ft Safety Designed to and documented to EN61010 1 1 1993 A2 1995 CE and ETL marked EMC including options Radiated Emissions EN55011 22 FCC Rules part 15 sub part J class B Radiated Immunity EN50082 1 Conducted Emissions EN55011 1991 Class B Conducted Immunity EN50082 1 Harmonics Shock and Vibration EN61000 3 2 MIL T 28800 type III class 5 style E Pollution Degree 2 Line Voltage 95V to 132V rms 209V to 264V rms Installation Cat II Line Frequency 48Hz to 63Hz Power Consumption lt 400 VA Line Fuse 20mm IEC127 220 240V T5 0A 250V 100 120V T10 0A 250V Warm up 20 minutes 7 1 2 Dimensions 9500B Base Unit 95xx Active Head Dimensions HxWxD HxWxD 133 x 427 x 440 mm 65 x 29 x 140 mm 5 24 x 16 8 x 17 3 ins 2 56 x 1 22 x 5 51 ins Weight 12 kg 27 lbs 0 45 kg 1 Ib approx approx 3 year Active Plus CarePlan Warranty Period 1 year 7 2 Accuracy Specifications All Specifications apply at TCal 5 C where Factory TCal 23 C Uncertainty includes long term stability of lyr Syrs for frequency temperature coefficient linearity load and line regulation and the traceability of factory and National calibration standards In general nothing further needs to be added to determine the Test Uncertainty Ratio over the ins
17. _L Logic active 8 10 Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 8 4 3 Printing Setup The results of Base Heads All and Fast selftest operations can be printed directly via the rear panel parallel port J103 A suitable printer must be connected and switched on line then the 9500B internal program will generate the required results 8 4 3 1 Printer Type The printer to be used should be capable of printing 120 characters per line and must be able to print the Code Page 437 character set Most printers compatible with Epson FX Canon Bubble Jet or Hewlett Packard Desk Jet are suitable 8 4 3 2 Data Formatting The required printout style format and data is pre determined depending on whether Base Heads All and Fast test results are being printed and on the type of printer to be used It is necessary to enable a particular printer type via Configuration mode only if the format for that printer is required Note Ifthe printer is disabled Config mode Volume 1 Section 3 paras 3 3 2 6 the printer will not be set up when starting to print for the first time 8 4 4 Results Printout Apart from the heading Base Heads All and Fast test results have the same printed layout The results of tests on all test pathways are collected together in a table A typical sample of a table is given below Serial No XXXXX S W Issue X XX Date XX YY ZZZZ Time 12 41 Type ALL TEST PT MEASVAL
18. 6 6 5 SOURce Subsystem Contd 6 6 5 27 SOUR CURR LEVE IMM AMPL lt dnpd gt Purpose This command selects either DC or AC Current hardware dependent upon the DC or SQU parameter included in the most recent FUNC command lt dnpd gt The lt dnpd gt is a number which sets the required output current amplitude expressed in units of DC or pk pk AC Amps It will automatically choose the best hardware range for the defined current output The 9500B will accept signed or unsigned positive values for DC Current Only DC may be given a negative lt dnpd gt A settings conflict will be reported if the DC or Square function has not been selected Response to Query Version The instrument will return the present DC or AC current output value dependent upon the DC or SQU parameter implicit or included in the most recent FUNC command The returned number will be in standard scientific format for example 200mA DC would be returned as 2 0E 1 positive numbers however are unsigned If the function is not selected the query CURR will return the invalid number 2E35 6 6 5 28 SOUR FREQ CWIFIX lt dnpd gt Purpose This command is used to set the frequency of the currently selected waveform The CW and FIXed optional parameters are included to stay with the SCPI definition of the frequency command The command is valid only for AC waveshapes lt dnpd gt The lt dnpd gt is anumber which sets the required
19. 60 000V 59 93999V 60 06001V 29 99799V 29 96750V 30 02751V Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 9 9 8 3 Verifying the LF Sine Voltage Function 9 8 3 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 8 3 2 and test interconnections at para 9 8 3 3 The LF Sine Voltage Function is verified by carrying out measurements of amplitude in the sequence given at para 9 8 3 4 at the verification points shown in Table 9 8 3 1 9 8 3 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B Mainframe with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e Ahighresolution Standards DMM with RMS AC Voltage accuracy of 0 3 or better between 0 5V and 2V at 1kHz and 45kHz Example Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads Example Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor e Short high quality 4mm leads Final Width 215mm 9 8 3 3 Interconnections Refer to Fig 9 8 3 1 opposite 9 8 3 4 Verification Setup 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the DMM as shown in Fig 9 8 3 1 or via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode and then select the Sine function N key Select the required output Signal Channel 50QLoad trigger channel and Trigger Ratio if required 9 10 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification Standards DMM Guard
20. 60 000V 59 98498V 60 01502V 190 00V 189 9525V 190 0475V Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification Final Width 215mm 9 8 2 Verifying the DC Square Function Square Voltage 9 8 2 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 8 2 2 and test interconnections at para 9 8 2 3 The Square Function is verified by carrying out measurements of amplitude in the sequence given at para 9 8 2 4 at the verification points shown in Tables 9 8 2 1 9 8 2 2 and 9 8 2 3 9 8 2 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B Mainframe with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e Ahighresolution Standards DMM with RMS AC Voltage accuracy of 0 01 or better from 2 5mV to 35V at 1kHz Example Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads Example Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor e Short high quality 4mm leads Final Width 215mm 9 8 2 3 Interconnections Refer to Fig 9 8 2 1 opposite 9 8 2 4 Verification Setup 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the DMM as shown in Fig 9 8 2 1 or via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode and then select the DC Square Square Positive function MANUAL mode entry default or T Lu softkey Select the required output Signal Channel 1MQ Load trigger channel and Trigger Ratio if required 9 6 Sec
21. Connect the 9500B to the Counter as shown in Para 9 8 4 1 and ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up Select the required function to measure period a Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode and then select the Time Markers function LLL key b Use the bottom soft key on the right of the screen highlighting 1 f fE to view output Period on the screen c Select the required output Signal Channel 50Q or IMQ Load as required trigger channel and Trigger Ratio if required Verfication Procedure and table overleaf Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 13 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 9 8 4 5 9500B mb wh 9500B Counter Counter Verification Procedure Copy the table 9 8 4 1 Follow the correct sequence of verification points as shown on the table and carry out the following operations 1 to 5 at each verification point 1 Verification Points Refer to Table 9 8 4 1 Select the correct display time trigger source and level to measure at the verification point Set the Time Marker period as required for the verification point and set Output ON Set Output OFF Adjust the trigger level for a stable display measure and note the output period Table 9 8 4 1 Time Markers Verification at 1Vpk pk Output Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the approriate Measured Period column on the copy Time Marker Period Ab
22. Results Certificates In Procedure mode three styles of printed certificate are available Style 1 This provides full information about each point tested including applied and target values spec limits and UUT error error pass fail and test uncertainty ratio between 9500B and UUT Style 2 This is a shorter form of certificate showing only the applied and target values and the 9500B absolute uncertainty Style 3 This certificate is similar to Style 1 and has been added to accommodate the wider spec limits encountered during oscilloscope calibration expressed in percentages rather than ppm Users are given the facility in Configuration mode to change the style of certificate to be printed 1 For access to allow the certificate formatting to be altered press the CERT DETAILS screen key on the second Present Settings screen 2 This transfers to what we shall refer to as a CERT DETAILS screen Configuration Present Settings CERT STYLE PAGE SETUP PASS Certificate Style 1 INDIC Start page number 1 Page length 66 APPEND Pass indicator ON MESSAGE Appended message LAB DETAILS TODAY S DATE EXIT CERT DETAILS Screen Layout TIME The CERT DETAILS screen allows users to design a certificate by adjusting or selecting characteristics via screen keys on the right refer to paras 3 4 3 20 to 3 4 3 28 The EXIT screen key reverts to the second Present
23. TEST Activates the instrument power on selftest routine takes about 5 secs TRIG ON OFF NORM X 1 X 01 ON Turns TRIGGER OUTPUT on OFF Turns TRIGGER OUTPUT off NORM Sets trig X 1 Sets trig X 01 Sets trig ger rate to the same as the output signal rate Power on default ger rate to 1 10 of the output signal rate ger rate to 1 100 of the output signal rate TSET urns the ASCII word NULL message U D lt NR3 gt s the desired units per division U D urns the presel t lt NR3 gt units per division U D lt NR3 gt UMSK lt NR1 gt masks an error hat was masked opposite to the MASK command VAR s instrument to display DUT percent error readout lt gt lt lt lt a x K ae ee AH KK KK KS VERS urns a version D code VERS 0000FFFF V D lt NR3 gt V s the instrumen t to voltage and desired number of units division a ZSHF Resets the shift co unter to zero Appendix F to Section 6 9500B System Operation Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND SECTION 7 9500B SPECIFICATIONS 7 1 General 7 1 1 Environmental Environmental Temperature Operating 5 C to 40 C Storage 0 C to 50 C Transit lt 100hrs 20 C to 60 C Humidity non condensing lt 90 5 C to 30 C lt 95 0 C to 50 C lt 75 30 C to 40 C
24. WAVE Provides a second menu screen FORM for selection between three Square waveshapes or DC paras 4 10 4 2 3 CHANNEL Permits the screen signal setup to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel trigger ratio and cable channel paras 4 5 3 Press to select Direct Mode paras 4 4 4 5 1 Press to select Scope Mode setting the step sequence to 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 as chosen using the Preferences key paras 4 4 1 2 4 10 6 Square Operation 4 10 6 1 Value Editing Amplitude At maximum and minimum output currents the screen settings of the contributors values units division scaling multiplier and deviation are limited by the output current itself For example Contributor Limits Minimum Maximum Output Current 88 8uA p p 111 2mA p p Limit Units Division 20uA div 50mA div Scaling Multiplier 1 10 Deviation 11 20 11 20 Provided they do not exceed the output current limits shown the contributors have the following adjustments Scope mode a Units Division in Amps division adjustable sequence 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 default ImA b Scaling Multiplier adjustable through integers 1 to 10 default 4 c Percentage Deviation a maximum range of 11 20 about the value of a x b at aresolution of four significant digits with two decimal places default zero Digit or direct edit can be used d Output Current adjustable only
25. al a Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 500ps Edge SPEED mode Set 9500B s output ON selecting TARGET 1 from table 10 6 3 3 Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading Note the rise or fall time of the edge and enter it into the Edge Speed field on the 9500B Make sure allowance is made for the rise time of the oscilloscope Edge Rise Time Measured Rise Time Scope Rise Time Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 3 by pressing NEXT TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 3 3 Edge Function 500ps Edge Speed Cal Point Voltage Frequency Edge Target 1 3 0000V 1MHz Rising Target 2 2 0000V 1MHz Rising Target 3 1 0000V Rising 10 6 3 7 Calibration Procedure 150ps Edge Linearity 1 Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge
26. where digit one of the ASCIl coded numerals previously determined from the length of the user message string user message the saved user message Response Decode Execution Errors The previously saved message is recalled None If no message is available the value of the two digits is 00 The data area contains up to 63 bytes of data Power On and Reset Conditions Asi 11 ea Data area remains unchanged single query sent as a terminated program message will elicit a single response terminated by nl newline with EOI If multiple queries are sent as a string of program message units separated by semi colons with the string followed by a permitted terminator then the responses will be sent as a similar string whose sequence corresponds to the sequence of the program queries The final response in the string will be followed by the terminator nl newline with EOI 6 C10 Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C 13 Reset RST RST will reset the instrument to a defined condition stated for each applicable command with the command s description and listed in Appendix D to Section 6 The reset condition is not dependent on past use history of the instrument except as noted below RST does not affect the following e the selected address of the instrument e calibration data that affect specifications e SRQ mask conditions e
27. Provided they do not exceed the output voltage limits shown the contributors have the following adjustments Scope mode a Units Division in Volts division adjustable sequence 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 default 5mV b Scaling Multiplier adjustable through integers 1 to 10 default 4 c Percentage Deviation a maximum range of 11 20 about the value of a x b at a resolution of four significant digits with two decimal places default zero Digit or Numeric Entry can be used d Output Voltage adjustable in Digit Edit Sequence Scroll only by manipulation of a b and c default 20 000mV 4 5 7 3 Output Voltage Editing The editing processes follow the same rules as for editing square waves refer to para 4 5 5 2 Obviously no frequency adjustmentis present and polarity is changed as described in para 4 5 7 4 Low Voltage LV and High Voltage HV States Entering and leaving High Voltage state in DC Function is governed by the same rules as for Square function refer to para 4 5 5 3 In this case the threshold setting limits are 10VDC and 110VDC not pk pk 4 5 7 5 Multi Channel DC Operation The 9500B is capable of simultaneous DC Output from all channels that have a 9510 9520 9530 or 9560 Active Head fitted Primarily to accelerate the Calibration of voltage linearity under automated remote control the feature is also available to manual operators via the 9500B front panel controls and display
28. Sets Narrow Markers mode gt lt gt lt a f al Kae ee KH OK MK OK KY Se OPC ON OFF Controls generation of SRQ for operation complete when CONTINUE is pressed OUT ON OFF Sets main output ON or OFF PCT lt NR2 gt Sets DUT percent error readout PCT Returns lt message unit gt present DUT percentage error information pct 2 0 if PCT selected orecT 0 0 ifnot Sets positive EDGE polarity POS is accepted in AC Volts with no error NEG gives a 22 error number Returns lt message unit gt units division and DUT percentage error after operator pressed the CONTINUE key Controls generation of SRQ when ID button is pressed REM ON OFF 6 F6 Appendix F to Section 6 9500B System Operation Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 Table 6 F 5 1 CG5010 5011 Command Emulation by 9500B Contd CG5010 5011 Command RPT CG5010 5011 Command Description Repeats the most recent message sent 9500B Emulation a 9500B Response ROS ON OFF Turns on or off the SRQ generations RSHF Increments the shi ft counter by 1 os oe SET Returns settings of instrument in settings dependent format As CG5011 S D lt NR3 gt S Sets Markers mode if not already selected and then sets the seconds per division value SHIFT lt NR1 gt Sets shift counter argument SRQ Returns the reason for SRQ
29. The Duty Cycle is fixed at a nominal 50 Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Current Function 4 10 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 10 4 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 Note Without Option 5 only one signal channel and one trigger channel is available 4 10 4 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 10 4 2 Choosing a Waveshape All waveshapes in this function can be selected on a second menu screen This is activated by pressing the WAVEFORM screen key on the bottom row The screen changes to show the available waveforms fi OFF hrccerNone m TG mA div x4 4 0000 MAr Deviation 00 00 Bas O P Amplitude 4 0000 marw Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME The WAVEFORM key label is highlighted to indicate that waveform selection is available as is the presently selected waveform icon The only square current waveform available is the symmetrical version so the others shown on this screen are for DC current Selecting any of these three will return to the previous screen with the icon of the selected waveform showing in the top left corner WAVE CHANNEL Fa 5 FORM SELECT BA a oh OFFS none x10 TOO mA div
30. Using default target values may therefore reduce the usefulness of historical calibration records e If you decide to use default values rather than the values at which your 9500B was previously calibrated assuming that the saved and default values are different simply press the DEFAULT TARGETS softkey on the Target Selection screen e The targets on the screen will have a new title DEFAULT CALIBRATION TARGETS and the DEFAULT TARGETS soft key will be highlighted e When passing to the Adjustment screen by selecting a target the default target value will be shown and from this point all targets will be default targets until you change back to saved targets again or decide to change the selected target value e Back on the Target Selection screen pressing the DEFAULT TARGETS soft key again will restore the title SAVED CALIBRATION TARGETS and the target values will revert to the saved values i e the DEFAULT TARGETS key toggles between the Saved and Default sets of target values 10 4 3 3 Modifying a Calibration Target Once the Adjustment screen is displayed the existing target value can be changed to a new value if this is preferable to using either the default target value or a target value saved from a previous calibration The target value can be changed whether it starts as a default or a saved target but will always become a new saved target The default target values will not change To c
31. b If no adjustment is provided on the UUT Scope record its response at the calibration point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF Sf WS Ss 4 6 6 5 UUT Oscilloscope Flatness Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required sine wave p p voltage frequency and load impedance for the UUT Scope flatness cal point UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Observe and note the amplitude response aa eS Se p ua Calibration a Use the 9500B Deviation control to slew the 9500B Output voltage until the UUT s response is appropriate to the 9500B settings as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b Record the 9500B screen output voltage as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the
32. kHz low 4 2 1 9 V 1 kHz high 3 41 6980 V 45 kHz low 4 1 9 V 45 kHz high TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL DEFAULT L SELECT TARGETS CHANNEL DEFAULT SELECT TARGETS Note that the other 9500B functions listed in paras 10 2 3 and 10 2 4 cannot be externally adjusted during Mainframe calibration they are either derived directly from functions that can be calibrated or are calibrated for life during manufacture or are adjusted during Head calibration Attempting to select these functions during Mainframe calibration while the Model 9500B is in CAL mode will result in an error message being displayed No calibration for this function 10 3 6 2 Cal Mode Function Screens Generally two special screens are provided to adjust each of the functions calibration points In CAL mode the purpose of these screens is to allow you to set the 9500B into the various hardware configurations also known as Cal Ranges required during calibration and initiate the necessary sequences of operations Each Function Waveform is identified by the usual symbol in the top left corner 10 3 6 3 Hardware Configurations Although all functions in the 9500B appear to the operator to have a single continuous range which covers the entire span of output values from the lowest to the highest e g for DC Voltage from 888 00LV to 222 4V internal
33. pk pk into 50Q amp 1MQ 4 44mV to 3 1V High Edge 100ns Active Head Model 9510 or 9530 Periods 10us to 100ms Output Voltage pk pk into 50Q 888mV to 5 56V pk pk into IMQ 888mV to 222 4V k Fast Edge 150ps Active Head Model or 9530 Periods 500ns to 100ms Output Voltage pk pk into 50Q amp 1MQ 4 44mV to 3 1V Time Markers Function Output Voltage pk pk into 509 amp 1M Square Sine Waveforms Variant 9500B 1100 quoted below e see Sect 7 for specifications of other variants Squarewave Periods 9 0091ns to 55s 111MHz to 18 181mHz Highlighted style 20ns to 55s 50MHz to 18 181mHz Output Voltage 100mV to 1 0V Sinewave Periods 450 5ps to 9 009ns 2 22GHz to 111MHz Output Voltage 100mV to 500mV Sinewave Periods 909 Ips to 9 009ns 1 1GHz to 111MHz Output Voltage 1 0V Pulse and Triangle Waveforms Periods 900 9 Ins to 55s 1 11MHz to 18 181mHz Highlighted style 20ns to 55s 50MHz to 18 181mHz Output Voltage 100mV to 1 0V Pulse Width Function Composite Video Function Polarity Patterns Amplitude Levels p p Frame Standards Trigger Positive and Negative sync Full Raster Selectable White Mid Grey or Black White 1V mid grey 0 7V black 0 3V No deviation 625 lines S0Hz 525 lines 60Hz Calibrator trigger output selectable to Odd Field Start or Composite Sync Linear Ramp Function Period 3s 300ms 30ms 3ms Ramps Equal Rise Fall and Flat divisions per cycle Amplitude
34. slot in the front panel the 9500B will move from operation to operation switching the 9500B controls automatically and issuing a series of requests for the operator to change UUT switching and connections Refer to Section 5 Portocal II v 1 7 see paras 1 3 can be used to generate calibration sequences on procedure cards to calibrate UUT oscilloscopes using the Model 9500B 1 2 2 3 Configuration Mode This mode requiring a password provides access for the user selectable configuration options These include e Set the internal reference frequency e Adjust the threshold for high voltage warning e Change the IEEE 488 bus addresses e Select or deselect remote emulation SG5030 or CG5010 5011 e Enable or disable use of an external printer Procedure mode only e Set the instrument to power up in either Manual or Procedure mode e Alter the passwords required for entry to Configuration and Calibration modes e Select the frequency for External Reference Input e Set the frequency of or disable External Reference Output e Alter the memorized date and time and its format of presentation e Set User language for Procedure mode only e Determine the percentage of UUT measurement tolerance beyond which a Borderline result is called in Procedure mode only e Enable or disable the use of a data card for RESULTS Procedure mode only e Enable or disable fields in certificates to accommodate Engineer s note Pro
35. AISA MOUN eisini 4 13 1 4 13 2 Overload Protection Test wee 4 13 1 4 13 3 Default SettiNgS sissisiississiisisoisieeses 4 13 1 4 13 4 Menu Selections 0 ccccccecsseeeceseseees 413 1 4 13 4 1 Retained Channel Memory 4 13 5 Overload Pulse Operation oo 413 1 4 13 5 1 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit csscscesesissneicacsssertesstnss 413 1 4 13 5 2 Right Side Screen Keys Direct Edit 4 13 5 3 Bottom Screen K Digit and Direct Edit ee 413 1 4 13 5 4 Value Editing esc 413 2 4 13 5 5 Overload Pulse Editing 0 413 2 4 13 6 Using the 95008 to Test the Overload Response Of A UUT OSCIOSCOPE 00 eeeeesseseeeseessennees 413 2 4 13 6 1 Introduction we 4 13 2 4 13 6 2 Interconnections 413 2 4 13 6 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup 4 13 2 4 13 6 4 Sequence of Operations 4 13 2 4 13 2 Overload Protection Test Some oscilloscope manufacturers protect the internal 50Q terminator with a voltage or thermal detector Verification of the protection function requires limited duration application of overload during which the protection should react and open circuit the 50Q terminator With the 9500B Auxiliary Overload Pulse function selected the Overload Pulse can be set to the UUT oscilloscope s overload test requirements using 9500B front panel controls The pulse is triggered as a single event and cannot be repeated at intervals less than 3
36. CAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ERRor Queries information about the event reported in the most recent ERROR lt 9500B error number gt EVEnt serial poll Note that these two commands are equivalent EVENT lt 9500B error number gt EXTtb Queries the present state of the external time base EXTTB ACTIVE INACTIVE FREQuency lt NR3 gt Sets the frequency of the output signal FREQuency Queries the present frequency setting FREQUENCY lt NR3 gt HELp Returns a list of all the command headers which the instrument accepts As SG5030 ID Returns the instrument identification ID TEK SG5030 V0 0 FX XX INIt Clears the present settings and initialises the SG5030 to Output off 1V 10MHz Refreq off RQS on Userreq off LEVeled Returns the levelled signal status of the output LEVELED YES NO OUTput ON OFF Turns the signal on or off at the output head OUTput Returns the present status of the output signal OUTPUT ON OFF RECall lt NR3 gt This command recalls the instrument settings from the non volatile RAM store REFreq ON OFF Turns the reference 50kHz on or off REFreq Queries the reference setting REFREQ ON OFF ROS ON OFF Enables or disables the ability of the instrument to generate Service Requests af ef ee A OK eS Se E ROS Queries whether the SRQ is enabled or disabled ROS ON OFF As SG5030 SET Returns the present condi
37. CH1 head control update failure 1054 CH5 Load mismatch detected UUT gt 150 352 007 CH2 head control update failure 1055 9560 head required for sine greater than 3 2GHz 008 CH3 head control update failure 1056 This function is not available from a 9560 head 009 CH4 head control update failure 1057 9560 head does not provide 1M 352 in this function 010 CH5 head control update failure 1058 9560 cannot source 1M 352 trigger signals 011 Loss of external reference frequency lock 1059 9560 requires a 3 2GHz option base 012 Load lt 50Q detected output off to avoid damage 1060 Incompatable heads for dual sine mode 013 Internal frequency lock has been performed 1061 9560 head required for timing marker lt 450ns 014 Load mismatch detected UUT lt 50kQ 1062 9560 head required for 70ps edge 015 Load mismatch detected UUT 3150 1063 Calibration of this function not allowed with a 9560 016 Loss of internal reference frequency lock 1064 Multi channel DC cannot mix 9560 with other head types 017 Trigger cable deselected with output on 1065 Pulse Width characterisation requires 9500B hardware 018 No head present on channel 1 R i 019 No head present on channel 2 20105 priority OEE received 020 No head present on channel 3 5011 Aaa request limited m 021 No head present on channel 4 5012 Failed to read from flash RA
38. Calibrated Capacitor Unit i a Active Head O on o N i J DEn Fig 10 6 5 1 Load Capacitance Function Calibration Interconnections 10 6 14 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Load Capacitance Function 10 6 6 5002 1MQ Ratio Calibration Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the DMM as shown in figure 10 6 6 1 and that both instruments are powered and warmed up 9500B It is necessary to temporarily exit the Head Calibration Mode to make and note the result of four measurements Using the Mode key return the instrument to Manual Mode and select the DC Square Function 9500B Select DC Positive waveform at 5 0000V configured to drive IMQ On the 4955 Select DCV o c or simply connect the Head directly to the DMM Turn the 9500B Output ON allow the DMM to settle and note the measurement in Table 10 6 6 1 9500B Select DC Positive waveform at 5 0000V configured to drive 50Q On the 4955 Select DCV 50Q or use an alternative shunt resistor Turn the 9500B Output ON allow the DMM to settle and note the measurement in Table 10 6 6 1 9500B Select Square waveform with positive bias at 5 0000V pk pk configured to drive IMQ Standards DMM Guard Q Guard WAVETEK _4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR 8 9 On the 4955 Select SQR o c or connect the Head directly to the DMM configured to measure DC voltage Turn the 9500B Output ON allow the DMM to settle and note the measurement in Table 10 6
39. FORM r sevect E 12 Fig 4 4 8 Deviation Selected as AV In this case by typing the number 002 the 9500B respects this change of units The result is shown in Fig 4 4 9 also changing the available unit labels on the right screen keys to reflect the change Ly OFF hanno V Amplitude 20 000 mva Deviation 25 22 mv W O P Amplitude 20 000 m ors Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME Form Ay seer BA 2 Fig 4 4 10 Voltage Deviation Applied The new deviation of 2mV is equivalent to 10 of the set value which can be seen by pressing the right side key A AV Numeric Entry Result The 9500B will comply with the instructions given in Numeric Entry using the displayed value to set the output deviation in the same way as for Digit Edit This applies wherever it is possible to use Numeric Entry 4 4 2 5 Return to Scope Mode The 9500B will always permit return from Direct mode to Scope mode even if the values on the screen cannot be attained in Scope mode The values will default to extremes if Fig 4 4 9 Option to Choose Units for Deviation Value Note that if the new value is implemented by pressing the Enter key on the keypad then in this case the units will be Volts If the number 2 had been typed followed by 4 an error message would have appeared as 2V is obviously outside the deviation range of 10 for
40. Final Width 215mm 10 3 2 Mode Selection 10 3 2 1 Mode Key Selection of any one of the Model 9500B s five operating Modes is enabled by pressing the Mode key at the bottom right of the CALIBRATION SYSTEM key panel Aux Mode Pref D This results in display of the mode selection screen Mode Selection Select required mode using softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME L PROC MANUAL CONFIG CALIB TEST 10 3 2 2 Mode Selection Screen The Mode Selection menu screen allows you to select any one of the following operating modes PROC Procedure mode MANUAL Manual mode CONFIG Configure mode CALIB Calibration mode TEST Selftest mode Each mode is selected by pressing the appropriate screen softkey after which a new menu screen relating specifically to that mode will be displayed Note for the calibration menu screen to appear certain other conditions must be satisfied see 10 3 3 10 3 3 Selection of Calibration Mode The following two conditions must be satisfied before the Calibration mode menu screen can be accessed a The rear panel Calibration Enable switch must be in the ENABLE position b A valid password must have been entered via the front panel keypad 10 3 3 1 Calibration Enable Switch The Calibration Enable DIP switch is accessible using a small screwdriver through a recess on the Model 9500B s rear panel CAL FA A ENABLE DISABLE DISAB
41. Final Width 215mm 6 6 4 6 ROUT SIGN DUAL lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 Purpose This command is for use within the Sine function to output the signal selection on two active heads at the same time Note that two channels must be selected for signals to be generated In the parameter list above the first lt cpd gt selects the Master signal the second lt cpd gt selects the Slave signal A settings conflict error will be reported if the SINusoid function shape has not been selected This dual mode is cancelled on receipt of a ROUTe SIGNal lt cpd gt command or on selection of another function Both signals must have the same expected impedance It is not possible to set their impedances independently Response to Query Version The 9500B will return the two selected channels in the same order 6 6 4 7 ROUT TRIG PATH lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 NONE lt cpd gt ACT CABL Purpose This command defines the channel associated with trigger output The ROUT TRIG command also has the ability to select no trigger output at all using the NONE parameter The lt cpd gt does not turn the output on only selects the trigger channel to be used If the output is on and the channel is to be changed then the output will be turned off the new channel will be selected and the output will be turned back on again A settings conflict error will be generated if a trigger cha
42. For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 4 18 2 Trigger Qualification Timer Tests Modern digital Oscilloscopes often feature sophisticated trigger circuitry capable of distinguishing events within a time window e g detection of a pulse narrower or wider than auser determined time The Oscilloscope willuse its internal sampling clock to measure the time between in this case rising and falling edges of the trigger waveform However in many cases the resolution of this measurement is extended by a short duration analogue timer It is this timer that demands independent verification and sometimes adjustment using a short duration pulse of known width With the 9500B Auxiliary Pulse Width function selected a narrow pulse of suitable and known width can be set up using the front panel controls and applied to the UUT input 4 18 3 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into the DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen The Pulse Width function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the soft key on the lower right of the screen Whenever the Pulse Width menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default setting
43. If a calibration adjustment is provided adjust the UUT s pulse shape Note rise time and aberration as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b If no adjustment is provided on the UUT Scope note rise time and aberration as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 4 7 4 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edge Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 8 Time Markers Function 4 8 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B for generating square waves and DC voltages for use for amplitude calibration of oscilloscopes For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 8 is divided into the following sub sections 4 8 1 Introduction 4 8 2 Default Settings 4 8 3 Menu Selections 0 0 4 8 3 1 Retained Channel Memory 4 8 3 2 Choosing a Waveshape 4 8 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit 4 8 2 4 8 3 4 Right Side Screen Keys Direct Edit 4 8 2 4 8 3 5 Bottom Screen Keys Digit and Direct Edit 4 8 2 4 8 4 Time Markers Operation ou 4 8 2 4 8 4 1 Value Editing ee ecccceeeseseeee 4 8 2 4 8 4 2 Output Period Editing 4 8 4 3 Highlighted Marker Styles 4 8 5 Using the 9500B Time Markers Function to Calibrate the Time Base of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 8 5 1 Introducti 4 8 5
44. Manufacturer To Select a Procedure Use the and cursor keys or the spinwheel to highlight the required procedure then press OK The 9500B will transfer to the appropriate menu screen Refer to the procedure description ABORT returns to the Select USER NAME screen Refer to paras 5 3 3 13 Fig 5 3 2 5 3 3 9 Procedures Card Based Operating Instructions Selection of UUT Model When the model of UUT has been chosen from the menu derived from the procedure card all procedures for the selected model are automatically downloaded into the 9500B s internal memory and the selected procedure no longer requires the card as it will be programmed from the internal memory Once the procedure has progressed this far the procedure card can be removed and used to program other Model 9500B units Procedure Activation Once the type of procedure has been selected the downloaded user interactive program will be run by the 9500B Subsequent instructions appearing on the screen will be derived from the programmed sequences Single Channel Variants Procedures This description assumes that the variant 9500B 1100 is being used Conclusion No further routine instructions are given here as they may vary from model to model and are developed within the programmed sequences However the 9500B is programmed also to interrupt procedures and communicate with the user when certain events occur Among these the two most impor
45. Maximum Input 40V pk pk 400mA pk pk X Switching Break 5V pk pk 100mA pk pk Rising Falling and Make Capacity Ramp Ramp VV VSWR lt 1 2 1 typ to 1 1GHz Insertion Loss to 100MHz lt 2 5dB Into 50Q to 500MHz lt 4aB to 1GHz lt 6dB Alternative Triggers k period LF Linear Ramp Waveshape 7 9 8 Reference Frequency Reference Frequency Input BNC Output BNC Frequency Range 1MHz to 20MHz 1MHz or 10MHz in 1MHz steps Level typical 90mV 1V pk pk Into 509 1V pk pk Into 1MQ 2V pk pk Lock Range 50ppm Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 9 Final Width 215mm 7 10 Trigger Output Specifications 7 10 1 Input Leakage Not available via 9550 Active Head Function Voltage Trigger Waveform Trigger Frequency DC Square 100Hz Trigger Alignment Trigger Leads by Square Square Signal div 1 10 100 Depart from ground 1 64 Period Levelled Sine lt 100MHz Square Signal Rising Zero Cross gt 100MHz Square Signal div 1 10 100 Rising Zero Cross gt 3 2GHz Square Signal div 2 20 200 Rising Zero Cross 500ps 1 9 Pulse Signal div 1 10 100 Return to Ground 25ns HV Square Signal div 1 10 100 150ps 1 9 Pulse Signal div 1 10 100 Depart from ground Return to Ground 1 64 Period 25ps 1 9 Pulse Signal div 1 10 100 Return to Ground 70ps 1 9 Pulse Signal div 1 10 100 Return
46. Month entry is not a valid month 7011 Day entry is not a valid day 7012 Hours entry is not a valid number 7013 Minutes entry is not a valid 7014 Entry does not give a valid t 7015 Cannot have duplicate bus addresses 7016 Bus address must be within the range 0 30 7017 Safety voltage must be within 7018 7019 Entry does not match previous 7020 7024 WARNING Instrument near cal 7025 WARNING Instrument past cal 7026 Ref frequency must be within the 7027 Ref frequency must be within the 7028 Ref frequency must be within the 7029 7030 Ref frequency must be within the 7031 Ref frequency must be within the 9990 Program ASSERTION Trip ALWAYS record the total message content for possible use by the Service Center 8 A6 Appendix A to Section 8 9500B Maintenance Error Reporting Subsystem Section 9 9 1 About Section 9 Section 9 introduces the verification of Model 9500B performance including the issue of traceability and a verification procedure 9 2 Need for Verification 9 2 1 Factory Calibration and Traceability Factory calibration of the Model 9500B ensures full traceability up to and including National Standards Its traceable accuracy figures are quoted in the specifications given in Section 7 and all relate to a 1 year calibration interval These figures include all calibration uncertainties including those of National Standards and therefore constitute abso
47. Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is saved in the error queue 6 6 2 12 CAL SPEC LFS Purpose This command adjusts to zero the DC offset for LF sine Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is saved in the error queue 6 6 2 13 CAL SPEC PWD Purpose This command characterizes the width of the pulse Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is saved in the error queue Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 2 14 CAL HEAD EHFS lt cpd gt LIN FLAT Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 1 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 2 of this manual 6 6 2 15 CAL HEAD VHFS Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 1 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 2 of this manual lt cpd gt LIN FLAT 6 6 2 16 CAL HEAD HFS Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 1 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 2 of this manual lt cpd gt LIN FLAT 6 6 2 16 CAL HEAD LFS Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 1 of the
48. The number itself represents the number of test failures The failure codes can be found only by re running the self test manually Refer to Section 8 Execution Errors Operational selftest is not permitted when calibration is successfully enabled Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C13 Final Width 215mm 6 C 18 Wait This command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements WAI Execution Errors prevents the instrument from executing any further commands None or queries until the No Pending Operations Flag is set true This isa mandatory command for IEEE 488 2 but has little relevance Power On and Reset Conditions to this instrument as there are no parallel processes requiring Not applicable Pending Operation Flags Final Width 215mm 6 C14 Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries Model 9500B Device Settings after RST amp Power On 6 D 1 RST Introduction will reset the instrument to a defined condition stated for each applicable command The reset condition is not dependent on past use history of the instrument except as noted below RST does not affect the following e the selected address of the instrument e calibration data that affect specifications e SRQ mask conditions e the e the e the Po
49. The product of the units division and multiplier are shown on the right side of the sign Deviation Scope and Direct Mode The triangular type of cursor indicates that all the cursor keys can be used From the default 00 00 the deviation percentage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 11 20 and 11 20 providing that the other contributors do not take the output voltage value out of its limits The result of combining the units division multiplier and deviation are shown as the value of O P Volts p p Output Voltage Scope and Direct Mode The O P Amplitude is only adjustable by means of its contributors From the default 20 000mV p p the output voltage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 35 52UV p p both 50Q and IMQ loads and 5 56V p p 50Q load or 222 40V p p IMQ load Frequency Scope and Direct Mode From the default 1kHz the output frequency can be changed to any value within its resolution between 10Hz and 100kHz 4 5 5 3 Low Voltage LV and High Voltage HV States In the interests of safety to avoid electric shock the 9500B incorporates a high voltage interlock system for DC Square and High Edge functions The interlock threshold voltage can be chosen by the user between 10V and 110V otherwise a default threshold value of 100V is set The active threshold value is stored in non volatile memory Any voltage below the threshold can be output without
50. The vertical bar can be read as or and is used to separate alternative parameter options 6 6 1 2 Legend lt dnpd gt lt cpd gt lt spd gt Decimal Numeric Program Data used to identify numerical information needed to set controls to required values The numbers should be in Nrf form as described in the IEEE 488 2 Standard Specification Character Program Data This normally represents alternative groups of unique literate parameter names available for the same keyword In the notation the set of alternatives will follow the lt cpd gt in the Parameter Form column of the Sub System table enclosed in a pair of braces For example in the OUTPut sub system the compound command header keyword OUTPut STATe is followed by the parameter form lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 The lt cpd gt gives the denomination of Character program data and ON OFF 1 0 gives the actual characters to be used to command each unique parameter String Program Data This is a string of variable literate characters which will be recognized by the internal 9500B software They are used for such inputs as passwords and date time Indicate query commands with no associated command form and no attached parameters for example CALibration TRIGger All commands which may include parameters in the command form but also have an additional query form without parameters for example ROUTe SIGNal PATH lt cpd gt
51. This is done on the following screen Enter the SERIAL NUMBER of UUT Confirm with OK Serial Number TODAY S DATE TIME OK ABORT Enter the UUT s Serial Number Use the alpha numeric keypad to write the serial number 20 characters max on the screen It will appear at the bottom of the screen as you type Then press the W key or the OK screen key after which the screen will change to select the type of procedure required ABORT returns to the Select USER NAME screen Refer to paras 5 3 3 13 Fig 5 3 2 Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Access Guide 5 3 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 5 3 3 8 Select the Procedure for the Subject UUT Model When the Select PROCEDURE screen is opened the 9500B will have already downloaded all the procedures for the selected model from the Procedure card memory into internal RAM The 9500B displays a list of these on the screen for the user to choose Select PROCEDURE using cursor keys Confirm with OK Adjustment Only Year Verification 1S09000 Verify Verify Pass Fail IS09000 Pass Fail TODAY S DATE TIME OK ABORT Types of Procedure Procedure Cards supplied from the Procedure Library Variants of three basic procedures Adjustment Only 1 Year Verification and Verify Pass Fail can be found in the Procedure cards available in the manufacturer s UUT Calibrat
52. allows the instrument to assert SRQ at power on providing that the PON bit in the ESR is enabled at the time of power down by the corresponding bit in its Enable register ESE When the value rounds to an integer value other than zero it sets the power on clear flag true which clears the standard event status enable and service request enable registers so that the instrument will not assert an SRQ on power up Examples PSC 0 or PSC 0 173 sets the instrument to assert an SRQ at Power On PSC 1 or PSC 0 773 sets the instrument to not assert an SRQ on Power On Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C7 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 0 10 Recall Power On Status Clear Flag This common query conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements The existing flag condition will have been determined by the PSC command PSC PSC will recall the Power On Status condition Response Format A single ASCII character is returned A single query sent as a terminated program message will elicit a single response terminated by nl newline with EOI If multiple queries are sent as a string of program message units separated by semi colons with the string followed by a permitted terminator then the responses will be sent as a similar string whose sequence corresp
53. and a second channel s head is connected into the same scope input channel With output on ADJUST ALIGN allows the second channel delay to be adjusted to the same cursor mark Repeating the adjustment for all other channels achieves accurate common alignment Having aligned the selected output channels they can be used to apply signals simultaneously to measure the relative delays between the input channels of a UUT oscilloscope 4 14 4 2 Preservation of Alignment X10 Multiplies the marked value by ten l f 0 Divides the marked value by ten 4 14 4 1 Precision Alignment of The 9500B Zero Skew function will allow 9500B Channel Outputs only the aligned channels to be used together Hz Evaluates the number in the box in ith their aliened heads Uni h l Hertz The 9500B is set into Zero Skew function W CIF anne EAUS mess Channels Two or more channel heads are aligned in Pave been reconfigured merely selecting kHz Evaluates the number in the box in turn on the same input channel of an another function will not destroy the alignment Koneri l _ oscilloscope can be the UUT oscilloscope when Zero Skew function is again entered MHz Evaluates the number in the box in while tris gering from another channel or Deselecting a channel allows the other aligned Megahertz external trigger channels to be used Reselecting the deselected GHZ Evaluates the number in the boxin Precision Alignment channel restores the alignment if the
54. assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for amplitude calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in DC Function with Output OFF Ifin any other function press the Li soft key at the top right of the screen then press the WAVEFORM screen key Select or as required Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 8 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required DC voltage polarity and load impedance for the UUT Scope amplitude cal point 2 UUT Scope a Select the correct channel for the cal point b Select DC Coupled if required c Select the correct range for the cal point 3 9500B a Press the 777 screen key on the bottom row to provide a zero reference b Set Output ON 4 UUT Scope a Set the Y controls to place the trace on graticule zero 5 9500B Repress the 7 screen key on the bottom row to remove a zero reference 6 UUT Scope a A
55. commands is given in sub section 6 2 The full range of 9500B commands with their actions and meanings in the 9500B is detailed in alphabetical order in sub Section 6 6 with conformance information in Appendix B to this section The IEEE 488 Common Commands implemented in the 9500B together with their operating information are given in Appendix C to this section 6 3 2 Section 6 9500B System Operation Introduction 6 4 Using the 9500B in a System 6 4 1 Addressing the 9500B 6 4 1 1 Accessing the Bus Address The instrument address can only be set manually using the Bus Address menu which is accessed via the Configuration menus N B A password is required for access to change the bus address 6 4 1 2 Select Configuration Mode 1 Press the Mode key on the right of the front panel to obtain the Mode Selection menu screen Mode Selection Select required mode using softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME PROC MANUAL CONFIG CALIB TEST 2 Press the CONFIG screen key at the center of the bottom row to progress into Configuration mode The 9500B will transfer to the open Configuration information screen Ser No NUT Rev XXX Options 1 1 GHz Normal xtal Present Settings Ref frequency 5 kHz Safety Voltage 199 80 V Bus Address 1 Printer NONE Power up mode Manual Ext ref in 18 MHz Ext ref in Disabled TODAY S DATE TIME MORE 6 4 1 3
56. lt cpd gt DC SQU EDGE MARK SIN OPUL TEL LEAK RAMP SKEW EXT PWID 9100 Option 250 compatible SOUR SCOP SHAP lt cpd gt DC SQU EDGE MARK SIN Purpose This defines the main signal required output i e selects the source function of the 9500B lt cpd gt The character program data determines the waveshape of the output signal It can be chosen from ten alternatives DC Determines that subsequent selection of VOLT or CURR will have a DC component only sQUare Determines that subsequent selection of VOLT or CURR will have a square waveshape EDGE Selects the edge function The waveshape is selected with a separate command MARKer Selects the timing marker waveshape SINusoid Selects the levelled sinusoidal waveshape OPULSe Selects the energy pulse used to test the overload detection of scopes TELevision Selects the TV waveform video test signals LEAKage Selects the open and closed head conditions used to determine the UUT s leakage current RAMP Selects the Ramp Function SKEW Selects the Zero Skew Function PWIDth Selects the Pulse Width Function EXTernal Selects the Auxiliary Input signal The SOURce SCOPe SHAPe command is for backward compatibility with Option 250 in the 9100 Note that there are some amplitude frequency selections that were available on the 9100 but are not covered on the 9500B The query form of this command returns the short form version of the command If none of the abov
57. seconds Sync or 100Hz triggers are provided if required 4 13 3 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen The Overload Pulse function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the ILA softkey onthe right of the screen Caution The A symbol indicates that care must be taken when applying the overload pulse to UUT oscilloscope inputs Whenever the Overload Pulse menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default settings AN OF irene Amplitude 20 0 V Pulse Energy 1 6 J Power In50Q 8 0000 W T Duration 200 02 ms PULSE TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL AUTO SELECT TRIG The above default screen has auto selected the positive pulse waveform as indicated by the icon in the top left corner Amplitude is variable between 5 Volts and 20 Volts default Pulse Energy is variable between 1 6 Joules default and 50 Joules Power into 50Q and Pulse Duration are calculated from the voltage and energy settings 4 13 4 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 Note Without Option 5 only one signal channel and one trigger cha
58. 1 Press to change display from Frequency to Period E Press to change display from Period to Frequency 4 14 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys Numeric Entry Right side screen keys operate on the value in the edit box and acting in place of the J key exit from Numeric Entry back to Digit Edit Sequence Scroll then set the value as evaluated in the box Keys operate only on the value of Frequency Period 4 14 3 4 Bottom Screen Keys ADJUST Press to select Precision Alignment ALIGN to adjust the alignment on each active channel and store the result DEFAULT After Precision Alignmenthas been ALIGN stored toggles between Default and Precision Alignment CHANNEL Permits Zero Skew to be selected SELECT for any two or more of the five channels providing that active heads are fitted to those channels para 4 14 3 1 _ Press to select Direct Mode paras BA E 4 4 3 4 E Press to select Scope Mode sets si the step sequence to 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 as chosen using the Preferences key paras 4 4 1 2 4 14 4 Zero Skew Operation adjustment With output off a channel active head is connected into the scope input channel to be used At the required frequency with output on the channel delay at half amplitude is marked using a cursor also by pressing the ADJUST ALIGN soft key the channel delay can be adjusted for a particular screen alignment With output off the first active head is removed
59. 150ps Edge LIN mode Set 9500B s output ON selecting TARGET 1 from table 10 6 3 4 Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the oscilloscope Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 4 by pressing NEXT TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 3 4 Edge Function 150ps Edge Linearity Cal Point Voltage Frequency Edge Target 1 1 0000V 100kHz Rising Target 2 2 0000V 100kHz Rising Target 3 2 5000V 100kHz Rising Target 4 1 0072V Rising Target 4 1 0000V 100kHz Falling Target 5 316 49mV Rising Target 6 316 49mV Rising Target 7 3 0000V Falling Target 8 20000V Falling Target 9 1 0000V Falling Target 10 1 0072V Falling Target 11 316 49mV Falling Target 12 316 49mV Falling Target 5 2 0000V 100kHz Falling Target 6 2 5000V 100kHz Falling Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Edge Function Low Edge Speed amp Linearity 10 6 9 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 6 3 8 Calibration Procedure 150ps Edge Gain 1 num Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings Select the required measurement device function
60. 1V pk pk Bias Symmetrical about ground Trigger Alignment Start of rising or falling ramp Overload Pulse Function Pulse Amplitude 5 0V to 20 0V 0 1V resolution Pulse Energy 1 6J to 50 0J 0 1J resolution Polarity Positive or negative from ground Pulse Duration at 20V 200ms to 6 25s at 5V 3 2s to 100s Internally calculated from Amplitude and Energy Power into 500 0 5W to 8W Internally calculated from Amplitude Repetition Rate Single manually triggered event max repetition rate 0 3Hz UUT Scope Trigger With energy pulse or Auto trigger at 100Hz Zero Skew Function Frequencies 10Hz to 100MHz Default Alignment 9500B output channel skew lt SOps Align 9500B Channel Output Timing Measure UUT Scope Channel Skew Auxiliary Input Signal Path Impedance 3dB Bandwidth Trigger Using a single oscilloscope channel Using aligned 9500B channels Automated passive relay switched routing of user s external calibration waveforms to any Active Head s BNC connector via the output multiplexer Input and Output 50Q Approx 400MHz No trigger pickoff provided internal trigger not available Load Resistance and Capacitance Measurement Resistance Range Input Termination Capacitance Range 10kQ to 20MQ 10Q to 150Q 1pF to 120pF Reference Frequency Input eae A a ali Frequency Range 1MHz to 20MHz in 1MHz integer steps aga cae eee Amplitude Range 70mV pk pk to 1V pk pk Rise Fall Time
61. 2 3 Command Errors CME Remote operation only Command Error Generation A Command Erroris generated when the remote command does not conform either to the device command syntax or to the IEEE 488 2 generic syntax The CME bit 5 is set true in the Standard defined Event Status Byte and the error code number is appended to the Error Queue Command Error Reporting The error is reported by the mechanisms described earlier in Section 6 Sub section 6 5 which deals with status reporting The Command Errors implemented in the 9500B are listed below their error numbers conform to those defined in the SCPI Standard document 100 Command error 101 Invalid character 103 Invalid separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 108 Parameter not allowed 110 Command header error 113 Undefined header 120 Numeric data error 121 Invalid character in number 123 Exponent too large 124 Too many digits 150 String data error 160 Block data error 161 Invalid block data 178 Expression data not allowed 8 A 2 2 4 Execution Errors EXE Remote operation only Execution Error Generation An Execution Error is generated if a received command cannot be executed due to it being incompatible with the current device state or because it attempts to command parameters which are out of limits In remote operation the EXE bit 4 is set true in the Standard defined Event Status Byte a
62. 2 Interconnections 4 8 5 3 COMMON SetU 4 8 4 4 8 5 4 UUT Scope Time Base Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source 4 8 4 4 8 5 5 UUT Scope Time Base Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable SOUTE pagna 4 8 4 4 8 2 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen Time Markers function can be accessed by pressing the 111 function key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel Whenever the Jl menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default settings although some settings may have been made non volatile refer to para 4 5 3 6 UL OFF X18 Time Marker 1 0000 us eels Deviation 0 00 A 9 Period 1 0020 us FREQ O P Amplitude 1 0000 Vpr TODAY S DATE TIME OS ewal ed The above default screen has auto selected the square waveform as indicated by the icon in the top left corner Square waveform Period is variable between 10ns and 50s sine waveform is used above approx 100MHz Sine waveform Period is variable between 500ps and 10ns variant 9500B 1100 for other variants refer to specifications in Section 7 Period has defaulted to 1us square deviation A to zero and output voltage to 1 0000Vp p The Duty Cycle is fixed at a nominal 50 4 8 3 Menu Selections Si
63. 2 Lifting and Putting Down at Low Level 2T MING VONAGS na a A R N S 2 7 1 i bend nneciors andi Pin Desig ations Always ben your knees not your back when going down Keep Bi EEE daS ihouv utursoikei a your back as straight and as vertical as possible 8 nput Output Socket oo eee neice 2 8 2 Parallel Port Tudi P shits aa a A E N 2 8 2 Use the same technique 2 2 1 3 above to hold the instrument s 2 8 3 Serial Port 2 8 center of gravity close to you 2 8 4 Auxiliary Input 2 9 2 8 5 Ref Frequency Input 2 9 28 6 Ref Frequency Output ss voce cccccsascsussssesecceaiernsieteeeteccascs 2 9 Care of Microwave Commectols s inon 2 9 Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 2 1 2 3 Unpacking and Inspection Every care is taken in the choice of packing materials to ensure that your equipment will reach you in perfect condition If the equipment has been subject to excessive mishandling in transit the fact will probably be visible as external damage to the shipping container and inner carton In the event of damage the shipping container inner carton and cushioning material should be kept for the catrier s inspection Carefully unpack the equipment and check for external damage to the case sockets controls etc If the shipping container and cushioning material are undamaged they should be retained for use in subsequent shipments If damage is found notify the carrier and your sales representa
64. 3 Note Without Option 5 only one signal 4 11 4 2 Right Side Screen Keys The cursor is available only on the Luminance Level parameter Scope mode Three luminance levels are defined para 4 11 5 1 The key labels will change depending on other key selections Default Screen Toggles between upright and inverted composite video cm Currently 50Hz line supply with 625 raster lines Press to select for 60Hz line supply with 525 raster lines oe a Currently 60Hz line supply with 525 raster lines Press to select for 50Hz line supply with 625 raster lines re eve Currently Composite synch pulses on the Trigger channel Press to output Frame synch pulses on the Trigger channel TRIG MRA Currently Frame synch pulses on the Trigger channel Press to output Composite synch pulses on the Trigger channel 4 11 4 3 Bottom Screen Keys CHANNEL Permits the screen signal setup to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel and cable channel paras 4 5 3 channel and one trigger channel is available 4 11 4 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Composite Video Function 4 11 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 11 5 Composite Video Function Operation 4 11 5 1 Value Editing Amplitude The three luminance levels give amplitudes as follows White 1 0Vp p Mid grey 0 7V
65. 3 1 On the Target Selection screen press the WAVEFORM soft key Select DCV negative by pressing the __ key on the right of the screen Repeat steps 2 to 12 for each of the Cal Ranges detailed in the Table 10 5 3 2 Note Ifotherfunctions are being calibrated in addition to DC Voltage refer to Table 10 5 2 1 on page 10 5 3 for information on sequencing calibrations 10 5 6 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square DC Voltage Function Table 10 5 3 1 DC Square DC Voltage Positive Hardware Configurations and Calibration Targets Function Waveshape Hardware Configuration Span Target 1 low Target 2 high Default Minimum Maximum Default Minimum Maximum Z Ooo NDNA WP i tk 2 Table 10 5 3 2 888 00pV 2 10mV 2 10mV 5 56mV 5 56mV 21 00mV 21 00mV 55 60mV 55 60mV 210 00mV 210 00mV 556 00mV 556 00mV 2 10V 2 10V 5 56V 5 56V 22 24V 22 24V 55 60V 55 60V 222 40 1 0000mV 2 3000mV 6 0000mV 23 000mV 60 000mV 230 00mV 600 00mV 2 3000V 6 0000V 23 000V 60 000V 0 9300mV 1 0700mV 2 1390mV 2 4610mV 5 5800mV 6 4200mV 21 390mV 24 610mV 55 800mV 64 200mV 213 90mV 246 10mV 598 00mV 642 00mV 2 1390V 2 4610V 5 5800V 6 4200V 21 39 24 610V 55 801 64 200V 1 900 5 000 19 00 50 00 190 0 500 0 1 9000 5 0000 19 0 50 0 190 00 a
66. 3 11 Ext ref out 3 4 3 12 DATE TIME 3 4 3 13 HEAD CONFIG 3 4 3 14 MORE Configuration 3 4 3 15 Language 3 4 3 16 Border line 3 4 3 17 Results card 3 4 3 18 Engineers Notes 3 4 3 19 Certificate 3 4 3 20 CERT STYLE 3 4 3 21 PAGE SETUP 3 4 3 22 Start page MUMDEM 2 cceeeccesteeeceeeesesteeeeenee 3 4 3 23 Page length header and footer sizes 3 4 3 24 Pass indicator irssi 3 4 3 25 Appended message 3 4 3 26 LAB DETAILS si lt c ccstescasenesccsnieesutevescestsccananeiasatcee 3 4 3 27 LAB NAME 3 4 3 28 Laboratory Temperature and Humidity 3 4 3 29 CLEAR USER LIST ue 3 4 3 30 IDN CONFIG 3 4 3 31 CALAlarms Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 1 Final Width 215mm 3 2 Introduction to the Front Panel 3 2 1 Local and Remote Operation 3 2 1 1 Remote Semi Automatic and Manual Calibration of UUT Oscilloscopes The 9500B has been designed to present three main user interfaces for control of UUT calibration e Fully automatic operation for UUT oscilloscopes which are remotely controllable on the IEEE 488 Instrumentation Control Interface employing IEEE 488 2 SCPI protocols The 9500B also includes emulation modes which minimize the software effort required for integration into existing calibration systems designed around
67. 6 4 2 Output Voltage Editing 4 6 5 Dual Channel Operation 4 6 5 1 Dual Channel Selec 4 6 6 Using the 9500B Levelled Sine Func Calibrate the Flatness Bandwidth Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 6 6 1 Introduction 4 6 6 2 Interconnecti 4 6 6 3 Common Setup 4 6 6 4 UUT Scope Flatne using the 9500B as a Fixed Source 4 6 4 4 6 6 5 UUT Scope Flatness Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable GOUNE cess vdessncadedinsanleorcvoeuemenearmias 4 6 4 4 6 2 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen Sine function can be accessed by pressing the function key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel Whenever the AV menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default settings te 10 5 00 mV div x6 30 000 mV Deviation Gogg 4 9 O P Amplitude 30 000 mor Frequency 50 000 kHz Jer The above default screen has auto selected the frequency of 50kHz Deviation has defaulted to zero and output voltage to 30 000mVp p Frequency is variable between 0 1Hz and 1 1GHz variant 9500B 1100 for other variants refer to specifications in Section 7 TODAY S DATE TIME 4 6 3 Menu Selections Except for Dual Channel operation paras 4 6 5 all Signal Channel selection Trigge
68. 7 but using Table 9 8 2 2 for each of the verification points 5 9500B Set Output ON and wait for the DMM reading to 9 Press the WAVEFORM soft key Select Square symmetrical by settle pressing the Ht key on the right of the screen Repeat steps 2 N B For Operation 6 the RMS Output Voltage values and RMS to 7 but using Table 9 8 2 3 for each of the verification points Absolute Tolerance Limits have been derived using the following factor for the output waveform at 1kHz RMS 0 5 x 0 999917 x pk pk Fi in al Width 215mm Note This factor applies only at 1kHz and assumes use of model 4955 set to SQV o c A compensation of 83ppm accounts the finite transition time of the Square Wave and the resultant fall in its RMS value Table 9 8 2 1 DC Square Square Verification at 1kHz into 1M9 Load Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy Frequency Output Absolute Tolerance Output Absolute Tolerance Measured Voltage Limits pk pk Voltage Limits RMS Value pk pk Lower Higher RMS Lower Higher RMS 600 00mV 599 39mV 600 61mV 299 9979mV 299 67mV 300 28mV 60 000mV 59 93mV 60 07mV 29 99799mV 29 96mV 30 03mV 6 0000mV 5 984mV 6 016mV 2 999799mV 2 992mV 3 008mV 6 0000V 5 99399V 6 00601V 2 999799V 2 99674V 3 00275V 60 000V 59 93999V 60 06001V 29 99799V 29 96750V 30 02751V 9 8 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Speci
69. 9 CONFIG Password To Change the Configuration Mode Password 1 On the Select the password screen press the CONFIG screen key on the right This transfers to the Enter new config password screen Configuration Enter new config password TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT To cancel an attempt press the EXIT key This will revert to the Select the password screen 2 Type the new password using the alpha numeric keyboard and finish with J The 9500B will ask for the password to be entered again to confirm it 3 Retype the same password finish with J If the second password is different from the first the 9500B will reject both and the process must be repeated If both passwords are the same the 9500B will accept the new password and revert to the Select the password screen Note The shipment version of the Configuration password is 12321 3 12 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 3 4 3 10 Ext ref in Reference Frequency Input A BNC connector on the 9500B rear panel accepts reference frequency inputs from 1 MHz to 20MHz in 1MHz steps from a TTL source 1 On the Present Settings screen press the EXT REF IN screen key to transfer to the Change the reference source screen default shown 2 To change the reference source press the required screen key on the right Configuration M
70. 9500B Emulation of Tektronics SG5030 and CG5010 5011 9500B System Application via IEEE 488 Interface Retrieval of Device Status Information 9500B SCPI Status Reporting Structure based on IEEE 488 2 651 GONG Ale anciani 6 5 2 IEEE 488 and SCPI Standard Defined Features 6 5 2 1 Status Summary Information and SRQ 6 5 2 2 Event Register Conditions 6 5 2 3 Access via the Application Program 6 5 3 9500B Status Reporting IEEE 488 2 Basics 6 5 3 1 IEEE 488 2 Model 6 5 3 2 9500B Model Structure 6 5 3 3 Status Byte Register 6 5 3 4 Service Request Enable Register 6 5 3 5 IEEE 488 2 defined Event Status Register 6 5 3 6 Standard Event Status Enable Register 6 5 3 7 The Error Queue sssrin 6 5 4 9500B Status Reporting SCPI Elements 6 5 4 1 General eeccseccsseees 6 5 4 2 SCPI Status Registers 6 5 4 3 Reportable SCPI States 9500B SCPI Language Commands and Syntax Detailed treatment of the 9500B SCPI Command Set For an index to pages of individual commands refer to Sub Section 6 2 6 6 1 Introduction 6 6 2 CALibration Subsystem 6 6 3 OUTPut Subsystem 6 6 4 ROUTe Subsystem 6 6 5 SOURce Subsystem 6 6 6 CONFigure Subsystem 6 6 7 STATus Subsystem 6 6 8 SYSTem Subsystem 6 6 9 REFerence Subsystem sssssssssscssseesssseessssessessneessaessnneessnseessneesssneesee 6 6 20 Section 6 9500B System Operat
71. 9500B cannot be made to power up in any other mode To set the power up default mode use the procedure in the column on the right 1 For access to change the default mode press the POWER UP MODE screen key on the Present Settings screen d This transfers to a Configuration screen to change The default power on mode Configuration MANUAL The default power on mode is indicated by the highlight Use the softkeys to select another TODAY S DATE EXIT TIME 3 To change the default press the required screen key on the right 4 Press EXIT toreturn tothe Present Settings screen The new default will be incorporated into the list Next time the line power is turned from OFF to ON the 9500B will power up in the selected mode continued overleaf Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 11 3 4 3 7 NEW PASSWORD Changing the Passwords Two passwords are required they can be the same or different e for entry to Configuration mode e to enter Calibration mode for calibration of the 9500B itself Refer to para3 4 2 When the 9500B is shipped from new the password requirementis enabled to avoid unauthorized access refer to para 3 4 2 The shipment Configuration and Calibration passwords allow initial access to the two modes but should be changed as soon as entry has been gained into Configuration mode
72. Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 5 9 4 5 8 1 Introduction 4 5 9 4 5 8 2 Interconnections 4 5 9 4 5 8 3 UUT Scope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source of DOVODE riinan 4 5 9 4 5 8 4 UUT Scope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source of DC Voltage e 45 10 4 5 2 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen Otherwise the function is accessed by pressing the 7 function key at the top right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel Whenever the DC Square menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it may appear with the following default settings although some settings may have been made non volatile refer to para 4 5 3 6 Ty OF x10 SDD mdv x4 20 000 mvn Y Deviation 90 00 4 9 O P Amplitude 20 800 mV Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME Porm a Ber The above default screen has auto selected the positive square waveform as indicated by the iconin the top left corner Frequency is variable between 10 000Hz and 100 00kHz Frequency has defaulted to 1kHz deviation A to zero and output voltage to 20 000mVp p The Duty Cycle is fixed at a nominal 50 4 5 3 Menu Selections 4 5 3 1 Signal Channels E
73. Change the reference source EXT by using the softkeys Reference LOCKED Hei 10 Mhz TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 3 When switched to EXT use the up down cursor control or spinwheel to inform the 9500B of the source frequency Ensure that the required source is connected and operating Configuration L Change the reference source EXT by using the softkeys Change the external reference setting by using the cursor keys or whirly wheel ei TAMH GER TODAY S DATE EXIT TIME 4 Press EXIT to return to the Present Settings screen The new external reference frequency is available to enhance the 9500B internal clock 3 4 3 11 Ext ref out Reference Frequency Output A BNC connector on the 9500B rear panel provides areference frequency output at either 1MHz or 10OMHz from a 50Q source VSWR lt 1 2 to 1OOMHz This can use the 9500B internal clock to enhance the frequency accuracy of other devices 1 On the Present Settings screen press the EXT REF OUT screen key to transfer to the current external reference output screen default shown Configuration The current external reference output is indicated by the highlight DISABLE 1 MHZ 10 MHZ Use the softkeys to select another TODAY S DATE EXIT TIME 2 To change the external reference output press the required screen key on the rig
74. DISABLE cy THE POWER CORD PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR MUST BE CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND 3 FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 FIT 250V FUSE OF CORRECT RATING RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO E2 Ax roe REF FREQUENCY NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS CONTAINED DO NOT yy bat SERIAL PORT PARALLEL PORT f REMOVE COVERS HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES PRESENT s 5Vpk REFER SERVICE TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL Say A EN LINE VOLTAGE FUSE 5 x 20mm JN OUTPUT SELECTION IEC 127 9 WIZ 1V pk pk nom 100V 120V T10 0 AH inte 500 220V 240V 15 0 AH b x aces eine Ca POWER INPUT 400VA max FREQUENCY 47 63Hz lt p 9500B Rear Panel 2 7 1 Mounting overleaf gt Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 2 7 2 7 1 Mounting 2 7 1 1 Bench Mounting The instrument is fitted with four plastic feet and a tilt stand It can stand flat on a bench positioned so that the cooling air inlet on the right side and exhaust apertures on the left side are not obstructed 2 7 1 2 Preparation for Operation Conta Option 90 Rack Mounting Fig 2 1 Option 90 permits the instrumenttobemounted C Removing the 9500B Feet and Tilt Stand in a standard 19 inch rack The method of fitting this option is described below the locations being shown in Fig 2 1 A 1 Provision of Option 90 Option 90 is provided with all necessary attachments and fixings The 9500B is fitted with side extrusions with holes to accommodate rac
75. Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Sine Function 4 6 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 6 3 Menu Selections Conid 4 6 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys Numeric Entry Right side screen keys operate on the value in the edit box and acting in place of the J key exit from Numeric Entry back to Digit Edit Sequence Scroll then set the value as evaluated in the box Cursor on Deviation Evaluates the number in the box in Deviation Percentage V Evaluates the number in the box in Volts mV Evaluates the number in the box in Millivolts Cursor on Frequency Hz Evaluates the number in the box in Hertz kHz Evaluates the number in the box in Kilohertz MHz Evaluates the number in the box in Megahertz GHz Evaluates the number in the box in Gigahertz 4 6 3 4 Bottom Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll and Numeric Entry CHANNEL Permits the screen signal setup to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel trigger ratio and cable channel paras 4 5 3 A 1 5 Currently in Scope mode Press to select Direct Mode paras 4 4 3 4 ii Currently in Direct mode Press to select Scope Mode setting the step sequence to l 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 as chosen using the Preferences key paras 4 4 1 2 4 6 4 Sine Function Operation 4 6 4 1 Value Editing Amplitude At maximum and minimum output voltages the screen settin
76. EXIT PRINT If there were no failures up to the point of aborting this is shown on the screen EXIT returns to the Select test menu screen PRINT prints out the results of the test up to the point of aborting Refer to Sub section 8 4 If failures were encountered up to the point of aborting EXIT and PRINT are available Also the number of failures is shown on the screen and an extra selection will be available 8 4 Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test Selftest Aborted Base Test Test ABORTED with X FAILURES TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT PRINT MAILS VIEW FAILS sets up a special screen for detailing the parameters of the failures encountered described later in Paras 8 3 2 3 8 3 2 2 Selftest Runs to Completion If the selftest is not aborted it will run to completion and if the testis successful with no failures a screen will appear Selftest Base Test Test completed with no failures TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT PRINT If failures were encountered during the test the 9500B will display a completion screen For example Selftest Base Test Test completed with X FAILURES TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT PRINT FALS EXIT returns to the Select test menu screen PRINT prints out the results of the test Refer to Sub section 8 4 If failures were encountered EXIT and PRINT remain available Also
77. Foraccess to allow the borderline reporting threshold to be altered press the BORDER LINE screen key on the Present Settings screen This transfers to a configuration screen designed for changing the threshold default value shown 3 14 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Configuration The percentage of UUT specification tolerance beyond which a border line is reported can be adjusted by using direct editing only 10 00 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Border line 2 Use Direct edit to set the required percentage of specification tolerance Results which lie between this percentage and 100 of tolerance will be reported as Border line 3 Press the EXIT screen key to return to the second Present settings menu screen Subsequently during each verification in Procedure mode the 9500B will detect its own slewed output and place the UUT measurement error into the Pass Border line or Fail category Whena Style 1 certificate is printed and on any active results card each test point willindicate a Pass Borderline or Fail result 3 4 3 17 Results card Formatting Results Memory Cards Procedure Mode only In Procedure mode the 9500B can deliver the results of a Calibrate or Verify procedure to amemory card inserted into PCMCIA SLOT 2 in the front panel refer to Section 5 of this Handbook Note that only SRAM cards can b
78. Forgiving Listener NR2 NR3 NRf Appendix F to Section 6 9500B System Operation Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 6 F1 6 F 3 6 F 3 1 General e Emulation mode andthe appropriate bus address for CG5010 5011 or SG5030 are selected on a screen in Configuration mode e This sub section introduces the actions necessary to perform these selections 6 F 3 2 Configuration Mode Before attempting to select Configuration mode please refer to Section 3 sub section 3 4 for information regarding Mode selection from the front panel This sub section also deals with the use of a password to open the screens which permit the Config mode parameters to be changed To activate 5000 series calibrator emulation it is necessary first to press the MORE soft key then use the Config mode password to access the BUS ADDRESS facility Then the following screen will be displayed f BUS Configuration mss Ser No XXXXXX Rev XXX PRINTER Options 1 1 GHz Normal xtal POWER Present Settings UP MODE Ref frequency 5 kHz Safety Voltage 168 08 V NEW Bus Address 1 PASSWRD Printer NONE EXT REF Power up mode Manual IN Ext ref in 1 MHz Ext ref in Disabled eee TODAY S DATE TIME REF VOLTAGE DATE HEAD FREQ LIMIT TIME CONFIG MORE Pressing the BUS ADDRESS soft key presents the following Emulation Mode and Bus Address Selection 6 F 3 3 Emulation Mode O
79. LF DC attenuators to the output BNC orPC3 5 socket Models 9510 9530 Special attenuators in Model 9530 9560 are used for the 150ps or 70ps edge pulses il iil iv vi Vil viii ix ttt Markers Marker types MM Square Sine JL Pulses or A Narrow Triangle waveform timing and levels originate in the mainframe and pass directly via switched attenuators to the output BNC or PC3 5 socket Line frequency markers are also included Aux f LiADC Square Current Source Current outputs between 100UA and 100mA are derived from the DC Square voltage source via an external BNC current loop accessory 50Q load to 9500B output The output calibrates current probes NB Not compatible with 9550 or 9560 L Composite Video Video voltage outputs are passed directly via the output BNC or PC3 5 to test TV sync separator functions Linear Ramp Symmetrical triangular 1Vp p waveforms of period 3ms to 3s are passed via the DC Square voltage route to the output BNC or PC3 5 These calibrate trigger level markers and check DSOs for missing ADC codes ILA Overload Pulse High energy pulses between 5V and 20V of limited duration are passed via the DC Square voltage route to the output BNC or PC3 5 to test 50Q terminator protection Lf Lero Skew Permits 9500B channels heads transit times to be harmonized in order to test UUT input channel trigger synchronization fAUXIN AUX IN Routes external calibration wave
80. Model 9500B firmware upgrade is now complete Please return your PCMCIA to the Service Center Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 8 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 8 3 Model 9500B Test and Selftest 8 3 1 Types of Test There are four main types of selftest Base Heads All and Fast The Fast selftest is also performed automatically at power on In addition the interface for front panel operation can be selectively tested covering such areas as display memory integrity keyboard operation the display itself integrity and formatting of static RAM memory cards for Procedure mode the correct operation of a connected tracker ball and the correct operation of a connected printer These tests are detailed in the following paragraphs Please Note that all Heads should be disconnected from the UUT Oscilloscope before initiating a Self Test Failure to disconnect may result in failed tests 8 3 1 1 Entry to Test Mode Test mode is selected from the Mode Selection menu which is displayed by pressing the front panel Mode key highlighted in Fig 8 3 1 Aux N Mode C D w 2m i Oe d Fig 8 3 1 Mode Key The Mode key sets up a special menu display offering selection from five primary modes Mode Selection Select required mode using softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME PROC MANUAL CONFIG CALIB TEST This menu can be exited only by pressing one o
81. More than No Previously Yes Manufacturers on Ore loaded model J the card There are no The XXXXX Select MODEL Select previously model has been using cursor MANUFACTURER loaded models loaded keys using cursor keys previously Insert new card Model No OK Manuf name OK NEW CARD Inseriinew Card Insert new card Insert new card ABORT NEW CARD NEW CARD NEW CARD ABORT ABORT Select PROCEDURE using cursor keys Enter SERIAL Procedure Name OK NUMBER of ABORT oN your meter _asorT gt G R Procedure The procedure has ABORT been ABORTED END The procedure has ended SERIAL Fig 5 3 2 Procedure Mode Access to Procedures 5 3 6 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Access Guide Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 6 6 1 Section 6 describes the environment in which the Model 9500B will operate in remote applications using the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language within the IEEE 488 1 remote interface In Section 6 we shall show how the 9500B adopts the IEEE 488 2 message exchange model and reporting structure and define the SCPI commands and syntax used to control the 9500B Section 6 is divided into the following sub sections 6 2 6 3 6 4 Index of IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Codes used in the 9500B 6 2 1 6 2 2 About Section 6 Common IEEE 488 2 Commands and Queries 9500B SCPI Subsystems Introduction 9500B Syst
82. OFF and ON keys arranged in a separate column because of their importance c Alpha numeric Keypad Cursor Controls See paras 3 2 3 4 2 Screen Soft Keys around the display itself are used to select sub functions and individual parameters identified in the areas used as screen key labels Before we proceed we need to identify the components present on a typical menu screen A representation of a DC Square display in Manual mode is given as Fig 3 2 1 3 2 3 2 Entry to Manual Mode This discussion is conducted in Manual mode which you may not recognize at present Refer to paras 3 4 1 To enter MANUAL mode 1 Press the front panel Mode key 2 Press the MANUAL screen key beneath the display 3 2 3 3 Manual Mode Typical Menu Screen Ensure that the 9500B is installed and switched on as in Section 2 If after selecting Manual mode the display does not correspond to Fig 3 2 1 press the La key in the top right corner of the front panel Familiarize yourself with Fig 3 2 1 This is the default version of the menu screen which will appear when you enter DC Square function for the first time unless the default has been changed in Config Mode N B Contrast inversions of symbols and fields indicate those elements which have been selected Scope Mode 1 2 5 only in this case 3 2 3 4 Editing on the Screen We have already mentioned Scope Mode This is not a major mode of the same importance as Manual mode bu
83. Output Line 3 Data Input Output Line 4 End or Identify Data Valid for Data Data Accepted Interface Clear Service Request Screening on cable connected to Safety Ground Output Line 5 Output Line 6 Output Line 7 Output Line 8 Remote Enable Ground wire of twisted pair with DAV Ground wire of twisted pair with NRFD Ground wire of twisted pair with NDAC Ground wire of twisted pair with IFC Ground wire of twisted pair with SRQ f Ground wire of twisted pair with ATN Logic Ground Internally associated with Safety Ground Continued overleaf gt Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 Parallel Port Rear Panel This 25 way D Type socket is located beneath the IEEE 488 connector on the rear panel Its connections are similar to the 25 way printer port on PCs carrying control and data for an external printer as designated in the table Pin Layout 13 PARALLEL PORT i ooo Pin Designations 9500B 9500B Signal Name 1 0 STROBE_L Ou Description or Common Meaning us pulse to cause printer to read one byte of data from data bus DO1 DOB8 Data bit 1 Data bit 2 Data bit 3 Data bit 4 Data bit 5 Data bit 6 DO1 Ou D02 Ou D03 Ou D04 Ou D05 Ou DO6 Ou D07 Ou Data bit 7 DO8 Ou Data bit 8 ACKNLG_L n Pulse to indicate that the printer has accepted a data byte and is ready for more data BUSY_H Printer is temporarily busy and cannot receive data P_E
84. POZIPAN screws and four M6 washers Fitting the 9500B into the Rack With assistance slide the instrument into the rack locating the rear ears in the sliders on the side extrusions Push the instrument home and secure the front ears to the rack using the other four M6 x 16 chromium plated POZIPAN screws and four M6 washers 2 4 Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B j NN i 4 Rear Slider MouNT wiTH PART N READING CORRECT Fig 2 1 Option 90 Rack Mounting Kit Fitting Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 2 5 2 7 Preparation for Operation Conta 2 7 2 Power Input The recessed POWER INPUT plug POWER FUSE POWER SWITCH and LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR are contained in an integral filtered module on the right of the rear panel looking from behind the unit A LINE VOLTAGE FUSE 5 x 20mm SELECTION IEC 127 100V 120V T10 0 AH 220V 240V 5 0 AH POWER INPUT 400VA max FREQUENCY 47 63 Hz fx o l gi A window in the fuse drawer allows the line voltage selection to be inspected To inspect the fuse rating the fuse drawer must be taken out Refer to sub section 2 7 4 First switch off and remove the power cable 2 7 3 Power Cable The detachable supply cable comprising two meters of 3 core PVC sheath cable permanently moulded to a fully shrouded 3 pin socket fits in the POWER INPUT plug recess A The supply lead must be connected to a gr
85. Pk Pk AC Volts It should be unsigned The parameter lt dnpd gt must have a value in the range 10 00V to 110 00V inclusive Response to Query Version SYST SVOL The instrument will return the present DC or AC voltage safety warning threshold value The returned number will be in standard scientific unsigned format for example 90V would be returned as 9 0E1 6 6 8 6 SYST VERS Purpose This query returns a numeric value corresponding to the SCPI version number for which the 9500B complies Response SYST VERS returns an lt Nr2 gt formatted numeric value corresponding to the SCPI version number for which the 9500B complies At the time of writing this will be 1994 0 6 6 8 7 SYST FORM Purpose This query returns the present date format as programmed locally Response SYST FORM returns one of three sets of three characters DMY MDY or YMD Day Month Year Month Day Year or Year Month Day respectively Formatting is carried out from a screen in Configuration mode Refer to Section 3 Subsection 3 4 3 paras 3 4 3 12 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 19 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 9 REFerence Subsystem This subsystem is used to configure the input and output reference frequencies 6 6 9 1 REFerence SubsystemTable Keyword Parameter Form REFerence OUTPut FREQuency lt dnpd gt INPut SOURce lt cpd gt INTernal EXTe
86. Procedure mode which can be changed using screen keys whose new labels appear on the display 5 SELECT Configuration s Ser No XXXXX Rev XXX ea Options 1 1 GHz Normal xtal ESTs Present Settings F SNE Language English Border line 70 08 ENG Results card Disabled NOTES Engineers Notes Disabled CERT Certificate Style 1 DETAILS CLEAR USER TODAY S DATE TIME LST The EXIT screen key acts to escape back to the first Configuration menu screen If it desired to revert to the Mode Selection display press the front panel Mode key 3 4 3 15 Language Language Considerations The 9500B default language is English It is possible to change the language used in Procedure mode but not in any of the other modes For Procedure mode the language of the introductory screens can be changed these are stored within the 9500B itself The language used in a procedure card is determined and registered on the card within the procedure header at the time that the procedure is created Portocal II can perform this function When the procedure card is being used in the Model 9500B the language cannot be changed This facility allows users to alter the language used in the introductory screens of Procedure mode ENGLISH Configuration Sa The current language is FRENCH indicated by the highlight GERMAN Use the softkeys to select another SPANISH ITALIAN TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT
87. RIGHT TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT diagram Note that the center key on the tracker has no function in its operation with the 9500B and is not tested so pressing this key should have no effect unless the tracker is defective If the last key to be named does not coincide with the last key to be physically pressed or if the last direction shown does not correspond to the last physical movement then a failure is implied It is possible to diagnose the defect source by checking a second tracker unit on the same 9500B or the same tracker unit on a different 9500B Rectification may require access to the internal circuitry of the 9500B or tracker unit so no further user action is recommended except to report the result to your Fluke Service Center EXIT returns to the Interface Select test menu screen 8 3 4 7 Printer Checks Checks of a connected printer are initiated by pressing the PRINTER key on the Select test menu screen Selecting PRINTER transfers to the Printer DISPLAY Selftest Ea KEYBRD Select test using softkeys DISPLAY MEMORY CARD TRACKER PRINTER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT test screen This invites a user to use a printer to test the interface e g by switching the printer off line or removing the paper and reports on the status of the printer Note Ifthe printer is disabled Config mode Continued overleaf Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Ma
88. Re Program the Firmware a Switch 9500B Power ON b Observe the following growth pattern on the 9500B LCD display The process takes approximately 2 minutes to complete When complete a repetitive pulsed audible tone will be heard If for any reason a continuous audible tone is heard the update has not been successful Note the current state of the growth pattern on the display and relay this information back to the Service Center 5 Recover the Operational State of the 9500B a Switch 9500B Power OFF b Return Switch 6 to the DISABLE position Do not disturb any of the other switches c Replace and secure the switch cover d Remove the PC Card switch the 9500B Power ON and wait for approximately 40 seconds until the Power On Selftest is complete e On the right of the 9500B front panel press the Mode key f At the bottom of the 9500B LCD display press the soft CONFIG key and check that the firmware issue shown on the screen matches that on the PC Card g Transfer back to the Mode Selection screen by pressing the Mode key 6 All Self Test Refer to paras 8 3 1 amp 8 3 2 a Execute an All Self Test and record any errors If printing facilities are available select the PRINT option to obtain a hard copy of the results refer also to paras 8 4 b Note any differences between the self tests at items 1 and 6 c Report the results of the upgrade procedure back to the Service Center The
89. Read Event Status Register This event status data structure conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements for this structure ESR ESR Response Decode recalls the standard defined events The value returned when converted to base 2 binary identifies Refer to Section 6 Subsection 6 5 the bits as defined in the IEEE 488 2 standard Execution Errors None Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 C 5 I D Instrument Identification This command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements IDN IDN will recall the instrument s manufacturer model number serial number and firmware level Response Format Character position 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 1 u k e 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 5 0 0O B 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 X X X X KX KX KX KX X K XX 26 27 28 29 xX X 8 Where The data contained in the response consists of four comma separated fields the last two of which are instrument depend ent The data element type is defined in the IEEE 488 2 standard specification A single query sent as a terminated program message will elicit a single response terminated by nl newline with EOI If multiple queries are sent as a string of program message units separated by semi colons with the string followed by a permitted terminator then the responses will be returne
90. Reporting the Event If an event is to be reported via the SRQ its corresponding enable bit will have been set true using the number Nrf Each bit in the Standard Defined register remains in false condition unless its assigned event occurs when its condition changes to true and remains true until cleared by ESR or CLS This causes the register s summary bit in the Status Byte also to be set true If this bit is enabled then the Status Byte bit 6 MSS RQS will be set true and the 9500B will set the IEEE 488 bus SRQ line true continued overleaf gt Section 6 9500B System Operation Retrieval of Device Status Information 6 5 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm Not used in 9500B TESTING Not used in 9500B Not used in 9500B Not used in 9500B Not used in 9500B lt SCPI Status Structure Registers IEEE 488 2 Status Structure Registers Operation Status Register Summary Bit OSS Operation Status Enable Register bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 gt bit 8 bit 7 MEASURING bit 6 bit 5 gt bit 4 bit 3 CALIBRATING bit 2 bit 1 ERL EEN SESS gt bit 0 OPERation ENABle OPERation EVENt LMM OPERation ENABle lt DNPD gt Master Status Summary Bit bit 6 Request for Service Bit Status Byte Register Ser
91. S DATE TIME 4 9 2 3 Function Icons The following icons are used to access the functions listed Sub Sect ILA Current 4 10 af L Composite Video 4 11 IAN LF Linear Ramp 4 12 ILA Overload Pulse 4 13 ALS Zero Skew 4 14 Without Option 5 only one signal channel and one trigger channel is available so Zero Skew operation is not possible FAUXIN Auxiliary Input 4 15 i Input Resistance Measurement 4 16 de Input Capacitance Measurement 4 16 ao Short Open Output 4 17 l Pulse Width 4 18 Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Auxiliary Functions 4 9 1 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 4 10 Current Function 4 10 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B for generating square waves and DC currents for use in calibrating oscilloscope current probes For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 10 is divided into the following sub sections 4 10 1 Introduction w 410 1 4 10 2 Current Probe Accessory 410 1 4 10 3 Default Settings 410 1 4 10 4 Menu Selections 410 2 4 10 4 1 Retained Channel Memory 410 2 4 10 4 2 Choosing a Waveshape 410 2 410 4 3 DCI Selection 410 2 4 10 4 4 Current Selection 5 4 10 2 4 10 5 Current Operation 410 2 4 10 5 1 Right Side
92. SF35tt 1 5GHz SF36tt 2GHz SF37tt 2 5GHz SF38tt 3GHz SF64ttt 4GHz SFesttt 5GHz SFeettt 5 5GHz SF67ttt 6GHz Additional verification points for 9500B 1100 amp 9500B 3200 t 9500B 3200 only tt and 9500B 3200 with 9560 ttt Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 27 Table 9 9 2 4 Sine FlatnessVerification at 100mV p p into 509 Load Nominal Output Measured Specification User s Total Flatness Validity Tolerance Measured p p Output Frequency p p Voltage Relative to Measurement Limits Voltage for Voltage at 50kHz 50kHz Uncertainty Flatness of Output Um Lower Higher Check Ref 4 100mV 50kHz SF39 10MHz SF40 5OMHz SF41 100MHz SF42 250MHz SF43 400MHz SF44 550MHz SF45 600MHz SF46t 725MHz Final Width 215mm SFAI 1GHz SF48tt 1 5GHz SF49tt 2GHz SF50tt 2 5GHz SF51tt 3GHz sFeettt 4GHz SFe6gttt 5GHz SF70ttt 5 5GHz SF71ttt 6GHz Additional verification points for 9500B 1100 amp 9500B 3200 t 9500B 3200 only tt and 9500B 3200 with 9560 ttt 9 28 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 9 3 Verifying the Edge Function 9 9 3 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 9 3 2 and test interconnections at para 9 9 3 3 Para 9 9 3 4 shows the Verification Setup The Verific
93. Screen Keys Digit Edities 4 10 2 4 10 5 2 Right Side Screen Keys Direct Edib nisanannnanan 410 3 4 10 5 3 Bottom Screen Keys Digit and Direct Edit 4 10 6 Square Operation 4 10 6 1 Value Editing 10 6 2 Output Current Editing 410 3 4 10 7 Using the 9500B Current Square Func ion to Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 10 7 1 Introduction 4 10 7 2 Interconnections 4 10 7 3 Common Setup 4 10 7 4 UUT Scope Ampli T 410 4 410 4 4 10 4 w 4 10 4 ude Calibration t using the 9500B as a Fixed Source 4 10 4 4 10 7 5 UUT Scope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as an hanes Source 410 5 4 10 8 DCI Operation 410 5 4 10 8 1 Polarity 410 5 4 10 8 2 Value Editing 410 5 4 10 8 3 Output Current Editing 410 5 4 10 9 Using the 9500B DCI Function to Calibrate the DC Coupled Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 10 6 4 10 9 1 Introduction 410 6 4 10 9 2 Interconnections 410 6 4 10 9 3 Common Setup w 4 10 6 4 10 9 4 UUT Scope DC Coupled Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed SOU eaa 4 10 6 4 10 9 5 UUT Scope DC Coupled Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source ceee 410 7 4 10 2 Current Probe Accessory This sub section describes the accessory which is used to terminate the 9500B output and activate UUT Oscilloscope current probe The accessory consis
94. Signal Channel to be calibrated b Ifa trigger is required use an active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Trigger for the Channel to be calibrated 4 5 6 3 UUT Scope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source The following procedure assumes that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for amplitude calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Square Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the M soft key at the top right of the screen Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required square wave p p voltage polarity frequency and load impedance for the UUT Scope amplitude cal point 2 UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the
95. So a signal of 1V DC can be adjusted from 0 8880V to 1 1120V using the deviation control To extend the usefulness of this facility the deviation display value can be expressed as UUT Error This permits use of the deviation control to adjust the 9500B output until the UUT oscilloscope presentation itself shows the required value The 9500B output value can be read off but in addition the UUT s error is presented on the 9500B screen Note that both the UUT error and the deviation are expressed as a percentage ratios This means that if the deviation has to be adjusted to 10 00 the UUT error is 9 091 An example will show why Example of UUT Error 1 Assume a 1V UUT nominal cal point 2 9500B set to 1V UUT reading is low 3 9500B Deviation increased until UUT reading is 1V nominal Deviation value is 10 and 9500B output is 1 1V 4 AUUTreading of 1V represents 1 1 x 1V so UUT original reading for 1V input was 1V 1 1 0 909091V The UUT Error is therefore 0 909091V 1V 0 09091V The UUT percentage Error is 0 09091 V 1V x 100 9 09091 Nm To change the Deviation parameter 1 Use the tab key to position the cursor on the Deviation display parameter 2 Use the spinwheel or up down cursor keys to toggle between Deviation and UUT Error Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 3 4 Modes of Ope
96. TODAY S DATE TIME Fig 4 4 2 Typical Screen in Direct Mode 4 4 1 4 Use of the Tab Key a In all editing the Tab key is used to select the required variable for adjustment 4 4 1 5 Scope Mode is the Default Scope Mode is the default mode which will always be forced at power on and when changing modes However we shall discuss Direct mode first because Sequence Scroll is excluded In order to enter Direct mode the bottom right most soft key must be toggled so that its label changes to ey z 4 4 2 Direct Mode 4 4 2 1 Introduction In Direct mode once the key has selected the required variable the cursor can take only one form triangular A pair of triangles pointing at a single digit indicate that the digit s value can be scrolled continuously in integer increments Note that the Units division and multiplier fields are not used and the barred cursor seen on the default screen is missing 4 4 2 2 Cursor Control The cursor controls used in Direct mode are shown highlighted in Fig 4 4 3 continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edit Facilities 4 4 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 4 2 Direct Mode Contd 4 4 2 3 Direct Mode Digit Edit With the triangular cursor attached to a digit the AN IX keys and the spinwheel are used
97. The passwords are changed using the following To change either the CALIB or CONFIG password 1 On the Present Settings menu screen press the NEW PASSWORD screen key on the right This transfers to the Select the Password screen 2 Select the password to be changed via one Configuration 8 CONFIG Select the password to be changed using the softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT of the two screen keys on the right 3 The EXIT screen key reverts to the Present Settings screen 3 4 3 8 CALIB Password To Change the Calibration Mode Password 1 On the Select the password screen press the CALIB screen key on the right This transfers to the Enter new calib password screen Configuration Enter new calib password TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT To cancel an attempt press the EXIT key This will revert to the Select the password screen 2 Type the new password using the alpha numeric keyboard and finish with J The 9500B will ask for the password to be entered again to confirm it 3 Retype the same password finish with J If the second password is different from the first the 9500B will reject both and the process must be repeated If both passwords are the same the 9500B will accept the new password and revert to the Select the password screen Note The shipment version of the Calibration password is 233 57 3 4 3
98. Width 215mm Contents Page SAFETY ISSUES READ THIS ENTIRE SECTION THOROUGHLY BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL OPERATE OR SERVICE THE MODEL 9500B 0 8 Section 1 The Model 9500B High Performance Oscilloscope Calibrator Aa CADOUUSOCHON Te arassa rnise aseh enue ena SE a ene dds 1 1 1 2 introduction to the Mode l 9500B s ices ars ual cosiataninnceicyencovera sects 1 2 1 3 Model 9500B Associated Products and Options ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseaees 1 4 Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 21 About Secon 2 2 ich ietesvtekearae asi aaat i aaa eais ladera N Oe 2 1 2 2 Lifting and Carrying the Model 9500B 2 1 2 3 Unpacking and Inspection 1 2 2 24 SOPAGC ecto sceseteteeliee las reie arene ever anata ete ety eed eeeneala tela ce taeanssactacies 2 2 2 5 Preparation for SMIPMEME wesc csscscevse seus set ssschssenas eeteeeeees a Ea AE cneuiay usin Gases 2 2 2 6 Calibration Enable Switch 1 2 2 2 7 Preparation for Operation we 2 3 2 8 Connectors and Pin Designations cc ccccescceeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaaees 2 7 2 9 Care of Microwave Connectors sprae ened tein Aneal an aeaciainiai seein nieas 2 9 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Sl About SECON a on sich het cedecsccicsanctsessceneandsavetaccvenndssens deacouadvenneenictadendseudiacemesndeseondeaneractns 3 2 Introduction to the Front Panel 3 3 Preferences ecceeeseeeeee
99. and zero 4 Toggles the value between positive and negative DC only iii Cursor on Deviation A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero A Press to set Deviation value in absolute units A Press to set Deviation value in percent of set value iv Cursor on Frequency Period X10 Multiplies the marked value by ten 10 Divides the marked value by ten A 0 Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero a Press to change display from Frequency to Period not DC f Press to change display from Period I to Frequency not DC 4 5 4 2 Right Side Screen Keys Numeric Entry Right side screen keys operate on the value in the edit box and acting in place of the J key exit from Numeric Entry back to Digit Edit Sequence Scroll then set the value as evaluated in the box Cursor on Deviation Evaluates the number in the box in Deviation Percentage V Evaluates the number in the box in Volts mV Evaluates the number in the box in Millivolts W Evaluates the number in the box in Microvolts 4 5 4 3 WAVE FORM rh CHANNEL SELECT Bottom Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll and Numeric Entry Provides a second menu screen for selection between three Square waveshapes or DC paras 4 5 3 7 9 With output on the output to the UUT is grounded for any waveform or DC selection Permits the screen signal setup to be routed to any o
100. appropriate load resistor 4 wire connection with the 9500B Active Head output BNC disconnected 5 DMM Set to the appropriate Resistance measurement range take a Resistance measurement and note the result R ref in Table 9 8 5 1 Note Make sure to allow for any settling time of the external measuring instrument 6 Calculate the lower and higher absolute tolerance limit values Lower limit Llim R ref R ref x 0 001 Higher limit H lim R ref R ref x 0 001 Enter L lim and H lim into the appropriate columns in Table 9 8 5 1 7 If using the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor a Set the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor switch as shown in Table 9 8 5 1 b Reconnect the Active Head output BNC to the Model 4955 input 8 If not using the Model 4955 disconnect the load resistor from the DMM and reconnect it to the 9500B Active Head output BNC 9 Press the ON key to turn the 9500B output on 10 Using the 9500B take a Resistance measurement and note the result R meas in Table 9 8 5 1 11 9500B Set OUTPUT OFF Final Width 215mm Table 9 8 5 1 Load Resistance Measurement Verification Please copy the following table Enter the measurements on the copy as described in the procedure 4955 Switch Position Op 3 b Resistance Value Measured by DMM Rref Lower L lim Calculated Absolute Tolerance Limits 4955 Switch Position Op 7 a Resistance Value Measured by 9500B Rmeas Higher H li
101. by manipulation of a b and c default 4 0000mA 4 10 6 2 Output Current Editing The Digit and Direct editing processes follow the same general rules as for editing currents described in paras 4 4 Tab Key and Cursors Scope Mode Repeatedly pressing this key moves the cursor from the default units division to the Multiplier then to the Deviation and back to the units division The type of cursor at each position indicates the type of adjustment possible Units Division Scope Mode The type of cursor barred used for the units division signifies that the value can be adjusted only as a step sequence value using the jand keys The lt and C gt gt keys are inactive From the default ImA div the value can be raised using the N key by increments through 2mA div 5mA div 10mA div and so on up to 50mA div providing that the other contributors will not take the output current value above 111 2mA p p Similarly the gt key will reduce the Units Division down to 20uA div unless the output current would fall below 88 8uA p p Multiplier Scope Mode Againthe lt and gt keysareinactive From the default x 4 the value can be changed using the N and keys by single integer increments to values between 1 and 10 providing that the other contributors do not take the output current value out of its limits The product of the units division and multiplier are shown on the right side of t
102. cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Observe and note the amplitude response ERa VU TF aS Calibration a If a calibration adjustment is provided adjust the UUT s response to be appropriate to the settings on the 9500B screen as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b If no adjustment is provided on the UUT Scope record its response at the calibration point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 4 5 6 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 5 6 4 UUT Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source The following procedure assumes that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for amplitude calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Square Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the M soft key at the top right of the screen Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibra
103. calibrated 4 7 6 3 Common Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for pulse response calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Edge Function with Output OFF Ifin any other function press the key at the right of the front panel 4 7 6 4 UUT Scope Pulse Response Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope flatness calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required edge p p voltage frequency and load impedance for the UUT Scope pulse response cal point 2 UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Observe and note the pulse shape response pRa TDP w g Calibration a
104. corresponding to the SCPI version for which the instrument complies 6 6 19 FORMat Returns the present date format as programmed locally c eeceeceeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 6 19 Configures the input and output reference frequencies 00 cl nnn UU in ieee aaa AAAA aaa nannaa Ennan 6 6 20 6 2 2 Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Code Index 6 3 Introduction This first part of Section 6 gives the information necessary to put the 9500B into operation on the IEEE 488 bus For more detailed information refer to the standard specification in the publications ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 and IEEE Std 488 2 1988 6 3 1 Interface Capability 6 3 1 1 IEEE Standards 488 1 and 488 2 The 9500B conforms to the Standard Specification IEEE 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation and to IEEE 488 2 1988 Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands 6 3 1 2 The 9500B in IEEE 488 2 Terminology In IEEE 488 2 terminology the 9500B is a device containing a system interface It can be connected to a system via its system bus and set into programmed communication with other bus connected devices under the direction of a system controller 6 3 1 3 Programming Options The instrument can be programmed via the IEEE Interface to e Change its operating state Function Source etc Transmit its own status data over the bus e Requ
105. cursor on the Frequency value Now use any editing mode to change this value note that the new value must lie within the Max and Min limits specified in Table 10 5 4 1 b Ifyou wish to change the target calibration point amplitude use the TAB E key to position the cursor on the Target Amplitude value Now use any editing mode to change this value note that the new value must lie within the Max and Min limits specified in Table 10 5 4 1 c Press the SAVE TARGET soft key If using the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor set its switch to SQV o c If not using the Model 4955 ensure that the DMM input is AC coupled at high impedance Set the Standards DMM to the appropriate RMS voltage measurement range Calculate the RMS value of the 9500B output pk pk voltage from the following factor at 1kHz RMS 0 5 x 0 999917 x pk pk Note This factor applies only at 1kHz and assumes use of model 4955 set to SQV o c A compensation of 83ppm accounts the finite transition time of the Square Wave and the resultant fall in its RMS value Press the ON key to turn the 9500B output on Press the TAB S key to return the cursor to the 9500B O P Amplitude display and increment or decrement this value using the cursor controls and or spinwheel until the reading on the Standards DMM is the RMS equivalent of the displayed Target Amplitude pk pk value calculated in operation 8 Note make sure to allow for any settling time of the
106. expected load impedance of the selected trigger channel 6 6 6 TRIGger RATio Sets the ratio of trigger to signal frequency 1 10 100 oo eceececeeeseeseeeseeseeesesseeseesseeneeeseeaes 6 6 6 continued overleaf gt Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Code Index 6 2 1 Final Width 215mm 6 2 2 SOURCce Final Width 215mm CONFigure READ STATus SYSTem REFerence Page 9500B SCPI Subsystems Contd Used to select the main 9500B Function to be Output iscicciccccccceseescecteccessesosesavsersssesossaccctscoscasoensstdesecnsatsresensiesdececoecesdoaveste 6 6 7 FUNCtion sel cts the Waveshape of OUtpUt SIQMAIS irrisica sinnige 6 6 8 SCOPe Backward compatibility with 9100 Opt 250 isiin SHAPe Selects the Waveshape of output signals TRANsition Selects the direction of the important edge UUT_Z Selects impedance matching for signal and trigger channels 6 6 13 SPERiod CW FlXed Sets the period of the currently selected waveform s s 6 6 14 PARameter DC Subsequent selection of VOLT or CURR will have DG COMPONENT OMY seee a ae aa aE NA 6 6 8 DC GROund Subsequent output of VOLT or CURR will be grounded DC MCHannel Enables disables multichannel output s es 6 6 8 SQUare Subsequent selection of VOLT or CURR will have SQUAIC WAVESNADE smreka saava tries enaiatadaniie 6 6 9 SQUare POLarity Sets the polarity of the selected SqUare
107. guide to the use of the 9500B for generating Linear Ramps for error code detection and trigger level marker calibrations For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 12 is divided into the following sub sections 412 1 Introduction 4 12 2 Default Settings 4 12 3 Menu Selections 4 12 3 1 Retained Channel M z 4 12 3 2 Scope Mode Only 4 12 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys satt 4 12 3 4 Bottom Screen Keys 4 12 4 Linear Ramp Operation 4 12 41 Value Editing 4 12 5 Using the 9500B Linear Ramp Function for Error Code Detection and Trigger Level Marker Checks 4 12 5 1 Introduction 4 12 5 2 Interconnections 4 12 5 3 9500B and UUT Os Gi 4 12 2 OUI ennei 4 12 2 4 12 5 4 Error Code Detection Sequence of Operations 412 2 4125 5 Trigger Level Sequence of Operations 412 2 4 12 2 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen The Linear Ramp function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the soft key on the right of the screen Whenever the Linear Ramp menu screen is gt lt to A OFF l O P Amplitude 1 0000 V pkp Ramp
108. in local operation The 9500B can be programmed to generate an SRQ at power up also preparing a status response for transmission to the controller when interrogated by a subsequent serial poll 6 4 2 2 Operating Conditions When the 9500B is operating under the direction of the application program there are two main conditions depending on whether the application program has set the REN management line true or false 1 REN True REN line low The 9500B can be addressed and commanded if in either Manual or Calibration mode All access to front panel control will be removed except for the bottom right screen key labelled Enable Local Usage The cursor controls will not be present If LLO Local Lockout has been sent with REN true then the Enable Local Usage screen key will be inoperative If LLO has not been sent the Enable Local Usage screen key will return to local control as if REN were false see 2 below The 9500B will act in response to valid commands performing any changes in output etc The display presentation will track the changes Remote control cannot command Configuration mode or Procedure mode These are Local Modes only Remote control cannot break into locally entered Configuration mode Procedure mode or Test mode However Test can be run remotely 2 REN False REN line high The 9500B will remain in Local Operation but can be addressed and com
109. in the table available for the UUT variant type 7 9500B Set Output OFF 9 24 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 9 2 7 Uncertainty Calculations and Flatness Check All Tables a Insert the User s Measurement Uncertainty Um for each of the verification points in the tables b For each of the verification points Combine the Total Measurement Uncertainty and the 9500B Sine function accuracy using the RSS method to calculate the Flatness Validity Tolerance Limits For further assistance refer to sub section 9 9 2 6 c Enter the limits in the appropriate columns of the copy of the Table d Check that the Measured p p Voltage is at or between the Flatness Validity Tolerance Limits Table 9 9 2 1 Sine Flatness Verification at 3V p p into 509 Load Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy Nominal Output Measured Specification User s Total Flatness Validity Tolerance Measured p p F in a I Width 2 1 5m m Output Frequency p p Voltage Relative to Measurement Limits Voltage for Voltage at 50kHz 50kHz Uncertainty Flatness of Output Um Lower Higher Check Ref 1 3V 50kHz SF01 10MHz SF02 5OMHz SF03 100MHz SF04 250MHz SF05 400MHz SF06 550MHz SF07 600MHz SFost 725MHz SFogt 1GHz SF10tt 1 5GHz SF11tt 2GHz SF12tt 2 5GHz Additional verification points for 9500B 1
110. initially shows the value to which the 9500B outputis presently set and the value of the selected target amplitude whether default or saved Note that on these values triangular cursors indicate which digit will change when using the cursor keys or spinwheel When transferring using the tab key the cursor always moves to the least significant digit on the other value Output and Target Amplitude control on this screen is similar to normal operation of the 9500B either by digit edit method cursor controls spinwheel operating on one digit at a time or direct edit method numeric keypad At this point you have already chosen to use either the default or saved value which is now shown on the screen At any time you can return to the Target Selection screen by pressing the EXIT softkey 10 4 3 2 Selecting Default Calibration Targets As mentioned earlier the Model 9500B s firmware contains a complete set of recommended target calibration values for every hardware configuration of every function that can be directly calibrated Before changing from Saved calibration target values back to Default target values consider that there may have been good reasons for choosing values other than default values at the previous calibration Your calibration standards may be uniquely characterized at particular target values for example standard cells may provide a calibration point voltage different from the default value
111. is following an inappropriate message exchange protocol resulting in the following situations e Interrupted Condition When the 9500B has not finished outputting its Response Message to a Program Query and is interrupted by a new Program Message e Unterminated Condition When the application program attempts to read a Response Message from the 9500B without having first sent the complete Query Message including the Program Message Terminator to the instrument e Deadlocked Condition When the input and output buffers are filled with the parser and the execution control blocked Bit3 Device Dependent Error DDE DDE is set true when an internal operating fault is detected and the appropriate error message is added to the Error Queue See the Note about the Error Queue below Note about the ERROR Queue The Error Queue is a sequential memory stack Each reportable error has been given a listed number and explanatory message which are entered into the error queue as the error occurs The queue is read destructively as a First In First Out stack using the query command SYSTem ERRor to obtain a code number and message Repeated use of the query SYSTem ERRor will read successive Device Dependent Command and Execution errors until the queue is empty when the Empty message 0 No error will be returned It would be good practice to repeatedly read the Error Queue until the Empty message is returned The co
112. is rounded to select 50Q gt 55 is rounded to select IMQ Response to Query Version The instrument will return the rounded lt dnpd gt for the currently selected UUT input impedance 6 6 5 26 SOUR VOLT LEVE IMM AMPL lt dnpd gt Purpose This command selects either DC or AC Voltage hardware dependent upon the DC or SQU EDGE MARK SIN OPUL TEL LEAK EXT parameter included in the most recent FUNC command lt dnpd gt The lt dnpd gt is a number which sets the required output voltage amplitude expressed in units of DC or pk pk AC Volts It will automatically choose the best hardware range for the defined voltage output The 9500B will accept signed or unsigned positive values for DC Voltage Only DC may be given a negative lt dnpd gt The voltage command will not cancel the ground mode if it is active Response to Query Version The instrument will return the present DC or AC voltage output value dependent upon the DC or SQU EDGE MARK SIN OPUL TEL LEAK EXT parameter implicit or included in the most recent FUNC command The returned number will be in standard scientific format for example 20mV DC would be returned as 2 0E 2 positive numbers however are unsigned If the function is not selected the query VOLT will return the invalid number 2E35 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 13 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm
113. manual The side edges of the top cover are located in slots in both side extrusions and secured to the rear panel by two screws A solid plastic block protects each of the rear corners To access the filter element remove the top cover as follows 1 Release the four screws securing the two rear corner blocks and remove the blocks 2 Release the two screws securing the top cover to the rear panel 3 Pull the top cover to the rear to clear the front bezel then lift off to the rear 8 2 2 2 Top Guard Shield and Calibration Seal IMPORTANT 1 With the cover removed a Calibration seal can be seen covering a countersunk screwhead on the front of the top guard shield The seal is set in position following a calibration of the instrument so that removal of the guard shield can be detected The calibration seal must NOT be broken unless the guard shield is to be removed for Authorized work inside the chassis assembly 2 Removal of the guard shield will compromise the traceable calibration of the instrument anda full recalibration of the 9500B will be required If removal of the guard shield is authorized take care to heedthe SAFETY WARNING printed on it next to the N 8 2 2 3 Removing the Filter Element The filter is removed as follows Carefully lever out the center pin of each of the four black nylon snap rivets and pull out the snap latches Lift off the filter element 8 2 2 4 Cleaning the Filter
114. message The query SYSTem ERRor can be used to read errors in the queue until it is empty when the message 0 No Error will be returned Section 6 9500B System Operation Retrieval of Device Status Information 6 5 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 5 4 9500B Status Reporting SCPI Elements 6 5 4 1 General In addition to IEEE 488 2 status reporting the 9500B implements the Operation and Questionable Status registers with associated Condition Event and Enable commands The extra status deals with current operation of the instrument and the quality of operations The structure of these two registers is detailed in Fig 6 2 together with the nature of the reported events Access to the registers is detailed in the STATus subsystem of Sub Section 6 6 of this handbook 6 5 4 2 SCPI Status Registers The SCPI states are divided into two groups reporting from the Operation or Questionable Status event register Each Status register has its own Enable register which can be used as a mask to enable bits in the event register itself in a similar way to that set by the ESE command for the Standard Event status Register ESR Each Status Register is associated with its own third Condition register not illustrated in Fig 6 2 in which the bits are not sticky but are set and reset as the internal conditions change Each Enable Register can be commanded to set its mask to enable
115. mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen Edge function can be accessed by pressing the function key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel Whenever the Edge menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default settings _Foons OF Fftmtcer none w D20 V div x5 1 0 Voe Deviation 90 00 A 8 O P Amplitude 1 0000 vew ES Frequency 1 0000 MHz Rise Time TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL ER es Ma The above default screen has auto selected a frequency of 1MHz arise time of 500ps zero deviation and an output level of 1 Vpk pk 4 7 3 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 4 7 3 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 7 3 2 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Keys operate on the value marked by the cursor The key labels will change depending on the cursor position as indicated i Cursor on Units div X10 Multiplies the Units div by ten 10 Divides the Units div by ten A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero FEA Press to select falling edge Function icon follows Press to select rising edge Function icon follows
116. must be included if the device is to claim conformance with the Standard The 9500B employs these bits as defined in the Standard Bits 0 1 2 and 3 and 7 are available to the device designer only bits 3 and 7 are used in the 9500B and these are as defined by the SCPI standard It must be recognized by the application programmer that whenever the application program reads the Status Byte it can only receive summaries of types of events and further query messages will be needed to probe the details relating to the events themselves For example a further byte is used to expand on the summary at bit 5 of the Status Byte 6 5 3 3 Status Byte Register In this structure the Status Byte is held in the Status Byte Register the bits being allocated as follows Bits 0 DIO1 1 DIO2 and 2 DIO3 are not used in the 9500B status byte They are always false Bit3 DIO4 SCPI defined Questionable Status Summary Bit QSS Bit 3 summarizes the state of the Questionable Status data held in the Questionable Status register QSR whose bits represent SCPI defined and device dependent conditions in the 9500B The QSS bit is true when the data in the QSR contains one or more enabled bits which are true or false when all the enabled bits in the byte are false The QSR and its data are defined by the SCPI Standard they are described in Sub Section 6 5 4 Bit 4 DIO5 IEEE 488 2 defined Message Available Bit M
117. of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 14 Input Leakage Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected open short circuit state 6 6 12 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 5 23 SOUR PAR LEAK TRIG lt cpd gt SING CONT Purpose This command selects the type of triggers associated with the leakage function Triggers are only produced if the output is on A settings conflict will be reported if the LEAKage function has not been selected lt cpd gt SINGle Generates one trigger coincident with each change of state of the open or close CONTinuous Selects a free running 100 Hz trigger signal For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 14 Input Leakage Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected trigger type 6 6 5 24 SOUR PAR EXT Purpose This command selects the AUX INPUT signal for routing to any of the five channels The required channel is selected using the ROUTe sub system Refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 15 5 Aux Input Function 6 6 5 25 SOUR SCOPe UUT _Z lt dnpd gt Purpose This command is for backwards compatibility with the 9100 250 and selects the impedance matching for the signal and trigger channels lt dnpd gt lt 55
118. on the right of the screen Ensure that the required channels are selected and ifnecessary have been Precision Aligned 4 14 5 4 Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope Input delay measurement points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide Follow the sequence of test stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 5 at each stage 1 UUT Scope a Select the correct signal test channels b Select trigger for the test from the correct channel c Select the correct Y sensitivity range d Select the correct timebase speed for the test e If required adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display 2 9500B Set Output ON 3 UUT Scope a Adjust each channel Y position control to superimpose the waveforms equally disposed across the X axis b Use the UUT oscilloscope controls to measure the relative delays on each channel at half amplitude 4 UUT Response Record the UUT input channels relative delays as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide 5 9500B Set Output OFF Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Zero Skew Function 4 14 3 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 4 15 Auxiliary Input 4 15 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B to generate variable width pulses for the testing trigger timing circuit
119. output frequency of the selected operation expressed in units of Hertz It will automatically choose the best hardware range for the defined frequency of output Response to Query Version The instrument will return the present output frequency value for the selected operation dependent upon the parameter implicit or included in the most recent FUNC command and the most recent VOLT or CURR command The returned number will be in standard scientific format 20kHz would be returned as 2 0E4 6 6 5 29 SOUR PER CWIFIX 2 lt dnpd gt SOUR SPER CW FIX 2 lt dnpd gt Note The SPERiod command is used for backward compatibility with Option 250 in the 9100 In the 9100 the SPER command was available only in Edge and Timing Markers functions but in the 9500B the PER command is available in all applicable functions Purpose This command is used to set the period of the currently selected waveform The CW and FIXed optional parameters are included to stay with the SCPI definition of the period command The command is valid only for AC waveshapes lt dnpd gt The lt dnpd gt is a number which sets the required output period of the selected operation expressed in units of Seconds It will automatically choose the best hardware range for the defined period of output Response to Query Version The instrument will return the present output period value for the selected operation dependent upon the parameter implicit or in
120. period it will appear with the following default settings T C 10 Default Alignment Skew lt 50 ps O P Amplitude 1 0000 Vok Frequency 1 0000 kHz im TODAY S DATE TIME ADJUST DSgN0in CHANNEL KRA 7 ALIGN ALIGN SELECT RJA The above default screen has auto selected Default Alignment as indicated by the top line of text and the highlighted screen key on the bottom row The unequallized default alignment has a maximum skew of 50ps between channels The amplitude and default frequency are also shown on the screen The selected output channels are listed in the central box at the top of the screen 4 14 3 Menu Selections 4 14 3 1 Signal Channel Selection Signal Channel selection differs from other functions in that all channels fitted with an active head will be selected on entering the function In the unit used for this description channels 1 2 and 3 had heads attached nothing was fitted to channel 4 and a trigger cable was fitted to channel 5 The required channels can be selected on a second menu screen This is activated by pressing the CHANNEL SELECT screen key on the bottom row The screen changes to show the available channels which are already selected E OFF ACTIVE CHANNELS cut CHS 1 2 3 502 CHANNEL 1 gt Standard Head SENA CHANNEL 2 gt Standard Head el CHANNEL 3 gt Standard Head SIGNAL CHAN
121. pre defined factor steps These forms of editing are also described in greater detail with illustrations in Section 4 sub section 4 4 Expected Load impedances Multiplies Selected x10 Value by 10 p Divides Selected na Value by 10 A Toggles Deviation between zero and previously set value Ta These three soft key labels not used with the DC Square Default Screen FORM WAVE CHANNEL Siig rh SELECT y 1 9 screen Uses of all the right side soft key labels are dependent on the field Screen O P On Soft key label Accesses Toggle Accesses not used with Waveform Applies Channel to Select lt DC Square Menu Ground Selection Default Condition Menu Direct Entry All bottom soft key labels Key Toggles Effects selected on the main part of the screen Scope or Mode may be employed for alternative or additional selections Fig 3 2 1 Manual Mode Startup Default Settings Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 3 3 Preferences 3 3 1 Pref Selection The Pref key is highlighted in Fig 3 3 1 below Fig 3 3 1 Pref Key 3 3 1 1 Pref Overview The Pref key sets up a special display which offers adjustment of four parameters shown in Fig 3 3 2 This menu can be exited only by pressing EXIT or re
122. pressing the Pref key Preferences Contrast 10 Amplitude step 1 2 5 Time step l 25 Deviation Display Deviation TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Fig 3 3 2 Pref Parameters The Preference screen can be displayed in all modes and functions without disturbing the function setup except that under certain conditions with OUTPUT ON the output will be turned off Preference selections are non volatile Once a parameter has been set up as required it will be remembered by the 9500B through changes of mode and function also being restored after Power down Power up 3 3 1 2 Changing the Parameters The mechanism for adjusting parameters is known as Digit Edit A Cursor of horizontal lines enclosing screen characters indicate the parameter selected for adjustment This can be moved from one parameter to another using the i Tab key Once the cursor has been moved to the required parameter the adjustment is carried out using either the spinwheel or the A Up Q Down cursor keys The Left and Right cursor keys have no effect 3 3 1 3 Screen Contrast The front panel screen is viewable from a wide range of vertical and horizontal angles For best contrast at a fixed angular sight line in the vertical plane the Contrast parameter on the screen can set the sight line to one of twenty seven different angles represented by the numbers 1 27 The range from numbers 10 12 will provide good con
123. rear panel providing an internal passive relay switched route for a user s external calibration signal via any one of five output channels to an Active Head s BNC or PC3 5 connector Internal controls are provided via front panel keys or via the IEEE 488 SCPI interface to switch the signal between channels For further details see Section 4 para 4 15 5 and Section 6 para 6 6 5 17 2 8 5 Ref Frequency Input Rear Panel REF FREQUENCY INPUT lt 5Vpk 509 This BNC connector is located at the middle center of the rear panel providing an input for a signal of good frequency accuracy for use as a frequency reference in the 9500B Internal controls are provided via front panel keys in Configuration mode to select the signal as reference For further details see Section 3 para 3 4 3 10 2 8 6 Ref Frequency Output Rear Panel REF FREQUENCY OUTPUT 1V pk pk nom into 509 This BNC connector is located at the lower center of the rear panel providing an output reference signal of the same frequency accuracy as the 9500B Internal controls are provided via front panel keys in Configuration mode to select the signal as reference For further details see Section 3 para 3 4 3 11 2 9 Care of Microwave Connectors Itis necessary to observe certain basic precautions when using microwave connectors in order to achieve accurate and repeatable calibration and measurement results This will also help to extend conn
124. refer to subjects later in this section Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Function Selection 4 3 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm PAGE LEFT BLANK 4 3 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Function Selection Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 4 Edit Facilities 4 4 1 Introduction 4 4 1 1 Subject Contents Sub section 4 4 is divided into the following paragraphs 4 4 1 Introduction 4 4 1 1 Subject Contents 4 4 1 2 Methods of Adjustment 441 3 Adjustment Modes 441 4 Use of the Tab Key 4 4 1 5 Scope Mode is the Default 4 4 2 Direct Mode uu 4 4 1 4 4 2 1 Introduction 4 4 1 4 4 2 2 Cursor Control 4 4 1 4 4 2 3 Direct Mode Digit Edit 44 2 4 Direct Mode Numeric Entry 4 4 2 44 2 5 Return to Scope Mode 4 4 3 Scope Mode 4 4 3 1 Introdu 4 4 3 2 Cursor Controls 4 4 3 3 Use of Sequence Scroll 0 0 0 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 Methods of Adjustment Before looking at displays for the functions we need to know how to alter the values displayed on the screen There are three main methods used to change values e DigitEdit in which values can be scrolled digit by digit using a triangular cursor and associated controls e Sequence Scroll in which values can only be changed by scrolling through a sequence of values using a barred cursor and associated controls One of
125. required for 25ps edge 5030 Crystal DAC chrsn corrupt Using default 038 9550 head can only be used for 25ps edge 5031 Square TMk chrsn failed setting defaults 039 At least one signal channel must always be selected S0327 Rat ed to Nave Square TMk enren failed 040 CH1 Load lt 50k 352 detected output off to avoid damage 5033 Square TMk chrsn unchrs d Using default 041 CH2 Load lt 50k 352 detected output off to avoid damage 2034 Square ue chrsn COLEURE Using default 042 CH3 Load lt 50k 352 detected output off to avoid damage 5035 Pulse Width Failed to characterise 043 CH4 Load lt 50k 352 detected output off to avoid damage 5036 Pulse width uncharacterised Using default 044 CH5 Load lt 50k 352 detected output off to avoid damage 045 CH1 Load mismatch detected UUT lt 50k 352 046 CH2 Load mismatch detected UUT lt 50k 352 047 CH3 Load mismatch detected UUT lt 50k 352 048 CH4 Load mismatch detected UUT lt 50k 352 ALWAYS record the total message content for possible use by the Service Center 8 A4 Appendix A to Section 8 9500B Maintenance Error Reporting Subsystem Calibration 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4051 4052 4053 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209
126. screen key EXIT returns to the previous Select required test menu screen The six available checks are detailed in list order in the following paragraphs 8 3 4 2 Display Memory Checks Pressing the DISPLAY MEMORY key on the Select test menu screen transfers to the Memory test screen and the sequence of tests begins The test in progress is reported on the screen DISPLAY Selftest er J KEYBRD Select test using softkeys 1m DISPLAY MEMORY CARD TRACKER PRINTER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Memory test Performing READ WRITE test 1 TODAY S DATE TIME The other tests reported are Performing WALKING ONES test 1 Performing READ WRITE test 2 Performing WALKING ONES test 2 8 6 Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test The result of the whole Memory testis reported once testing is complete Memory test Display memory PASSED TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Memory test Display memory FAILED TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT J Ifa failure is reported rectification will require access to the internal circuitry so no further user action is recommended except to report the result to your Fluke Service Center EXIT returns to the Interface Select test menu screen 8 3 4 3 Keyboard Checks Keyboard checks are initiated by pressing the KEYBOARD key on the Select test menu screen DISPLAY Selftest a j KEYBRD Se
127. selected bits in the corresponding Event Register All registers Event Enable and Condition can be interrogated by appropriate Queries to divulge their bits states 6 5 4 3 Reportable SCPI States Operation Status Event Register The following sticky bits are set by their associated conditions bit0 CALIBRATING the instrument is performing a VCO characterize a DAC characterize or a DC Square characterize bit4 MEASURING the instrument is performing a measurement cycle for capacitance or resistance bit 8 TESTING the instrument is running a self test Questionable Status Event Register The following sticky bits are set by their associated conditions bit 11 CAPACITANCE The measurement of capacitance is questionable bit 12 RESISTANCE The measurement of resistance is questionable 6 5 6 Section 6 9500B System Operation Retrieval of Device Status Information 6 6 9500B SCPI Language Commands and Syntax The command subsystems are placed in alphabetical order 6 6 1 Introduction This Sub Section lists and describes the set of SCPI compatible remote commands used to operate the 9500B To provide familiar formatting for users who have previously used the SCPI reference documentation the command descriptions are dealt within a similar manner In particular each sub system s documentation starts with a short description followed by a table showing the complete set of commands in the sub system
128. than 3 metres Power Input amp Fuse Requirements To avoid fire hazard use only the fuse arrangements that appear in the fuse specification table below Additionally the supply network must be fused at a maximum of 16A and in the UK a 10A fuse must be fitted in the power cable plug See Section 2 7 for details of setting line input voltage and changing the line input fuse Power Input Fuse Supply Line Fuse Action Fuse Rating Fluke Voltage Selection 115 VAC Installation Category l Measurement and or guard terminals are designed for connection at Installation Overvoltage Category I To avoid electric shock or fire hazard the instrument terminals must not be directly connected to the AC line power supply or to any other voltage or current source that may even temporarily exceed the instrument s peak ratings WARNING TOAVOIDINJURY OR DEATH DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT SIGNAL LEADS WHILE THEY ARE CONNECTED TO A HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SOURCE MAKE SURE THAT ALL LEADS ARE IN A SAFE CONDITION BEFORE YOU HANDLE THEM IN ANY WAY Make sure that the instrument is correctly protectively earthed safety grounded via the power cable before and while any other connection is made Manufacturer IEC Part No amp Type No 920274 Littlefuse 215010 230 VAC 920273 Littlefuse 215005 0 10 Model 9500B User s Handbook Safety Section Maintenance and Repair Observe all applicab
129. that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 9500B a Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode and then select the Load Resistance Measurement function From entry default press the Aux key on the right of the Front Panel then the Q soft key at the bottom left of the screen b In the Q Menu select the required output Signal Channel via the Channel Selection screen Verfication Procedure and table overleaf Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 15 Final Width 215mm Standards DMM Guar Q Guard D Final Width 215mm ajdhjs EE _ Active Head WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 9 8 5 1 Load Resistance Measurement Function Verification 1MQ Ref Interconnections 9 16 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 8 5 5 Verification Procedure Copy the table 9 8 5 7 Follow the correct sequence of verification points as shown on the table and carry out the following operations 1 to 10 at each verification point 1 Verification Points Refer to Table 9 8 5 1 2 9500B Ensure that OUTPUT is OFF 3 Ifusing the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor a Ensure that the Active Head output BNC is disconnected from the Model 4955 input b Set the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor switch as shown in Table 9 8 5 1 4 Ifnotusing the Model 4955 set up external circuitry to measure the
130. the ranges 100 120 220 240V 48 63Hz To accommodate these ranges a small voltage selector block is housed behind the POWER FUSE drawer 2 7 5 1 A Ensure that the POWER CABLE is removed Selection of Operating Line Voltage 1 Insert a small screwdriver blade in the narrow recess beneath the catch under the fuse drawer lever gently downwards until the catch releases Pull the drawer out to reveal the grey voltage selector block 2 Hook a small finger into the block in the square recess in its base pull to disengage its contacts and remove from the module cavity 3 Rotate the voltage selector board until the desired voltage faces outward 4 Ensure thatthe block is upright Re insert the block firmly into its cavity in the module 5 Check the fuse ifrequired see paras 2 7 4 then insert the fuse drawer into the module and press until the catch is heard to click into place 6 Check that the desired voltage is visible in the cutout in the fuse drawer 2 8 2 8 1 Connectors and Pin Designations IEEE 488 Input Output Rear Panel This 24 way input output connector on the rear panel which is labelled IEEE 488 is directly compatible with the IEEE 488 and IEC 625 Interface Bus standards Pin Layout 12 1 easel 24 Pin Designations 13 Description ot ready Attention Data Inpu Data Inpu Data Inpu Data Inpu Data Input Output Line 1 Data Input Output Line 2 Data Input
131. the Target Amplitude value Now use any editing mode to change this value note that the new value must lie within the Max and Min limits specified in Table 10 5 3 1 b Press the SAVE TARGET soft key 10 11 12 13 14 If using the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor set its switch to DCV o c Otherwise ensure that the DMM input is at high impedance Set the Standards DMM to the appropriate measurement range Press the ON key to turn the 9500B output on Press the TAB key to return the cursor to the 9500B O P Amplitude display and increment or decrement this value using the cursor controls and or spinwheel until the reading on the Standards DMM is the same as the displayed Target Amplitude value Note make sure to allow for any settling time required by the external measuring instrument When you are satisfied with the measurement press the ACCEPT CALIB key to generate and implement the correction factor required by the 9500B to ensure that its displayed O P Amplitude value and measured output value coincide The O P Amplitude value will change to the Target Amplitude value and the adjustment of the output amplitude at this target is complete Press the EXIT key to turn the 9500B output off and return to the Target Selection screen Repeat steps 3 to 11 for each of the target values displayed in the Target Selection screen Repeat steps 2 to 12 for each of the Cal Ranges detailed in the Table 10 5
132. the correct time base speed for the cal point c Select the correct amplitude range for the cal point 3 9500B Set Output ON 4 UUT Scope a Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stated display b Observe and note the accuracy of marker alignment indicating any misadjustment in the UUT s time base speed or linearity 5 Calibration a Use the 9500B Deviation control to slew the 9500B Output period frequency until the UUT s alignment is appropriate to the 9500B settings as detailed in the UUT Scope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b Record the 9500B screen output voltage and period frequency as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 4 8 4 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Time Markers Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 9 Auxiliary Functions 4 9 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to selecting the Auxiliary Functions Eight functions are available 4 9 2 Selection of Auxiliary Functions 4 9 2 1 Aux Key Auxiliary functions are accessed by pressing the Aux key at the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel 4 9 2 2 Default Settings At power on the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen Each time the Aux key is pressed the system defaults to show the Auxiliary menu screen r LA AE Auxiliary Ee A A Functions TODAY
133. the message changes to WARNING Instrument past cal due date Setting the Advance Warning Period On the CAL DUE DATE screen the present setting of the advance warning period is shown highlighted against one of the right screen keys This period is altered by pressing the appropriate right screen key Final Exit from Calibration Mode When satisfied that the CAL DUE DATE and advance warning period are correct press the EXIT screen key to terminate calibration and return to the Mode Selection screen The stored Cal Date and Cal Due Date will appear on any directly printed certificate for this calibration 10 4 6 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Standard Calibration Basic Sequences 10 5 10 5 1 Front Panel Base Calibration by Functions Introduction Sub section 10 5 is a guide to the process of calibrating the Model 9500B s functions from the front panel The following topics are covered 10 5 2 10 5 3 10 5 4 10 5 5 10 5 6 Other Functions Summary of Calibration Process 10 5 2 1 General Procedure 10 5 2 2 Sequencing Calibrations DC Square DC Voltage Calibration DC Square Square Voltage Calibration LF Sine Calibration Load Resistance Measurement Calibration No calibration is required for the following functions as they are either calibrated for life at manufacture or calibrated automatically as a result of calibrating the functions listed above as shown in the table HF Sine fl
134. the presently programmed date as three slash separated two digit numbers in the date format that they are currently set 6 6 18 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 8 4 SYST TIME lt spd gt Purpose This command changes the present time as recorded by the 9500B software Any new time will be updated from a non volatile real time internal 24 hour clock lt spd gt This string defines the present time consisting of two 2 digit numbers separated by ahyphen The numbers represent hour and minute in that order Their order within the string must reflect the fixed sequence The string must conform to the scheme X Y where X and Y are 2 digit numbers The combination of the 2 digit numbers must have the following meaning within the context of a 24 hour clock Hour Minute Response to Query Version SYST TIME The Query will return the updated time at the moment the query was accepted as two hyphen separated 2 digit numbers in the fixed time format 6 6 8 5 SYST SVOL 2 lt dnpd gt Purpose This command sets the voltage value of the threshold of operation for the High Voltage Warning as employed in DC Voltage and AC Voltage functions The 9500B need not be currently set in either of these functions to program the voltage lt dnpd gt The decimal numeric program data is anumber which sets the required voltage safety warning threshold expressed in units of DC or
135. the set value of 20mV This could have been avoided by typing 2 then pressing the mV screen key to obtain the correct result Fig 4 4 10 necessary For example 0 P Amplitude FORM TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL Lesa TE Amplitude 222 40 Voen 10 Deviation JG 20 A 0 222 40 Vok vk Frequency 1 0000 kHz SELECT 1x x 2 Soe af Fig 4 4 11 Direct Mode Starting Point In Fig 4 4 11 the maximum O P Amplitude has been set using Direct mode as shown An error message will result for any attempt to increase the Amplitude value or any positive Deviation percentage If the bottom right screen key Editing Mode key is pressed to return to Scope mode the two contributors Units Div and Deviation will be adjusted to the achieve the same O P Amplitude as shown in Fig 4 4 12 10 500 Vidiv x4 200 00 Vow Deviation 1120 4 9 O P Amplitude 222 40 Vien Frequency 1 0800 kHz to TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL G 7 Form 77 sevect R 12 Fig 4 4 12 Transfer to Scope Mode For simplicity the remainder of Manual mode is described in this handbook in terms of Scope mode Digit Edit continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edit Facilities 4 4 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm
136. the state of the IEEE 488 1 interface Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable 6 0 14 Service Request Enable This Status Byte data structure conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements for this structure a o SRE enables the standard and user defined summary bits in the service request byte which will generate a service request Refer to Section 6 Subsection 6 5 Nrf is a Decimal Numeric Data Element representing an integer decimal value equivalent to the Hex value required to enable the appropriate bits in this 8 bit register The detail definition is contained in the IEEE488 2 document Note that numbers will be rounded to an integer Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C11 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 0 15 Recall Service Request Enable This Status Byte data structure conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements for this structure SRE SRE recalls the enable mask for the standard defined events Refer to Section 6 Subsection 6 5 Response Decode The value returned when converted to base 2 binary identifies the enabled bits which will generate a service request The detail is contained in the IEEE 488 2 standard document Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions
137. the words Any Head will appear in place of the head number If the procedure card was produced for use with the Model 9100 Option 250 or 600 then no channels will have been nominated in the procedure In this case the 9500B will choose the channel which was most recently used and it will be this which appears on the screen Pressing OK will cause the 9500B to pass on to the next operation in sequence only after the appropriate heads have been connected to the selected channels Otherwise the operator can choose ABORT which will return to the previous start point 5 3 3 11 END When all stages of the procedure have been completed the system will end the procedure also generating a special END message which overwrites the currently displayed screen The procedure has ended Please select one of the softkeys below TODAY S DATE TIME USER MODEL SERIAL PROC RETRY For the choices obtained from the five screen keys refer to paras 5 3 3 12 Final Width 215mm continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Access Guide 5 3 5 Final Width 215mm 5 3 3 12 User Options Following ABORT or END Once the procedure has ended or been aborted the user can return to one of five points in the sequence The point numbers refer to Fig FIA USER Point 1 The Select USER NAME screen is the first to appear after selecting Procedure mode All setu
138. this case Signal Channel 3 pree CH3 509 SIGNA TRIGGER NONE CHANNEL 1 gt 150ps Head SIGNAL CHANNEL 2 gt 150ps Head CH2 CHANNEL 3 gt Standard Head SIGNAL CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head SIGNAL O P Amplitude 30 000 mVook cH Frequency 50 000 kHz Giat DUAL TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL TRIGGER D sii see ma Now press the DUAL CHANNEL soft key and the Dual Channel screen icon will appear IAS OFF DUAL _CH3 __50Q SONA aT TRIGGER NONE CHANNEL 1 gt 150ps Head SoA CHANNEL 2 gt 150ps Head H2 CHANNEL 3 gt Standard Head SIGNAL CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head SIGNAL O P Amplitude 30 000 mVorrk cra Frequency 50 000 kHz SIGNAL DUAL CHANNEL TODAY S DATE TIME TRIGGER KOAD EXIT CHANNEL DY M2 Next select the Slave channel in this case Signal Channel 2 OFF DUAL CH3 2 58Q AGE TRIGGER NONE CHANNEL 1 gt 150ps Head SIGNAL CHANNEL 150ps Head CH2 J 2 gt CHANNEL 3 gt Standard Head SIGNAL CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head SIGNAL O P Amplitude 30 000 mV cua Frequency 50 000 kHz SIGNAL DUAL CHANNEL TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT TRIGGER AD CHANNEL ew MO Both channel key labels and the Dual channel label are highlighted and the legend in the box at the t
139. to increase or decrease the digit s value The C lt and gt keys move the cursor along the number to select the digit to be scrolled Except for Deviation where the resolution cannot be changed movement of the cursor off the end of the number will cause the resolution to change to accommodate an extra digit until no further resolution change is possible The two shift keys A or MM can be used as a short cut to change the number s resolution Pressing either of the shiftkeys beforea lt or _ gt _ key will effect the change even if the digit may not be at the end of the number The cursor will remain with its selected digit Note that after pressing a shift key its image appears and remains on the bottom right of the screen until the lt Jor gt keyis pressed for Deviation the resolution cannot be changed so use of a shift key is ineffective 4 4 2 4 Direct Mode Numeric Entry Introduction Numeric Entry is not a default state Digit Edit will always be forced at power on and when changing modes and functions Each method has its own advantages which will become apparent with experience of using the front panel controls Numeric Entry facility employs the numeric keypad to enter whole values where this is more convenient than operating on individual digits in Digit Edit facility Cursor Control The tab key is used to pass the cursor from one parameter to another but the K N Q lt C gt keys a
140. to display the Mode Selection screen 5 Press the CALIB screen key to display the Password Entry for Calibration screen 6 Enter the correct password and press the key to display the Calibration Mode screen 7 Press the Special screen key to display the Special Calibration screen IMPORTANT NOTE The Characterise operations 8 12 below should be performed once only immediately before performing Standard Calibration of the 9500B It is not necessary to repeat them before calibrating each individual function of the 9500B 8 Press the Chse DAC screen key to initiate the Characterise DAC operations and wait until these automatic internal adjustments have been successfully completed 9 Press the Chse VCO screen key to initiate the Characterise VCO operations and wait until these automatic internal adjustments have been successfully completed 10 Press the Chse SQU TRI TMK screen key to initiate the Characterise Timing Marker operations and wait until these automatic internal adjustments have been successfully completed 11 Press the Chse LF SIN DC OSS screen key to initiate the Characterise LF Sine DC Offset operations and wait until these automatic internal adjustments have been successfully completed 12 Press the Chse PULSE WIDTH screen key to initiate the Characterise Pulse Width operations and wait until these automatic internal adjustments have been successfully completed 13 Press the EXIT soft key to display the Ca
141. to measure edge response Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 150ps Edge GAIN mode Set 9500B s output ON selecting TARGET 1 from table 10 6 3 5 Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the oscilloscope Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 5 by pressing NEXT TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 3 5 LS Function 150ps Edge Gain Cal Point Voltage Frequency Target 1 2 5000V 100kHz Target 2 839 39mV 100kHz Target 3 263 74mV 100kHz Target 4 263 74mV 100kHz 1 nw ad 0 6 3 9 Calibration Procedure 150ps Edge Speed Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 150ps Edge SPEED mode Set 9500B s output ON selecting TARGET 1 from table 10 6 3 6 Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading Note the rise or fall time of the edge and enter it into the Edge Speed Field on the 9500B Make sure allowance is made for the rise time of the oscilloscope Edge Rise Time Measured Rise Time Scope Rise Time Pre
142. to verify HF flatness above 1MHz and so a commonly used technique employs an RF Power Meter Flatness is normally expressed as a voltage relative to that at a reference frequency of 50kHz and in our procedure Tables 9 9 2 1 9 9 2 2 9 9 2 3 and 9 9 2 4 are used to register the values at this reference frequency For the flatness verification each output voltage is measured as power into 50Q in an RF Power Meter and converting power to pk to pk voltage using a formula given in the procedure This voltage is compared against the power meter reading at 50kHz by checking that it is within validity tolerance limits about the 50kHz value To calculate the validity tolerance limits at each verification point we must take into account the Total Measurement Uncertainty and the specified 9500B flatness with respect to 50kHz These are combined using an RSS calculation 2 Example Calculation of Validity Tolerance at 10MHz e From the Power Meter Specification let us say that its Total Measurement Uncertainty Power at 1 OMHz including the Sensor uncertainty is 1 4 e But this is a power uncertainty and the pk pk voltage uncertainty will be half 0 7 e With this we must combine by RSS Method the 9500B pk pk voltage flatness specification At 1OMHz the 9500B specification relative to 50kHz is 1 5 Validity Tolerance V 0 007 015 2 0 01655 1 655 e We must now multiply this by the Reference value at 50kHz and o
143. two common sequences can be selected using the Pref facility e Numeric Entry Edit where a complete new value is written in place of the existing selected value using the triangular cursor and the numeric keypad 4 4 1 3 Adjustment Modes In addition to the three methods there are two modes selected by the right most soft key on the bottom row beneath the screen which toggles between Scope mode 1 2 and Direct mode te 4 These are not major modes of the same magnitude as Manual mode but identify specific means of making selections or entering changes on the screen 1 Scope Mode which relates to the way that oscilloscopes are ranged in sequences Scope mode mainly uses Sequence Scroll but also includes limited use of Digit Edit and Numeric Entry Edit This is indicated by the bottom right corner key label 1 8 OFF SIGNAL CHI 500 x10 TRIGGER NONE 10 mV div x4 20 000 mV Deviation 20 00 AB O P Amplitude 20 000 m prox Frequency 1 0000 kHz io 5i iss TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL Z ronm 77 seLect E 2 2 Fig 4 4 1 Typical Screen in Scope Mode 2 Direct Mode which permits access to all contributing parameters using only Digit Edit and Numeric Entry Edit indicated by the bottom right corner key label lt 2 hb i Amplitude 20 000 m o Deviation 0 00 48 O P Amplitude 20 800 mV Frequency 1 0000 kHz
144. which it becomes significant may vary as UUT input attenuators are selected V div adjustment and are highly dependent upon UUT design and construction Errors due to signal path length may be reduced slightly by using a BNC 50W thru termination between the 9500 output and the UUT input Again effectiveness will be limited by remaining path length and capacitance within the UUT In all cases frequencies above 5 00MHz are not recommended for use into UUT input Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Sine Function 4 6 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 6 5 Dual Channel Operation 4 6 5 1 Dual Channel Selection Two channels heads activated For certain oscilloscope test and calibration procedures suchas channel trigger sensitivity and X Y test it is necessary to provide the oscilloscope with two identical sinewave signals Dual Channel Sine function allows the 9500B and UUT oscilloscope to remain connected without the need to insert physical cable couplers This is particularly useful during automated calibration and test N B For this function two heads must be connected and activated When two channels are used it is necessary to choose one of the channels as Master and one as Slave The Master channel controls the feedback whereas the Slave repeats the signal To select two channels press the CHANNEL SELECT soft key to select the Master channel in
145. x4 20 000 mV CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps 10 CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps a 108 CHANNEL 4 gt No Head na CHANNEL 5 Trigger Cable 0 P Amplitude 20 000 mV Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Pressing first the required ratio then EXIT returns to the trigger selection screen On this screen no indication of the trigger ratio is given Note Beware that a low frequency sub divided in this way could lead to a very long delay before a trigger occurs mo Deviation 00 00 T O P Amplitude 20 000 mVow Frequency 1 0000 kHz Z TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL RR FORM ieee SELECT BEM 15 The WAVEFORM key label is highlighted to indicate that waveform selection is available as is the presently selected waveform icon Pressing one of the waveform keys for example the t key to select a different waveform will return to the previous screen with the icon of the selected waveform showing in the top left corner Or TE ST mvjdiv x4 20 000 mvn Deviation 00 00 A O P Amplitude 20 000 more Frequency 1 0200 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME o gt ESE 4 5 3 8 DC Selection Pressing one of the two DC keys for example the ___ DC Negative key will return to the previous screen with the DC Negative icon showing in the top left corn
146. x4 20 000 mVoen 7 Deviation 90 00 A 4 O P Amplitude 20 000 mor Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL REN FORM 7 SELECT 1g Fig 4 3 3 2 Manual Mode Power Up Screen Multi Channel 4 3 3 3 OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR Panel Right Side Function Keys This panel carries the main controls used to select the operational functions and modes of the calibrator Manual and Calibration Mode Function keys are arranged down the right edge DC Square function Select Square with direction or DCV using screen keys Select output channel amplitudes and frequency using screen keys and cursor controls Levelled Sinewave function Select output channel amplitude and frequency using screen keys and cursor controls Edge Select polarity amplitude and frequency using screen keys Timing Markers Select Waveform Amplitude and Frequency Period using screen keys F T Aux Auxiliary Functions Select from e Current e Composite Video e Linear Ramp Overload Pulse e Zero Skew e Auxiliary Input e Load Resistance or Load Capacitance measurement e UUT Input Leakage Test using screen keys e Pulse Width As soon as a right side screen key is pressed other than ML the default menu screen will disappear to be replaced by the default screen of the selected oscilloscope function For further details
147. x4 4 0000 maw Deviation 90 00 A 9 O P Amplitude 4 0000 mAr Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL i 5 FORM SELECT NZA 4 4 10 4 3 DCI Selection Pressing one of the two DC keys for example thef__ DC Negative key will return to the previous screen with the DC Negative icon showing in the top left corner The parameters listed on the screen will be changed to reflect DC instead of Square OFF SIGNAL CHI 582 x18 TRIGGER _ NONE TOO mA div x4 4 0000 mA Deviation 90 00 A O P Amplitude 4 0000 mA 7 TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL 1 rf FORM SELECT ELE a 4 10 4 4 Current Selection Summary DC and Square can be regarded as acombined dual function as each has a similar purpose and switching between the two is accomplished by selection in a common Waveform menu The parametric differences are evident once the appropriate waveform soft key has been pressed Detailed operation follows below paras 4 10 5 Current Operation paras 4 10 6 7 Square Operation paras 4 10 8 9 DCI Operation 4 10 5 Current Operation 4 10 5 1 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Keys operate on the value marked by the cursor The key labels will change depending on the cursor position as indicated Cursor on Units div i X10 Multiplies the Units div by ten 10 Divides
148. 011 Command Description 9500B Emulation 9500B Response CALDATE lt mm gt lt dd gt lt yy gt Sets the calibration date CALDATE Returns calibration date information lt mm gt lt dd gt lt yy gt CHOP ON OFF For amplitude modes only OFF sets output signal level to the DC value ot the amplitude set ON restores normal amplitude frequency output COMP CG DUT AUTO auto Chop between CG5010 output and DUT cc Comparator head to CG5010 output pur Comparator head to DUT CS ON OFF s or Clears Slewed Edge used only in CG5010 calibration CSET urns lt message unit gt for changed settings information to the controller CSET NONE DEC btracts 0 1 from present percent error readout for HIGH or FAST indications adds 0 1 for LOW or SLOW indications DLY ON OFF s delayed trigger for FAST EDGE mode DSP Enable or disable variable display for EDGE or FAST EDGE modes DSPL urns lt message unit gt for present units division and percent error information PCT 0 5 U D 1 0E 0 If VARIABLE is not on then PCT has the value of 0 0 DT ON OFF anges status of DTO DT1 mode of bus allows use of GET EDGE lt NR1 gt s number of edges generated for one slewing cycle ERR urns a code for the error condition ERR lt 9500B error number gt Appendix F to Section 6 9500B System Operation Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and C
149. 0B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required square wave p p current and frequency for the UUT Scope amplitude cal point UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Observe and note the amplitude response Sew oe Calibration If a calibration adjustment is provided adjust the probe s response to be appropriate to the settings on the 9500B screen as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b If no adjustment is provided record the probe s response at the calibration point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF Pm 4 10 4 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Current Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 10 7 5 UUT Current Probe Pulse Response Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required square wave p p current and frequency for the UUT Scope amplitude
150. 1 55 2 80GHz Targets 21 25 2 05GHz Targets 56 60 2 90GHz Targets 26 30 2 20GHz Targets 31 35 2 30GHz Targets 61 65 3 00GHz Targets 66 70 3 10GHz Targets 36 40 2 45GHz Targets 71 75 3 20GHz Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B 3GHz Levelled Sine Function 9530 only 10 6 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 6 2 8 Calibration Procedure 6GHz Levelled Sine Function HF Linearity 9560 only 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Sine 6GHz Sine mode LIN The following process takes you through all TARGETs in table 10 6 2 3 9500B Set Output ON Power Meter Select a range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the measuring device The conversion from power to pk pk voltage is pk pk Voltage V power 20 Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETS remain Table 10 6 2 3 6GHz Levelled Sine Function HF Linearity Cal Point Voltage Frequency Target 1 450 00mV 1 2GHz Target 2 700 00mV 1 2GHz Target 3 1 0000V 1 2GHz Target 4 1 6000V 1 2GHz Target 5 2 4000V 1 2GHz Target 6 3 5000V 1 2GHz Target 7 400 00mV 3 3GHz Target 8 700 00mV 3 3GHz Target 9 1 0000V 3 3GHz Target 10 1 6000V 3 3GHz Target 11 2 0000V 3 3GHz Target 12 2 5000V 3 3GHz 10 6 2 9 Calibration Procedure 6GHz Levelled S
151. 1 2 2 2 Procedure Mode 1 2 2 3 Configuration Mode 1 2 2 4 Calibration Mode 1 2 2 5 Test Mode 1 2 3 System Operation 1 2 3 1 Remote Interface 1 2 3 2 Portocal Il 1 3 Model 9500B Associated Products and Options 1 4 The Model 9500B is a state of the art calibrator offering oscilloscope test and calibration capabilities from a single source providing wide functionality Variant 9500B 1100is described for other variants refer to their specifications in Section 7 The functions listed overleaf are not necessarily available via every model of Active Head BRK KR dow bb wh Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 1 Introducing the Model 9500B 1 1 Final Width 215mm 1 2 1 DC Function Output Voltage Output Voltage Square Function Frequencies Output Voltage Output Voltage Sine Function Functions Contd into 50Q 888uV to 5 56V into IMQ 888UV to 222 4V 10Hz to 100kHz pk pk into 50Q 35 52uV to 5 56V pk pk into IMQ Load 35 52uV to 222 4V Variant 9500B 1100 quoted below see Sect 7 for specifications of other variants Frequencies 100mHz to 550MHz Output Voltage pk pk into 50Q amp 1MQ 4 44mV to 5 56V Frequencies 550MHz to 1 1GHz Output Voltage pk pk into 50Q amp 1M 4 44mV to 3 35V Dual Channel Edge Function Selectable Rising Falling Edge Low Edge 500ps Active Head Model 9510 or 9530 Periods 500ns to 100ms Output Voltage
152. 100 amp 9500B 3200 t and 9500B 3200 tt Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 25 9 9 2 Verifying the Levelled Sine Function Flatness Contd Table 9 9 2 2 Sine FlatnessVerification at 1V p p into 50Q Load Nominal Output Measured Specification User s Total Flatness Validity Tolerance Measured p p Output Frequency p p Voltage Relative to Measurement Limits Voltage for Voltage at 50kHz 50kHz Uncertainty Flatness of Output Um Lower Higher Check Ref 2 1V 50kHz SF13 10MHz SF14 50MHz SF15 100MHz SF16 250MHz SF17 400MHz SF18 550MHz SF19 600MHz SF20t 725MHz Final Width 215mm SF2att 1 5GHz SF23tt SF24tt SF25tt SF6ottt SF61ttt SF62ttt SF63ttt t Additional verification points for 9500B 1100 amp 9500B 3200 t 9500B 3200 only tt and 9500B 3200 with 9560 ttt 9 26 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification Table 9 9 2 3 Sine FlatnessVerification at 300mV p p into 509 Load Nominal Output Measured Specification User s Total Flatness Validity Tolerance Measured p p Output Frequency p p Voltage Relative to Measurement Limits Voltage for Voltage at 50kHz 50kHz Uncertainty Flatness of Output Um Lower Higher Check Ref 3 300mV 50kHz SF26 10MHz SF27 50MHz SF28 400MHz SF29 250MHz SF30 400MHz SF31 550MHz SF32 600MHz SF33t 725MHz SF34t 1GHz Final Width 215mm
153. 2 Frequency Counter 10 3 5 3 Interconnections 10 3 5 4 9500B and Counter Setup 1 Connections Connect the 9500B to the Counter as shown in Para 10 3 5 3 and ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up Any model number head may be used except 9550 2 Counter Select the required function to measure frequency 3 9500B In the Calibration Mode screen press the SPECIAL soft key on the left of the bottom row This transfers to the Special Cal screen shown in Para 10 3 4 1 10 3 5 5 Sequence of Operations AIIM Oee x10 Frequency Adjustment a using 100MHz Timing Markers DAC Factor 1479 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT CHANNEL SELECT 1 9500B In the Special Cal screen press the Adjust FREQ soft key on the bottom row This transfers to the Frequency Adjustment screen 2 Counter Select the correct display time trigger source and level to measure at the calibration point 3 9500B Set Output ON 4 Counter Adjust the trigger level for a stable display and note the measured frequency 5 9500B a Use the cursor keys to increment or decrement the DAC Factor value until the Counter registers a frequency of 100MHz b Set Output OFF c Press the EXIT soft key on the bottom row to return to the Special Cal screen Frequency calibration is now complete 10 3 4 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 3 6 Mainframe Standard Calibration BAS
154. 2V b Record this value in the Measured 19 000V 18 99523V 19 00477V Value column of the copy of the Table 23 000V 22 99423V 23 00577V c Check that the Measured Value is at or between the Absolute Tolerance Limits 60 000V 59 98498v 60 01502V 6 9500B Set Output OFF 50 000V 49 98748V 50 01252V 190 00V 189 9525V 190 0475V 9 4 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification Table 9 8 1 2 DC Square DC Verification into 1MQ Load Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy Output Voltage Absolute Tolerance Limits DCV Lower Higher Measured Value 1 0000mV 0 97475mV 1 02525mV 1 9000mV 1 87453mV 1 92547mV 2 3000mV 2 27443mV 2 32557mV 5 0000mV 4 97375mV 5 02625mV 6 0000mV 5 9735mV 6 0265mV 19 000mV 18 9703mV 19 0297mV 23 000mV 22 9693mV 23 0307mMV 50 000mV 49 9625mV 50 0375mV 60 000mV 59 960mV 60 040mV 190 00mV 189 928mV 190 073mV 230 00mV 229 918mV 230 082mV 500 00mV 499 85mV 500 15mV 600 00mV 599 83mV 600 18mV 1 9000V 1 8995V 1 9005V 2 3000V 2 2994V 2 3006V 5 0000V 4 99873V 5 00127V 6 0000V 5 99848V 6 00152V 19 000V 18 99523V 19 00477V 23 000V 22 99423V 23 00577V 50 000V 49 98748V 50 01252V
155. 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Target 3 500 00mV 1 11GHz Final Width 215mm RF Power Meter Sensor Input E E E al RF Head Assembly Precision N to BNC Adaptor Fig 10 6 4 1 Timing Marker Amplitude Calibration Interconnections Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Timing Marker Amplitude 10 6 13 Final Width 215mm 10 6 5 Load Capacitance Function Calibration 9510 and 9530 only Equipment required two calibrated capacitance standards 6 Enter the calibrated value of the standard capacitor recorded in i calibrated value between 15pF and 25pF ii calibrated value between 85pF and 95pF 7 Press ACCEPT CALIB These values may be recorded in table 10 6 5 1 for use during the 8 Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no calibration and for future reference TARGETs remain table 10 6 5 1 into the 9500B s Target Cap field and press Enter 1 Make connections as shown in figure 10 6 5 1 2 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Other Load Cap Table 10 6 5 1 Load Capacitor Calibration Points 3 The following process takes you through all TARGETs in table 10 6 5 1 4 9500B Set Output ON Cal Point Nominal Cap Value Calibrated Cap Value 5 Connect the appropriate standards capacitors with nominal values Target 1 0 pF as shown in table 10 6 5 1 Target 2 15 pF Target 3 82 pF
156. 4 5 1 Output Frequency Synthesis 10 4 5 2 Changing the Output Frequency of Target Calibration Points Exit from Calibration Cal Date and Cal Due Date 10 4 6 1 Exit Mode Key Warning Screen 10 4 6 2 Exit Only 10 4 6 3 Update the Date Stamp on a Certificate 10 4 6 4 Setting the Cal Due Date and Advance Warning Period Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Standard Calibration Basic Sequences 10 4 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 4 1 Introduction 10 4 1 1 Aim of Calibration The aim of calibrating the Model 9500B Oscilloscope calibrator is to determine the accuracy of its outputs and if necessary adjust them so that they are within specification If this calibration is to be traceable then the 9500B s outputs must be compared with Traceable calibration standards of suitable Test Uncertainty Ratio 10 4 1 2 General Calibration Process As mentioned earlier in Section 10 3 calibrating each of the 9500B s functions can be broken down into three distinct stages as follows 1 Selectthe required hardware configuration by selecting the correct Cal Range 2 Select target values at which this hardware configuration will be calibrated 3 Determine the 9500B s output error at each of these target values and generate a suitable compensating correction factor This sub section 70 4 describes the general process of calibrating the 9500B using front panel controls The following des
157. 4210 4211 4212 Corrupt calibration store using default NVRAM Failed to save configuration Password incorrect Calibration switch not enabled Password incorrect Amplitude outside limits Calibration is password protected Frequency outside limits Invalid calibration function Output must be ON for CAL No more targets available Failed to save sv_tgt factor Failed to save sv_frq factor Failed to save act factor Failed to save tgt factor Failed to save frq factor NVRAM Failed to save R eqV factor Limits R eqv NVRAM Failed to save act R dervd NVRAM Failed to save tgt R dervd NVRAM Failed to save act C ref NVRAM Failed to save tgt C ref NVRAM Failed to save frq C ref NVRAM Failed to save C eqV factor NVRAM Failed to save cjc factor Cap meas no 1st reading Cap meas no 2nd reading Cap meas outside limits Corrupt calibration factors Failed a Corrupt selfcal factor Corrupt res ref factor Corrupt offset DAC factor DAC un characterised using defaults Head calibration store corrupt using default Incompatible head inserted Head data area corrupt Insufficient memory to save head cal factors Could not locate head cal factors using defaults 9560 requires a 16k EEPROM fitted in the head Head read failed Head write faile
158. 45mV 10 6066mV 10 4475mV 10 7657mV 9 22 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 9 9530 9560 9550 9510 Head Verification by Functions conta 9 9 2 Verifying the Levelled Sine Function Flatness 9 9 2 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 9 2 2 and test interconnections at para 9 9 2 3 Para 9 9 2 4 shows the Verification Setup The Verification Procedure is at para 9 9 2 5 A short description of Calculating Validity Tolerances is given at para 9 9 2 6 and the final Uncertainty Calculation and Flatness Check is at para 9 9 2 7 The Levelled Sine Function is verified by carrying out measurements of amplitude at frequencies beween 50kHz and 6 4GHz in the sequences given at para 9 9 2 5 at the verification points shown in Tables 9 9 2 1 9 9 2 2 9 9 2 3 and 9 9 2 4 Note Heads can be verified only within the bandwidth of the mainframe e g Head Model 9510 with Mainframe Variant 9500B 600 can only be verified to 600MHz 9 9 2 2 Equipment Requirements The UUT Active Head connected to a verified Model 9500B Mainframe for Mainframe verification refer to Sub section 9 8 3 RF Power Meter for Power measurements from 50kHz and 6 4GHz and from 100mVp p to 3Vp p into 50Q Examples Marconi Instruments Model 6960B with Model 6912 head up to 1 1GHz or Rhode and Scwarz NRVS with NRV Z5 head beyond 1 1GHz Precision N to BNC Adapter for signal connection from the UUT A
159. 5 is divided into the following sub sections 4 5 1 Introduction 4 5 2 Default Settings 4 5 3 Menu Selections 4 5 3 1 Signal Ch z 4 5 3 2 UUT Triggers 4 5 3 3 Trigger Channel Selection 4 5 3 4 Cable Selection 45 3 5 Trigger Ratio 4 5 3 6 Retained Channel Memory 4 5 3 7 Choosing a Waveshape 45 3 8 DC Selections 4 5 3 9 DC Square Selection Summary 4 5 4 DC Square Operation 0 4 5 4 4 5 4 1 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll cseeecseeeeceeeees 4 5 4 4 5 4 2 Right Side Screen Keys umeric Entry ooo eeeeceeeeesseeeeeeeees 4 5 4 45 4 3 Bottom Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll and Numeric Entry 4 5 4 4 5 5 Square Operation 4 5 4 4 5 5 1 Value Editing 4 5 4 4 5 5 2 Output Voltage Edi vee 4 5 5 4 5 5 3 Low Voltage LV and High Voltage HV States 4 5 5 4 5 6 Using the 9500B Square Function to Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 5 6 4 5 6 1 Introduction 4 4 5 6 2 Interconnections 4 5 6 3 UUT Scope Amplitu using the 9500B as a Fixed Source 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 UUT Scope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source 4 5 7 DC Operation 45 7 1 Polarity 4 5 7 2 Value Editing 4 5 7 3 Output Voltage Editing 4 5 7 4 Low Voltage LV and High Voltage HV States 4 5 8 4 5 7 5 Multi Channel DC Operation 4 5 8 4 5 8 Using the 9500B DC Function to
160. 5mm Standards DMM C Guard Q Guard Oj o x x2 o Ke o Q a Active Head Final Width 215mm WAVETEK _4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 10 6 1 1 LF Sine Voltage Calibration Interconnections 10 6 1 4 Calibration Procedure LF Gain 1 Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL mode then select Sine Lo Table 10 6 1 2 Levelled Sine Function LF Gain Frq Sine function 2 Select TARGET 1 3 Set output ON and wait for DMM reading to settle Cal Point Frequency O P Volts O P Load 4 Ifusing the Model 4955 Calibration Adapter set its switch to SQV Target 1 1kHz 3 0000V 50Q o c according to table 10 6 1 2 If not using the Model 4955 ensure Target 2 1kHz 1 0072V 50Q that the DMM input is AC coupled at 50Q or 1MQ input impedance as shown in table 10 6 1 2 Target 3 ikHz 316 49mV 5 Select the correct RMS Voltage range for the calibration point RMS Target 4 1kHz 316 49mV Output Voltage Target 5 1kHz 3 0000V 6 Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude until the DMM reads the same as the Target Amplitude on the 9500B pk pk Voltage 2 V 2 RMS Voltage 7 Press ACCEPT CALIB 8 Selectnext TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain 10 6 2 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Levelled Sine Function LF Gain 10 6 2 Levelled Sine Function HF Calibration 10 6 2 1 Summary The Levelled Sine Function HF calibrat
161. 6 1 Please note that the DMM reading average DC level should be multiplied by two pk pk level 9500B Select Square waveform with positive bias at 5 0000V pk pk configured to drive 50Q 10 On the 4955 Select SQR 50Q or use an alternative shunt 11 resistor Turn the 9500B Output ON allow the DMM to settle and note the measurement in Table 10 6 6 1 Please note that the DMM reading average DC level should be multiplied by two pk pk level Having made the necessary measurements re enter the Head Calibration mode using the Mode and Cal keys 9500B Select HEAD CAL Other 50Q 1MQ Ratio For Target 1 this screen requires entry of two Measurem nt values for the DC function Target 1 1 and Target 1 2 Repeat this process for Target 2 and the values Target 2 1 and 2 2 Table overleaf gt Fig 10 6 6 1 5002 1MQ Ratio Calibration Interconnections Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B 50Q IMQ Ratio 10 6 15 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 6 6 500 1MQ Ratio Calibration cont Table 10 6 6 1 509 1MQ Ratio Calibration Points Meas Point Target Voltage Waveshape DC Voltage Measurement Target Name Target1 1 5 0000V DC Amp 1MQ Target 1 2 5 0000V DC Target 2 1 5 0000Vpk pk Amp 50Q Amp 1MQ Target 2 2 5 0000Vpk pk Amp 509 10 6 7 Exit from Head Calibration When the necessary calibration operations are complete return to the Calibra
162. 670mV 2 0330mV 4 6500mV 5 3500mV 17 670mV 20 330mV 46 500mV 53 500mV 176 70mV 203 30mV 465 00mV 535 00mV 1 7670V 0330V 4 6500V 3500V 17 670V 0 330V 46 500 176 70V Table 10 5 4 3 DC Square Square Waveform Symmetrical Hardware Configurations and Calibration Targets Target 1 low Target 2 high Function Waveshape 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Default Frequency Target Minimum Maximum Hardware Configuration Span 536 04 pV 2 10mV 2 10mV 5 56mV 5 56mV 21 00mV 21 00mV 55 60mV 55 60mV 210 00mV 210 00mV 556 00mV 556 00mV 2 10V 2 10V 5 56V 5 56V 22 24V 22 24V 55 60V 55 60V 222 40 Default 800 00 2 3000mV 6 0000mV 23 000mV 60 000mV 230 00mV 600 00mV 2 3000V 6 0000V 23 000V 60 000V Maximum 856 00 2 4610mV 6 4200mV 24 61 0mV 64 200mV 246 10mV 642 00mV 2 4610V 6 4200V 24 610V 64 200V Default 000V 190 00V Maximum 2 0330mV 5 3500mV 20 330mV 53 500mV 203 30mV 535 00mV 2 0330V 5 3500V 20 330V 53 500V 203 30V 10 5 12 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square Function Square Waveforms 10 5 5 LF Sine Voltage Calibration 10 5 5 1 Introduction This section is a guide to calibrating the Model 9500B s LF Sine Function using its front panel controls The following topics are covered 10 5 5 2 10 5 5 3 10 5 5 4 10 5 5 5 C
163. 80 19ps to 9 009ns for 9500B 3200 with 9560 Head Ranging Time div ranging 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 or continuously variable Period Deviation Range 45 Rise fall Times ins typ 2 5 of period Timing Accuracy 0 25ppm Timing Jitter lt 10ps pk pk lt 100ns within time window lt 100ps pk pk lt 100us lt 1000ps pk pk lt 10ms Duty Cycle 5 Amplitude 100mV 250mV 500mvV and 1V pk pk symmetrical about ground NB 9500B 1100 500mV pk pk max for period lt 1ns Subdivision Every 10th marker can be set to higher amplitude Line frequency timing markers are available in the Square Wave function Jitter wrt Line zero crossing lt t20us pk pk Frequencies above 500MHz are not recommended for 1MQ input applications The 9560 Head is restricted to 50Q loads only Specified Specified Edge Edge A A ov gt 10 90 k period Rising Edge EJ Low and Fast Edges lt period 10 90 Y y Specified Specified Edge Edge Falling Edge Fa Low and Fast Edges For High Edge the Duty Cycle is different bu the specified edges correspond to those shown above 7 4 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 6 Levelled Sine Function Specification 7 6 1 Frequency Range Levelled Sine Function 9500B 600 0 1 Hz to 600 MHz 9500B 1100 0 1 Hz to 1 1 GHz Not available
164. A settings conflict will be reported if the TELevision function has not been selected lt dnpd gt lt 600 is rounded to select 525 line 2600 is rounded to select 625 line For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 11 Composite Video Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the rounded lt dnpd gt for the currently selected line frequency standard Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 11 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 5 SOURce Subsystem Contd 6 6 5 19 SOUR PAR TEL SYNC lt cpd gt COMP FRAM Purpose This command selects the sync standard of the TV function available on the trigger channel if one has been selected A settings conflict will be reported if the TELevision function has not been selected lt cpd gt COMPosite selects the full composite sync standard FRAMe selects the frame sync standard For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 11 Composite Video Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected sync standard 6 6 5 20 SOUR PAR TEL LEV lt cpd gt BLAC GREY WHIT Purpose This command selects one of the three amplitude levels of the TV waveform A settings conflict will be reported if the TELevision function has not been selected
165. A to Section 8 of the User s Handbook for Model 9500B 8 A 2 2 2 Error Reporting In response to a bus or a keyboard error there are certain categories of error reporting Primarily the error will be reported to the original source of the error but in some cases will be reported to both local and remote operators Locally the error will be displayed on the front panel screen remotely it will set the relevant ESR bit and add the error to the Error Queue Note about the ERROR Queue accessible via the IEEE 488 Interface The Error Queue is a sequential memory stack Each reportable error has been given a listed number and explanatory message which are entered into the error queue as the error occurs The queue is read destructively as a First In First Out stack using the query command SYSTem ERRor to obtain a code number and message Repeated use of the query SYSTem ERRor will read successive Device Dependent Command and Execution errors until the queue is empty when the Empty message 0 No error will be returned It would be good practice to repeatedly read the Error Queue until the Empty message is returned The common command CLS clears the queue ALWAYS record the total message content for possible use by the Service Center Appendix A to Section 8 9500B Maintenance Error Reporting Subsystem 8 Al Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 8 A 2 2 Recoverable Errors Contd 8 A 2
166. AL 1 0000mV 0 97475mvV 1 02525mV mode and then select the DC Square DC Voltage Positive function from 1 9000mV 1 87453mV 1 92547mV MANUAL mode entry default press the WAVEFORM soft key and then press the soft key on the right of 5 0000mV 4 97375mV 5 02625mV the screen Select the required output Signal Channel 1MQ Load trigger 6 0000mV 5 9735mV 6 0265mV channel and Trigger Ratio if required 2 3000mV 2 27443mV 2 32557mV 19 000mV 18 9703mV 19 0297mV 9 8 1 5 Verification Procedure 23 000mV 22 9693mV 23 0307mV Refer to Tables 9 8 1 1 and 9 8 1 2 Follow the correct Final Width 215mm sequence of verification points as shown on the tables and Eom Ge GEMA ee leroy carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each 60 000mV 59 960mV 60 040mV verification point 1 DMM Select the correct DCV range for the Liceasdeind ee een verification point Output Voltage 230 00mV 229 918mV 230 082mV 2 9500B Set the O P Volts P P and polarity as 500 00mV 499 85mV 500 15mV required for the verification point 3 4955 If using the Model 4955 Calibration 600 00mV 599 83mV 600 18mV Adaptor set its switch to DCV o c 4 9000V 1 8995V 1 9005V Otherwise ensure that the DMM input is at high impedance 2 3000V 2 2994V 2 3006V 4 9500B Set Output ON and wait for the DMM 5 0000V 4 99873V 5 00127V reading to settle i 5 Amplitude a Measure the DCV output value 6 0000V 5 99848V 6 0015
167. AV The MAV bithelps to synchronize information exchange with the controller It is true when a message is placed in the Output Queue or false when the Output Queue is empty The common command CLS can clear the Output Queue and the MAV bit 4 of the Status Byte Register providing it is sent immediately following a Program Message Terminator Bit5 DIO6 IEEE 488 2 defined Standard Event Summary Bit ESB Summarizes the state of the Event Status byte held in the Event Status register ESR whose bits represent IEEE 488 2 defined conditions in the device The ESB bit is true when the byte in the ESR contains one or more enabled bits which are true or false when all the enabled bits in the byte are false Bit 6 DIO7 is the Master Status Summary Message MSS bit and is set true if one of the bits 0 to 5 or bit 7 is true bits 0 1 and 2 are always false in the 9500B Bit7 DIO4 SCPlI defined Operation Status Summary Bit QSS Summarizes the state of the Operation Status data held in the Operation Status register OSR whose bits represent processes in progress in the 9500B The OSS bit is true when the data in the OSR contains one or more enabled bits which are true or false when all the enabled bits in the byte are false The OSR is described in Sub Section 6 5 4 continued overleaf gt Section 6 9500B System Operation Retrieval of Device Status Information 6 5 3 Final
168. B In it you will find the recommended calibration methods details of the parameters that require calibration and the procedures needed to calibrate them This section is divided into the following sub sections 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 9500B Mainframe Calibration and Active Head Calibration Functions and Methods The Model 9500B Calibration Mode Selection of Calibration Mode Special Calibration and Standard Calibration Standard Calibration Basic Sequences Using the Target Selection and Adjustment screens Front panel Calibration by Functions General procedure sequencing equipment requirements interconnections procedures and lists of calibration points for all functions requiring calibration Head Calibration Procedures Calibrating sine edge timing markers load capacitance and 509 1MQ ratio functions Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B About Section 10 10 1 1 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 10 2 9500B Mainframe Calibration and Active Head Calibration 10 2 1 Introduction The Model 9500B has been designed around a 1 year recalibration interval When they do need recalibration it is not necessary to lose the entire system while it is being performed In addition to being supported by traditional scope calibration standards the 9500B s mainframe and its Active Heads are calibrated separately The mainframe unit defines the DC and LF traceability and is easily calibr
169. B is standard 625 line or 525 line video with both frame and composite synch pulses and an inverted version of the composite waveform is available As shown by the screen icon three luminance levels are available The 9500B trigger channel can output either composite or frame synchronizing pulses without the video All variants can be selected from the front panel 4 11 3 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen The Composite Video function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the f d Le softkey on the right of the screen Whenever the J menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default settings a OFF none O P Amplitude 1 0 Vp VAIR EA Wem 525 Luminance Level White AA corz I TRIG ee a FRAME TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL SEUECT The above default screen has auto selected 625 lines 50Hz and triggers will be from composite video Amplitude has defaulted to a luminance level of White at 1 0V p p 4 11 4 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection and Cable selection all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Trigger Ratio is not available in Composite Video function Refer to paras 4 5
170. CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 The response from this query will be one of the parameters listed in association with the command Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 2 CALibration Subsystem This subsystem is used to calibrate the functions and hardware ranges of the 9500B This will correct for any system errors due to drift or ageing effects Before any calibration can take place two security levels must be set First there is a switch on the 9500B itself that must be set to CAL ENABLE Having done this the calibration password command must be sent Once entered into Calibration mode the commands present in the table at 6 6 2 1 are enabled 6 6 2 1 CALibration Subsystem Table Keyword Parameter Form CALibration SECure PASSword lt spd gt EXIT lt spd gt lt cpd gt PRD7 PRD14 PRD30 PRD60 TARGet lt dnpd gt lt dnpd gt lt dnpd gt TRIGger HEAD EHFSine lt cpd gt LINearity FLATness VHFSine lt cpd gt LINearity FLATness HFSine lt cpd gt LINearity FLATness LFSine E70 lt cpd gt LINearity GAIN SPEed E150 lt cpd gt LINearity GAIN SPEed E500 lt cpd gt LINearity GAIN SPEed MARKer lt cpd gt SINusoid CAPacitance RESistance STORe lt spd gt lt cpd gt PRD7 PRD14 PRD30 PRD60 BASE SFRequency lt dnpd gt SPECial DAC VCO DCSQ TMK LFSine FADJust FAD
171. CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 MCHannel lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 ON OFF TRIGger PATH lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 NONE lt cpd gt ACTive CAble IMPedance lt dnpd gt RATio lt dnpd gt 6 6 4 2 ROUT FITT lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 Purpose This query command returns the type serial number date last calibrated and calibration due date of the active head fitted to the lt cpd gt channel Response Format The response willbe an lt Arbitrary ASCII Response Data gt element consisting of four comma separated fields Field 1 Type e g 9510 9530 CABL NONE Field 2 Serial Number up to 13 characters Field 3 Date that the head was last calibrated in the currently defined date format Field 4 Date thatthe calibration of the head is due in the currently defined date format For example for a channel with an active head fitted 9510 12345 1997 02 28 1998 02 27 If there is no active head fitted to the lt cpd gt channel the response will be NONE 0 0000 0 00 0000 0 00 The 9500B can only determine that a cable has been fitted if this was informed viathe ROUT TRIG PATH command para 6 6 4 5 6 6 4 3 ROUT SIGN PATH lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 Purpose This command is used to define which channel is associated with the signal output The lt cpd gt does not turn the output on only selects the signal ch
172. Chse s VCO BEWARE These keys trigger Er major changes to calibration SQY TRI Chse LF SIN DC 0 S Chse PULSE WIDTH TODAY S DATE TIME Adjust EXIT Rea 10 3 4 2 When to Characterise Characterisations are adjustments which calibrate basic digital sources ofoutput These adjustments are only required immediately prior to routine Standard Calibration of the Model 9500B detailed in subsequent sub sections IMPORTANT Do not characterise unless you are doing so as part of an authorized recalibration of the Model 9500B Although the internal adjustment operations which it initiates will not dramatically change the overall calibration of the instrument they will introduce a very small artificial step into its apparent drift performance If your company maintains historical records on each calibrator s drift performance between calibrations for example for the purposes of statistical process control in a total quality management system this artificial step would need to be determined and suitably recorded in these records There are no performance advantages to be gained by characterising at any time other than immediately before Standard Calibration of the Model 9500B s functions 10 3 4 3 How to Characterise Characterisation is performed merely by pressing the appropriate Chse soft key When characterising do so in the following sequence Chse DAC Chse VCO Chse S
173. Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 95008 5088 SERIES Configuration IEEE 488 ADDRESSES 9500B address oS 2nd address inactive Change by direct edit only TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 3 Use numeric entry to set the required bus address number Type the number on the keypad then press the J key 4 PressEXIT toreturnto the Present Settings screen For second address 5000 series emulation refer to Section 6 Appendix F 3 4 3 5 Printer Printer Operation Procedure Mode and Test Mode only Using the Procedure mode print facility the 9500B can deliver a printed certificate whose style is also determined in Configuration mode In Test mode test results can also be printed in a pre determined format The results are stored until the print command is given after the test is over The printer does not need to be selected in Configuration mode unless the results print is required to conform to the layout of a particular type of printer The printer is set up only when an attempt is made to print following two types of occasion a printer type is changed in Config mode b 9500B is powered on Printer Type Selection 1 Foraccess to select and enable a particular printer type or one using the same formatting press the PRINTER screen key on the Present Settings screen 2 This transfers to a Configuration screen to c
174. Controls the width of the pulse for Pulse Width functions 2 00 ce ec ceee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeees 6 6 14 Selects the resistance or capacitance measurement FUNCTION 0 00 0 cece eeeeseeeseeeeeeseeseeeaeeaetseeeaeceeeaeeaeeeaeeeeeaeseseaeeeeeeaeenees 6 6 15 Returns the most recent resistance or capacitance measurement value oo ee eee eee eee e eee eeeetneeeceeteeeseeeseeeeeeeseaeenaes 6 6 15 Gives access to the 9500B SCPI defined Status Reporting Structure cecceceeceeseeceeeeeeeeeesereeeeseeseeeseseeeseeeeesneeeeeeaeeees 6 6 16 OPERation Reads from or writes to the OPERation Status Register ccccccceceseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeees 6 6 16 QUEStionable Reads from or writes to the QUEStionable Status Register cceccceseeeeseeeeeeeeseeneeneeeeenteaes 6 6 17 PRESet Presets a default status reporting condition 0 0 ee cee ene ecee etree tease tees tee teeeeteeeteeeseeeeee 6 6 17 Collects general functions that are not related to 9500B performance oo cece eee ce cececeeeeeeeeeneetetel 6 6 18 ERRor Requests the next entry from the 9500B error queue 0 eee eee cece eee eceeeeeeeeeseeeetneeeeaeenees 6 6 18 DATE Reads or writes the present dato sirisser anaana Ea PA aaRS ER 6 6 18 TIME Meads or Writes the present TMS arruir itte nisani K iris RETE ERE pi EEan 6 6 19 SVOLtage Reads or writes the Safety Threshold Voltage in DC or AC Voltage function seses 6 6 19 VERSion Returns a numeric value
175. Data String Program Data PASS EXIT DATE TIME Arbitrary Block Program Data PUD Arbitrary ASCII Response Data to ROUTe FITTed No Compound Command Program Headers are used within the SCPI format 15 16 17 18 19 Macro commands are not implemented IDN is described in Section 6 Appendix C Neither RDT nor RDT are implemented The states affected by RST are described for each command in the list of commands and queries in Section 6 Appendix C Query Command LRN is not implemented neither are 7 PUD blocks are limited to 63 bytes Commands RCL and SAV 8 Expression Program Data elements are not used 20 TST invokes the Operational Selftest The response to f TST is described in Section 6 Appendix C with a list of 9 The syntax for each command is described in the general possible errors detailed in Appendix A to Section 8 of this list of commands in Subsection 6 6 and Section 6 handbook Appendix C This list includes all queries for which the response syntax is also described 21 The additional status data structures used in the instrument s status reporting are fully described in Section 10 All device to device message transfer traffic follows the 6 Subsection 6 5 rules for lt RESPONSE MESSAGES gt elements ae i EO Operating instructions for the status reporting facilities are 11 The only command which elicits a Block Data response is given in Section 6 Appen
176. Data Input Output Line 7 Data Input Output Line 8 Remote Enable Gnd wire of DAV twisted pair Gnd wire of NRFD twisted pair Gnd wire of NDAC twisted pair Gnd wire of IFC twisted pair Gnd wire of SRQ twisted pair Gnd wire of ATN twisted pair 9500B Logic Ground internally connected to Safety Ground Table 6 2 Connector J101 Pin Designations 6 3 3 SCPI Programming Language Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI is an instrument command language which goes beyond JEEE 488 2 to address a wide variety of instrument functions in a standard manner IEEE 488 2 defines sets of Mandatory Common Commands and Optional Common Commands along with a method of Standard Status Reporting The 9500B implementation of SCPI language conforms with all IEEE 488 2 Mandatory Commands but not all Optional Commands It conforms with the SCPI approved Status Reporting method Note Commands in SCPI language prefaced by an asterisk eg CLS are IEEE 488 2 standard defined Common commands Conformance of the 9500B remote programming commands to SCPI ensures that the 9500B has a high degree of consistency with other conforming instruments For most specific commands such as those relating to frequency and voltage the SCPI approved command structure already exists and has been used wherever possible SCPI commands are easy to learn self explanatory and account for a wide variety of usage skills A summary of the 9500B
177. Direct Mode The triangular type of cursor indicates that all the cursor keys can be used as in other functions From the default 00 00 the deviation percentage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 11 20 and 11 20 within output voltage value limits The result of combining the units division multiplier and deviation are shown as the p p value of O P Amplitude Output Voltage Scope and Direct Mode The O P Amplitude is only adjustable by means of its contributors 500ps Edge and Fast Edge From the default 1 0000V p p the output voltage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 4 44mVp p and 3 0000Vp p The software ensures that the contributors values remain within their limits High Edge From the default 5 0000V p p the output voltage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 888mVp p and 5 56Vp p IMQ expected load only The software ensures that the contributors values remain within their limits Frequency Scope and Direct Mode 500ps Edge and Fast Edge From the default 1MHZz the output frequency can be changed to any value within its resolution between 10Hz and 2MHz High Edge From the default 1kHz the output frequency can be changed to any value within its resolution between 10Hz and 100kHz Rise Fall Time Scope and Direct Mode When each head is calibrated its measured 10 to 90 transition times for each type of edge are stored in non vola
178. E CAL 10 3 6 1 Function Selection Pressing the BASE CAL screen softkey displays a DC Square DC CAL function screen the Target Selection screen shown below which appears on entry to Standard Calibration OFF SIGNAL CHI 5 0 TARGET TRIGGER NONE 1 TARGET Cal Range 1 2 888 00 pV to 2 10 mV SAVED CALIBRATION TARGETS e Resistance Measurement selected by pressing the Aux front panel push button a OFF SIGNAL CHT 580 TARGET CAO TARGET z Resistance Calibration TARGET SAVED CALIBRATION TARGETS TARGET 1 gt 50 Q 4 2 50 kQ 3 1 M 4 gt 19 Ms2 TODAY S DATE TIME 1 1 mV low 2 gt 1 9 mV high TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL DEFAULT i FORM SELECT TARGETS Other available Mainframe calibrations are e DC Square Function DC Negative and Square waveforms selected using the WAVEFORM soft key Oie e Cal Range 1 888 W to 2 10 mV SAVED CALIBRATION TARGETS 1 gt 1 mv low 2 1 9 mV high eae TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL DEFAULT FORM SELECT TARGETS e SineFunction selected simply by pressing the LU front panel push button TARGET YY OFF Rneee hone 1 CAO TARGET Cal Range 1 2 1 4 V to 2 224 V AREE SAVED CALIBRATION TARGETS TARGET 1 gt 1 6 V 1
179. EL 15 FORM SELECT RA Once into DC function it is not necessary to change the waveform to change polarity Pressing the screen key toggles between positive and negative DC Current The polarity selection is shown by the function icon in the top left corner confirmed by the or sign on the O P Amplitude value 4 10 8 2 Value Editing Amplitude At maximum and minimum output currents the screen settings of the contributors values units division scaling multiplier and deviation are limited by the output current itself For example Contributor Limits Minimum Maximum Output Current 88 8uA p p 111 2mA p p Limit Units Division 20pA div 50mA div Scaling Multiplier 1 10 Deviation 11 20 11 20 Provided they do not exceed the output current limits shown the contributors have the following adjustments Scope mode a Units Division in Volts division adjustable sequence 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 default ImA b Scaling Multiplier adjustable through integers 1 to 10 default 4 c Percentage Deviation a maximum range of 11 20 about the value of a x b at a resolution of four significant digits with two decimal places default zero Digit or direct edit can be used d Output Current adjustable in digit edit only by manipulation of a b and c default 4 0000mA 4 10 8 3 Output Current Editing The Digit and Direct editing proces
180. ESULT IN DAMAGE TO THIS OR OTHER PROPERTY 0 8 Model 9500B User s Handbook Safety Section Protective Earth Ground Protection Class l The instrument must be operated with a Protective Earth Ground connected via the power cable s protective earth ground conductor The Protective Earth Ground connects to the instrument before the line amp neutral connections when the supply plug is inserted into the power socket on the back of the instrument WARNING ANY INTERRUPTION OF THE PROTECTIVE GROUND CONDUCTOR INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE INSTRUMENT IS LIKELY TO MAKE THE INSTRUMENT DANGEROUS To avoid electric shock hazard make signal connections to the instrument after making the protective ground connection Remove signal connections before removing the protective ground connection i e the power cable must be connected whenever signal leads are connected Do Not Operate Without Covers To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate the instrument with its covers removed The covers protect users from live parts and unless otherwise stated must only be removed by qualified service personnel for maintenance and repair purposes WARNING REMOVING THE COVERS MAY EXPOSE VOLTAGES IN EXCESS OF 1 5KV PEAK In MORE UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS Safe Operating Conditions Only operate the instrument within the manufacturer s specified operating conditions Specification examples that must be considered include ambient tempe
181. Editing Overload Protection Different oscilloscope manufacturers have different ways of defining the overload which will activate their protection system For example into 50Q the two specifications 20V for 200ms and 1 6J at a power of 8W are equivalent Normally where voltage and time are specified the voltage will be set and the energy adjusted to achieve the specified time The 9500B can output single pulses whose two adjustable constituents are Amplitude and Pulse Energy The limits on these parameters are Amplitude 45V to 20V Pulse Energy 1 6J to 50J For a fixed Pulse Amplitude the power into 50Q will remain constant regardless of pulse duration Adjusting the Pulse Energy operates on the pulse duration at fixed amplitude Controlling these two parameters can adapt to all specifications between the above limits Maximum and minimum power values into 50Q are Power 0 5W to 8W Amplitude 45V to 20V Maximum and minimum pulse durations with corresponding parameters are Duration 200ms to 100s Amplitude 420V to 5V Pulse Energy 1 6J to 50J Power 8W to 0 5W 4 13 5 5 Overload Pulse Editing The Digit and Direct editing processes follow the same general rules as for editing DC Square described in paras 4 4 4 13 6 Using the 9500B to Test the Overload Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 13 6 1 Introduction The test procedure consists of inputting a single pulse as specified in the oscilloscope ma
182. Element Once the filter is removed wash it in warm water and household detergent rinse thoroughly and allow to dry 8 2 2 5 Refitting the Filter Element 1 Hold the filter element in position to cover the chassis holes and the four securing holes Separate the latch and center pin of ablack nylon snap rivet and push the latch through the filter into a securing hole at the top Fit the center pin into the latch and push fully home so that the pin opens the splits in the rear of the latch 2 Slightly stretch the filter element into the correct position fit and secure the other four snap rivets 8 2 2 6 Refitting the Top Cover Carefully refit the top cover into the slots in the side extrusions with the front edge immmediately behind the front bezel push forward to locate inside the bezel and secure to the rear panel using the two screws Refit and secure the corner blocks 8 2 2 7 Replacement Parts Should the filter or snap rivets become damaged by removal or refitting the following parts can be ordered through your Fluke Sales and Service Center Part No Description Manufacturer Type Qty 451004 20ppi Reticulated 1 Foam Filter symbol 617020 Snap Rivet Richco SR4050B 5 Black Nylon 8 2 Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 8 2 3 Firmware Upgrade 8 2 3 1 Introduction The Model 9500B firmware can be upgraded using a Persona
183. FLUKE USER S HANDBOOK Model 9500B High Performance Oscilloscope Calibrator Operation and Performance Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm User s Handbook For The Model 9500B High Performance Oscilloscope Calibrator Operation and Performance 2005 Fluke Precision Measurement Ltd Part No 1625019 Issue 11 0 October 2005 FLUKE For any assistance contact your nearest Fluke Sales and Service Center l S 9 0 0 2 Addresses can be found at the back of this handbook Fluke Precision Measurement Ltd Due to our policy of continuously updating our products this handbook may contain minor differences in specification components and circuit design to the instrument actually supplied BSI Amendment sheets precisely matched to your instrument serial number are available on request CERTIFICATE P No FM 29700 S Z y LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment Parts product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller and does not apply to fuses disposable batteries or to any product which in Fluke s opinion has been misused altered neglected contaminated or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of ope
184. G5010 5011 6 F5 Table 6 F 5 1 CG5010 5011 Command Emulation by 9500B Contd CG5010 5011 Command FREQ DC lt NR3 gt DC Sets chop frequenc C G5010 5011 Command Description y to DC lt NR3 gt Sets chop frequency from 10Hz to 1MHZz 9500B Emulation 9500B Response FXD Removes the VARIABLE deviation value from the output value HOLD lt NR1 gt For SLEWED EDGE mode ID Returns identity of instrument ID TEK SG5011 V0 0 FX XX INC Adds 0 1 from present DUT error readout for HIGH or FAST indications or subtracts 0 1 for LOW or SLOW indications INIT Clears the present settings and initialises to defaults Volts 1V D 1kHz 1 divis ion output off trigger norm off LDZ 50 HI 50 Selects 50Q termi ation HI Selects high impedance termination LOOP ON OFF Selects or deselects curre t loop LSHF Decrements the shift counter by 1 MAG X1 X10 Sets time division magnifi er to X1 or X10 for Markers Masks errors so that SRQ is not sent Selects VOLTS Selects CURRENT mode Selects EDGE Selects FAST EDGE Selects TIMING MARKERS Selects SLEWED EDGE Sets Number of Divisions multiplier in range 1 10 NEG Sets negative EDGE and VOLTAGE polarity NM ON OFF MASK 1 2 3 MODE V VOLTAGE MODE CUR CURRENT MODE EDGE MODE FE FASTEDGE MODE MKRS MARKERS MODE SLWD SLEWED MULT lt NRF gt
185. Hz Targets 116 119 5 50GHz Targets 56 60 2 90GHz Targets 120 123 5 80GHz 2 The following process takes you through all TARGETs in table 10 6 2 4 The process sequentially calibrates all amplitudes at one Targets 61 65 3 00GHz Targets 124 127 6 00GHz frequency before repeating the same amplitude calibration points at Targets 66 70 3 10GHz Targets 128 131 6 20GHz the next frequency step Targets 71 75 3 20GHz Targets 132 136 6 40GHz 3 9500B Set Output ON 4 Power Meter Select a range that gives an on scale reading Targets age one 10 6 6 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B 6GHz Levelled Sine Function 9560 only 10 6 3 Calibrating the Edge Function 10 6 3 1 Summary High Bandwidth Oscilloscope The Edge Function is calibrated by applying risetime corrections in the sequences given in paras 10 6 3 4 through 10 6 3 9 Equipment requirements are given in para 10 6 6 2 para 10 6 6 3 describes the Calibration Setup 10 6 3 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Active Head connected to a verified Model 9500B ne Y Channel Mainframe e High bandwidth sampling oscilloscope with bandwidth gt 6GHz for Risetime measurements 20GHz for 9550 and 9560 A Example Tektronix Model TDS820 or HP 54750 Vel Active Head e 50Q SMA SMA co axial Trigger cable for trigger inputs to the a high bandwidth oscilloscope e High bandwidth coaxial attenuator may be required if 9500B ed
186. Information 6 5 2 IEEE 488 and SCPI Standard Defined Features Contd 6 5 2 3 Access via the Application Program Contd SCPI Status Registers The two SCPI Status registers operate in the same way using the appropriate program commands to set the enable registers and query commands to discover the condition of the registers Subsequent Action Thus the application programmer can enable any assigned event to cause an SRQ or not The controller can be programmed to read the Status Byte using a serial poll to read the Status Byte register and the true summary bit ESB OSS QSS or MAV The application program then investigates the appropriate event structure until the causal event is discovered The detail for each register is expanded in the following paragraphs and in the command descriptions 6 5 3 9500B Status Reporting IEEE 488 2 Basics 6 5 3 1 IEEE 488 2 Model This develops the IEEE 488 1 model into an extended structure with more definite rules These rules invoke the use of standard Common messages and provide for device dependent messages A feature of the structure is the use of Event registers each with its own enabling register as shown in Fig 6 2 6 5 3 2 9500B Model Structure The IEEE 488 2 Standard provides for an extensive hierarchical structure with the Status Byte at the apex defining its bits 4 5 and 6 and their use as summaries of a Standard defined event structure which
187. Just lt dnpd gt PWD 6 6 2 2 CAL SEC PASS lt spd gt Purpose This command is used to gain access to Calibration mode The lt spd gt must be the correct Calibration password registered in the 9500B software The calibration password can be changed only in Configuration mode from the 9500B front panel Refer to Section 3 6 6 2 3 CAL SEC EXIT lt spd gt lt cpd gt PRD7 PRD14 PRD30 PRD60 Purpose This command is used to switch off Calibration mode cancelling any set CAL TARG command and protecting the calibration by disabling the calibration commands Parameters in the command permit a user optionally to date stamp the calibration record and set up an advance warning for the next due calibration date Certain Functions are not available in Calibration Mode for which calibration is not required When finishing a calibration procedure it is necessary to exit from Calibration mode in order to access these functions e The lt spd gt must be the due date of the next calibration for the 9500B It must conform to the format decided by the SYStem FORmat lt spd gt command e The lt cpd gt PRDXX gives the required number of days advance warning of the cal due date Refer to 9500B Verification and Adjustment Handbook Section 10 6 6 2 4 CAL TARG lt dnpd gt lt dnpd gt lt dnpd gt Purpose For each calibration operation the required calibration point factor must be targetted Refer to Section 10
188. LE With the Calibration Enable switch in the DISABLE position any attempt to select Calibration mode by pressing the CALIB screen softkey will result in the screen prompt Calibration switch not enabled being displayed and access to Calibration mode will be denied ENABLE With the Calibration Enable switch in the ENABLE position pressing the CALIB screen key will result in the Password Entry for Calibration user prompt screen being displayed Password Entry For Calibration i Enter password QOOQOOOO TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 10 3 3 2 Password Before the Calibration mode menu screen can be displayed you must now enter a valid password using the Model 9500B s alpha numeric keyboard For information about the initial shipment password and about the method of changing this to a custom password refer to Section 3 paras 3 4 2 of this Handbook As each character in the password is entered security code icons will appear on the screen as shown above Once the correct password has been entered pressing the 1 Enter key will result in the Calibration Mode menu screen being displayed If the wrong password is used the error message PASSWORD INCORRECT will be displayed and the security code character icons will disappear enabling you to attempt correct password entry again The EXIT screen softkey will take you back to the Mode Selection screen 10 3 3 3 Calibration Mode Di
189. M 022 No head present on channel 5 5013 OTUP VCO correction ee 023 Active signal cable removed with output on 5014 Failed to Save VCO COFFEGES On 024 Head interrupt OFF timeout 5015 Corrupt If sin dc offset correction 025 Zero Skew requires at least two heads 5016 Failed to save lf sin dc offset correction 026 Output must be ON 5017 Corrupt timing marker zero correction 027 Alignment must be adjusted before deselecting default a0TAs Failed Po gave timing marker zero correction 028 Head on channel 1 has not been recognised S013 Corrupt timing marker peak correction 029 Head on channel 2 has not been recognised 5020 Failed to save timing marker peak correction 030 Head on channel 3 has not been recognised 5021 Timing marker peak failed setting defaults 031 Head on channel 4 has not been recognised 5022 Octal dac value out of range using default 032 Head on channel 5 has not been recognised 5023 Peak detect not cleared setting defaults 033 9520 head or better required for 150ps edge 5025 VCO unchrs d Using default y 034 9530 head required for sine greater than 1 1GHz 5027 nE reguency Crystal DAC unchrs d Using default 035 Command not available for single channel configuration 3028 IF Brne DEGI TACE UNGHTE SAE Using default 036 Base unit cannot calibrate at required frequency 029 Triangular TMks unchre d Using default 037 9550 head
190. Model 9500B Sine Function 4 6 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 6 6 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Sine Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 7 Edge Function 4 7 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B for generating defined pulse edges to examine oscilloscope pulse response For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 4 7 1 Introduction 4 7 2 Default Settings A 47 3 Menu Selections 47 1 47 3 1 Retained Channel Memory 47 1 4 7 3 2 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit 4 7 1 4 7 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys Direct Edit 4 7 2 47 3 4 Bottom Screen Keys Digit and Direct Edit 4 7 4 Edge Function Operation aii 4 7 2 4 1 2 4741 Value Editing 47 2 47 4 2 Output Voltage Editing 0 4 7 2 47 4 3 Low Voltage LV and High Voltage HV States 4 7 3 4 7 5 Using Active Head Models 9510 9520 9530 4 7 3 ATST IMtrOdUCtION sesiis 4 7 3 4 7 6 Using the 9500B Edge Function to Calibrate the Pulse Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 7 4 4 7 6 1 Introduction 47 4 4 7 6 2 Interconnections 4 1 4 SARN 4 7 4 47 6 3 Common Setup 4 7 6 4 UUT Scope Pulse Response Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source uss 4 7 4 4 7 2 Default Settings When Manual
191. ND_H Printer is out of paper SLCT_H Printer is in on line state or connected AUTO_FEED_L Paper is automatically fed 1 line after printing This line is fixed _H high by the 9500B to disable auto feed ERROR_L Printer is in Paper End Off line or Error state INIT_L Commands printer to reset to power up state and in most printers to clear its print buffer SLCT_IN_L Commands some printers to accept data This line is fixed _L low by the 9500B Digital Common ocean D oO amp Ww PS OV_F _H Logic 1 active _L Logic active Connectors and Pin Designations Conta 2 8 3 This 9 way D Type socket is located to the left of the Parallel port connector on the rear panel Its connections are RS232 compatible carrying control and power supplies for and receiving data from an external tracker ball SERIAL PORT g Q Pin Designations Serial Port Rear Panel Pin Layout Description ot used Serial Data Tracker Ball gt 9500B Serial Data 9500B Tracker Ball Data Terminal Ready Digital Common Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear to Send ot used 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _H Logic 1 active _L Logic active 2 8 Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 2 8 4 Auxiliary Input Rear Panel AUXILIARY l INPUT lt 40Vpk This SMC connector is located at the upper center of the
192. NEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt _ Trigger Cable SS O P Amplitude 1 0000 Voe Seha Frequency 1 0000 kHz SGMA TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT CABLE SELECT Neither channel 4 nor 5 has an active head fitted The highlights on channels 1 2 and 3 indicate that only these channels have heads active confirmed by the legend in the top central box and for these zero skew can be used Toggling any one of these soft keys deselects and reselects that channel Note that the function cannot operate with only one channel selected which will cause an error message to appear on the screen In Zero Skew function expected load is fixed at 50Q on all signal channels so the 50Q 1MQ switching soft key is absent In this function the trigger channel soft key is absent When the Channel Select screen is presented adjustment of Frequency Period is inhibited Pressing the EXIT key will revert back to the standard Zero Skew screen of para 4 14 2 the top central box showing the channels which have been selected continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Zero Skew Function 4 14 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 14 3 Menu Selections Conta 4 14 3 2 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll Keys operate only on the value of Frequency Period X10 Multiplies the marked value by ten 10 Divides the marked value by ten
193. Paras 10 3 4 This command permits the user to define three parameters associated with the calibration point in the current operation e The first lt dnpd gt is an integer from 1 to 6 allocated to the calibration point at which calibration is intended This will be one of those listed on the Calibration mode screen in Target State for the corresponding function and hardware range e The second lt dnpd gt is a value which will determine the required hardware range amplitude of the 9500B for that calibration point e The third optional lt dnpd gt is a value which will determine the required hardware range frequency of the 9500B for that calibration point 6 6 2 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax Once a target has been set the 9500B adjustment is restricted to values within the selected hardware voltage span and frequency band In order to release this restriction one of the following commands must be sent TRIG EXIT oranew TARG command Any error which occurs will also release the restriction 6 6 2 5 CAL TRIG Purpose After the parameters are set for calibration at a single calibration point this command initiates the internal calibration process This command applies to the TARGet settings Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is put in the error queue 6 6 2 6 CAL SPEC DAC Pu
194. Q Guard Active Head bt 230 Vpk WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 9 8 3 1 LF Sine Voltage Verification Interconnections Continued overleaf Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 11 Final Width 215mm 9 8 3 5 Verification Procedure Copy the table 9 8 3 7 Follow the correct sequence of verification points as shown on the table and carry out the following operations J to 7 at each verification point 1 Verification Points Refer to Table 9 8 3 1 N B For Operation 6 the RMS Output Voltage values and RMS 2 DMM Select the correct RMS Voltage range for the Absolute Tolerance Limits have been derived using the following verification point RMS Output Voltage factor for the output waveform at 1kHz RMS 0 5 x 0 707106781 x pk pk 3 9500B Set the Output Volts p p as required for the verification point Note mater e amas praan DMM 4 4955 Ifusing the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor set its ee iano a switch to SOV 500 Tf notusing the Model 4955 It is based on the use of a model 4955 set to SQV 50 ensure that the DMM input is AC coupled at 50Q 6 Amplitude a Measure the RMS Output Voltage value b Record this value in the Measured Value column of the copy of the Table c Check thatthe Measured Value is at or between the Absolute Tolerance Limits 7 9500B Set Output OFF inpu
195. QU TRI TMK Chse LF SIN DC O S Chse PULSE WIDTH Gy BG Ne Note Selected characterisation has completed when single highlighted softkey selected is replaced by complete softkey menu display 10 3 4 4 Form of Characterisation The Characterise operations comprise sets of fully automatic internal adjustments such as in the case of Chse DAC checking and calibrating the linearity of the 9500B D A converter which is used to set the amplitude of its analog output functions Press EXIT to return to the calibration mode menu screen on completion of all characterisations Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 3 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 3 5 Special Cal Adjust FREQ This is really a calibration of the internal frequency source to an external frequency standard The 9500B generates a stream of square timing markers as in Time Markers function refer to Section 4 8 at 100MHz This is applied to the external frequency standard and the internal frequency DAC factor is adjusted until the external counter registers 1 OOMHz 10 3 5 1 When to Adjust The 9500B Frequency Uncertainty 5 years is specified at 1OOMHz as 0 25ppm In either case it is normally unnecessary to adjust the frequency at less than 5 year intervals 10 3 5 2 Equipment Requirements e Digital counter for 0 25ppm clock accuracy measurements Example Hewlett Packard Model HP53131A with Option 01
196. Select MORE Parameters The bus address is accessed by pressing the MORE soft key By trying to select MORE the Configuration password will be required The 9500B will transfer to the Password Entry screen Refer to Section 3 sub sections 3 4 2 and 3 4 3 Password Entry For Configuration Enter password 00000 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 6 4 1 4 Enter Your Password 1 When you enter your password using the alpha numeric keyboard security icons will appear on the screen as you type Finally press the J return key If the password is incorrect an error message will be given and the security icons will be removed enabling a new attempt to enter the password The EXIT screen key acts to escape back to the previous screen 2 The correct password followed by 4 will provide entry to the main Configuration menu screen which shows the present settings of the parameters which can be changed using screen keys on this display BUS Configuration Ser No XXXXXX Rev XXX PRINTER Options 1 1 GHz Normal xtal z POWER Present Settings UP MODE Ref frequency 5 kHz Safety Voltage 198 08 V NEW Bus Address 4 PASSWRD Printer NONE EXT REF Power up mode Manual IN Ext ref in 1 MHz Ext ref in Disabled eE TODAY S DATE TIME REF VOLTAGE DATE HEAD FREQ LIMIT TIME CONFIG MORE J 3 In this case we are interested in BUS ADDRESS 6 4 1 5 Change the Bus Address 1 F
197. Settings screen 3 4 3 20 CERT STYLE 1 TODAY S DATE For access to select the certificate style press the CERT STYLEscreen key on the CERT DETAILS screen This transfers to The certificate type screen which allows the style of certificate to be selected j i STYLE 1 Configuration STYLE 2 The certificate type is STYLE 3 indicated by the highlight Use the softkeys to select another TIME EXIT 2 Press the key on the right which represents the required style of certificate 3 Press the EXIT screen key to revert to the CERT DETAILS screen 3 4 3 21 PAGE SETUP 1 To set up the certificate page press the PAGE SETUP screen key on the CERT DETAILS screen This transfers to what we shall refer to as a PAGE SETUP screen which allows users to design the certificate page using the keys on the right Configuration START PAGE PAGE LENGTH Present Settings HEADER Start page number SIZE Page length 66 Header size ROOTES Footer size 1 SIZE TODAY S DATE EXIT TIME PAGE SETUP Screen Layout 2 Press the key on the right which describes the attribute to be changed 3 The EXIT screen key to revert to the CERT DETAILS screen 3 4 3 22 Start page number 1 TODAY S DATE Tochange the certificate start page number press the START PAGE screen key on the PAGE SETUP screen This transfers to the Current start pag
198. T SIGNAL TRIGGER CABLE D CHANNEL RATIO SELECT 1M2 This channel must be allocated as a cable channel accessed by pressing the CABLE SELECT key A new screen is presented OFF SIGNAL CHI 582 gael l TRIGGER CH5 _ 502 CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps are CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps CABLE CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head CABLE O P Amplitude 20 000 mVor cua Frequency 1 0000 kHz Gee TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Pressing the CABLE CH 5 key has the following effect OFF SIGNAL CHI 589 gape l J TRIGGER CH5 500 CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps Dates CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps CABLE CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 Trigger Cable OP Amplitude 20 000 mvorw Chie Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Having made the selection pressing EXIT returns to the trigger selection screen 4 5 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Mj OFF SIGNAL CHI 550 TRIGGER TRIGGER CH5 580 CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps IPGGER CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps TRIGGER CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt Trigger Cable TRIGGER O P A
199. T Signal Channel to be calibrated b Ifa trigger is required use an active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Trigger for the Channel to be calibrated 4 8 5 3 Common Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for time base calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Time Markers Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the _ key at the right of the front panel 4 8 5 4 UUT Scope Time Base Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Scope time base calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B output to the required channel expected load impedance trigger channel waveshape period and p p voltage for the UUT Scope time base cal point 2 UUT Scope a Select the correct channel for the cal
200. TODAY S DATE TIME ar EXIT 6 F2 Appendix F to Section 6 9500B System Operation Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 6 F 4 S G5030 Levelled Sine Generator 6 F 4 1 Command Equivalence 6 F 4 2 Status and Error Reporting Table 6 F 4 1 overleaf lists the SG5030 commands as outlined The Status Byte coding is the same as the SG5030 but the error in the manual The 9500B Emulation column indicates numbers returned are those of the 9500B whether the 9500B emulates the SG5030 command Refer to Section 8 Appendix A X indicates that the 9500B does not have an equivalent mapping In this case the 9500B will accept the command and take no further action indicates that the 9500B does not have an equivalent mapping but the command is dealt with For example queries that report a standard answer are mapped indicates that the command is mapped Appendix F to Section 6 9500B System Operation Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 6 F3 Table 6 F 4 1 SG5030 Command Emulation by 9500B G5030 G5030 Command Description 9500B 9500B Response Command Emulation ABStouch Causes front panel buttons or controls to be remotely activated AMPlitude lt NR3 gt dBm Sets the amplitude of the output signal in Volts pk pk or dBm Amplitude Queries the present amplitude setting AMPLITUDE lt NR3 gt DBM CAL Queries the present DAC settings stored in NVRAM
201. Target 3 1 2000V 1 2GHz Target 4 2 0000V 1 2GHz Target 5 2 8000V 1 2GHz Target 6 3 7000V 1 2GHz 10 6 2 7 Calibration Procedure 3GHz Levelled Sine A w S Function HF Flatness 9530 only 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Sine 3GHz Sine mode FLAT The following process takes you through all TARGETS in table 10 6 2 4 The process sequentially calibrates all amplitudes at one frequency before repeating the same amplitude calibration points at the next frequency step 9500B Set Output ON Power Meter Select a range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the measuring device The conversion from power to pk pk voltage is pk pk Voltage V power 20 Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Press NEXT FREQ then select TARGET 1 and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 2 4 3GHz Levelled Sine Function HF Flatness Cal Point Voltage Frequency Target 1 2 0000V 1 2GHz Target 2 671 48mV Target 3 210 99mV Target 4 70 839mV Target 5 22 259mV Repeat the process using the Cal Point voltage levels in the Targets 1 5 sequence for each of these frequency points for a total of 75 calibration steps Targets 06 10 1 50GHz Targets 41 45 2 55GHz Targets 11 15 1 75GHz Targets 16 20 1 95GHz Targets 46 50 2 65GHz Targets 5
202. Target 7 100kHz Rising Target 5 400mV 1MHz Rising Target 6 250mV 1MHz Rising Target 7 220mV 1MHz Rising Target 8 100kHz Rising Target 8 120mV 1MHz Rising Target 9 100kHz Rising Target 9 75mV 1MHz Rising Target 10 100kHz Rising Target 10 70mV 1MHz Rising Target 11 100kHz Rising Target 11 40mV 1MHz Rising Target 12 100kHz Rising Target 12 25mV 1MHz Rising Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Edge Function Fast Edge Speed amp Linearity 10 6 11 Final Width 215mm 10 6 3 12Calibration Procedure 25ps Edge Speed 1 Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings 3 Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response 4 Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 25ps Edge SPEED mode 5 Set 9500B s output ON selecting TARGET 1 from table 10 6 3 6 Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading 7 Note the rise or fall time of the edge and enter it into the Edge Speed Field on the 9500B Make sure allowance is made for the rise time of the oscilloscope Edge Rise Time Measured Rise Time Scope Rise Time Press ACCEPT CALIB 9 Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 6 by pressing NEXT TARGET and return to step 4 repe
203. Tektronix CG5011 and SG5030 calibrators Refer to Section 6 e Semi automatic operation using procedure memory cards to drive the 9500B with control of the subject UUT being implemented by a form of the UUT manufacturer s procedure through a series of user prompts Refer to Section 5 e Manual operation from the front panel again with control of the subject UUT being implemented by the UUT manufacturer s procedure Refer to Section 4 3 2 1 2 Use of Procedure Memory Cards This is a form of assisted semi automatic calibration in which a memory card for a specific UUT oscilloscope is inserted into PCMCIA SLOT 1 Running Procedure Mode will generate instructions to the operator while setting output values on the 9500B The sequence of these instructions and outputs the output specifications and the pass fail limits conform the UUT manufacturer s calibration procedure 3 2 1 3 Manual and Remote Calibration of the 9500B Itself The 9500B itself must periodically be verified or calibrated against suitable traceable standards The calibration processes for the mainframe and Active Heads are available manually but to gain the advantages of simplicity and throughput provided by automated procedures these process commands are also available via the remote interface IEEE 488 2 SCPI protocols Section 6 The 9500B communicates with programmable standards under the direction of external Control Software 3 2 1 4 General Arrangement of Front Panel Cont
204. The Power On condition depends on the condition stored by the common PSC command if 0 then it is not cleared if 1 then the register is cleared Reset has no effect 6 0 16 Read Service Request Register This Status Byte data structure conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements for this structure STB STB recalls the service request register for summary bits Refer to Section 6 Subsection 6 5 Response Decode The value returned when converted to base 2 binary identifies the summary bits for the current status of the data structures involved For the detail definition see the IEEE 488 2 standard document There is no method of clearing this byte directly Its condition relies on the clearing of the overlying status data structure Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable 6 C12 Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 0 17 Test Operations Full Selftest This query conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements TST TST executes a Full selftest A response is generated after the test is completed N B Operational selftest is valid only at temperatures 23 C 10 C Response Decode The value returned identifies pass or failure of the operational selftest ZERO indicates operational selftest complete with no errors detected Non zero indicates operational selftest has failed
205. Time 1 0000 s TRIG TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL SELECT The 9500B has auto selected a Ramp Time of 1 0000s Trigger is auto selected TRIG START not TRIG MID O P Amplitude is fixed at 1 0000V 4 12 3 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 Note Without Option 5 only one signal channel and one trigger channel is available 4 12 3 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 12 3 2 Scope Mode Only The function operates only in Scope mode Ramp Time is the only signal variable operating on a step sequence as selected in Pref Refer to Section 3 sub section 3 3 4 12 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys X18 Increases Ramp Time by a factor of 10 within max and min limits 10 Decreases Ramp Time by a factor of 10 within max and min limits mG UUT Scope trigger currently at start code Press to provide trigger at center code qe UUT Scope trigger currently at center code Press to provide trigger at start code 4 12 3 4 Bottom Screen Keys CHANNEL Permits the screen signal setup to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel trigger ratio cable channel and expected load paras 4 5 3 4 12 4 Linear Ramp Operation 4 12 4 1 Value Editing Amplitude Amplitude is fixed at 1 0000V pk pk and cannot be
206. UE NOMINAL MIN LIMIT MAX LIMIT ERR FAILURES DQ8 O01 5 289216 5 000000 4 500000 5 000000 60 DG8 002 5 486493 5 200000 5 600000 4000000 72 DQ8 003 14 646128 15 000000 14 250000 15 750000 47 ERR gives the achieved percentage of full tolerance for that test FAILURES In this column a failure is shown by the figure 1 against the relevant test Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 8 11 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND Error Reporting Subsystem Note to users For the sake of completeness this appendix collects together the error codes which might be generated either on the instrument front panel or via the IEEE 488 system bus 8 A 1 Error Detection All errors which cannot be recovered without the user s knowledge result in some system action to inform the user via a message and where possible restore the system to an operational condition Errors are classified by the method with which they are handled Recoverable errors report the error and then continue System errors which cannot be recovered cause the system to reset via the Power on state to a system trip error report state from which a resume may clear the error but generally such messages are caused by hardware or software faults which require user action 8 A 2 Error Messages 8 A 2 1 System Trip Errors For all system trip errors the error condition is reported only via
207. V 20ps 20ps 15ps 15ps ps 100 00mV 200 00mV 20ps 20ps 15ps 15ps 330 00mV 660 00mV 20ps 20ps 15ps 15ps Verification points EDG2 1 0V 2 0V 20ps 20ps 15ps 15ps to EDG28 available for Active Head Model 9560 only Verification points EDG29 to EDG30 available for Active Head Model 9550 only 9 32 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 9 4 Verifying the Load Capacitance Measurement Function 4 9 9 4 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 9 4 2 and test interconnections at para 9 9 4 3 Para 9 9 4 4 shows the Verification Setup The Verification Procedure is at para 9 9 4 5 The Load Capacitance Measurement Function is verified by carrying out measurements of the capacitance of a calibrated Capacitance Standard in the sequences given at paras 9 9 4 4 and 9 9 4 5 at the verification points shown in Table 9 9 4 1 9 9 4 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Active Head connected to a verified Model 9500B Mainframe e Two Calibrated Capacitance Units BNC terminated a Calibrated value between 15pF and 25pF b Calibrated value between 85pF and 95pF Suitable capacitance values can be constructed from a length of coaxial cable fitted with a BNC connector at one end and open circuit at the other Measure the capacitance value with a capacitance bridge If the cable is
208. WAVE eeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 6 6 9 SQUare GROund Subsequent output of VOLT or CURR will be grounded 6 6 9 EDGE Sets edge direction and speed in Edge function s es 6 6 9 MARKer Sets waveforms in Timing Marker function sssssssessccerese 6 6 10 OPULse Sets the pulse amplitude and energy used to test overload protection of oscilloscopes and executes transmission 6 6 10 RAMP Sets ramp time and trigger point in Linear Ramp function 6 6 11 SKEW Enables disables precision alignment in Zero Skew function 6 6 11 TELevision Selects TV line standard sync standard video level and polarity in Composite Video function cceceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 6 11 LEAKage Selects open closed conditions and triggers used to determine the UUT oscilloscope s input leakage current cceeeeeeeeee 6 6 12 EXTernal Selects the Auxiliary Input Signal 0 0 0 ceceeeereeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaee 6 6 13 VOLTage Selects the Voltage source and Sets output amplitude ee ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetesteeeaeeneeas 6 6 13 CURRent Selects the Current source and sets output amplitude eee eee cece eteeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeseeeaeeseeeas 6 6 14 FREQuency Controls the Output Frequency value for AC functions eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeeneee 6 6 14 PERiod Controls the Output Period value for AC functions eeceecce cee ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeseaeesteeseaeees 6 6 14 WIDTh
209. Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 5 3 9500B Status Reporting IEEE 488 2 Basics Contd Reading the Status Byte Register STB The common query STB reads the binary number in the Status Byte register The response is in the form of a decimal number which is the sum of the binary weighted values in the enabled bits of the register In the 9500B the binary weighted values of bits 0 1 and 2 are always zero 6 5 3 4 Service Request Enable Register The SRE register is a means for the application program to select by enabling individual Status Byte summary bits those types of events which are to cause the 9500B to originate an RQS It contains a user modifiable image of the Status Byte whereby each true bit acts to enable its corresponding bit in the Status Byte Bit Selector SRE phs Nrf The common program command SRE phs Nrf performs the selection where Nrf is a decimal numeric whose binary decode is the required bit pattern in the enabling byte For example If an RQS is required only when a Standard defined event occurs and when a message is available in the output queue then N7f should be set to 48 The binary decode is 00110000 so bit 4 or bit 5 when true will generate an RQS but with this decode even if bit 3 is true no RQS will result The 9500B always sets false the Status Byte bits 0 1 and 2 so they can never originate an RQS whether enabled or not Reading the Service Request Enable Reg
210. ach channel leads to specified pair of active head connectors and a head if fitted The required channel can be selected on a second menu screen This is activated by pressing the CHANNEL SELECT screen key on the bottom row The screen changes to show the available channels the presence of a head is detected when fitted i ore e HA TRIGGER NONE CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps Se CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps SIGNAL CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head SIGNAL O P Amplitude 20 000 mV cha Frequency 1 0000 kHz Siar TODAY S DATE TIME TRIGGER D Ext aa A As can be seen from the screen Model 9530 heads are fitted to channels 1 and 2 a Model 9510 head is fitted to channel 3 and no heads are fitted to channels 4 and 5 The highlight on channel 1 indicates that this channelis selected for signal output confirmed by the legend in the top central box Pressing any one of the right side soft keys selects that channel for the signal output Expected load is confirmed as 50Q once selected the selection applies to all signal channels The right most key on the bottom row toggles between expected loads of 509 and IMQ The presence of TRIGGER NONE in the top central box indicates that no trigger channel has been nominated Pressing the EXIT key will revert back to the standard DC Square screen
211. ads High Edge Frequency 10Hz 100kHz Minimum Maximum 500ps Edge amp Fast Edge Frequency 10Hz 2MHz Minimum Maximum Output Voltage Limit 888mV p p 5 56V p p 4 44mV p p 3 10V p p Units Division Scaling Multiplier Deviation 0 2V div 1 11 20 2V div 5 11 20 1mV div 1 11 20 1V div 10 11 20 Table 4 7 4 1 Edge Function Output Voltage Limits and Contributors Limits Provided they do not exceed the output voltage 4 7 4 2 Output Voltage Editing limits shown the contributors have the following adjustments Scope mode a Units Division in Volts division adjustable sequence 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 defaults High Edge 1V others 0 2V b Scaling Multiplier adjustable through integers High Edge 1 to 5 default 5 others 1 to 10 default 5 c Percentage Deviation a maximum range of 11 20 about the value of a x b at aresolution of four significant digits with two decimal places default zero Digit or direct edit can be used d Output Voltage adjustable in digit edit only by manipulation of a b and c defaults High Edge 5V others 1V The Digit and Direct editing processes follow the same general rules as for editing voltages described in paras 4 4 Tab Key and Cursors Scope Mode Repeatedly pressing this key moves the cursor from the default Units Division to the Multiplier then Deviation f
212. age Function 10 5 5 Final Width 215mm 10 5 3 4 Calibration Setup 1 2 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Standards DMM as shown in Fig 10 5 3 or via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in BASE CAL mode and then select the DC Square DC Voltage Positive function default selection when entering STD CAL Select the required output Signal Channel 1MQ Load trigger channel and Trigger Ratio if required via the Target Selection screen 10 5 3 5 Calibration Procedure 1 Starting at Cal Range 1 calibrate at all calibration points listed in Table 10 5 3 1 by performing operations 2 to 13 below Select the required 9500B hardware configuration by choosing the appropriate Cal Range For this Cal Range use a or b a If you wish to use the saved target calibration points used during the previous calibration of the 9500B do not press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key b If you wish to use the default target calibration points defined for this hardware configuration press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key Press the TARGET 1 or TARGET 2 screen key to display the target s Adjustment screen Note Omit operation 5 if you do not wish to change the amplitude of 5 this target calibration point a Ifyou wish to change the target calibration point amplitude use the TAB fe key to position the cursor on
213. alibration Equipment Requirements Interconnections Calibration Setup Calibration Procedure 10 5 5 2 Calibration Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B with Active Head e A high resolution Standards DMM with RMS AC Voltage accuracy of 0 3 or better between 0 5V and 2V at 1kHz and 45kHz For example a Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads incorporating a 50 load For example a Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor e Short high quality 4mm leads Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B LF Sine Function 10 5 13 Final Width 215mm 10 5 5 3 Interconnections Standards DMM 7 S Guard Q Guard D A y Q T w o E a I a Final Width 215mm AC Active Head ACTIVE HEAD INPUT 230 Vpk Ret 50k 0 WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 10 5 5 1 LF Sine Function Calibration Interconnections 10 5 5 4 Calibration Setup 1 Connections 2 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Standards DMM as Ensure that the 9500B is in BASE CAL mode and then select the LF shown in Fig 10 5 5 1 or via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and 50Q Sine function From entry default in the Target Selection screen load and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up press the N key on the right of the Front Panel Select the required o
214. annel to be used If the output is on and the channel is to be changed then the output will be turned off the new channel will be selected and the output will be turned back on again A settings conflict will be generated if a signal channel is selected that is already in use and an error message will be generated Response to Query Version The 9500B will return the name of the selected signal channel 6 6 4 4 ROUT SIGN IMP lt dnpd gt Purpose This command chooses between the 50Q or IMQ scope impedance matching levels for the selected signal channel The value of lt dnpd gt is rounded to select the required impedance values lt 55 select 50Q values gt 55 select IMQ Response to Query Version The 9500B will return 50 if 50Q is selected or 1E6 if IMQ is selected 6 6 4 5 ROUT SIGN SKEW lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 ON OFF 1 0 Purpose Use this command to choose a single channel then use the ON OFF 1 0 element to turn the channel ON or Off Repeat for each channel Note that at least two channels must be selected for signals to be generated A settings conflict error will be reported if the SKEW function has not been selected Other ROUTe SIGNal commands and ROUTe TRIGger commands are not valid in Zero Skew function Response to Query Version The 9500B will return all of the selected channels Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 5 Final Width 215mm
215. any channel output is less than 50pA Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Input Leakage Function 4 17 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 17 6 Using the 9500B to Test the Input Leakage Current of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 17 6 1 Introduction The test procedure consists of applying an open circuit and short circuit to each channel input in turn as specified in the oscilloscope manufacturer s input leakage test and checking that the resulting deflection is within specification limits 4 17 6 2 Interconnections a Use the appropriate active head to connect from the required 9500B signal output channel to the UUT input channel b If a UUT trigger is required use the appropriate active head or trigger cable toconnect from the required 9500B channel output to the UUT Trigger input 4 17 6 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrumentis in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with front panel operation In case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for Input Leakage test 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Input Leakage Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the
216. are arranged down the right edge Fj Waveform select Square with direction or DCV using screen keys NS Sinewave select amplitudes and frequency using screen keys and cursor controls Sa Edge select polarity using screen keys JLL Timing Markers select Waveform and Frequency Period using screen keys including Line Frequency Aux Auxiliary Functions select Current Composite Video Linear Ramp Overload Pulse UUT Input Leakage Test Auxiliary Input Channel Skew and Load Resistance or Load Capacitance measurement using screen keys b Mode Key under the Function keys The modes are Procedure Manual Configuration Calibration and Test refer to sub section 3 4 c Preferences Key the bottom key The user preferences provided are display adjustments of Screen Contrast Amplitude step factor sequence Time step factor sequence and Deviation UUT Error toggle refer to sub section 3 3 d OUTPUT OFF and ON keys with an ON state indicator LED in a separate column due to their importance e Alpha numeric keypad used for various purposes to be described later f The Tab key Cursor keys and Spinwheel These select and increment or decrement displayed quantities 3 2 2 3 Output Connections The ten output connectors are located on the left of the panel Use of these connectors is described in Section 4 3 2 2 4 PCMCIA SLOT 1 and PCMCIA SLOT 2 These slots are included mainly for Proce
217. as selected from the Select Model screen menu the 9500B will have downloaded all the procedures for the selected model into internal RAM If on this occasion no Procedure memory card has yet been inserted into the slot and procedures are still resident in the RAM see 5 3 3 6 then a message similar to the following will appear on the screen The MODEL X model has been loaded previously Press MODEL to use this model or insert a procedure card and then press NEW CARD to continue TODAY S DATE TIME NEW EN MODEL ABORT A choice is given whether to use the loaded procedures or to insert a new card to load a different model s procedures For the same model merely press the MODEL screen key and the 9500B will transfer to the Enter the SERIAL NUMBER screen Fora different model insert the card required for the UUT into PCMCIA SLOT 1 push firmly home and press the NEW CARD screen key for the sequence to continue After pressing NEW CARD the 9500B will transfer to the Select MANUFACTURER menu screen if more than one manufacturer is listed in the procedure card or to Select MODEL screen if only one manufacturer is listed ABORT returns to the Select USER NAME screen Refer to paras 5 3 3 13 Fig 5 3 2 5 3 2 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Access Guide Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 5 3 3 5 Select the Subject UUT Manufacturer Only available if more t
218. as sending the appropriate message to the operating system it also has a hardware link which bypasses the software Even if the program has locked up this button is effective in cutting off the output 5 2 3 General Notes 5 2 3 1 Output Slewing In the 1 Year Verification procedure within Procedure mode there is a need for the 9500B output to be adjusted slewed around the nominal test point value This enables the slew error to be registered in the 9SOOB internal memory to appear on printed certificates Front Panel Controls Fine Slewing Adjustments To provide slewing in single digit increments there is an ENABLE CURSOR screen key on the bottom row of all READ SLEW SOURCE screens The effect of pressing this key is to place the cursors on the least significant digit of the Applied Value enabling all the cursor keys shift keys and spinwheel to operate as in the Digit Edit facility refer to Section 4 paras 4 4 2 Front Panel Controls Coarse Slewing Adjustments Most initial slewing operations will require steps of adjustment larger than a single digit These coarser adjustments are available with the ENABLE CURSOR key cancelled Of the front panel keys only the spinwheel and the A and Q keys are enabled The size of their increments and decrements are calculated internally continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Safety and Genera
219. at the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Sine Hi Frq Sine mode LIN The following process takes you through all TARGETs in table 10 6 2 1 9500B Set Output ON Power Meter Select a range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the measuring device The conversion from power to pk pk voltage is pk pk Voltage V power 20 Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 2 1 Levelled Sine Function HF Linearity Cal Point Voltage Frequency Target 1 1 0000V 250MHz Target 2 1 5000V 250MHz Target 3 2 0000V 250MHz Target 4 3 0000V 250MHz Target 5 5 5000V 250MHz 10 6 2 5 Calibration Procedure Levelled Sine Function HF Flatness 1 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Sine Hi Frq Sine mode FLAT 2 The following process takes you through all TARGETs in table 10 6 2 2 The process sequentially calibrates all amplitudes at one frequency before repeating the same amplitude calibration points at the next frequency step 9500B Set Output ON Power Meter Select a range that gives an on scale reading 5 Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the measuring device The conversion from power to pk pk voltage is pk pk Voltage V power 20 Press ACCEPT CALIB 7 Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until n
220. at until no TARGETs remain s 90 Final Width 215mm Table 10 6 3 9 Edge Function 25ps Edge Speed Cal Point Voltage Frequency Edge Target 1 500mV 1MHz Rising Target 2 500mV 1MHz Falling 10 6 12 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Speed 10 6 4 Calibrating the Timing Markers 9510 only 1 Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Power Meter as shown in Table 10 6 4 1 Timing Marker Calibration Points figure 10 6 4 1 satisfies the equipment requirements in para 10 6 2 2 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Other Timing Marker Target 1 100 00mV 1 11GHz 3 The following process takes you through TARGETS 1 3 in table Target 2 250 00mvV 1 11GHz 10 6 4 1 repeating amplitude calibrations for frequency points in TARGETS 4 9 4 9500B Set Output ON 5 Power Meter Select a range that gives an on scale reading Repeat the sequence using the Cal Point voltage levels in TARGETs 6 Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to 1 3 foreach of these frequency points for a total of 9 calibration steps Target Amplitude on the measuring device The conversion from power to pk pk voltage is pk pk Voltage V power 20 7 Press ACCEPT CALIB Targets 4 6 1 6GHz 8 Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no Targets 7 9 2 0GHz TARGETs remain 9 Press NEXT FREQ then select TARGET 1 and return to step
221. ated on site All high frequency calibrations such as the leveled sinewave and pulse outputs are confined to the Active Heads which can therefore be calibrated independently They are small enough and light enough to be sent by regular mail services to a calibration laboratory Our global network of Service Centers provides a fast turnaround Active Head recalibration service By substituting a spare head for the one that is being calibrated the benefits of near zero downtime become attainable 10 2 2 Mainframe Unit Calibration Mainframe Unit calibration correction factors are stored in non volatile calibration memory in the Mainframe Unit The following calibrations are available e DC voltage positive and negative outputs selected using the WAVEFORM soft key on the DC Square Target Selection screen when in Calibration mode e Square voltage waveforms positive negative and symmetrical outputs selected using the WAVEFORM soft key on the DC Square Target Selection screen when in Calibration mode e LF Sine function selected simply by pressing the MU front panel push button when in Calibration mode e Resistance Measurement selected by pressing the Aux front panel push button when in Calibration mode 10 2 3 Active Head Calibration Active Head calibration correction factors are stored in non volatile calibration memory in the Active Head itself The following calibrations are required e Sine flatness ab
222. ation Procedure is at para 9 9 3 5 A short description of Calculating Validity Tolerances is given at para 9 9 3 6 and the final Uncertainty Calculation and Speed Check is at para 9 9 3 7 The Edge Function is verified by carrying out measurements of risetime in the sequences given at paras 9 9 3 4 and 9 9 3 5 at the verification points shown in Table 9 9 3 1 9 9 3 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Active Head connected to a verified Model 9500B Mainframe e High bandwidth sampling oscilloscope with bandwidth 26GHz for Risetime measurements Examples Tektronix Model TDS820 6 20GHz for 9550 9560 or HP54750 20 50 GHz 50Q SMA SMA co axial Trigger cable for trigger inputs to the high bandwidth oscilloscope e High bandwidth coaxial attenuator may be required if 9500B edge output voltage exceeds oscilloscope input capability Example HP8493 Copt20 26 5GHz 3 5mm 20dB attenuator 50Q SMA BNC adaptor Example Sumner 33 SMA BNC 50 1 9 9 3 4 Verification Setup 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Oscilloscope as shown in Fig 9 9 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 Oscilloscope Select the required function to measure edge response Caution The 9500B Edge function output is capable of generating voltages that may cause damage to sampling oscilloscope inputs with limited input voltage capability Use of an attenuator is typically required for outputs above 1V pk
223. atness above 50kHz Head Calibration 500ps High and Fast Edge Head Calibration Load Capacitance Head Calibration Final Width 215mm Termination Compensation Head Calibration Dual Sine Via Sine LF amp Flatness Frequency Special Calibration Current Via DC Square Linear Ramp N A Overload Pulse N A Zero Skew N A Auxiliary Input N A Input Leakage N A Pulse Width N A There are therefore no manual calibration procedures for functions listed in the table although confidence checks for them can be performed e g the Full Selftest procedure detailed in 9500B User s Handbook Operation and Performance Section 8 sub section 8 3 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Front Panel Calibration by Functions 10 5 1 Final Width 215mm 10 5 2 Summary of Calibration Process 10 5 2 1 General Procedure Subsections 10 3 and 10 4 introduced the general calibration process for the Model 9500B They also outlined the methods used to select functions hardware configurations and target calibration points and how to calibrate the 9500B at these target points This entire process is outlined again here as a sequence of simple steps 1 Ensure that the 9500B output is OFF 2 Connect the necessary measuring equipment to the 9500B s output terminals and set it to the required measurement function and range 3 Ensure that the rear panel CAL Calibration switch is set to the ENABLE position 4 Press the front panel Mode key
224. be measured by a suitable external Standard To calibrate at the target value use the Adjustment screen OFFS CHT 580 RESET TRIGGER NONE POINT O P Amplitude 1 0000 mv Target Amplitude 1 0000 mV TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT PREV SAVE NEXT ACCEPT TARGET TARGET TARGET CALIB e Ensure that the Output is OFF IMPORTANT Do not press the ACCEPT CALIB softkey while using the Adjustment screen unless you are sure that you wish to perform an authorized recalibration of the selected hardware configuration at the selected target value To prevent accidental calibrations due to inadvertent use of the CALIB key initial use of the Adjustment screen takes place with the 9500B output OFF If you accidentally press the ACCEPT CALIB key or attempt a calibration without first turning the 9500B output on the following error message will be shown Output must be ON for CAL Under output off conditions the existing stored calibration corrections will remain unchanged e Ensure that the Adjustment screen is displayed with the cursor on the O P Amplitude value e Set the Output ON The displayed output value has already followed to match the target value so the external Standard measurement will include the error between the output value and the target value e With the cursor on the O P Amplitude value use the A Q CX Jand gt keys to adjust the output amplitude until th
225. be s response is appropriate to the 9500B settings as detailed in the UUT Scope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Record the 9500B screen output current as detailed in the UUT Scope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 9500B Set Output OFF Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Current Function 4 10 7 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 4 11 Composite Video Function 4 11 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B to generate composite video for video trigger sensitivity calibration of oscilloscopes For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 11 is divided into the following sub sections 4 11 1 Introduction 4 11 2 Signals and Triggers 4 11 3 Default Settings 4 11 4 Menu Selections ee 4 11 4 1 Retained Channel Memory 4 11 4 2 Right Side Screen Keys 4 11 4 3 Bottom Screen Keys 4 11 5 Composite Video Function Operation 411 5 1 Value Editing eee 411 2 4 11 6 Using the 9500B Composite Video Function to Calibrate Video Trigger Sensitivity of a UUT Oscilloscope i 4 11 6 1 Introduction vee 4 11 2 4 11 6 2 Interconnections we 411 2 4 11 6 3 Calibration Procedure 0 411 2 4 11 2 Signals and Triggers The composite video signal generated by the 9500
226. be used d Output Voltage adjustable only by manipulation of a b and c default 20 000mV 4 5 5 2 Output Voltage Editing The editing processes follow the same general rules as for editing voltages described in paras 4 4 Tab gt Key and Cursors Scope Mode Repeatedly pressing this key moves the cursor from the default units division to the Multiplier then to the Deviation and back to the units division The type of cursor at each position indicates the type of adjustment possible Units Division Scope Mode The type of cursor barred used for the units division signifies that the value can be adjusted only as a step sequence value using the and Q keys The lt and C gt keys are inactive From the default SmV div the value can be raised using the A key by increments through 10mV div 20mV div 50mV div and so on up to 50V div providing that the other contributors will not take the output voltage value above 5 56V p p 50Q load or 222 40V p p IMQ load Similarly the V key will reduce the Units Division down to 10uV div unless the output voltage would fall below 35 52uV p p both 50Q and 1MQ loads Multiplier Scope Mode Again the lt and gt keysare inactive From the default x 4 the value can be changed using the N and V keys by single integer increments to values between 1 and 10 providing that the other contributors do not take the output voltage value out of its limits
227. between 100mV p p and 1V p p With Marker Style ULL for sinewave periods less than 909 09ps the maximum output voltage available is 500mVp p Output Period Frequency From the default 1 us 1 MHz the output period frequency can be changed to any value within its limits as shown in the table for the Marker Styles 4 8 4 3 Highlighted Marker Styles Each marker style is available in a version where each tenth marker is raised to higher amplitude highlighted for Output Periods of lus and longer a TULL Square Sine symbol for highlighted style is lull does not extend into Sine frequency band b HLI Pulse symbol for highlighted style is f lad c IAA Narrow Triangle symbol for highlighted style is Tash Limits for these highlighted versions are shown in the table Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Time Markers Function 4 8 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 8 5 Using the 9500B Time Markers Function to Calibrate the Time Base of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 8 5 1 Introduction Two types of procedures for time base calibration are given a Using the 9500B as a fixed source where the oscilloscope can be adjusted or a measurement can be taken b Using the 9500B as an adjustable source reading oscilloscope deviations via the 9500B screen 4 8 5 2 Interconnections a Use an active head to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UU
228. both DC and Square Voltage functions The limit can be set to any voltage from 10V to 110V The default warning threshold value 100V can be changed in Configuration mode The active threshold value is stored in non volatile memory When the output is on in DC Square or High Edge function the warning will sound when the output voltage setting is raised to or above the threshold value The output will stay at its previous value until the user confirms the new voltage by re pressing the OUTPUT ON button 1 For access to allow the high voltage warning threshold to be altered press the VOLTAGE LIMIT screen key on the Present Settings screen 2 This transfers to a configuration screen designed for changing the Voltage Limit The default value is shown Configuration The high voltage warning limit can be changed by using direct editing only The maximum value is 110V Slits A 396 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT DEFAULT 100 V 3 Use Direct edit to set the required high voltage warning limit After typing the value press the key on the keypad the Direct edit V screen key in the right hand column will perform the same action 4 The DEFAULT 100V screen key on the right can be used if 100V is the required level 5 Press the EXIT screen key to return to the Present settings menu screen The new high voltage threshold value appears on the Present Settings list No
229. brated at 20pF The specification tolerance for this value is 2 0 25pF 2 x 20pF 0 25pF 0 4pF 0 25pF 0 65pF We must now subtract this value from 20pF for the lower limit 19 35pF and add it to 20pF for the higher limit 20 65pF Enter the 9500B Absolute Tolerance Limits into their respective columns on Table 9 9 4 1 Verification Procedure Refer to Table 9 9 4 1 At each verification point shown on the table carry out the following operations 1 to 6 1 Test Cap Select the correct Test Capacitance for the verification point range 9500B Set Output ON and wait for the Load Capacitance reading to settle b Record the 9500B reading in the Measured Value column of the copy of the Table c Checkthatthe Measured Value is ator between the Absolute Tolerance Limits Set Output OFF Reading 9500B Table 9 9 4 1 Load Capacitance Measurement Verification Please copy the following table Enter the values in the columns on the copy Capacitance Test Test Range Value 9500B Capacitance Measurement Calibrated Spec 9500B Absolute Tolerance Limits 9500B Measured Lower Higher Value Low 15 25pF pF 2 0 25pF pF High 85 95pF pF 3 0 25pF pF 9 34 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B 10 1 About Section 10 Section 10 outlines general procedures for calibrating the Model 9500
230. btain the higher limit at 1 OMHz by adding the Validity Tolerance to the 50kHz Reference value The lower limit at 1OMHz is found by subtracting the Validity Tolerance from the 50kHz Reference value 1 Copy the Tables 9 9 2 1 9 9 2 2 9 9 2 3 and 9 9 2 4 2 Starting with Table 9 9 2 7 follow the correct sequence of verification points as shown on the table and carry out operations 3 to 7 at the verification points on the table 3 9500B a Set the Output Volts p p as required for the verification points on the table b Set Frequency to 50kHz c Set Output ON 4 Power Meter Select a power range which gives an on scale reading the example Power Meter auto ranges to accommodate the input power 5 Ref a Measure the 9500B output power at 50kHz and calculate the Pk Pk value of 9500B output voltage into 50Q Pk Pk Voltage 20V power into 509 b Record the result in the Measured p p Voltage at 50kHz column on the copy of the Table 6 Flatness a Set the 9500B Frequency to the first SF point in the table b measure the 9500B output power and calculate the Pk Pk value of 9500B output voltage into 50Q Pk Pk Voltage 20V power into 509 c Record the result in the Measured p p Voltage for Flatness Check column for the verification point on the copy of the Table d Set the 9500B Frequency to the next SF point in the table and repeat operations b and c e Repeat operation d for all other SF points
231. cal point UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Observe and note the amplitude response aaa De al ed m Calibration a Use the 9500B Deviation control to slew the 9500B Output current until the UUT s response is appropriate to the 9500B settings as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b Record the 9500B screen output current as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 4 10 8 DCI Operation 4 10 8 1 Polarity Waveform Selection Screen From the power on default pressing the WAVEFORM screen key transfers to the waveform menu screen M OFF NONE 7 00 mA div x4 4 0000 mAr Deviation 00 00 a O P Amplitude 4 0000 mAr Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL Ea SELECT 1g Both polarities of DC Current output are listed merely as different waveforms As an example pressing the key from the setup shown above will present the DC function screen showing negative values selected of course the frequency parameter has disappeared from the screen _ 1 TOO mAldiv x4 4 0000 mA Deviation 90 00 4 9 O P Amplitude 4 0200 mA TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANN
232. calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 1 of this manual 6 6 2 17 CAL HEAD E70 lt cpd gt LIN GAIN SPE Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 4 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 3 of this manual 6 6 2 18 CAL HEAD E150 lt cpd gt LIN GAIN SPE Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 4 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 3 of this manual 6 6 2 19 CAL HEAD E500 lt cpd gt LIN GAIN SPE Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 4 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 3 of this manual 6 6 2 20 CAL HEAD MARK lt cpd gt SIN Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 2 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 4 of this manual 6 6 2 21 CAL HEAD CAP Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 2 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 5 of this manual 6 6 2 22 CAL HEAD RES Purpose This command provides the setup conditions specified in step 2 of the calibration sequence as detailed in section 10 6 6 of this manual 6 6 2 23 CAL HEAD STOR lt spd gt lt cpd gt PRD7 PRD14 PRD30 PRD60 Purpose This command provides the store for the calibration data as detailed in section 10 6 7 of this manual Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any
233. ce 8 2 1 Intervals Firmware Upgrade 8 2 3 1 8 2 3 2 Removing the Top Cover c 8 2 Top Guard Shield and Calibration Seal AUN A A Removing the Filter Element Cleaning the Filter Element Refitting the Filter Element Refitting the Top Cover Replacement Parts ntroduction Procedure 8 3 Model 9500B 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 3 4 Types of Test 8 3 1 Base Heads All and Fast Selftests 8 3 2 8 3 2 2 8 3 2 3 8 3 2 4 Selftes Interface Test est and Selftest 8 4 Printing Selftest Results 8 4 1 Introduction 8 4 2 Parallel Port 8 4 3 Printing Setup ne 8 4 3 1 Printer Type 8 5 8 4 3 2 Data Formatting Entry to Test Mode Aborting the Selftest Selftest Runs to Completion Viewing the Test Results Printing the Test Results at Power On Access to Interfact S Display Memory Checks Keyboard Checks 8 7 Display Checks Memory Card Checks Tracker Ball Checks Printer Checks 8 4 4 Results Printout 0 0 ecco Appendix A Error Reporting Subsystem Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 8 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 8 2 Routine Maintenance 8 2 1 General Cleaning WARNING Disconnect the power line cord before cleaning see the Safety Issues section at the front of this manual Remove dust from the top cover using a soft brush do not use a clot
234. cedure mode only e Select the type of certificate required to be printed alter some of the certificate details and re format its pages Procedure mode only e Clear the displayed list of Procedure mode users 1 2 2 4 Calibration Mode Calibration of the 9500B itself cannot proceed until two security measures have been satisfied 1 The rear panel CAL switch must be set to its ENABLE position Note The switch is recessed behind a small hole at shipment this hole is covered by a paper seal which should not be broken except for an authorized recalibration A broken seal is regarded as invalidating the previous calibration 2 An acceptable password must be entered on the screen Once into Calibration mode there are three types of calibration available These should be used only under supervision if it is suspected that calibration may be required contact your Fluke Service Center e Special calibration enabling automatic calibration of the main A D converter e Factory use only is an initial calibration which is not available to users requiring a second password e Standard Calibration will initiate manual calibration procedures for those functions requiring recalibration Calibration of the 9500B is detailed in Section 9 Specification Verification and Section 10 Calibration Adjustment Those 9500B calibration sequences which are user accessible are detailed in Section 10 If it is suspec
235. ch Height 2 2 Lifting and Carrying the Model 9500B i 2 2 1 Lifting and Carrying from Bench Height seseeeeerees 2 1 1 Disconnect and remove any cables from the rear panel 2 2 2 Lifting and Putting Down at Low Level ee 2 1 2 The9500B center of gravity is concentrated at the rear Tilt the unit 2 3 Unpackingiand IMNSpeCtOm cc ccccccseeseecsseeeeeeteeeceecenetecseceneeseteeedeess 2 2 so that itis standing vertically onits rear panel with the feet towards Oa Storage ea a Ee a A A A sate 2 2 you at the edge of the bench 2 5 Preparationifot ShipMeNt scssssne n nieeden is 2 2 3 Grasp the instrument at the bottom rear panel corner furthest away 2 6 Calibration Enable Switch cssssssssssssssssessseseesesseeeeetensseeeeesnsseeee 2 2 from you and tilt it slightly to rest against you Take the weight and 2 f Preparation for Operation seccivcceciscsccsisiensceeseesccrtiisesenueiecnieeiaassses 2 3 carry it vertically at the same height making sure that it remains 2 8 2 9 resting against you 2 7 1 Mounting v sccinccsnn 2 4 a 2 7 1 1 Bench Mounting 2 4 4 Place the 9500B down at the same level by setting it vertically on 2 7 1 2 Rack Mounting 24 to the surface then swivel it so that it can be tilted back on to its feet 2 7 2 Power Input 2 6 PTA e SPOWSECADIC O isis cevtscatetesctetiie E E EE 2 6 27A POWw r FUSE sicscscstserecits segrccstsedncesccune raeas Eranti EEEn 2 6 2 2
236. cluded in the most recent FUNC command and the most recent VOLT or CURR command The returned number will be in standard scientific format 50us would be returned as 5 0E 5 6 6 5 30 SOUR WIDT CW FIX 2 lt dnpd gt Purpose This command is used to set the width of the pulse waveform The amplitude of the pulse is fixed but the frequency can be modified with the SOURce FREQuency command The CW and FIXed optional parmeters are included to provide continuity with other similar commands The command is only valid for the PWIDth function lt dnpd gt The lt dnpd gt is a number which sets the required pulse width expressed in units of Seconds Response to Query Version The instrument will return the present width value for the pulse The returned number will be in standard scientific format 50us would be returned as 5 0E 5 6 6 14 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 6 CONFigure Subsystem This subsystem is used to select the input resistance or input capacitance measurement mode Note about Measurement in the 9500B There are only two parameters that a 9500B can measure the UUT input capacitance and the UUT input resistance These are simple measurements with the user having no control over read rate resolution trigger timing etc Note that the Group Execute Trigger GET is not available on the 9500B The instrument is configured with DTO interface capabilit
237. condition may be reached when the Calibration memory for a particular Cal Point is heavily biassed in one direction A conflict can arise between the limits on the O P Amplitude value and the target value In response to successive attempts at adjustment the 9500B will keep repeating the error message Outside amplitude range and calibration is not accepted This conflict can often be resolved by pressing the RESET CAL POINT soft key to clear the cal memory to zero then recalibrating If this does not work then it could indicate one of two causes 1 the Model 9500B has developed a fault 2 the measuring instrument has developed a fault is incorrectly set up or is incorrectly connected to the Model 9500B s terminals The cause should be determined and rectified before proceeding If this is not possible then you should contact your Fluke Service Center 10 4 4 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Standard Calibration Basic Sequences 10 4 5 Standard Calibration of AC Functions Standard calibration of the Square Voltage and Sine Voltage functions in the 9500B uses the same procedure as that described in Paras 10 4 1 to 10 4 4 of this section except that the frequency of the target calibration points must also be set 10 4 5 1 Output Frequency Synihesis The frequency of the Model 9500B s Square Voltage and Sine Voltage output is derived digitally from an internal reference frequency crystal which is suffici
238. creen as detailed in the UUT Scope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide If no adjustment is provided record the probe s amplitude response at the calibration point as detailed in the UUT Scope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 9500B Set Output OFF 4 10 6 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Current Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 10 9 5 UUT Current Probe Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Scope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 8 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required DC current and polarity for the UUT Probe amplitude cal point 2 UUT Scope a Select the correct channel for the cal point b Select DC Coupled if required c Select the correct range for the cal point 3 9500B Ensure that Output is OFF 4 UUT Scope a Set the Y controls to place the trace on graticule zero 5 9500B Set Output ON 6 UUT Scope a Auto trigger the oscilloscope or use the 100Hz Trigger from the 9500B Adjust the UUT for a stable display b Observe and note the DC level change from graticule zero Calibration Use the 9500B Deviation control to slew the 9500B Output current until the UUT pro
239. cription uses as an example the DC Square function which has eleven positive DC hardware configurations called Cal Ranges to generate output voltages between 888 00mV and 222 40V Each Cal Range requires two target value calibration points generating two associated correction factors The factors are stored in non volatile memory and are subsequently used to correct all outputs which employ the hardware configuration We will start by assuming that the Cal mode of the DC Voltage function has been selected as described in Section 10 3 of this handbook This presents the Target Selection screen similar to that illustrated in the next column 10 4 2 Target Selection Screen Selecting Hardware Configurations OFF SIGNAL CHT 50a TARGET TRIGGER NONE 1 2 TARGET Cal Range 1 2 888 uV to 2 10 mV SAVED CALIBRATION TARGETS 1 1 mV low 2 1 9 mv high TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL DEFAULT FORM SELECT TARGETS 10 4 2 1 Waveform Selection Refer to para 10 3 6 1 10 4 2 2 Hardware Configurations Fora given function selecting a particular Cal Range switches in the relevant hardware configuration which will generate the required span from the function s total output range The span of the hardware configuration appears under the Cal Range selection on the screen For example the total output range in DC Square function DC positive output co
240. ct the Load Resistance Measurement function From entry default in the Target Selection screen press the Aux key on the right of the Front Panel Select the required output Signal Channel via the Target Selection screen Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Load Resistance Measurement Function 10 5 17 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 5 6 5 Calibration Procedure 1 2 Starting at Target 1 calibrate at all calibration points listed in Table 10 5 6 1 by performing operations 2 to 15 below Use a or b a If you wish to use the saved target calibration points used during the previous calibration of the 9500B do not press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key b Ifyou wish to use the default target calibration points press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key Saved default targets should be considered as nominal values with the actual value being used during calibration which is typically not saved at step 13 Select the required load resistance by choosing the appropriate TARGET 1 TARGET 2 TARGET 3 or TARGET 4 screen key to display the target s Adjustment screen Note Omit operation 4 if you do not wish to change the resistance 4 value of this target calibration point a Ifyou wish to alter the target resistance use any editing mode to change this value note that the new value must lie within the Max and Min limits specified in Table 10 5 6 1 b Press the SAVE TARGET soft key If usi
241. ction 10 3 2 Mode Selection cceee 10 3 3 Selection of Calibration Mode 10 3 4 Special Calibration 00 2 10 3 5 Special Cal Adjust FREQ 00 ee 10 3 6 Mainframe Standard Calibration STD CAL 10 3 7 Overview of Calibration Operations vee Standard Calibration Basic Sequences cccceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeseeaeeeeeneeetes TO AA IMPOAUCHOM essien E EE E REENA 10 4 2 Target Selection Screen Selecting Hardware Configurations 104 3 TheAdjustment SCreGn a0 eceruisen isan rere ie 10 4 4 Calibrating the Model 9500B at Target Values ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeee 10 4 5 Standard Calibration of AC FUNCTIONS 0 0 0 0 ccc cecceccceeesessteeeeeeeeeseteseeeeeeeeseaaee 10 4 6 Exit from Calibration Cal Date and Cal Due Date ec cececeeeeeeeeeeeeee Model 9500B User s Handbook Contents List Page Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Cont 10 5 Front Panel Calibration by Functions 10 6 105 1 WAUOCUCUON sirean msee PATTE ENRE 10 5 2 Summary of Calibration Process cccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseneeeeeieeeeeees 10 5 3 DC Square DC Voltage Calibration 10 5 4 DC Square Square Calibration 10 5 5 LF Sine Voltage Calibration ccecccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenieeeeees 10 5 6 Load Resistance Measurement Calibration cccceeeeees
242. ctive Head to the input of the RF Power Meter head for Amplitude measurements Example Huber amp Suhner Adapter type no 31BNC N 50 51 or 31N PC3 5 50 1 9 9 2 3 Interconnections RF Power Meter Sensor Input RF Head Assembly Precision N to BNC Adaptor Fig 9 9 2 1 RF Sine Voltage Verification Interconnections Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 23 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 9 9 2 9 9 2 4 Verification Setup 1 2 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the RF Power Meter as shown in Fig 9 9 2 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode and then select the Sine function N key Select the required output Signal Channel 50Q Load Trigger Channel and Trigger Ratio if required 9 9 2 5 Verification Procedure Verifying the Levelled Sine Function Flatness Contd 8 Other Tables Repeat Items 2 to 7 but for Tables 9 9 2 2 9 9 2 3 and 9 9 2 4 in turn The measurements are now complete 9 9 2 6 Calculation of Validity Tolerances 1 Introduction The first part of the verification procedure in sub section 9 9 1 deals with verification of amplitude at frequencies below 50kHz into input impedance of 509 A DMM in ACV function is used here as the calibration standard Unfortunately the frequency response of DMMs falls off at frequencies which must be used
243. curacy of other devices 4 2 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Interconnections Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 3 Manual Mode Function Selection 4 3 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to selecting the functions in Manual mode The following topics are covered 43A MMIOGUGHON Tasisi kaa 4 3 1 4 3 2 Selection of Manual Mode 43 1 4 3 3 Front Panel Function Keys 43 1 4 3 3 1 Function Keys 43 1 4 3 3 2 Default Settings 0 0 ese 4 3 1 4 3 3 3 OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR Panel Right Side Keys select Functions 4 3 1 4 3 2 Selection of Manual Mode Whenever the 9500B is in another mode Manual mode can be selected by pressing the front panel Mode key followed by the Manual screen key at the left of the bottom row N B The 9500B can be made to default to either Manual or Procedure mode at power up refer to para 3 4 3 6 Power up mode 4 3 3 Front Panel Function Keys N B This description assumes that the 9500B is powered up and that Manual mode is active Fig 4 3 3 1 9500B Function Keys 4 3 3 1 Function Keys A function is accessed by pressing one of five keys at the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel as highlighted in Fig 4 3 3 1 4 3 3 2 Default Settings When entering Manual mode the system selects DC Square function The system defaults to show the DC Square menu screen Ty OFF acces none x10 SDE mVidiv
244. d WARNING Head on channel WARNING Head on channel WARNING Head on channel WARNING Head on channel is past cal due date is past cal due date is past cal due date is past cal due date is is is is is is UPWNHR UW past near near near near near cal cal cal cal cal cal default set 4213 WARNING Head on channel 4214 WARNING Head on channel 4215 WARNING Head on channel 4216 WARNING Head on channel 4217 WARNING Head on channel 4218 WARNING Head on channel 4219 WARNING Unable to restore 4220 WARNING 4221 Characterization 4501 Limits main DAC gain 4502 Limits composite DAC zero 4503 Limits trim DAC gain 4504 Limits offset DAC gain 4505 Limits main DAC linearity 4506 Failed to write to flash RAM 4507 Limits gain of 2 zero 4508 Limits gain of 0 5 zero 4509 Limits DAC output zero 4510 Limits 0 75 buffer zero 4511 Limits DAC positive zero 4512 Limits DAC negative zero 4513 Limits DAC positive FR 4514 Limits DAC negative FR 4515 Limits DAC FR ratio 4516 Limits DAC max DAC min 4517 Limits resistor ratios 4518 Failed to save resistor ratios 4519 Limits main DAC offset 4520 Failed to save impedance offset 4521 LF AC Chrctn impossible 4522 Excess LF AC flatness 4523 Failed to save DDS lfac error 4524 Limits Gain of 1 zero ALWAYS record the total message content for possib
245. d as a similar string whose sequence corresponds to the sequence of the program queries The final response in the string will be followed by the terminator nl newline with EOI Response Decode The data contained in the four fields is organized as follows e First field manufacturer e Second field model e Third field serial number e Fourth field firmware level will possibly vary from One instrument to another Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable 6 C4 Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C 6 Operation Complete This command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements OPC OPC Execution Errors is a synchronization command which will generate an operation None complete message in the standard Event Status Register when all pending operations are complete Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable 6 C 7 Operation Complete This query conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements OPC Response Decode The value returned is always 1 which is placed in the output queue when all pending operations are complete Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 C 8 Recall the 9500B Instrument Hardware Fitment This command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard req
246. d no Procedures Downloaded Up to now there has been no need to use the Procedure memory card After this point the 9500B needs to extract information from the card so the card required for the UUT must be inserted into PCMCIA SLOT 1 and pushed firmly home But first Examine the Memory Card The 68 way socket pins can be seen on the end of the card to be inserted Keep this side on top Insert this end into 9500 slot Missing key Insert the Card When inserting the missing key must be located underneath the card on the right front Socket pins this end Missing key A lt underneath Top Insert If no Procedure Card has yet been inserted into the slot and no procedure is at present resident in the RAM see 5 3 3 6 then the following message will appear on the screen There are no previously loaded models Insert a procedure card and then press NEW CARD to continue TODAY S DATE TIME NEW a ABORT In this case insert the card required for the UUT into PCMCIA SLOT 1 push gently home and press the NEW CARD screen key for the sequence to continue The 9500B will transfer to the Select MANUFACTURER menu screen if more than one manufacturer is listed in the procedure card or to Select MODEL screen if only one manufacturer is listed b No Procedure Card in Slot but a UUT Model s Procedures Resident in RAM If on a previous occasion since the most recent power on a UUT model w
247. d to a channel is dominant and must be first de selected to change its use Pressing an unoccupied channel key will highlight the key s label and change the legend in the top central box For instance pressing the TRIGGER CH 3 key has the following effect OFFS CHT 500 RIGGER TRIGGER _CH3 500 CH1 RIGGER CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps CH2 CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps TRIGGER CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head RIGGER O P Amplitude 20 000 mVe cra Frequency 1 0000 kHz TREGER RIGGER NONE TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT SIGNAL TRIGGER CABLE ES AD CHANNEL RATIO SELECT Me The expected load value can be changed from 50Q to IMQ using the bottom left corner toggle key 4 5 3 4 Cable Selection If it is intended to use a cable instead of a full head to convey the trigger then a channel with nohead fitted must be selected In this case for example pressing the TRIGGER CH5 key has the following effect ig OFF SIGNAL _CH1_5aQ eoD J TRIGGER CH5 58Q CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps Reorg CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps TRIGGER CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head TRIGGER O P Amplitude 20 200 mow ona Frequency 1 0000 kHz E TRIGGER TODAY S DATE TIME NONE EXI
248. d using the softkeys WARNING Card data will be overwritten TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT SLOT 1 selects PCMCIA SLOT 1 for testing SLOT 2 selects PCMCIA SLOT 2 for testing EXIT returns to the Interface Select test menu screen Either slot can be used for the test If one particular slot is suspect then that naturally will be the one to choose The WARNING gives notice that the inserted memory card will be overwritten by this test This is because reformatting is required to perform the checks and the card inserted into the slot will be reformatted as a Results card The 9500B first checks for the presence of the correct SRAM card If there is no card in the slot if the card in the slot is nota SRAM card or if it is a SRAM card but not write enabled then the following screen is displayed Card slot test Insert a write enabled STATIC RAM card into the selected slot If no card in the selected slot or if card not write enabled or if not a SRAM card TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT After correcting the defect press the OK screen key This transfers to a new screen and the sequence of tests begins The test in progress is reported on the screen The 9500B first checks the state of the card s internal battery If the battery voltage is low this will be stated on the screen Card slot test Battery level is low TODAY S DATE TIME If there is no battery in the card or if th
249. de screen keys PRINTER and the appropriate selection of printer type refer to Section 3 paras 3 4 3 5 5 2 2 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Safety and General Notes Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 5 2 5 Saving Results on Memory Cards Front Panel PCMCIA Slots In Procedure mode the procedures for adjustment and verification operations for UUTs are controlled from a pre programmed memory card inserted in the left PCMCIA SLOT 1 on the 9500B front panel The results of these operations can be saved on Static RAM memory cards inserted in the right PCMCIA SLOT 2 The 9500B Test mode of operation can be used to erase SRAM cards containing old results and initialize them as blank results cards refer to Section 8 paras 8 3 4 5 Although FLASH cards are used to store procedures they cannot be used for storing results 5 2 5 1 Results Card Enabling and Insertion Use of Config Mode Config mode is used to enable results to be saved on memory cards Details can be found in Section 3 paras 3 4 3 17 Inserting the Card Before the results can be saved amemory card must be inserted into PCMCIA SLOT 2 and pressed firmly home If a card is not present areminder will be given on the screen when the internal program attempts to write results Examine the Memory Card The 68 way socket pins can be seen on the end of the card to be inserted Keep this side on top Insert this end into 9500 slot Missing key Inse
250. dealt with Digit Edit Sequence Scroll is easy to understand The default DC Square screen of Fig 4 4 1 is repeated in Fig 4 4 14 as an example Ly OFF rme x10 SDD mVidiv x4 20 000 mvo 19 Deviation 90 00 A 9 O P Amplitude 20 000 more Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL FORM Pz SELECT E Fig 4 4 14 DC Square Default Screen Using the Tab key to transfer through the four available fields in turn it can be seen that the mV div the Multiplier and the Frequency fields use barred cursors with the Deviation field using a triangular cursor Returning to the mV div field pressing the N key will increase the whole value to 10 0mV or pressing the Q key will reduce the whole value to 2 00mV always assuming that the sequence 12 55 has been selected in Pref facility All other values with barred cursors will also be incremented in the preferred sequence 4 4 4 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edit Facilities Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 5 DC Square Function 4 5 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B for generating square waves and DC voltages for use for amplitude calibration of oscilloscopes For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4
251. devices such as voltage dividers and power amplifiers must be switched to achieve this total span With this switching the hardware configuration changes Because each of these configurations introduces slight offset and gain errors into the 9500B output they must be compensated by calibration in order to maintain the 9500B s very high level of performance Calibration of the 9500B determines and stores the offset and gain errors associated with each hardware configuration so that they can be digitally compensated by the instrument s control processor The processor applies digital correction factors to the selected output value so that the analog output accurately matches the selected value within its specification This results in an accurate and linear output response across each function s entire output span 10 3 6 4 Target Calibration Values Individual hardware configurations are calibrated by accurately measuring their analog outputs at usually two or more points using a higher order calibration standard In most cases these target calibration values are values close to the lower and upper extremes of the Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 3 5 Final Width 215mm hardware configuration s output capability 10 3 7 Overview of Calibration Operations In general calibration of each of the 9500B s Mode Selection hardware configurations can be broken down into three dist
252. dix C the query PUD Its response consists of 2 two digits and a data area of 63 22 All commands are sequential overlapped commands are bytes 67 bytes in all not used 12 A separate list of every implemented Common Command 23 As all commands ae sequential there are no pending and Query is given in the alphabetical index in Section 6 parallel operations The functional criterion which is met aibsection 6 2 1 therefore is merely that the associated operation has been completed They are also described in Section 6 Appendix C 24 No representations are used for Infinity and Not a Number 13 CAL is not implemented 14 DDT is not implemented 6 A2 Appendix A to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Device Documentation Requirements Appendix C to Section 6 of the User s Handbook for Model 9500B IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries Implemented in the Model 9500B 6 C 1 Clear Status This command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements gt CLS CLS Execution Errors clears all the event registers and queues except the output queue None The output queue and MAV bit will be cleared if CLS immediately follows a Program Message Terminator refer to Power On and Reset Conditions the IEEE 488 2 standard document Not applicable Final Width 215mm Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C
253. djustable sequence 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 default 1 0000us b Percentage Deviation a maximum range of 45 00 about the value of a at a resolution of four significant digits with two decimal places default zero Digit or direct edit can be used c Output Voltage directly adjustable only by preferred sequence between 100mV and 1V default 1 0000V 4 8 4 2 Output Period Editing The Digit and Direct editing processes follow the same general rules as for editing voltages described in paras 4 4 Tab Key and Cursors Scope Mode Repeatedly pressing this key moves the cursor from the default Time Marker period to the Deviation then to the O P Amplitude and back to the Time Marker position The type of cursor at each position indicates the type of adjustment possible Time Marker Scope Mode The type of cursor barred used for the Time Marker signifies that the value can be adjusted only as a step sequence value using the AN and Q keys The lt and C gt keys are inactive From the default 1 us the Time Marker period can be raised using the N key by increments through 2us Sus 10us and so on up to 50s providing that the other contributors will not make the output period longer than 55s Similarly the V key will reduce the Time Marker period down to 500ps unless the output voltage is greater than 500mV Square Sine Waveform Changeover The changeover from square to sine occurs at a fre
254. ds DMM as shown in Fig 10 5 4 1 or via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in BASE CAL mode and then select the DC Square Square Waveform Positive function From entry default in the Target Selection screen press the WAVEFORM soft key and then press the TL soft key on the right of the screen Select the required output Signal Channel 1MQ Load trigger channel and Trigger Ratio if required via the Target Selection screen 10 5 4 5 Calibration Procedure 1 2 Starting at Cal Range 1 calibrate at all calibration points listed in Table 10 5 4 1 by performing operations 2 to 13 below Select the required 9500B hardware configuration by choosing the appropriate Cal Range For this Cal Range use a or b a If you wish to use the saved target calibration points used during the previous calibration of the 9500B do not press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key b If you wish to use the default target calibration points defined for this hardware configuration press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key Press the TARGET 1 or TARGET 2 screen key to display the target s Adjustment screen Note Omit operation 5 if you do not wish to change the amplitude of 10 this target calibration point The frequency is fixed and cannot be changed a Ifyou wish to change the target calibration point frequency use the TAB key to position the
255. dth 215mm nets WAVETEK _4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 9 9 1 1 LF Sine Voltage Verification Interconnections 9 9 1 4 Verification Setup 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected tothe DMMas 2 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode and shown in Fig 9 9 1 1 or via a similar PC3 5 or then select the Sine function N key Select the BNC 4mm adaptor and that both instruments are required output Signal Channel 50Q Load powered on and warmed up Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 21 Final Width 215mm 9 9 1 5 Verification Procedure Copy the table 9 9 1 1 Follow the correct sequence of verification points as shown on the table and carry out the following operations 1 to 7 at each verification point 1 Verification Points Refer to Table 9 9 1 1 2 DMM Select the correct RMS Voltage range for the verification point RMS Output Voltage 3 9500B Set the Output Volts p p as required for the verification point 4 4955 Ifusing the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor set its switch to SQV 50Q Ifnot using the Model 4955 ensure that the DMM input is AC coupled at 50Q input impedance 5 9500B Set Output ON and wait for the DMM reading to settle N B For Operation 6 the RMS Output Voltage values and RMS Tolerance Limits have been derived using the following factor Table 9 9 1 1 Sine Verification into 509 Load Please copy the following table E
256. dure mode Section 5 although there are secondary uses 3 2 2 5 Standby Push Button Pressing this button in the bottom right corner of the front panel will toggle between normal operation LED green and standby LED red The instrument will transfer automatically from normal operation to standby some 15 minutes after the most recent operation then pressing the button will immediately restore normal operation 3 2 2 6 Power On Off Switch Line power to the 9500B is switched On and Off using a switch at the left of the instrument on the rear panel Up is On Down is Off Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 3 Final Width 215mm 3 2 3 Output Controls The aim of this discussion is to become familiar with the 9500B interactive display and the manipulation of front panel controls We have chosen DC Square as a typical function for manipulation it is also likely to be the most familiar to most new operators Full details of the DC Square function are not given here they appear in Section 4 Subsection 4 5 3 2 3 1 Front Panel Control Sets We have already seen that there are two sets of front panel controls which manipulate the output configuration but briefly to establish a base line here they are again 1 Controls positioned in the right half of the front panel They are a Major Function keys arranged in a column down the right edge b Moving left the OUTPUT
257. e Calibration Enable Switch IMPORTANT This two position CAL switch on the rear panel protects the instrument calibration memory The instrument was initially calibrated at the factory so under no circumstances should the switch be operated until immediate recalibration is intended 2 6 For Recalibration If Calibration Mode is entered while the switch is in the DISABLE position the following warning message is placed on the screen Calibration switch not enabled Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 2 7 IMPORTANT Refer to the Safety Issues section at the front of this manual together with additional information in the Model 9500B General Specifications Preparation for Operation including Environmental Conditions Section 7 sub section 7 1 Before preparing the Model 9500B calibrator for operation note the danger warning A THIS INSTRUMENT IS CAPABLE OF DELIVERING AN ELECTRIC SHOCK UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES TOUCH ANY DANGER A INSTRUMENT TERMINAL UNLESS YOU ARE FIRST SATISFIED THAT NO DANGEROUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT Other than the main output active head connectors the connections to the 9500B are via the rear panel a D D A i amp A enman WARNING PON CAL FACTORY SET DISCONNECT POWER AND SIGNAL LEADS ENABLE BEFORE REMOVING COVERS INPUT won 2 FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK lt 40Vpk
258. e screen Configuration The current start page is 1 Enter a new page TIME 2 3 EXIT J Use Direct edit to enter the new start page number Press the screen key to confirm the new page number and return to the PAGE SETUP menu screen The new page number will appear on the Present settings list The EXIT screen key reverts to the PAGE SETUP screen without changing the start page number 3 16 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 3 4 3 23 Page length header and footer sizes Page length Header size and Footer size are changed by similar operations as for the Start page number change No further explanation is necessary After all the page setup characteristics are satisfactory press EXIT on the PAGESETUP screen to return to the CERT DETAILS screen 3 4 3 24 Pass indicator On the CERT DETAILS screen the PASS INDIC soft key acts as a toggle to turn the pass indicator facility off and on There is no transfer to another screen The state of the pass indicator on the CERT DETAILS screen merely toggles between off and on as the facility is altered 3 4 3 25 Appended message Message required for the Certificate For the printed results certificates users may wish to add a descriptive message 1 To access the message screen press the APPEND MESSAGE screen key on the CERT DETAILS screen T
259. e Input Leakage function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the gt softkey on the bottom of the screen Whenever the Input Leakage menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default settings gt OFF noe UUT Input Leakage Test TODAY S DATE TIME T CHANNEL AUTO m ser This The above default screen has auto selected the open circuit output as indicated by the icon in the top left corner and the highlighted screen key on the bottom row 4 17 4 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection and Cable selection all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 4 17 4 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 17 5 Input Leakage Operation 4 17 5 1 Bottom Screen Keys 7 Press to select short circuit output and provide a one shot trigger to the UUT nv Press to select open circuit output and provide a one shot trigger to the UUT CHANNEL Permits the screen signal setup to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel and cable channel paras 4 5 3 AUTO Producesatrain of triggers at 100Hz TRIG to trigger the UUT oscilloscope 4 17 5 2 Open Circuit Output Leakage Specification Output Leakage Current The 9500B output leakage current in
260. e are currently selected i e instrument is in measurement mode then the word NONE will be returned 6 6 5 3 SOUR PAR DC GRO lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 Purpose This command sets the output of the DCV signal to zero OV when selected ON and will return the output to its previous value when selected OFF Changing function will turn off the ground selection With output ON a settings conflict error will be reported if the DC function has not been selected lt cpd gt The character program data lt cpd gt ON or lt cpd gt 1 sets the output voltage to ground OV Conversely lt cpd gt OFF or lt cpd gt 0 returns the output to its previous value Response to Query Version The instrument will return ON grounded or OFF not grounded as programmed 6 6 5 4 SOUR PAR DC MCH lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 Purpose This command enables the input of the DC signal to multiple channels when the selection is ON and disables the multichannels selected when the selection is OFF see section ROUT SIGN MCH Response to Query Version The instrument will return ON or OFF as programmed 6 6 5 5 SOUR PAR SQU POL lt cpd gt POS NEG SYMM Purpose This command selects the polarity of the square wave above below or symmetrical about zero volts A settings conflict error will be reported if the SQUare function has not been selected lt cpd gt The character program data lt cpd gt POS sets the output sq
261. e battery cannot support read write operations then the statement will be Battery level is dead Note For are chargeable card with a low battery the low dead message may take several minutes to clear after pressing OK The next test is to check the size of the card memory While the 9500B is checking it will place the following message on the screen Card slot test Checking card size TODAY S DATE TIME Once the size check is completed the 9500B starts on a read write check meanwhile the display changes to Card slot test Card size XXXX k Bytes Performing READ WRITE test TODAY S DATE TIME After the read write check the 9500B starts on a walking ones check and the message on the display changes to Performing WALKING ONES test 8 8 Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test The test continues this time to format the memory into Results Card format A new message appears on the display Performing RESULTS CARD format Providing that the full range of tests and formatting is completed successfully the PASS statement is added to the screen Card slot test Card size XXXX k Bytes Performing RESULTS CARD format Selected card interface PASSED TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT i EXIT returns to the Interface Select test menu screen If the test fails at any point then the test will stop leaving the heading for the failed test on the scre
262. e external Standard measurement is the same as the target value Note that the O P Amplitude display will now include the error Note Limits are placed on the extent to which the Output Amplitude value can be changed Inourexample at 1 0000mV the amplitude cannot be set above 1 4500mV nor below 0 8880mV Beyond these limits the error message Outside amplitude range is given e Once you are satisfied that the external measurement matches the Target value perform the adjustment by pressing the ACCEPT CALIB soft key The displayed O P Amplitude value returns to the Target value the external Standard measurement remains the same as the Target value and the adjustment at this target is complete 10 4 4 2 Target Selection On the Adjustment screen using the NEXT TARGET and PREV TARGET soft keys it is possible to move backwards and forwards along the current target list for the selected function without returning to the Target Selection screen The lists are in Sub section 10 5 For example if the present Cal Range in DC Square function DC Positive target is Cal Range 2 and the Target 1 low 2 3000mV is selected then pressing the NEXT TARGET soft key transfers to Cal Range 2 Target 2 high 5 0000mV On the other hand from the same target then pressing the PREV TARGET soft key transfers to Cal Range 1 Target 2 high 1 9000mV 10 4 4 3 RESET CAL POINT Over a series of recalibration periods a
263. e going edge lt cpd gt FALL sets a negative going edge For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 7 Edge Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the present edge setting RIS or FALL 6 6 5 8 Purpose This command selects the speed slew rate of the Edge function SOUR PAR EDGE SPE lt dnpd gt A settings conflict error will be reported if the EDGE function has not been selected lt dnpd gt The lt dnpd gt is rounded so that dnpd gt 600E 12 200E 12 lt dnpd lt 600E 12 dnpd lt 200E 12 selects 100ns edge HV Edge selects 500ps edge selects 150ps edge For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 7 Edge Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the present edge speed setting 6 6 5 9 SOUR PAR MARK WAV lt cpd gt SQU PULS TRI LINE Purpose This command selects the waveshape of the timing marker function A settings conflict error will be reported if the MAR Ker function has not been selected Note that period frequency restrictions are placed on the waveshape selection An Settings Conflict error will be reported when outside limits lt cpd gt character program data selects waveforms as follows lt cpd gt SQu square sine waveform lt cpd gt PULS pulse waveform lt cpd gt TRI narrow triangular waveform lt cpd gt LINE square wavef
264. e in the list is on the screen and the NEXT FAILURE screen key is pressed the following error message will appear in the top right of the screen No more failures to view Pressing the NEXT FAILURE screen key will have no further effect 8 3 2 4 Printing the Test Results The PRINT screen key is present on the ABORTED or completed screens after the test has run to completion or has been aborted Pressing the PRINT key will print out all the available results Printing will only be possible if a suitable printer is set up connected and on line Refer to Sub section 8 4 Continued Overleaf gt Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 8 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 8 3 3 Selftest at Power On N B Certain catastrophic System Trip Errors may cause the display to flash on and off at the point of setting power on In this case immediately switch Power Off and report the fault to your Service Center The first normal action at power on is to show the Fluke logo and then the 9500B will run a fast selftest FLUKE 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator If no failures are found the 9500B will revert to the default power up mode which is either Manual mode or Procedure mode If System Trip failures are encountered the 9500B will show the System Trip screen RESUME If non trip failures are encountered the 9500B will lapse into Test mode at the foll
265. e or Manual mode as previously programmed in Configure mode When Procedure mode is required and the Configure default is Manual mode it will be necessary to transfer via the Mode display By pressing the Mode key the system will present the Mode Selection menu screen for selection from the five modes Fig 5 3 1 Mode Selection Select required mode using softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME PROC MANUAL CONFIG CALIB TEST Fig 5 3 1 Mode Selection Menu The required mode is selected by pressing its appropriate screen key on the bottom row then the Mode Selection screen will be replaced by the mode s first menu screen or in the case of Configure or Calibration mode the password entry screen Press the Mode key on the right of the front panel to obtain the Mode Selection menu screen 5 3 3 Selection of Procedure Mode Entry Menus Common to All Procedures 5 3 3 1 PROC Key Procedure mode is entered by pressing the PROC screen key on the bottom row of the Mode Selection menu screen or after Power On when the Procedure mode is set as the power on default in Configuration mode 5 3 3 2 Procedure Mode Display at Entry When Procedure mode has been successfully entered the 9500B starts by presenting the Select USER NAME display Select USER NAME from list or type in a new name using the keypad C F BARNES F J BLOGGS JK FLIPFLOP TODAY S DATE TIME OK
266. e queue is read destructively as described in the SCPI Command Reference to obtain a code number and error message The query can be used successively to read errors in the queue until it is empty when the message 0 No error will be returned Response The response is in the form of String Program Data and consists of two elements a code number and error message The list of possible responses is given in Appendix A to Section 8 6 6 8 3 SYST DATE lt spd gt The date format can only be changed locally using the Date Format menu which is accessed via the Configuration menus N B A password is required for access to change the date format Refer to Section 3 Subsection 3 4 3 paras 3 4 3 1 and 3 4 3 12 Purpose This command is not used to change the date format It only changes the present date as recognized by the 9500B within the current date format as defined locally lt spd gt This string defines the present date The numbers represent day month and year but not necessarily in that order The locally defined date format governs the sequence in which these three numbers are recognized and their order within the string must reflect the locally defined sequence Possible Formats The string must conform to the scheme dd mm yyyy where the chosen sequence agrees with that set locally in paras 3 4 3 12 dd mm yyyy or mm dd yyyy or yyyy mm dd Response to Query Version SYST DATE The Query will return
267. e refuses to set any address outside the range 0 30 It responds instead with a Device Dependent Error displayed on the front panel screen Bus address must be within the range 30 The manual only method of setting the address is described on pages 6 4 1 including the point in time when the 9500B recognizes a user initiated address change Appendix E to Section 6 describes the active and non active settings at power on Message Exchange Options The Input Buffer is a first in first out queue which has a maximum capacity of 128 bytes characters Each character generates an interrupt to the instrument processor which places it in the Input Buffer for examination by the Parser The characters are removed from the buffer and translated with appropriate levels of syntax checking If the rate of programming is too fast for the Parser or Execution Control the buffer will progressively fill up When the buffer is full the handshake is held No query returns more than one lt RESPONSE MESSAGE UNIT gt All queries generate a response when parsed No query generates a response when read Appendix A to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Device Documentation Requirements 6 Al Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm The following functional elements are used in constructing the device specific commands Command Program Header Query Program Header Character Program Data Decimal Numeric Program
268. e the front panel tab key to move the dark band down the screen up to the top and down again thus testing all the display elements on the screen Display test Use the tab key to advance the band and the enter key to exit the test The screen text will shift automatically so as not to obscure the band as it jumps back to the top of the screen If there are elements of the screen which do not show light in the light background or dark in the dark band as it is advanced down the screen then this implies a failure Rectification will require access to the internal circuitry so no further user action is recommended except to report the result to your Fluke Service Center The Enter Key returns to the Interface Select test menu screen Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 8 7 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 8 3 4 Interface Test Contd 8 3 4 5 Memory Card Checks Memory Card checks are initiated by pressing the MEMORY CARD key on the Select test menu screen Selftest HOR KEYBRD Select test using softkeys m DISPLAY MEMORY CARD TRACKER PRINTER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Pressing the MEMORY CARD key on the Select test menu screen transfers to the Card slot test screen This invites a user to select the memory card slot to be tested and presents an Overwrite warning Card slot test SLOT 2 Select the card slot to be teste
269. e used in the PCMCIA SLOT 2 drive New SRAM cards must first be formatted for the purpose This can be carried out in Test mode as part of the Card Slot Test procedure refer to Section 8 or within Portocal II software Caution During the formatting process the Card Slot Test over writes all data stored on the card in the slot and sets up anew Results card header Note It is not necessary to re format a used card with results already stored for it to accept new data New results data from Procedure mode runs will be concatenated with existing data until the card memory is full Erasure of card contents should be done using Portocal II 1 Foraccess toenable Procedure mode results to be downloaded to a SRAM memory card in the front panel PCMCIA SLOT 2 press the RESULTS CARD screen key on the Present Settings screen 2 The RESULTS CARD screen key transfers to The result card requirement menu screen The power on default is DISABLE Configuration ENABLE The result card requirement is indicated by the highlight Use the softkeys to select another TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 3 To enable or disable the facility press the required screen key on the right of the screen If enabled without a results card inserted in PCMCIA SLOT 2 the selected procedure will not run 4 EXIT returns to the second Present Settings menu screen 3 4 3 18 Engineers Notes Engin
270. ector life Good practice includes e When notin use ensure that connectors are kept clean This is best done by using a plastic endcap Avoid touching components whose function is to make electrical contact e Visually inspect all connectors looking for dents scratches and metal particles Never use damaged connectors e Clean connectors properly particularly connector threads and dielectric faces Try compressed air first and if this is insufficient use isopropyl alcohol Avoid spillage and never use abrasives e When making connections be careful to align connectors carefully avoiding bending forces Always make the initial connection lightly to avoid cross threading and use a correctly set torque wrench for final tightening Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND Section 3 Model 9500B Controls 3 1 About Section 3 3 1 1 Introduction Section 3 is a detailed description of the 9500B operating controls starting with a general description of the front panel The user preferences Pref key and screen is described followed by a brief description of Mode selection 3 1 2 Section Contents Section 3 is divided into the following sub sections 3 1 About Section 3 3 2 Introduction to the Front Panel 3 2 1 Local and Remote Operation 3 2 1 1 Remote Semi Automatic and Manual Calibration Of UUT Oscilloscopes issnin iei 3 2 1 2 Use of Procedure Memory Cards 3 2 1 3 Manual and Rem
271. ed earlier in Section 6 Sub section 6 5 which deals with status reporting The specific reason for a query error must be determined by inspection of the command program No error codes are provided from within the 9500B 8 A 2 2 6 Device Dependent Errors DDE A Device Dependent Error is generated if the device detects an internal operating fault eg during self test The DDE bit 3 is set true in the Standard defined Event Status Byte and the error code number is appended to the Error queue The error description appears on the display remaining visible until the next key press or remote command Errors are reported by the mechanisms described earlier in Section 6 Sub section 6 5 which deals with status reporting ALWAYS record the total message content for possible use by the Service Center 8 A2 Appendix A to Section 8 9500B Maintenance Error Reporting Subsystem 8 A 2 2 7 Device Dependent Errors Reported only Locally on the Front Panel Screen The error list for local operations which are not reported to the remote operator is given below Note that the error number will not be presented on the screen 7001 Entry contains illegal characters 7002 Entered value is outside the allowed range 7003 Day entry is not a valid number 7004 Day separator is incorrect 7005 Month entry is not a valid number 7006 Month separator is incorrect 7007 Century entry
272. ed to 50Q loads only 7 7 2 Input Impedance Functions Resistance Measurement 109 400 409 900 750MHz to 1 1GHz 30 Not available via 9550 Active Head 909 1500 50kQ 800kQ2 800k 1 2MQ 1GHz to 3 2GHz 25 1 2MQ 12MQ Capacitance Measurement Accuracy Not available via 9550 or 9560 Active Head 1pF to 35pF 35pF to 95pF 2 0 25pF 3 0 25pF 7 6 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 8 Pulse Width Function Specification 7 8 1 Pulse Width Function Not available via 9550 Active Head Pulse Width n to 100ns Accuracy lt 5 200ps Adjustment Resolution ins to 4ns lt 50ps 4ns to 20ns lt 250ps 20ns to 100ns lt 1ns Rise and Fall Time 450ps typical Aberrations lt 5 pk typical Width Stability lt 10ps pk pk 10mins 1 C Pulse Jitter wrt Trigger lt 5ps pk pk Frequency 1kHz to 1MHz Amplitude 1V pk pk into 509 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 7 Final Width 215mm 7 9 Other Output function Specifications 7 9 1 Current Function Not available via 9550 Active Head Current Squarewave Amplitude 100uA to 100mA 100uA to 100mA pk pk Accuracy 0 25 0 54 A 0 25 0 5A 1kHz Ranging Amps div ranging 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 or continuously variable Frequency 10Hz to 100kHz Duty Cycle amp Symmetry 50 sym
273. ed to 9 0E6 and thus the frequency selected would be 9MHz Response to Query Version The 9500B will return the set frequency in scientific format 6 6 9 5 REF INP LOCK Purpose This query only command will respond with a lt cpd gt OFF 9500B is unlocked to the external input frequency ON 9500B is locked to the external input frequency Note that when the internal frequency is selected this command will always return ON 6 6 20 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax Appendix A to Section 6 of the User s Handbook for Model 9500B IEEE 488 2 Device Documentation Requirements TIEFE 488 2 requires that certain information be supplied to the user about how the device has implemented the standard The Device Documentation Requirements are detailed in Section 4 9 of the Standard document IEEE Std 488 2 1992 on page 22 In this handbook the required information is already contained within the descriptions of the system and this appendix provides cross references to those descriptions in which it is presented The following paragraphs have the same numbers as the paragraphs of Section 4 9 in the Standard document to which they refer 1 The list of IEEE 488 1 Interface Functions subsets implemented is given as Table 6 1 page 6 3 1 The list is also printed close to the IEEE 488 connector on the rear of the instrument The instrument address is set manually and the instrument firmwar
274. edited Bias The waveform is symmetrical about ground Ramp Time From the default 1s the ramp time can be changed in decades from 1ms to 1s Waveform Period The ramp times are part of waveforms with the following periods opened except on recovery from a standby Ramp Time Waveform Period period it will appear with the following default 1s 35 settings 100ms 300ms 10ms 30ms ims 3ms Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Linear Ramp Function 4 12 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 12 5 Using the 9500B Linear Ramp Function for Error Code Detection and Trigger Level Marker Checks 4 12 5 1 Introduction The type of procedure for generating Linear Ramps for error code detection and trigger level marker calibrations uses the 9500B as a fixed source 4 12 7 2 Interconnections a Use an active head to connect from the required 9500B signal output channel to the UUT signal input channel b Ifa trigger is required use an active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the UUT Trigger input 4 12 5 3 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 1 Preparation Ensure that both instrume
275. eeeee wes 3 4 Modes of Operation 0 cccccceeeccceeecneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeceaaeeecaaeeeeeaaeesenaeeeseeaeeseeneeseneneeeees Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Manual Mode 4A About Sectoni aissis ienaa aa a EAA EAS 42 MMterconNeECtONS iracucsdonnisreaas oas nea Ea aN NA a EaR ESEE EAER 4 3 Manual Mode Function Selection ja e E E E A e E E EEEE A A A E E A A T Functions 49 DOSg are RUNCUOMN aruer aane E AEEA E EEEE NENEA E AS 4 5 1 4 6 Levelled Sine Function 4 6 1 4 7 Edge Function 4 7 1 4 8 Time Markers Function 4 8 1 4 9 Auxiliary Functions 4 9 1 4 10 Current Function 4 10 1 4 11 Composite Video Function 4 11 1 4 12 Linear Ramp Function 4 12 1 4 13 Overload Pulse Function 4 13 1 4 14 Zero Skew Function 4 14 1 4 15 Auxiliary Input FUNGON crasse nenna aag aai 4 15 1 4 16 Load Resistance and Capacitance Measurement Function 4 16 1 4 17 Input Leakage Function ccccccecsceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteaee 417 1 A18 Pulse Width FUNGUO Airesiin wate eesncpeanrnii ane eae enone 4 18 1 0 4 Model 9500B User s Handbook Contents List Section 5 Using the Model 9500B Procedure Mode Dill AADOWTSOCUON Dae cece cas a E tees execpt otra ete cence EES 5 2 Procedure Mode Safety and General Notes 5 3 Procedure Mode AcCeSS Guide ssis eiaa NI E NAOTA ASTEAN NIEA Secti
276. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 10 5 16 9510 9530 9550 9560 Head Calibration Procedures cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 10 6 1 106 IMrod cti m sarera AEE EO ete ine 10 6 1 10 6 1 Levelled Sine Function LF Gain issiskirt 10 6 1 10 6 2 Levelled Sine Function HF Calibration cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 10 6 3 106 9 Edge Function Calibration sensores ain easiness 10 6 7 10 6 4 Calibrating the Timing Markers sursin asen naaa e a nEn 10 6 13 10 6 5 Load Capacitance Calibration ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeae 10 6 14 10 6 6 5003 1MO Ratio Calibration sissors ana tages eiachoensianteds 10 6 15 106 7 Exit from Head Calibration arkaa a ea 10 6 16 Fluke s Regional Sales amp Service Centers Inside Rear Cover Model 9500B User s Handbook Contents List Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm SAFETY ISSUES READ THIS ENTIRE SECTION THOROUGHLY BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL OPERATE OR SERVICE THE MODEL 9500B General Safety Summary This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with the British and European standard publication EN61010 1993 A2 1995 and has been supplied in a safe condition This manual contains information and warnings that must be observed to keep the instrument in a safe condition and ensure safe operation Operation or service in conditions or in a manner other than specified could compromise safety For the co
277. een Keys Digit Edit Keys operate on the value marked by the cursor The key labels will change depending on the cursor position as indicated i Cursor on any parameter A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero LINE Line frequency output is available FREQ only for Square waveform selection The key toggles between internal Period Frequency and the Line input Frequency ii Cursor on Time Marker X10 Multiplies the displayed value by ten 10 Divides the displayed value by ten E Press to change display from Period m to Frequency Press to change display from Frequency to Period iii Cursor on Deviation KA As Press to set Time Marker Deviation value in absolute units A Press to set Time Marker Period Deviation value in percent of Time Marker Period value iv Cursor on O P Amplitude See i above 4 8 3 4 Right Side Screen Keys Direct Edit Right side screen keys operate on the value in the edit box and acting in place of the I key exit from Direct Edit back to Digit Edit then set the value as evaluated in the box Cursor on Deviation Evaluates the number in the box in Period Deviation Percentage S Evaluates the number in the box in Seconds ms Evaluates the number in the box in Milliseconds uS Evaluates the number in the box in Microseconds ns Evaluates the number in the box in Nanoseconds 4 8 4 Time Markers Operation 4 8 4 1 Value Edi
278. eer s Notes When a certificate is being prepared in Procedure mode sometimes it will be desirable to insert additional information about special conditions pertinent to the procedure which was carried out For instance if the procedure was performed on a plug in module of an oscilloscope it may be desired to add the serial number of the oscilloscope mainframe as well as the module s serial number If in CONFIG mode the Engineers Notes are enabled then an extra field will be added to the certificate entitled Additional Notes in which any engineer s information can be entered It will appear between the Calibration Standard and Measurement Type blocks The additional notes can be added on a screen which will be shown in Procedure mode when Engineers Notes are enabled To Enable Engineers Notes 1 On the second Present Settings menu screen press the ENG NOTES screen key on the right This transfers to the Eng notes requirement screen DISABLE Configuration ENABLE The eng notes requirement is indicated by the highlight Use the softkeys to select another TODAY S DATE EXIT 2 Press the ENABLE screen key on the right The DISABLE key reverses the process 3 The EXIT screen key reverts to the second Present Settings screen TIME Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 15 3 4 3 19 Certificate
279. em Operational Parameters 6 3 1 Interface Capability 6 3 1 1 IEEE Standards 488 1 and 488 2 6 3 1 2 The 9500B in IEEE 488 2 Terminology 6 3 1 3 Programming Options 6 3 1 4 Capability Codes 6 3 1 5 Bus Addresses 6 3 1 6 Limited Access 6 3 2 Interconnections 6 3 3 SCPI Programming Language Using the 9500B in a System 9500B System Infrastructure 6 4 1 6 4 4 Addressing the 9500B uu 6 4 1 1 Accessing the Bus Address 6 4 1 2 Select Configuration Mode 6 4 1 3 Select MORE Parameters 6 4 1 4 Enter Your Password 6 4 1 5 Change the Bus Address Operation via the IEEE 488 Interface 6 4 21 General ones 6 4 2 2 Operating Conditions 6 4 2 3 Programmed Transfer to Local Control GTL or REN False 6 4 2 4 Device Clear 6 4 2 5 Levels of Reset Message Exchange 6 4 3 1 IEEE 488 2 Model 6 4 3 2 9500B Status Subsystem 6 4 3 3 Incoming Commands and Queries 6 4 3 4 9500B Functions and Facilities 6 4 3 5 Outgoing Responses 6 4 3 6 Query Error Request Service RQS 6 4 4 1 Reasons for Requesting Service 6 4 4 2 RQS in the IEEE 488 2 Model ooo eessescssseecssseesssseesssnseesssneessneeesnneee 6 4 4 6 5 6 6 Appendix A IEEE 488 2 Device Documentation Requirements Appendix C EEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries Appendix D Device Settings after RST Reset u s Appendix F Model
280. ements of amplitude in the sequence given at para 9 8 1 4 at the verification points shown in Tables 9 8 1 1 and 9 8 1 2 9 8 1 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B Mainframe with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e A high resolution Standards DMM with DC Voltage accuracy of 0 005 or better from 1mV to 200V Example Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads Example Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor e Short high quality 4mm leads 9 2 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 8 1 3 Interconnections Standards DMM E Guard Q Guard ACTIVE HEAD INPUT 230 Vpk WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR 230V PK MAX Active Head Fig 9 8 1 1 DC Square DC Voltage Verification Interconnections Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification Final Width 215mm Table 9 8 1 1 DC Square DC Verification into 1MQ Load 9 8 1 4 Verification Setup Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the DMM as shown in Fig 9 8 1 1 or Output Absolute Tolerance Measured Voltage Limits DCV Value Lower Higher via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in MANU
281. en followed by a failure statement For example if the failure occurred during the walking ones check then the following screen would be presented Card slot test Card size XXXX k Bytes Performing WALKING ONES test Selected card interface FAILED TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT a To diagnose the reason for a failure there are several further checks which can be made to localize the fault Firstly an attempt should be made to re check the same card in the other slot then if this is successful check a new card in the original slot This should narrow the fault down to one slot or one card If it is suspected that the 9500B is at fault itis wise to report the result to your Fluke Service Center EXIT returns to the Interface Select test menu screen 8 3 4 6 Tracker Ball Checks Checks of a connected tracker ball are initiated by pressing the TRACKER key on the Select test menu screen Selecting TRACKER transfers to the Tracker DISPLAY Selftest Ew KEYBRD Select test using softkeys DISPLAY MEMORY CARD TRACKER PRINTER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT test screen This invites a user to use a tracker ball to test the interface and reports on the screen the details of the last key to be pressed and the last movement of the ball The possible responses are shown on the Tracker test Use a tracker ball to test interface Last key pressed LEFT RIGHT Last direction UP DOWN LEFT
282. ency 1 kHz TRIGGER TRIGGER NONE TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT SIGNAL aaa CABLE CHANNEL RATIO SELECT been allocated to triggers This is confirmed by the legend in the top central box and the right side screen keys On the screen the TRIGGER CHANNEL label has changed to SIGNAL CHANNEL and pressing this will revert to the previous screen of para 4 5 3 1 so this key toggles between the signal and trigger selection screens Pressing the EXIT key will revert back to the standard DC Square screen of para 4 5 2 Note that in the bottom right corner of the screen the expected load selection label has disappeared because as yet no trigger channel has been selected The label will be reinstated if an active head is chosen to carry the trigger but if a cable is used a trigger load of 50Q will always be expected 4 5 3 3 Trigger Channel Selection Any of the channels can be selected for trigger so long as it is not already allocated as a signal channel In the screen of para 4 5 3 2 the top central box shows Channel 1 as the signal channel and unavailable for trigger Attempting to use an occupied channel will result in a bleep and an error message If itis necessary to use an occupied channel for triggers its allocation as a signal channel must be de selected Similarly a channel already occupied as a trigger channel cannot also be used as a signal channel The first use to be allocate
283. ent serial poll by the Application Program will discover that the 9500B was the requesting device while resetting RQS false again MSS remaining true and which of the summary bits is true The STB command is an equivalent command to serial poll where serial poll is not available 6 5 2 2 Event Register Conditions The Status Byte summary bits direct the application program down the structure towards causal events ESB and MAV are standard IEEE 488 features described in detail in Sub Section 6 5 3 OSS and QSS are features of the SCPI structure described in Sub Section 6 5 4 6 5 2 3 Access via the Application Program Referring to Fig 6 2 take as an example the main Event Status register Enabling the Events The main Standard Defined Event Status Register has a second Event Status Enable Register A program command ESE phs Nrf can be used to set the state of the bits in the Enable register This enables or disables the events which will set the main register s summary bit true Reading the Enable Register A query command ESE permits the application program to read the state of the Enable register and hence find out which events are enabled to be reported Reading the Main Register Another query command ESR reads the state of the main Standard Defined register to discover which event has occurred i e has caused the summary bit to be set true Reading this register clears all its bits
284. ently stable for the output frequencies of these functions not to require any routine calibration for at least 5 years Refer to paras 10 3 5 10 4 5 2 Changing the Output Frequency of Target Calibration Points When you display target selection screens for AC functions on the Target Selection screen you will notice that the Saved Calibration Targets and Default Calibration Targets all include a target calibration point frequency As an example the default calibration targets forthe Symmetrical Square Voltage Cal Range 1 Target 2 are illustrated in the following screen f FE TARGET f j TRIGGER NONE 1 CAO P TARGET Cal Range 1 2 556 01 pV to 2 10mV 1kHz DEFAULT CALIBRATION TARGETS 1 8 uV 1 kHz low 2 1 9 mV 1 9990 kHz high TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL SSG FORM SELECT _ BARGES When you select target 2 by pressing its soft key the Target Amplitude and Frequency will be displayed below the current Output Amplitude as shown in the following Adjustment screen illustration eas OFF SE CHI 500 RESET TRIGGER NONE POINT ICAU O P Amplitude 1 9020 mv Target Amplitude 1 9800 mV Frequency 1 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT PREV SAVE NEXT ACCEPT TARGET TARGET TARGET CALIB If you now wish to change the calibration point frequency this must be done by editing the Frequency s
285. equired function for pulse response calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Current Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the FL A soft key on the top right of the screen Select or _____ as required 4 10 9 4 UUT Current Probe Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Scope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 8 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required DC current and polarity for the UUT Probe amplitude cal point 2 UUT Scope a Select the correct channel for the cal point b Select DC Coupled if required c Select the correct range for the cal point 3 9500B Ensure that Output is OFF 4 UUT Scope a Set the Y controls to place the trace on graticule zero 5 9500B Set Output ON 6 UUT Scope a Auto trigger the oscilloscope or use the 100Hz Trigger from the 9500B Adjust the UUT for a stable display b Observe and note the DC level change from graticule zero Calibration If a calibration adjustment is provided adjust the UUT probe s amplitude response to be appropriate to the settings on the 9500B s
286. er Press EXIT UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the test point Select DC Coupling if required 9500B Set Output ON Read the Load Resistance value from the screen 4 UUT Response Record the UUT channel load resistance at the test point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Calibration Guide 5 9500B Set Output OFF on TE oP Me 4 16 6 5 Sequence of Operations Load Capacitance Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope Load Capacitance measurement points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of test stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 4 at each stage 1 9500B a Press the SIGNAL CHANNEL screen key on the bottom row Select the required signal channel Press EXIT UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the test point Select DC Coupling if required 9500B Set Output ON Read the Load Capacitance value from the screen 4 UUT Response Record the UUT channel Load Capacitance at the test point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Calibration Guide 5 9500B Set Output OFF TEV FPN es 4 16 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Load R and C Measurement Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 17 Input Leakage Function 4 17 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to using the 9500B to short circuit and open circuit channel in
287. er The parameters listed on the screen will be changed to reflect DC instead of Square _ OF x10 500 mvdv x4 20 000 mv E Deviation 90 00 A 9 O P Amplitude 20 000 mV TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL KEA FORM 7 SELECT Hz 4 5 3 9 DC Square Selection Summary DC and Square can be regarded as acombined dual function as each has a similar purpose and switching between the two is accomplished by selection in a common Waveform menu The parametric differences are evident once the appropriate waveform soft key has been pressed Detailed operation follows below paras 4 5 4 DC Square Operation paras 4 5 5 6 Square Operation paras 4 5 7 8 DC Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function 4 5 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 5 4 DC Square Operation 4 5 4 1 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll Keys operate on the value marked by the cursor The key labels will change depending on the cursor position as indicated Cursor on Units div X10 Multiplies the Units div by ten 10 Divides the Units div by ten i A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero 2 Toggles the value between positive and negative DC only ii Cursor on Multiplier A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value
288. eriod only 5 To correct the time press the CHANGE TIME screen key to transfer to the Change the time screen then use the alpha numeric keypad to enter the present time Configuration Change the time by using direct editing only Po or e TODAY S DATE EXIT CHANGE DATE 6 Press the EXIT screen key to return to the Presentsettings menu screen The updated corrected date and time will appear wherever they are used Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 13 3 4 3 13 HEAD CONFIG Information only Pressing the HEAD CONFIG key provides a screen which indicates the type serial no cal date and cal due date for each head fitted Co n fig u ra tio n Due Date 1 9510 XXXX XX XX XXXX XX XX XXXX 2 9510 XXXX XX XX XXXX XX XX XXXX 3 No Head G0 0B G000 20 00 0008 4 9510 UNDEFINED 22 2 2220 0 00 0000 5 No Head G0 00 G000 20 00 0008 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Head calibration stores head details and calibration corrections specific to that head regardless of the base unit to which it is fitted The above screen presents the stored details derived from the fitted heads 3 4 3 14 MORE Configuration After exiting to the Present Settings screen pressing the MORE key will provide entry to asecond Configuration menu screen showing the present settings of other parameters generally associated with
289. est service from the system controller 6 3 1 4 Capability Codes To conform to the IEEE 488 1 standard specification it is not essential for a device to encompass the full range of bus capabilities For IEEE 488 2 the device must conform exactly to a specific subset of IEEE 488 1 with a minimal choice of optional capabilities The IEEE 488 1 document describes and codes the standard bus features for manufacturers to give brief coded descriptions of their own interfaces overall capability For IEEE 488 2 this description is required to be part of the device documentation A code string is often printed on the product itself The codes which apply to the 9500B are given in table 6 1 together with short descriptions They also appear on the rear of the instrument next to the interface connector These codes conform to IEEE 488 2 requirements Interface Function Source Handshake Capability Acceptor Handshake Capability Talker basic talker serial poll unaddressed to talk if addressed to listen Listener basic listener unaddressed to listen if addressed to talk Service Request Capability Remote Local Capability incl Local Lockout No Parallel Poll Capability Device Clear Capability No Device Trigger Capability No Controller Capability Open Collector and Three State Drivers Table 6 1 9500B IEEE 488 1 Interface Capability Appendix C of the IEEE 488 1 document contains a fuller description o
290. et sets up the calibration target Poitrineau s ietan aea Epe ai rrii 6 6 2 TRIGger Initiates the calibration at a single point TARGet once the target and levels have been set up and returns 0 for pass and 1 for fail eeeseeseeeeeeesinernreennnee 6 6 3 SPECial Runs various calibration characterizations calculations and procedures cece eee eects 6 6 3 HEAD STORe Initiates storage of head calibration data iiisge erara iada aan 6 6 4 Used to control parameters associated with output CONNECTIONS 00 eee ce eee cee e eee eeeeceee tesa sees eseeseaeeseeeseeeseaeeeaeeel 6 6 4 STATe Controls output On Off SWITCHING assine A aii Nie ease eee ate ees 6 6 4 Used to define the output channels which are associated with signal and trigger outputs oo eee eee eee eee eee 6 6 5 FITTed Returns the type of head or cable or neither associated with each channel s 6 6 5 SIGNal PATH Defines the channel to be used as signal output path eects a 6 6 5 SIGNal IMPedance Defines the expected load impedance of the selected signal channel 6 6 5 SIGNal SKEW Defines and selects the signal channels to be used in Skew function e eee 6 6 5 SIGNal DUAL Used in Sine function Selects the two signal channels to be used in Dual operation s es 6 6 6 TRIGger PATH Defines the channel to be used as trigger output path ssessrssssesrsrsusrirennrenraanranressrnsenssrnssanernsenae 6 6 6 TRIGger IMPedance Defines the
291. etting e To do this first transfer cursor control to the Frequency setting via the Tab key Then alter the frequency setting using the same digit edit cursor controls spinwheel method or direct edit numeric keypad method used to change Output and Target Amplitude Note Limits are placed on the extent to which the Frequency value can be changed In our example at 1 0000kHz the frequency cannot be set above 1 0500kHz nor below 0 9500BkHz Beyond these limits the error message Outside frequency range is given Once the target has been saved the new saved Frequency will be shown as well as any new saved Target Amplitude on the Target Selection screen when the DEFAULT TARGETS soft key label is not highlighted Calibration can now continue as detailed in Paras 10 4 4 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Standard Calibration Basic Sequences 10 4 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 4 6 Exit from Base Calibration Cal Date and Cal Due Date Once all calibration has been completed you will wish to return to normal operation which requires a short exit process The normal means of exit from Calibration mode is to press the Mode key on the right of the front panel When you do this the 9500B will present a Warning screen to indicate that the 9500B calibration may have changed and to offer you the following options e altering the date stamp on any directly printed result
292. external measuring instrument approx 30 40 secs 10 5 10 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square Function Square Waveforms 11 When you are satisfied with the measurement press the ACCEPT 15 On the Target Selection screen press the WAVEFORM soft key CALIB key to generate and implement the correction factor required Select Square negative by pressing the FL key on the right of by the 95008 to ensure that its displayed O P Amplitude value and the screen Repeat steps 1 to 14 but using Table 10 5 4 2 for measured output value coincide The O P Amplitude value will each of the Cal Ranges Targets and Limits change to the Target Amplitude value and the adjustment of the 16 On the Target Selection screen press the WAVEFORM soft key output amplitude at this target is complete Select Square symmetrical by pressing the key on the right 12 Press the EXIT key to turn the 9500B output off and return to the of the screen Repeat steps 1 to 14 but using Table 10 5 4 3 for Target Selection screen each of the Cal Ranges Targets and Limits 13 Repeat steps 3 to 12 for each of the target values displayed in the Note If other functions are being calibrated in addition to Square Target Selection screen Waveform refer to Table 10 5 2 1 on page 10 5 5forinformation 14 Repeat steps 2 to 13 for each of the Cal Ranges detailed in the on sequencing calibrations Table 10 5 4 1 Table 10 5 4 1 DC Squa
293. f each code 6 3 1 5 Bus Addresses When an IEEE 488 system comprises several instruments a unique Address is assigned to each to enable the controller to communicate with them individually The 9500B has two primary addresses refer to Para 6 4 1 5 and Section 6 Appendix F which can be set by the user to exclusive values within the range from 0 to 30 inclusive They cannot be made to respond to any address outside this range Secondary addressing is not available The application program adds data to the active address to define talk or listen The method of setting addresses and the point at which the new user initiated address is recognized by the 9500B is given in Sub Section 6 4 1 6 3 1 6 Limited Access The 9500B has five main modes which are described briefly in Volume 1 of this Handbook Section 1 Sub section 1 2 2 Remote operation is subject to the following limitations e Procedure Mode When the 9500B is in Procedure Mode it is driven essentially from the front panel Remote Operation will not be allowed in this mode N B The9500B can be powered up in either Manual mode or Procedure mode as set locally in Configuration mode e Manual Mode Remote operation is available for each Manual mode function but for ease of programming some remote commands do not mirror front panel operations exactly e Configuration Mode Remote operation is not available and configuration commands have n
294. f the 9500B as defined in the accuracy tables given in Section 7 of this handbook i e the measurement equipment should be able to operate within the relevant 9500B limits so that no additional accuracy figures have to be taken into account The specific equipment requirements for verifying individual functions are listed in the sub sections detailing their verification procedures 9 4 Interconnections The form of interconnection required to ensure optimum conditions for verification measurements will depend on the individual function being verified and on the measuring equipment connected to the 9500B s terminals Suitable connections are described in the sub sections detailing the functions verification procedures 9 5 Verification Points The accuracy specifications detailed in Section 7 of this handbook cover the full range of output values which can be generated by 9500B and its accuracy can therefore be verified against the specification at any number of points in these output ranges Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm This section recommends a set of verification points 9 6 Specification Limits For each chosen verification point it will be necessary to know absolute measurement limits which can be used to judge whether or not the 9500B is performing within its specification As mentioned earlier the accuracy specifications detailed in Sectio
295. f the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel trigger ratio and cable channel paras 4 5 3 Press to select Direct Mode paras 4 4 3 4 Press to select Scope Mode setting the step sequence to l 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 as chosen using the Preferences key paras 4 4 1 2 4 5 5 Square Operation 4 5 5 1 Value Editing Amplitude At maximum and minimum output voltages the screen settings of the contributors values units division scaling multiplier and deviation are limited by the output voltage itself For example Qroap 1MQ Minimum Contributor Maximum Quoap 50Q Minimum Maximum Output Voltage Limit 35 52uV p p 222 4V p p 35 52uV p p 5 56V p p Units Division 10u V div 50V div Scaling Multiplier 1 Deviation 11 20 11 20 10 10uV div 2V div 1 10 11 20 11 20 Provided they do not exceed the output voltage limits shown the contributors have the following adjustments Scope mode 4 5 4 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 a Units Division in Volts division adjustable sequence 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 default 5mV b Scaling Multiplier adjustable through integers 1 to 10 default 4 c Percentage Deviation a maximum range of 11 20 about the value of a x b at aresolution of four significant digits with two decimal places default zero Digit Edit or Numeric Entry can
296. f the five screen keys TEST This key enters Test mode displaying the following screen Selftest Select test using softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME BASE HEAD ALL FAST Nace BASE runs a selftest of the Base Unit HEADS runs a selftest of all fitted Active Heads ALL runs a selftest of the Base Unit and all fitted Active Heads FAST runs the same confidence selftest as at Power On INTERFACE This key allows checks of the display and display memory the front panel keyboard the Procedure mode memory card slots the tracker ball and printer interfaces 8 3 2 Base Heads All and Fast Selftest BASE HEADS ALL and FAST selftests follow the same format By pressing one of these four screen keys on the Select test menu screen the 9500B runs that selftest The first screen shows the type of test the pathway under test and the number of tests remaining For example Selftest Running Base Test Testing pathway no XXX XXX Tests remaining in base unit YYY TODAY S DATE TIME ABORT In the following descriptions it is assumed that a BASE selftest was selected Other selftests have the selftest name appearing on the screen 8 3 2 1 Aborting the Selftest ABORT stops the selftest and displays the appropriate ABORTED screen For example Selftest Aborted Base Test Test ABORTED with no failures TODAY S DATE TIME
297. f verification points as shown on the table and carry out the following operations 1 to 5 at each verification point 1 Verification Points Refer to Table 9 8 6 1 2 Counter Select the correct display time trigger source and level to measure at the verification point 3 9500B Set the Pulse Width Duration as required for the verification point and set Output ON 4 Counter Adjust the trigger level for a stable display measure and note the output period 5 9500B Set Output OFF Table 9 8 6 1 Pulse Width Verification at 1Vpk pk Output Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the approriate Measured Period column on the copy Pulse Width Duration Absolute Tolerance Limits 5 200ps Lower Higher Measured Duration 4 0000ns 3 6000ns 4 4000ns 20 000ns 18 800ns 21 200ns 100 00ns 95 20ns 105 20ns Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 19 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 9 9 9510 9530 9550 9560 Head Verification by Functions Sub section 9 9 is a guide to the process of verifying the Model 9560 9550 9530 and 9510 Heads functions from the front panel The following topics are covered 9 9 1 Levelled Sine Function LF Gain 9 9 2 Levelled Sine Function Flatness 9 9 3 Edge Function 9 9 4 Load Capacitance Measurement Function The list of topics above are placed in the order in which the 9500B Head funct
298. failure was caused by neglect misuse contamination alteration accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling including overvoltage failures caused by use outside the product s specified rating or normal wear and tear of mechanical components Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work Following repair the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges FOB Shipping Point THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY ANDIS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA ARISING FROM ANY CAUSE OR THEORY Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decision maker of competent jurisdiction such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision Sept 1 2001 Fluke reserves the right to amend specifications without notice Final Width 215mm Final
299. fety and General Notes 5 2 3 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 5 3 Procedure Mode Access Guide 5 3 1 Introduction Sub section 5 3 is a guide to access to Procedure Mode The following topics are covered Page 5 3 2 Mode Selection 5 3 1 5 3 2 1 Mode Key 5 3 1 5 3 2 2 Mode Selection Display 5 3 1 5 3 3 Selection of Procedure Mode Entry Menus Common to All Procedures 5 3 1 5 3 3 1 PROC Key 5 3 1 5 3 3 2 Procedure Mode Display at Entry 5 3 1 5 3 3 3 Is Your Name on the List 5 3 1 5 3 3 4 Select and Insert the Procedure Card which contains the Procedure for the Subject UUT Model 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 Select the Subject UUT Manufacturer 5 3 3 5 3 3 6 Select the Subject UUT Model 5 33 5 3 3 7 Enter the Serial Number of the Subject UUT 3 3 5 3 3 8 Select the Procedure for the Subject UUT Model 5 3 4 5 3 3 9 Procedures Card Based Operating Instructions 5 3 4 5 3 3 10 ABORT 5 3 5 5 3 3 11 END 5 3 5 5 3 3 12 User Options Following ABORT or END 5 3 6 5 3 3 13 Common Operations in Procedure Mode Summary of Actions 5 3 6 5 3 2 Mode Selection A flow chart summarizing the access to Procedures is given at paras 5 3 3 13 Fig 5 3 2 5 3 2 1 Mode Key The five Modes are accessed by pressing the Mode key at the right of the front panel 5 3 2 2 Mode Selection Display At power on the system defaults into either Procedure mod
300. fication Table 9 8 2 2 DC Square Square Verification at 1kHz into 1MQ Load Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy Frequency Output Voltage pk pk Absolute Tolerance Limits pk pk Lower Higher Output Voltage RMS Absolute Tolerance Limits RMS Lower Higher Measured Value RMS 600 00mV 599 39mV 600 61mV 299 9979mV 299 67mV 300 28mV 60 000mV 59 93mV 60 07mV 29 99799mV 29 96mV 30 03mV 6 0000mV 5 984mV 6 016mV 2 999799mV 2 992mV 3 008mV 6 0000V 5 99399V 6 00601V 2 999799V 2 99674V 3 00275V 60 000V 59 93999V 60 06001V 29 99799V 29 96750V 30 02751V Table 9 8 2 3 DC Square Square Symmetrical Verification at 1kHz into 1MQ Load Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy Frequency Output Voltage pk pk Absolute Tolerance Limits pk pk Lower Higher Output Voltage RMS Absolute Tolerance Limits RMS Lower Higher Final Width 215mm Measured Value RMS 600 00mV 599 39mV 600 61mV 299 9979mV 299 67mV 300 28mV 60 000mV 59 93mV 60 07mV 29 99799mV 29 96mV 30 03mV 6 0000mV 5 984mV 6 016mV 2 999799mV 2 992mV 3 008mV 6 0000V 5 99399V 6 00601V 2 999799V 2 99674V 3 00275V
301. finally the effects of individual keywords and parameters are described Some extra identification of style and syntax is detailed in paras 6 6 1 1 and 6 6 1 2 to clarify shorthand meanings 6 6 1 1 SCPI Syntax and Styles Where possible the syntax and styles used in this section follow those defined by the SCPI consortium The commands on the following pages are broken into three columns the KEYWORD the PARAMETER FORM and any NOTES Notes are signified by an oblique stroke followed by curly brackets The KEYWORD column provides the name of the command The actual command consists of one or more keywords since SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as the tree system Square brackets are used to enclose a keyword that is optional when programming the command that is the 9500B will process the command to have the same effect whether the optional node is omitted by the programmer or not Letter case in tables is used to differentiate between the accepted shortform upper case and the long form upper and lower case The PARAMETER FORM column indicates the number and order of parameter in a command and their legal value Parameter types are distinguished by enclosing the type in angle brackets lt gt If parameter form is enclosed by square brackets these are then optional care must be taken to ensure that optional parameters are consistent with the intention of the associated keywords
302. fitted with a female connector a BNC male male adapter is required to interface with the Active Head and must be included in the capacitance value 9 9 4 3 Interconnections Calibrated Capacitor Unit Fig 9 9 4 1 Load Capacitance Measurement FunctionVerification Interconnections Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 33 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND Final Width 215mm 9 9 4 4 Verification Setup 1 Copy the Table 9 9 4 1 2 Test Capacitor Values 3 Connections 4 9500B a Ensure that the two Capacitors have been calibrated b Enter the low and high calibrated values in the Capacitance Calibrated Value column of Table 9 9 4 1 Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Capacitance unit or individual capacitors in turn as shown in Fig 9 9 4 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up a Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode Select the Aux functions Aux key on the right of the front panel Press the 4 soft key on the bottom row b Select the required output Signal Channel 9 9 4 5 1 9 9 4 6 9500B Absolute Tolerance Calculations Refer to Table 9 9 4 1 Ensure that the Test Capacitance Calibrated Values have been entered for the two Test Capacitors High and Low Use the specification figures to calculate the 9500B Absolute Tolerance Limits Example Let us say that the Test Capacitor value has been cali
303. for the intention of the SCPI mandate but also to provide a known starting point for application programmers Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 17 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 8 SYSTem Subsystem This subsystem collects the functions that are not related to 9500B performance 6 6 8 1 SYSTem Subsystem Table Keyword Parameter Form SYSTem ERRor DATE lt spd gt TIME lt spd gt SVOLtage lt dnpd gt VERSion FORMat 6 6 8 2 SYST ERR The Error Queue As errors in the 9500B are detected they are placed in a first in first out queue called the Error Queue This queue conforms to the format described in the SCPI Command Reference Volume 2 although errors only are detected Three kinds of errors are reported in the Error Queue in the sequence that they are detected Command Errors Execution Errors and Device Dependent errors Queue Overflow Any time the Error Queue overflows the earliest errors remain in the queue and the most recent error is discarded The latest error in the queue is replaced by the error 350 Queue overflow Purpose of SYST ERR Reading the Error Queue This query is used to return any error which has reached the head of the Error Queue and delete the error from the queue The Error Queue is first in first out so the returned string will represent the earliest error in the queue Th
304. forms to an active head s BNC or PC3 5 output S2 Load Resistance Measures load resistance in the active head s output circuit 4t Load Capacitance Measures load capacitance in the active head s output circuit gt UUT Input Leakage Tests Short Open circuit outputs directly to the output BNC or PC3 5 allow testing of oscilloscope input leakage current continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Interconnections 4 2 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 2 3 AUX IN Rear Panel Despite the huge flexibility if the 9500B it is sometimes desirable to apply signals from user s equipment to the inputs of a UUT oscilloscope for specific calibration or test purposes With the 9500B Auxiliary Input selected wideband passive routing is available from a rear panel 50Q SMA input through to the selected 9500B channel output using 9500B front panel controls No trigger pickoff is provided and internal triggers are not available 4 2 4 REF FREQUENCY INPUT A BNC connector on the 9500B rear panel accepts reference frequency inputs from 1 MHz to 20MHz in 1MHz steps from a TTL source to enhance the 9500B internal clock 4 2 5 REF FREQUENCY OUTPUT A BNC connector on the 9500B rear panel provides areference frequency output at either 1MHz or 10MHz from a 50Q source VSWR lt 1 2 to 100MHz This can use the 9500B internal clock to enhance the frequency ac
305. g the 9500B DC Function to Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope Conta 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required DC voltage polarity and load impedance for the UUT Scope amplitude cal point 2 UUT Scope a Select the correct channel for the cal point b Select DC Coupled if required c Select the correct range for the cal point 3 9500B a Press the 7 7 screen key on the bottom row to provide a zero reference b Set Output ON 4 UUT Scope a Set the Y controls to place the trace on graticule zero 5 9500B Repress the 7 screen key on the bottom row to remove a zero reference 6 UUT Scope a Auto trigger the oscilloscope or use the 100Hz Trigger from the 9500B Adjust the UUT for a stable display b Observe and note the DC level change from graticule zero 7 Calibration a If a calibration adjustment is provided adjust the UUT s response to be appropriate to the settings on the 9500B screen as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b If no adjustment is provided on the UUT Scope record its response at the calibration point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 8 9500B Set Output OFF 4 5 8 4 UUT Scope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as an Adjustable Source of DC Voltage The following procedure assumes that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also
306. ge output voltage exceeds oscilloscope input capability Example HP8493 Copt20 26 5GHz 3 5mm 20dB attenuator 50Q SMA BNC adaptor Example Suhner 33 SMA BNC 50 1 Final Width 215mm n 2 gt 10 6 3 3 Calibration Setup 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Sora LE Oscilloscope as shown in Fig 10 6 3 1 and aR Ka that both instruments are powered on and i warmed up 2 Oscilloscope Select the required function to measure edge response Caution The 9500B Edge function output is capable of generating voltages that may cause Fig 10 6 3 1 Edge Function Calibration damage to sampling oscilloscope inputs with limited input voltage capability Use of an attenuator is typically required for outputs above 1V pk pk Interconnections Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Edge Function 10 6 7 Final Width 215mm 10 6 3 4 Calibration Procedure 500ps Edge Linearity num Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 500ps Edge LIN mode Set the 9500B s output ON Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s outpu
307. gnal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 4 8 3 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 8 3 2 Choosing a Waveshape All waveshapes Marker Styles in this function can be selected on a second menu screen This is activated by pressing the WAVEFORM screen key on the bottom row The screen changes to show the available waveforms MUL OFE e Time Marker 1 0000 us ll Deviation 90 00 Period 1 0000 us Mawl O P Amplitude 1 0000 Vero Ual en hash The WAVEFORM key label is highlighted to indicate that waveform selection is available as is the presently selected waveform icon Pressing one of the waveform keys for example the A_A key to select a different waveform will return to the previous screen providing that the frequency is appropriate with the icon ofthe selected waveform showing in the top left corner Wi 10 Time Marker 1 0008 us 10 Deviation 00 00 _A 9 Period 1 0000 ps FREQ O P Amplitude 1 0000 Vor 1 j TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL KEA FORM SELECT 1B Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Time Markers Function 4 8 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 8 3 3 Right Side Scr
308. gnal Nam 1 0 8 4 2 Parallel Port Rear Panel This 25 way D Type socket is located beneath the IEEE 488 connector on the rear panel Its connections are similar to the 25 way printer port on PCs carrying control and data for an external printer as designated in the table Pin Layout PARALLEL PORT Games 25 14 Description or Common Meaning STROBE_L tput D01 tput D02 tput D03 tput D04 tput D05 tput DO6 tput D07 tput D08 tput ACKNLG_L put OoOeowNMD OO SW PO BUSY_H put P_END_ SLCT_H put AUTO_F ERROR_L INIT_L SLCT_IN_L OV_F _H Logic 1 active ps pulse to cause printer to read one byte of data from data bus D01 DO08 Data bit 1 Data bit 2 Data bit 3 Data bit 4 Data bit 5 Data bit 6 Data bit 7 Data bit 8 P Ise to indicate that the printer has accepted a data byte and is ready for more da Pri receive data Printer is out of paper a nter is temporarily busy and cannot Printer is in online state or connected Pa Th disable autofeed per is automatically fed 1 line after printing is line is fixed _H high by the 9500B to Printer is in Paper End Offline or Error sta te Commands printer to reset to power up state and in most printers to clear its print bu fer Commands some printers to accept data Th is line is fixed _L low by the 9500B Digital Common
309. gned for negative pulse direction These commands do not apply the pulse just select the parameters Pulse power and pulse duration are internally calculated from these two commands of amplitude and energy A settings conflict error will be reported if the OPULse function has not been selected lt dnpd gt The Amplitude lt dnpd gt has units of Volts and is restricted to 5 lt dnpd lt 20 or 20 lt dnpd lt 5 The Energy lt dnpd gt has units of Joules and is restricted so that 1 6 lt dnpd lt 50 For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 13 Overload Pulse Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt dnpd gt for the present amplitude or energy 6 6 5 12 SOUR PAR OPUL EXEC Purpose This command will cause the 9500B to apply the overload pulse A settings conflict error will be reported if the OPULse function has not been selected or if Output is not already ON The EXECute command is not buffered in the 9500B It will be ignored and discarded if a current EXECute command is not completed 6 6 5 13 SOUR PAR OPUL POWer SOUR PAR OPUL DURation Purpose These two query commands can be used to find out the Power and Duration settings which have been selected by the Amplitude Energy combination A value of 200E33 will be reported if the OPULse function has not been selected 6 6 5 14 SOUR PAR OPUL TRIG lt cpd gt SING CONT
310. gns and Tigges f 4 16 3 4 6 Sine Function 4 11 3 Defaut Settings 4 16 4 4 6 1 i 46 1 4 11 4 Menu Sdections 4 16 5 4 6 2 461 4 11 5 Conposite Video Function Operation 4 11 2 4 16 6 463 46 1 4 11 6 Using the Composite Video Function 4 6 4 46 2 to Calibrate Video Trigger Sensitivity 4 17 Input Leakage Function 4 6 5 464 Of a UJT OSciOSCOPS ws eee cece eects 4 11 2 4 17 1 Irtroduction 417 1 4 6 6 Using the 9500B Leveled Sine Function 4 12 Linear Ramp Function 4 17 2 Input Leakage Test 4 17 1 to Cdibrate the Flatness Bandwicth Response of a UJT Oscillascope 465 4 17 3 Defaut Settings 4 17 4 Menu Sdections 417 1 4 17 5 Input Leakage Operation 417 1 4 17 6 Using the 9500B to Test the Input Leakage Current 4 17 1 4 7 Edge Function 4 12 4 Linear Ramp Operation 4 7 1 47 2 4 12 5 Using the 9500B Linear Ramp Function for pas Error Code Detection and 4 7 4 Edge ANON QpeatiON scesessescsseesseeesseeeseee 4 7 2 TERA NH MSI CHEERS arinina ia aie 4 7 5 Using Active Head Models 9510 9520 9530 4 7 3 4 7 6 Using the 9500B Edge Function to Calibrate the Puse Response of a UJT Oscilloscope 4 7 4 Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Contents 4 1 1 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 4 2 Interconnections 4 2 1 Introduction This sub section deals with the Active Head Technology used to connect the 9500B to a UUT oscilloscope and rear pane
311. graphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for video and trigger calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Composite Video Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the badly soft key on the right of the screen Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B to output the required Luminance level Composite Video and line standard for the UUT Scope cal point 2 UUT Scope a Select the correct channel for the cal point b Select the correct range for the cal point c Select the correct presentation setup for the cal point 3 9500B Set Output ON 4 UUT Scope Verify stable display from TV trigger in accordance with the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 4 11 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Composite Video Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 12 Linear Ramp Function 4 12 1 Introduction This sub section is a
312. gs of the contributors values units division scaling multiplier and deviation are limited by the output voltage itself refer to Table 4 6 4 1 Frequency 100mHz 550 00MHz Frequency 550 01MHz 1 1GHz Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Output Voltage 4 44mV p p 5 56V p p 4 44mV p p 3 336V p p Limit Units Division 1mV div 2V div 1mV div 2V div Scaling Multiplier 1 1 10 Deviation 11 20 11 20 11 20 11 20 Table 4 6 4 1 Sine Function Output Voltage Limits and Contributors Limits Provided they do not exceed the output voltage limits shown the contributors have the following adjustments Scope mode a Units Division in Volts division in the adjustable sequence 1 2 5 or using Pref 1 2 2 5 4 5 default 5mV div b Scaling Multiplier adjustable through integers 1 to 10 default 6 c Percentage Deviation a maximum range of 11 20 about the value of a x b at a resolution of four significant digits with two decimal places default zero Digit Edit Sequence Scroll or Numeric Entry can be used d Output Voltage adjustable in Digit Edit Sequence Scroll only by manipulation of a b and c default 30 000mV 4 6 4 2 Output Voltage Editing Editing follows the same general rules as for editing voltages described in paras 4 4 Tab Key and Cursors Scope Mode Repeatedly pressing this key moves the cursor from the default Units Division to the Multi
313. h unless it it lint free Keep the controls clean using a soft lint free cloth dampened with a non toxic non corrosive detergent The display screen should be cleaned using a soft lint free cloth dampened with an anti static cleanser Avoid extreme pressure on the face of the screen and do not spray the screen directly 8 2 2 Air Intake Filter WARNING Disconnect the power line cord before removing any covers see the Safety Issues section at the front of this manual The internal airflow is powered by an axial fan which draws cooling air through the interior directed mainly through the RF module to be exhausted on the left side via holes in the cover Replacement air is drawn into the instrument through holes in the right side of the top cover then through a 20ppi pores per inch reticulated filter This filter is accessed by removing the top cover Once the cover is removed holes can be seen in the chassis assembly right side with the reticulated filter located over these holes attached by four black nylon snap rivets through four holes to the chassis assembly Inspect and clean the filter element by vacuuming at intervals of no more than 90 days Remove the filter for thorough cleaning at least once per year immediately prior to routine calibration of the unit 8 2 2 1 Removing the Top Cover WARNING Disconnect the power line cord before removing any covers see the Safety Issues section at the front of this
314. han one manufacturer is listed in the Procedure Card By the time the Select MANUFACTURER screen has been successfully opened the 9500B will have extracted a list of the manufacturers whose models procedures are contained in the Procedure card memory These it displays on the screen for the user to choose For example Select MANUFACTURER using cursor keys Press NEW CARD to read another card MANUF 1 MANUF 2 TODAY S DATE TIME NEW OK NEW ABORT If the wrong card has been inserted Remove that card insert another then press the NEW CARD screen key to tell the 9500B that a different card has been inserted More than one manufacturer listed in the new card The 9500B lists the manufacturers whose models procedures are resident in the new card Only one manufacturer listed in the new card The 9500B transfers to the Select MODEL screen if only one manufacturer is listed Correct manufacturer selected After selecting the required manufacturer pressing the OK screen key will cause the 9500B to transfer to the Select MODEL menu screen ABORT returns to the Select USER NAME screen Refer to paras 5 3 3 13 Fig 5 3 2 5 3 3 6 Select the Subject UUT Model By the time the Select MODEL screen has been successfully opened the 9500B will have extracted a list of the models whose procedure is contained in the Procedure card memory These it displays on the screen for t
315. hange The current printer type gt DISABLE EPSON Configuration The current printer type is JET indicated by the highlight DESK JET Use the softkeys to select another USER DEFINED TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 3 Power on default is DISABLE Use the screen keys to select the type of printer on the interface or to disable direct printing 4 EXITreturns tothe Present Settings menu screen User Defined Printer Type 5 Ifthe type of printer you are using does not conform to one of those listed press the USER DEFINED screen key This transfers to a Configuration screen designed to enter the initialisation control codes for your printer Configuration Enter the initialisation control codes in decimal and confirm with enter The current control code string is string appears here eg 27 116 1 18 15 Enter a new control string TIME TODAY S DATE EXIT 6 Obtain the initialisation control codes from your printer s operating manual If necessary convert the codes to decimal Use the 9500B keypad to type the decimal codes separated by spaces the new string replaces the old Press the key 6 EXIT returns to the current printer type screen 3 4 3 6 Power up mode Mode Selection at Power on Users can determine which mode will be selected automatically at power on choosing between Procedure mode and Manual mode The
316. hange the existing Target Amplitude e Use the tab gt key to place the cursor on its value then use the N C lt and C gt keys to set the required target amplitude Note The extent to which the target value can be changed from the default value is limited Inourexampleat 1 0000mV the target cannot be set above 1 0700mV nor below 0 9300mV Beyond these limits the error message Outside amplitude range is given e Press the SAVE TARGET soft key to record the change A message will appear TARGET SAVED e You can check that the change has been recorded by pressing EXIT to return to the Target Selection screen where the different value will have appeared against that saved target unless the DEFAULT TARGETS key is highlighted If default targets remain selected then they will not have changed merely press the DEFAULT TARGETS key to return to saved targets to note the change in saved target value e Returning to the Adjustment screen by pressing the same target soft key it can be seen that the 9500B O P Amplitude has also changed to the saved value in preparation for adjustment Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Standard Calibration Basic Sequences 10 4 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 4 4 Calibrating the Model 9500B at Target Values 10 4 4 1 Adjust Output Amplitude Once the target value is as required the next step is to set up the external circuit so that the output can
317. he sign continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Current Function 4 10 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 10 6 Square Operation Contd 4 10 6 2 Output Current Editing Contd Deviation Scope and Direct Mode The triangular type of cursor indicates that all the cursor keys can be used From the default 00 00 the deviation percentage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 11 20 and 11 20 providing that the other contributors do not take the output current value out of its limits The result of combining the units division multiplier and deviation are shown as the value of O P Amplitude p p Output Current Scope and Direct Mode The O P Amplitude is only adjustable by means of its contributors From the default 4 0000mA p p the output current can be changed to any value within its resolution from 88 8uA p p to 111 2mA p p Frequency Scope and Direct Mode From the default 1kHz the output frequency can be changed to any value within its resolution between 10Hz and 100kHz 4 10 7 Using the 9500B Current Square Function to Calibrate the Pulse Response of a UUT Oscilloscope Current Probe 4 10 7 1 Introduction Two types of procedures for amplitude calibration are given a Using the 9500B as a fixed source where the oscilloscope can be adjusted b Using the 9500B as an adjustable source reading oscillo
318. he emulated instruments cannot be guaranteed The low level command language is not emulated The 9500B without Option 5 5 full channels has one signal channel and one trigger channel matching the one signal and one trigger channel on the emulated instruments With Option 5 fitted to the 9500B signal will use CH 1 and trigger will use CH5 The terms NR1 NR2 NR3 and NRf appear within the following text and tables These represent particular forms of Decimal Numeric Program Data as described in the IEEE 488 2 Standard Specification Briefly they conform to the following criteria NRI a number expressed as an integer only no decimal point 375 is in the form of NR1 a number expressed as a mantissa i e can include a decimal point 375 263 is in the form of NR2 a number expressed as a mantissa plus an exponent separated by a white space i e can include a decimal point and also can include an exponent in the form of the ASCII character E or e followed by a power of 10 375 263 E 3 is in the form of NR3 This is a flexible form which accepts any of the three above forms The spirit adopted in IEEE 488 2 is that a specific command which is transmitted over the bus should be consistent in its conformance to one of the three forms On the other hand a device which receives commands should be able to accept any of the three forms This leads to the user friendly concept of Precise Talker and
319. he flow chart shown on the right summarizes Erse KO TMK amp the operator actions needed to enter Calibration Chse LF SIN DC O S should be performed once mode and to then select an appropriate function immediately before proceeding for calibration to routine STD CAL operations Selections shaded thus cannot be used when the Model 9500B is in CAL mode Fig 10 3 2 Access to Functions in Calibration Mode 10 3 6 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 4 Standard Calibration Basic Sequences This sub section describes in more detail the main processes involved when calibrating each of the Model 9500B s hardware configurations from the instrument s front panel The following topics are covered 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 4 3 10 4 4 10 4 5 10 4 6 Introduction 10 4 1 1 Aim of Calibration 10 4 1 2 General Calibration Process Target Selection Screen Selecting Hardware Configurations 10 4 2 1 Waveform Selection 10 4 2 2 Hardware Configurations 10 4 2 3 Channel Selections 10 4 2 4 Retained Channel Memory 10 4 2 5 Default or Saved Targets The Adjustment Screen 10 4 3 1 Setting Target Values 10 4 3 2 Selecting Default Calibration Targets 10 4 3 3 Modifying a Calibration Target Calibrating the Model 9500B at Target Values 10 4 4 1 Adjust Output Amplitude 10 4 4 2 Target Selection 10 4 4 3 RESET CAL POINT Standard Calibration of AC Functions 10
320. he standard Event Status Byte whereby each true bit acts to enable its corresponding bit in the standard Event Status Byte Bit Selector ESE phs Nrf The program command ESE phs Nrf performs the selection where Nrf is adecimal numeric which when decoded into binary produces the required bit pattern in the enabling byte For example If the ESB bit is required to be set true only when an execution or device dependent error occurs then Nrfshould be set to 24 The binary decode is 00011000 so bit 3 or bit 4 when true will set the ESB bit true but when bits 0 2 or 5 7 are true the ESB bit will remain false Reading the Standard Event Enable Register The common query ESE reads the binary number in the ESE register The response is a decimal number whichis the sum of the binary weighted values in the register 6 5 3 7 The Error Queue As errors in the 9500B are detected they are placed in a first in first out queue called the Error Queue This queue conforms to the format described in the SCPI Command Reference Volume 2 Chapter 19 para 19 7 although errors only are detected Three kinds of errors are reported in the Error Queue in the sequence that they are detected Command Errors Execution Errors and Device Specific errors Reading the Error Queue The queue is read destructively as described in the SCPI Command Reference using the query command SYSTem ERRor to obtain a code number and error
321. he user to choose For example Select MODEL using cursor keys Press NEW CARD to read another card MODEL 1 MODEL 2 TODAY S DATE TIME OK u ABORT If the wrong card has been inserted Remove that card insert another then press the NEW CARD screen key to tell the 9500B that a different card has been inserted More than one manufacturer listed in the new card The 9500B lists the manufacturers whose models procedures are resident in the new card After selecting the required manufacturer using the cursor keys pressing the OK screen key will cause the 9500B to transfer to the Select MODEL menu screen Only one manufacturer listed in the new card The 9500B transfers to the Select MODEL screen if only one manufacturer is listed Correct Model selected After selecting the required model pressing the OK screen key will cause the 9500B to download all the procedures for that model into internal RAM The card can then be removed and used to load another instrument After choosing the model the next stage is to enter the UUT serial number Pressing the OK screen key will cause the 9500B to transfer to the Serial Number screen ABORT returns to the Select USER NAME screen Refer to paras 5 3 3 13 Fig 5 3 2 5 3 3 7 Enter the Serial Number of the Subject UUT Having selected the UUT model the 9500B asks for the serial number to be entered so that any results can be identified
322. hen converted to base 2 binary identifies the Operation Event register bits to determine their current status For example refer to Fig 6 2 If the 9500B had just performed a selftest the TESTING bit 8 of the register would be set and if no other Operation Event bits were enabled the number 256 would be returned Bit 8 indeed all bits in the register would be reset by this query 6 6 7 3 STAT OPER ENAB lt dnpd gt Purpose STAT OPER ENAB lt dnpd gt _ sets the mask which enables those Operation Event register bits which are required to be summarized at bit 7 of the IEEE 488 2 Status Byte register lt dnpd gt This is a decimal integer whose binary equivalent represents the bits required to be enabled For example refer to Fig 6 2 and paras 6 5 4 The command STAT OPER ENAB 272 would be required to enable only the TESTING and MEASURING bits 8 and 4 of the Operation Event register Response to the Query Version A lt dnpd gt inthe form of an Nr1 number is returned The value of the number when converted to base 2 binary identifies the bits set in the Operation Enable mask For example refer to Fig 6 2 and paras 6 5 4 Tf only the MEASURING and CALIBRATING bits 4 and 0 of the register are enabled the number 17 would be returned 6 6 7 4 STAT OPER COND Purpose STAT OPER COND returns the contents of the Operation Condition register not shown in Fig 6 2 which is not cleared by the co
323. hindrance but voltages on or above the threshold cannot be output without deliberate action being taken to enter the high voltage HV state Once entered a continuous audible signal acts as a reminder that HV state is active The system exits from HV state when the output voltage is brought down below HV state s lower limit This is always 10 less than the active threshold value allowing some adjustment of output without the irritation of having to change states Each threshold value is related to the output value set on the screen including Deviation The default state boundaries are shown in Fig 4 5 1 The values given in the figure translate to DC volts in DCV function and pk pk volts in Square and High Edge functions gov 100V Low Voltage State gt lt High Voltage State Fig 4 5 1 Default Settings of Low and High Voltage States continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function 4 5 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 5 5 Square Operation Conta 4 5 5 3 Low Voltage LV and High Voltage HV States Contd Increasing Output Voltage into High Voltage State When increasing output value using any method if the new value will be at or greater than the upper threshold and OUTPUT is OFF HV state will be activated but no effect will be observed If OUTPUT is ON it will remain ON at its latest value The operator
324. his Validity Tolerance to the Nominal value of 500ps giving the Upper Validity Tolerance Limit of 553 85ps e Considering the lower limit Validity Tolerance V 20ps 150ps 151 32ps e We must now subtract this Validity Tolerance from the Nominal value of 500ps giving the Lower Validity Tolerance Limit of 348 68ps 9 9 3 7 Calculation of Validity Tolerance Limits and Edge Speed Check a Calculate the User s Total Measurement Uncertainty and Validity Tolerance Limits and enter in the appropriate columns of the copy of the Table For further assistance refer to sub section 9 9 3 6 b Check that the Measured Value is at or between the Upper and Lower Validity Tolerance Limits c Check that the difference between the 9500B Displayed Value recorded at para 9 9 3 5 operation 7 d and the Measured Value recorded at para 9 9 3 5 operation 7 c is within the 9500B displayed value accuracy specification of the Measured Value see note below the table 9 30 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 9 3 Verifying the Edge Function Conta Table 9 9 3 1 Edge Function Verification Rise Fall Time at 1MHz Period 1ps into 50 Q Load Please copy the following table Enter the calculation results and measurements in the appropriate columns on the copy Nominal Rise Fall Time 10 90 Output Voltage pk pk Lower Tolerance Limit Upper Tolerance Limit User s To
325. his transfers to the Current appended message screen 2 Use Direct edit to enter the new message Configuration The current appended message is The current message appears in this space Enter a new message TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 3 Press the J screen key to return to the CERT DETAILS screen The message appears on the Present settings list 4 The EXIT screen key reverts to the CERT DETAILS screen without changing the appended message 3 4 3 26 LAB DETAILS Laboratory Details required for the Certificate For the printed results certificates itis required to enter details of the laboratory at which the results were obtained Users should enter the name temperature and relative humidity of their laboratory for the printed certificates 1 To set up the Laboratory details press the LAB DETAILS screen key on the CERT DETAILS screen This transfers to what we shall refer to as a LAB DETAILS screen 2 The lab name temperature and humidity f D LAB Configuration LAB TEMP Present Settings FAB Lab name Fluke L HUMID Lab temp 23 C 35C Lab humid 40 10 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT LAB DETAILS Screen Layout can be entered via the three screen keys on the right 3 The EXIT key reverts to the CERT DETAILS screen 3 4 3 27 LAB NAME 1 To enter the Laboratory name press the LAB NAME screen key on the LAB DETAILS screen T
326. his transfers to the Current lab name screen Configuration The current lab name is The current name appears in this space Enter a new name TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 2 Use Direct edit to enter the new laboratory name 3 Press the screen key to return to the LAB DETAILS screen The new lab name will appear on the Present settings list 4 The EXIT screen key reverts to the LAB DETAILS screen without changing the lab name 3 4 3 28 Laboratory Temperature and Humidity Lab temp and Lab humid are changed by similar operations as for the Lab name change No further explanation is necessary After all the laboratory details are satisfactory press EXIT on the LAB DETAILS screen to return to the CERT DETAILS screen Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 17 Final Width 215mm 3 4 3 29 CLEAR USER LIST Procedure Mode User List A list of users is presented on the opening menu screen of Procedure mode where the user s name can be selected to appear on the certificate New names can be added to the screen at the same time Names cannot be removed from the list without knowing the Config mode password which must be used to access the Clear user list facility 1 For access to allow the Procedure mode user list to be cleared press the CLEAR USER LIST screen key on the second Present Settings screen Th
327. ht 3 PressEXITtoreturnto the Present Settings screen The selected external reference frequency is either disabled or applied to the REF FREQUENCY OUTPUT BNC connector on the rear panel 3 4 3 12 DATE TIME Date and Time Settings A real time clock supported by an internal battery presents the date and time at the bottom of many screens It is also used to generate the date to appear on direct printing certificates in Procedure mode Users have access via Configuration mode to correct the date and time for instance to accommodate daylight saving changes and crossing time zones 1 Press the DATE TIME screen key on the Present Settings screen for access to allow the date and time to be altered 2 This transfers to a configuration screen designed for changing the date and time Our representation shows the current date from a previous setting Configuration DY The selected date format is M D Y indicated by the highlight Ch h K gt ME hange the date by using a direct editing only DELIM 08 07 2001 TODAY S DATE TIME CHANGE CHANGE EXIT TIME 3 Press the appropriate right screen key to set the required date format and use the keypad to correct the date using non alphanumeric characters as delimiters followed by J The new date will appear with delimiters as set by the TOGGLE DELIM key which merely switches between slash and p
328. iaroi siei aina N E Sa A AEE 7 4 7 6 Levelled Sine Function Specifications arises reai 7 7 Dual Sine Function Specifications ssrcsnesiossisi iig a 7 8 Pulse Width Function Specifications 7 9 Other Output Function Specifications 7 10 Tigger Output Specifications 2 2 scccpicesccescecceeaseeenessesssssacheasscy na i Eua Ve EEVEE EEE N Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test 81 About SECON S essre asia E EN N OAE NNE ANE e AEN Ea 8 2 Routine Maintenance cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeneeeeaaeeeseneeeeaaeeseeaaeeseeaaeeseeaeeeeenaeeess 8 3 Model 9500B Test and Selftest 8 4 Printing Selftest Results 0 ceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeee Section 8 Appendix A Error Reporting Subsystem cecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeennaeees 8 A1 Model 9500B User s Handbook Contents List 0 5 Final Width 215mm Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Specification 9 1 9 2 9 9 ADOUt SECIONO Pitapis rasai eaea raae a e re 9 1 Need for Verification eee 9 1 9 2 1 Factory Calibration and Traceability 9 1 9 2 2 Verification on Receipt from the Factory cccsccecesseeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 9 1 9 2 3 Verification after User Calibration oo eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 Equipment Requirements 9 1 Interconnections 9 1 NVEFINCAUOM IP OMS sarsana iaaa EEEE NNE EEA EEEE 9 1 Specification EMMIS
329. ic Purity 2nd Harmonic lt 35dBc 3rd Harmonic lt 40dBc in 12GHz Non amp Sub Harm Purity Frequencies above 500MHz are not recommended for 1M input applications The 9560 Head is restricted to 50Q loads only For offsets gt 10kHz lt 6 0GHz lt 35dBc Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 7 7 Dual Sine Function Specification 7 7 1 Levelled Sine Function Frequency Range 9500B 600 0 1 Hz to 600 MHz 9500B 1100 0 1 Hz to 1 1 GHz Selected heads must be of the same type either 9510 9530 or 9560 9500B 3200 amp 9530 0 1 Hz to 3 2 GHz 9500B 3200 amp 9560 0 1 Hz to 3 2 GHz Time Alignment Amplitude pk pk into 50Q 25ps Any Channel to Any Channe 0 1Hz to 550MHz 5mV to 2 5V 550MHz to 600MHz 5mV to 1 5V 0 1Hz to 550MHz 5mV to 2 5V 550MHz to 1 1GHz 5mV to 1 5V 0 1Hz to 550MHz 5mV to 2 5V 550MHz to 2 5GHz 5mV to 1 5V 0 1Hz to 550MHz 5mV to 2 5V 550MHz to 2 5GHz 5mV to 1 5V 2 5GHz to 3 2GHz 5mV to 1V 2 5GHz to 3 2GHz 5mV to 1V Accuracy and Flatness Master Channel As Levelled Sine above Flatness wrt Ref Freq Slave Channel 0 1Hz to 600MHz 10 0 1Hz to 750MHz 10 0 1Hz to 750MHz H0 0 1Hz to 1GHz 10 750MHz to 1 1GHz 30 Frequencies above 500MHz are not recommended for 1MQ input applications The 9560 Head is restrict
330. ich is to set true bit 2 QYE of the Standard defined Event Status register 6 4 4 Request Service RQS 6 4 4 1 Reasons for Requesting Service There are two main reasons for the application program to request service from the controller e When the 9500B message exchange interface is programmed to report a system programming error e When the 9500B is programmed to report significant events by RQS The significant events vary between types of devices thus there is a class of events which are known as Device Specific These are determined by the device designer 6 4 4 2 RQS in the IEEE 488 2 Model The application programmer can enable or disable the event s which are required to originate an RQS at particular stages of the application program The IEEE 488 2 model is extended to incorporate a flexible SCPI status reporting structure in which the requirements of the device designer and application programmer are both met This structure is described in Sub Section 6 5 dealing with Retrieval of Device Status Information 6 4 4 Section 6 9500B System Operation Using the 9500B in a System 6 5 Retrieval of Device Status Information 6 5 2 IEEE 488 and SCPI Standard Defined Features 6 5 1 General For any remotely operated system the provision of up to date information about the performance of the system is of major importance In the case of systems which operate under automatic control the con
331. in Section 8 In the case of a reported or suspected failure consult your Fluke Service Center 1 2 3 System Operation 1 2 3 1 Remote Interface The instrument can form part of an automated system by means of the IEEE 488 standard digital interface The interface has been included both for automatic calibration of UUT oscilloscopes and for automatic calibration of the 9500B itself The method of connecting to the system controller and the IEEE 488 2 SCPI command codes are described in Section 6 Emulation of the SG5030 and CG5010 5011 is available only via the remote IEEE 488 interface as detailed in Section 6 Appendix F 1 2 4 2 Met Cal Il The 9500B is included in the number of calibrators accessible through Met Cal II which can be used to calibrate UUT oscilloscopes remotely 1 3 Model 9500B Associated Products and Options 1 Active Head At least one unit of the following products is necessary to complete the output connection from the 9500B output channel to one channel of the UUT oscilloscope Model 9510 1 1GHz Output Module Active Head with 500ps pulse edge capability Model 9530 3 2GHz Output Module Active Head with 150ps and 500ps pulse edge capabilities Model 9550 25ps Fast Edge Output Module Active Head with 25ps pulse edge capability only Model 9560 6 4GHz Output Module Active Head with 70ps pulse edge capability Requires 9500 3200 or 9500B 3200 base with issue 3 0 firmware or greater
332. inally to the Frequency and back to the Units Division The type of cursor at each position indicates the type of adjustment possible to that value Units Division Scope Mode The type of cursor barred used for the units division signifies that the value can be adjusted only as a step sequence value using the N and keys The lt and gt keys are inactive 4 7 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edge Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 500ps Edge and Fast Edge From the default 0 2V div the value can be raised using the O key up through 0 5V div and so on to 1V div providing that the other contributors will not take the output voltage value above 3 00Vp p Similarly the V key will reduce the Units Division down through 0 1V div and so on to ImV div unless the output voltage would fall below 4 44mVp p all frequencies High Edge For High Edge the default is 1 V div the upper limit is 2V div O P Ampl limit for IMQ load 5 56Vp p The lower limit is 0 2V div to ImV div O P Ampl limit 888mVp p Multiplier Scope Mode 500ps Edge Fast Edge and High Edge Again the lt Jand _ gt keys are inactive From the default x 5 the value can be changed using the N and keys by single integer increments to values between and 10 within output voltage value limits The product of the units division and multiplier are shown on the right side of the sign Deviation Scope and
333. inct stages as follows 1 Selection of the required hardware SONTE configuration Target Selection screen 2 Selection of target values at which this hardware configuration will be calibrated CAL Switch Disable Target Selection screen Condition 3 Modification of the target values and Paani determination of the 9500B s output error sacs Password Entry XXXXXX The Target Selection screen is used to select EXIT the correct hardware configuration expressed as Cal Range and permits you to opt to use Fluke s recommended default target K Final Width 215mm calibration values or custom target values close lt Oie gt gt to the default values more appropriate to the S ateach ofthese values Adjustment screen g x Ye equipment being used for calibration purposes TE Selecting one of the target values displayed in the target selection screen by pressing its get pressing corresponding Target softkey transfers you Special Calibration to the Adjustment screen where you can Chse DAC optionally alter and save the target value before Fs measuring the output error and generating a Chse VCO compensating correction Chse SQ TRI TMK These three stages are described in more detail Ch N se LF SIN in Section 10 4 while descriptions of the DC O S calibration sequences for each individual function are provided in Section 10 5 Chse DAC hse V T
334. ine Function HF Flatness 9560 only 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Sine 6GHz Sine mode FLAT D Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the measuring device The conversion from power to pk pk voltage is pk pk Voltage V power 20 Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Press NEXT FREQ then select TARGET 1 and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 2 4 6GHz Levelled Sine Function HF Flatness Cal Point Voltage lt 3 2GHz Voltage gt 3 2GHz Target 1 2 0000V 1 6000V Target 2 671 48mV 526 30mV Target 3 210 99mV 155 30mV Target 4 70 839mV 51 300mV Target 5 22 259mV 15 240mV Repeat the process using the Cal Point voltage levels in the Targets 1 5 sequence for each of these frequency points for a total of 136 calibration steps Targets 06 10 1 50GHz Targets 80 83 3 50GHz Targets 11 15 1 75GHz Targets 84 87 3 70GHz Targets 16 20 1 95GHz Targets 88 91 3 90GHz Targets 21 25 2 05GHz Targets 92 95 4 10GHz Targets 26 30 2 20GHz Targets 96 99 4 30GHz Targets 31 35 2 30GHz Targets 100 103 4 50GHz Targets 36 40 2 45GHz Targets 104 107 4 70GHz Targets 41 45 2 55GHz Targets 108 111 5 00GHz Targets 46 50 2 65GHz Targets 112 115 5 30GHz Targets 51 55 2 80G
335. instead the 9500B Execution Control processes all commands sequentially ie waits for actions resulting from the previous command to complete before executing the next Bus Messages IEEE 488 1 bus IEEE 488 1 Bus Interface 9500B Bus Transmissions Filter out bus management and configuration commands Device Dependent Errors DDE bit Status Byte ba STB Input Output Control RQS bit state for Status Byte General and Addressed Requested Bus Messages Bus Messages Message Input Output gt Available Buffer Queue MAV bit Received Response Message Message Elements Elements Command Message Errors Response it Parser Exchange CME bit Control Formatter Parsed Message Elements Execution Errors Execution Query Errors EXE bit Control QYE bit Executable Message Elements pea ee 9500B Functions and Facilities Fig 6 1 9500B Message Exchange Model Power On PON bit Section 6 9500B System Operation Using the 9500B in a System 6 4 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 4 3 Message Exchange Contd 6 4 3 4 9500B Functions and Facilities The 9500B Functions and Facilities block contains all the device specific functions and features of the 9500B accepting Executable Message Elements from Execution Control and performing the associated operations It responds to any of the elements
336. intenance and Test 8 9 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 8 3 4 Interface Test Contd Printer test Use a printer to test interface Press EXIT to stop printout Printer status NOT RESPONDING OUT OF PAPER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Section 3 the printer will not be set up when starting to print for the first time The possible responses are shown on the diagram They are updated automatically as the printer status changes When operating correctly the printer will print a character set continuously until the EXIT screen key is pressed If the reported status of the printer interface does not match the known physical status then this implies a failure It is possible to diagnose the defect source by checking a second printer unit on the same 9500B or the same printer unit on a different 9500B Rectification may require access to the internal circuitry of the 9500B or printer unit so no further user action is recommended except for obvious setup errors Otherwise it is advisable to report the result to your Fluke Service Center EXIT returns to the Interface Select test menu screen 8 4 Printing Selftest Results 8 4 1 Introduction The results of All and Fast selftests can be printed out by a printer connected to the parallel port J103 on the rear panel It can also be used to print out certificates for UUTs calibrated in Procedure mode Pin Designations 9500B 9500B Si
337. ion About Section 6 6 1 1 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 6 2 6 2 1 Program Coding CLS ESE Nrf ESE ESR IDN OPC OPC OPT 6 2 2 CALibration OUTPut ROUTe Index of IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Codes used in the 9500B Common IEEE 488 2 Commands and Queries Program Description Appendix C Page Coding Description Appendix C Page Clears eert registers and queues not QP QUEUE eee 6a PSC 0 1 Sets resetS Power on Status der flag 2 eee e eee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeee Enables standard defined vent bits oo eescseseeesesesseseeeeeeeeees 6c PSC Recalls power on Status de flag eee eeeseseeeceeescsesecevetetseseeeeeeees PUD Allons entry of user data to protected store PUD RST SRE Nrf SRE For No Qperations Pending flag TRLE places a1 STB Nhe QUAE Senet 6c TST Recalls the instrument s opion COMPIQUTAHION Loo ceeeeseeeeeeeeeee 6c WAI 9500B SCPI Subsystems Page Used to calibrate the functions and hardware ranges of the 9500B correcting for system errors which have accumulated due to driftiand agoing SHOCKS Ec cisiscesscsecedececdeedeccevessenssensssexeadscateeveevodbecdeedaucovauecusencystasucneatecuecebeperveadeceevsaees 6 6 2 SECure PASSword Gains access to Calibration operations using Cal Enable switch and Password 6 6 2 EXIT Permits clean exit from calibration Operation c ccccscsceessessrsesesseeseseeseeecseessseesnentenens 6 6 2 TARG
338. ion 5 5 1 About Section 5 Section 5 is a guide to using procedure card in the 9500B to calibrate manually operated oscilloscopes UUTs For a guide to using front panel controls in Manual Mode please turn to Section 4 Because the actual procedures are contained within the cards this section is limited to general points and access to the programs on thecards Section 5 is divided into the following sub sections page 5 1 About Section 5 this sub section 5 2 Procedure mode Safety and General Notes 5 2 1 Introduction 5 2 2 Safety Features 5 2 3 General Notes 5 2 4 Printing Setup 5 2 5 Saving Results on Memory Cards 5 3 Procedure mode Access Guide 530 INOOUCHON sirsiran 5 3 1 5 3 2 Mode SGlQ CON caaasccnssccvsanssacteeesssssncoteerennate 5 3 1 5 3 3 Selection of Procedure Mode Entry Menus Common to All Procedures sceceeee 5 3 1 Using the Model 9500B Procedure Mode Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 5 Using the Model 9500B Procedure Mode Contents 5 1 1 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 5 2 Procedure Mode Safety and General Notes 5 2 1 Introduction Sub section 5 2 introduces notes to Procedure mode The following topics are covered Page 52A WMAPOMUCHION sc c coscesscossescscsessosszcesasaresnaneseensass 5 2 1 5 2 2 Safety Features 5 2 1 High Voltage Warning Emergency Action Use of OUTPUT OFF
339. ion Procedure Library sub section 1 4 Adjustment Only The procedure will cause the 9500B to provide the correct outputs for each of the Manufacturer s recommended test points for adjustment of the subject UUT model The identity of adjustment controls target values and limits are presented on the screen for the convenience of the user who will also decide whether the adjustment was successful and record pass fail status The procedure is described in sub section 5 4 1 Year Verification The 9500B provides the correct outputs for each of the Manufacturer s recommended test points used to verify the full performance of the subject UUT model Users can slew the output to determine the UUT error Style 1 printed results will list these errors The procedure is described in sub section 5 5 1SO9000 Verify This is a variant of 1 Year Verification different in that the 9500B provides a wider range of test points to verify performance in greater detail than is recommended by the Manufacturer Verify Pass Fail The 9500B provides the correct outputs at each of the test points for the user to check whether the UUT verifies within its specification Pass Fail only is printed on the report The procedure is described in sub section 5 6 1SO9000 Pass Fail This is a variant of Verify Pass Fail different in that the 9500B provides a wider range of test points to check the specification in greater detail than is recommended by the
340. ion is calibrated by carrying out the sequences given in sections 0 6 2 4 through 10 6 2 7 The 3GHz calibrations described in Sections 0 6 2 6 and 10 6 2 7 only apply to model 9530 Heads and the 6GHz only applies to model 9560 heads Equipment requirements are for LF Gain calibration are given in para 10 6 2 2 and calibration setup in para 10 6 2 3 RF Power Meter Sensor Input RF Head Assembly Precision N to BNC Adaptor 10 6 2 2 Equipment Requirements The UUT Active Head connected to a verified Model 9500B Mainframe RF Power Meter for Power measurements from 50kHz to 6GHz and from 20mVp p to 5 5Vp p into 50Q Example Marconi RF Power Meter model 6960B Rhode amp Swartz NRVZ with NRV 25 Head Precision N to BNC or PC3 5 Adapter for signal connection from the UUT Active Head to the input of the RF Power Meter head for Amplitude measurements Example Huber amp Suhner Adapter type no 31BNC N 50 51 or 31N PC3 5 50 1 10 6 2 3 Calibration Setup Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the RF Power Meter as shown in Fig 10 6 2 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Active Head Fig 10 6 2 1 RF Sine Voltage Calibration Interconnections Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Levelled Sine Function HF Linearity 10 6 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 10 6 2 4 Calibration Procedure HF Linearity Rw a 9500B Ensure th
341. ions should be verified Although it is not essential to verify all the functions at any one time functions higher in the list should be verified before those lower in the list Head verification involves the use of a verified 9500B Mainframe Note Heads can be verified only within the bandwidth of the mainframe e g Head Model 9510 with Mainframe Variant 9500B 600 can only be verified to 600MHz 9 9 1 Verifying the Levelled Sine Function LF Gain 9 9 1 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 9 1 2 and test interconnections at para 9 9 1 3 The Levelled Sine Function is verified by carrying out measurements ofamplitude at frequencies of 1kHz 45kHz and 50kHz in the sequences given at para 9 9 1 4 and 9 9 1 5 at the verification points shown in Table 9 9 1 1 9 9 1 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Active Head connected to a verified Model 9500B Mainframe refer to Sub section 9 8 3 e Ahighresolution Standards DMM with RMS AC Voltage accuracy of 0 3 or better from 10mV to 1 5V at 1kHz 45kHz and 50kHz Example Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from PC3 5 or BNC to 4mm leads Example Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor and PC3 5 to BNC adaptor e Short high quality 4mm leads for connection between the Calibration Adaptor the DMM 9 20 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 9 1 3 Interconnections Standards DMM Guard Q Guard Final Wi
342. is ON A settings conflict will be reported if the RAMP function has not been selected lt cpd gt STARt generates one trigger coincident with the start of the rising ramp MIDDle generates one trigger coincident with the peak of the rising ramp For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 12 Linear Ramp Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected trigger type 6 6 5 16 SOUR PAR SKEW ALIGnment lt cpd gt DEFault PRECision Purpose This command enables and disables the application of precision calibration to the Zero Skew output waveforms Note that the Zero Skew offsets must have already been set up manually as there is no command to perform this calibration via the remote interface A settings conflict will be reported if the Zero Skew function has not been selected lt cpd gt DEFault the inter channel skew is set to default 50ps PRECision the precision adjustments already carried out and stored manually are applied For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 14 Zero Skew Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected trigger type 6 6 5 17 SOUR PAR TEL LINE lt dnpd gt Purpose This command selects the line frequency standard of the TV composite video function
343. is not a valid number 7008 Year entry is not a valid number 7009 Year separator is incorrect 7010 Month entry is not a valid month 7011 Day entry is not a valid day 7012 Hours entry is not a valid number 7013 Minutes entry is not a valid number 7014 Entry does not give a valid time setting 7016 Bus address must be within the range 0 30 7017 Safety voltage must be within the range 10V and 110V 7018 Borderline value must be within the range 10 00 99 99 7019 Entry does not match previous password entry 7020 New string contains illegal characters or values 7024 WARNING Instrument near cal due date 702 5 WARNING Instrument past cal due date 7026 Ref frequency must be within the range 0 1 Hz and 1 3 GHz 7027 Ref frequency must be within the range 0 1 Hz and 3 2 GHz 7029 Ext Ref must be locked for selection to be allowed 9001 9002 9008 9009 9010 9011 9012 9013 9014 9015 9016 9017 9018 9019 9020 9021 9022 9023 9024 9025 9026 9027 9028 9029 9030 9031 9032 9041 9042 9043 9044 9050 9051 9053 9060 9062 9063 9067 9068 9069 9070 9071 9072 9073 9074 9075 9076 9077 No calibration necessary for this function Target factor is corrupt select defaults Edge
344. is transfers to the confirmation screen Configuration CF BARNES FJ BLOGGS J KFUPFLOP Press OK to clear list TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT OK 3 OK removes all names from the list and returns to the second Present Settings menu screen 4 EXIT returns to the second Present Settings menu screen without removing the names Sec 3 4 3 30 IDN CONFIG To retain compatibility with software applications that depend upon instrument response to the IEEE 488 2 common command IDN it may be necessary to configure your Fluke 9500B to respond as a previous model 9500 from a previous manufacturer E g Wavetek 1 On the second Present Settings menu screen press the IDN screen key on the bottom row of Softkeys This transfers to the IDN Config screen Configuration Ser No 20000x Options 32 GHz Rev 20x Hi acc tal Present Settings CARD Language English ear Border tine 7 o o0 NOTES Resuts cord Disabled Engineers Notes Disabled cerr Certificate Ste DETAILS CLEAR USER TODAY S DATE TIME Het EXIT Rea eats Configuration The current HDN response is indicated by the highlight Use the softkeys to select mj a m 9500 TODAY S DATE TIME L________ EXIT 2 The EXIT screen key reverts to the second Present Settings menu screen Sec 3 4 3 31 CAL Alarms The default setting for calibration alarms is enabled This configuration allows these alarm
345. istance losses in mating BNC or PC3 5 connectors 7 2 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 4 Edge Function Specification 7 4 1 Edge Function Rise Fall Time 2 10 90 500ps Edge 9510 30 Heads Only Into 50Q or 1MQ 500ps HV Edge Into 1MQ lt 100Vpk pk lt 150ns gt 100Vpk pk lt 200ns NB into 50Q lt 100ns 9550 Active Head supports 25ps Fast Edge only 150ps Fast Edge 9530 Head Only Into 50Q 150ps 70ps Fast Edge 9560 Head Only Into 509 70ps 25ps Fast Edge 9550 Head Only Into 509 25ps Accuracy 50ps to 150ps NA 25ps 15ps to 20ps 4ps Accuracy displayed value 40ps NA 15ps 11ps 4ps Polarity Rising or Falling Return to Ground Rising or Falling Rising or Falling Return to Ground Rising Return to Ground Rising or Falling Return to Ground Amplitude 5mV to 3V pk pk 1V to 200V pk pk NB 1V to 5V pk pk into 50Q 5mV to 3V pk pk 25mV to 2V pk pk 425 to 575mV pk pk Amplitude Accuracy 2 Ranging Volt div factors of 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 or continuously variable continuous Deviation 11 2 Including over and under range NA Duty Cycle 10 50 10 10 10 Aberrations Into VSWR 1 2 1 lt 2 pk in 8GHz 1 lt 1 5 pk in 3GHz first 10ns lt 2 pk first 500ns lt 3 pk in 8GHz 1 lt t2 pk in 3GHz fir
346. ister The common query SRE reads the binary number in the SRE register The response is in the form of a decimal number which is the sum of the binary weighted values in the register The binary weighted values of bits 0 1 and 2 will always be zero 6 5 3 5 IEEE 488 2 defined Event Status Register The Event Status Register holds the Event Status Byte consisting of event bits each of which directs attention to particular information All bits are sticky ie once true cannot return to false until the register is cleared This occurs automatically when it is read by the query ESR The common command CLS clears the Event Status Register and associated error queue but not the Event Status Enable Register Note that because the bits are sticky it is necessary to read the appropriate subordinate register of the status structure in order to clear its bits and allow a new event from the same source to be reported The Event Status Register bits are named in mnemonic form as follows Bit 0 Operation Complete OPC This bit is true only if OPC has been programmed and all selected pending operations are complete As the 9500B operates in serial mode its usefulness is limited to registering the completion of long operations such as self test Bit1 Request Control RQC This bit is not used in the 9500B It is always set false Bit 2 Query Error QYE QYE true indicates that the application program
347. k mounting fixing screws B Fitting the Mountings to the 9500B Fit left and right front rack mounting ears these are interchangeable to the 9500B a Assemble the handles to the front ears as shown in the diagram and secure using the four M4 x 12 POZICSK screws provided b Secure the front ears through the side extrusions to the chassis with the brackets at the front as shown Use two M5 x 20 POZIPAN screws plain and shakeproof washers provided through the lower holes of each ear Fit left and right rear rack sliders these are interchangeable to the 9500B Secure both sliders through the side extrusions to the chassis at the rear as shown Use the four M5 x 20 POZICSK screws provided if required Remove the feet and tilt stand a Prize off the rubber pads from the four feet b Undo the two securing screws from each foot This releases the feet washers and tilt stand so that they can be detached and stored safely for possible future use D Fitting the Rear Ears to the Rack Fit the left and right rear ears not interchangeable to the rack a Fit the eight M6 cage nuts into the correct cutouts at front and rear of the rack see Fig 2 1 Squeeze the cage on each nut and insert from the inside of the rack b Offer up each appropriate ear to the outside of the back of the rack with the tongue facing forward as shown in the diagram Secure the ears using four of the eight M6 x 16 chromium plated
348. key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPECALIBRATOR panel then pressing the C soft key at the bottom of the screen Whenever the Load Capacitance screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear as follows but also refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 OFF READING CH1 Load Capacitance 0 000 pF TODAY S DATE TIME SIGNAL CHANNEL 4 16 4 Menu Selections 4 16 4 1 Load Resistance Menus Only Signal Channel and Expected Load selections operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 Note Measurement is available only when OUTPUT is ON 4 16 4 2 Load Capacitance Menus Only Signal Channel selection operates in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 Note Measurement is available only when OUTPUT is ON 4 16 4 3 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 16 5 Measurement Operation 4 16 5 1 Bottom Screen Keys Resistance SIGNAL Permits the measurement setup to CHANNEL be routed via any of the five heads also allowing selection of expected load paras 4 5 3 4 16 5 2 Bottom Screen Keys Capacitance SIGNAL Permits the measurement setup to CHANNEL be routed via any of the five heads paras 4 5 3 Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Load R and C Measurement 4 16 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 16 6 Use the 9500B to Measure Load Resis
349. l Final Width 215mm 6 C 2 Event Status Enable This event status data structure conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements for this structure es EZE O ESE enables the standard defined event bits which will gener ate a summary message in the status byte Refer to Section 6 Subsection 6 5 Nrf isa Decimal Numeric Data Element representing an integer decimal value equivalent to the Hex value required to enable the appropriate bits in this 8 bit register The detailed definition can be found in section 6 5 3 5 Note that numbers will be rounded to an integer Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable 6 C 3 Recall Event Status Enable This event status data structure conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements for this structure ESE recalls the enable mask for the standard defined events Refer to Section 6 Subsection 6 5 Response Decode The value returned when converted to base 2 binary identifies the enabled bits which will generate a summary message in the service request byte for this data structure Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions The Power On condition depends on the condition stored by the common PSC command if 0 then it is not cleared if 1 then the register is cleared Reset has no effect 6 C2 Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C 4
350. l bits in the register would be reset by this query 6 6 7 6 STAT QUES ENAB lt dnpd gt Purpose STAT QUES ENAB lt dnpd gt _ sets the mask which enables those Questionable Event register bits which are required to be summarized at bit 3 of the IEEE 488 2 Status Byte register lt dnpd gt This is a decimal integer whose binary equivalent represents the bits required to be enabled For example refer to Fig 6 2 and paras 6 5 4 The command STAT QUES ENAB 6144 would be required to enable only the RESISTANCE and CAPACITANCE bits 12 and 11 of the Questionable Event register Response to the Query Version A lt dnpd gt inthe form of an Nr1 number is returned The value of the number when converted to base 2 binary identifies the bits set in the Questionable Enable mask For example refer to Fig 6 2 and paras 6 5 4 Ifthe CAPACITANCE bit 1 1 of the register is the only enabled bit the number 2048 would be returned 6 6 7 7 STAT QUES COND Purpose STAT QUES COND returns the contents of the Questionable Condition register not shown in Fig 6 2 which is not cleared by the command N B This register contains transient states in that its bits are not sticky but are set and reset by the referred conditions The response to the query therefore represents an instantaneous Snapshot of the register state at the time that the query was accepted Response A lt dnpd gt inthe form of an Nr1
351. l Computer Memory Card Interface Adaptor PC Card To do this the Model 9500B has been fitted with FLASH memory chips to provide the update capability Ifan upgrade is required for your Model 9500B unit s your Service Center will inform you and provide the appropriate PC Card This Sub Section describes the routine procedure for upgrading the firmware Note that the All Self Test appears twice in the procedure before and after carrying out the upgrade This is included on two occasions to determine whether any difficulties were present before the upgrade or whether they have arisen as a result of the upgrade 8 2 3 2 Procedure 1 AIl Self Test Refer to paras 8 3 1 amp 8 3 2 Execute a All Self Test and record any errors If printing facilities are available select the PRINT option to obtain a hard copy of the results 2 Prepare the 9500B a Switch 9500B Power OFF b Locate the FACTORY SET switches on the 9500B rear panel CAL FACTORY SET ENABLE A DISABLE i Remove the switch cover by releasing its retaining screw CAL FACTORY SET ENABLE J A DISABLE 678 ii Set Switch 6 to the ENABLE position up Do not disturb any of the other switches CAL FACTORY SET ENABLE J E DISABLE 678 3 Insert the PC Card a Locate PCMCIA SLOT 1 in the 9500B front panel b Insert the PC Card into PCMCIA SLOT 1 exerting justenough pressure to push out the black button by the side of the slot 4
352. l Notes 5 2 1 Final Width 215mm 5 2 4 Printing Setup The results of adjustment and verification operations on UUTs can be printed on one of two forms of certificate A suitable printer must be connected and switched on line and the required certificate style format and data must be entered into the 9500B memory Then with the correct printer type enabled the 9500B internal program will generate the required certificate 5 2 4 1 Printer Type The printer to be used should be capable of printing 120 characters per line and must be able to print the Code Page 437 character set Most printers compatible with Epson FX Canon Bubble Jet or Hewlett Packard Desk Jet are suitable The printer is connected to the 25 way D type port on the 9500B rear panel 5 2 4 2 Certificate Formatting and Final Width 215mm Data Presentation Config mode is used to select the style of certificate to be printed and to set the format of page length headers footers etc In addition such certificate entries as laboratory identification temperature and humidity can be added Details of these elements of Config mode can be found in Section 3 paras 3 4 3 Note If the Procedure Card used to run the procedure was originally written for the Model 9100 Option 250 or 600 then the procedure and certificate will incorporate the relevant 9100 not 9500B uncertainties 5 2 4 3 Enable Printing Printing must be enabled using the Config mo
353. l signal inputs and outputs Section 4 2 is divided into the following sub sections pagi 4 2 1 Introduction 4 2 1 4 2 2 Active Head Technology 4 2 1 4 2 2 1 Connections to the 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope 4 2 2 2 Head Module Signal Proce 4 2 3 AUX IN Rear Panel 4 2 4 REF FREQUENCY INPUT 4 2 5 REF FREQUENCY OUTPUT 4 2 6 Single and Multiple Channel Outputs 4 2 2 4 2 6 1 Single Channel Variants 4 2 6 2 Option 5 4 2 2 Active Head Technology The main function of a head is to route the 9500B s output to the UUT oscilloscope input channel without intervening cables that could degrade the signal Each head contains output circuitry that generates and supports the transmission of pulses of very short rise and fall times with low distortion and amplitude variable from 5mV to 43V and good 50Q matching This is achieved by the use of low loss substrate dielectrics with wide band components attenuators and relays The heads also perform the function of sinewave levelling Available head modules include e Model 9510 1 1GHz Output Module with 500ps pulse edge capability e Model 9530 3 2GHz Output Module with 150ps and 500ps pulse edge capability e Model 9550 Output Module with 25ps pulse edge capability only e Model 9560 6 4GHz Output Module with 70ps pulse edge capability Electrical specifications apart modules are interchangeable The 9500B accepts any mix of types up to five modules
354. ld be calibrated Head calibration involves the use of a verified 9500B Mainframe Note Heads can be calibrated only within the bandwidth of the mainframe see table 10 6 1 1 e g Head Model 9510 with Mainframe Variant 9500B 600 can only be verified to 600MHz Table 10 6 1 1 Head Calibration and Base Compatibility Model 400MHz base 600MHz base 1 1GHz base 3 2GHz base 10 6 1 Levelled Sine Function LF Gain 10 6 1 1 Summary The Levelled Sine Function LF Gain is calibrated by carrying out the sequences given in section 170 6 1 4 Equipment requirements are for LF Gain calibration are given in para 10 6 1 2 and calibration setup in para 10 6 1 3 10 6 1 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Active Head connected to a verified Model 9500B Mainframe e Ahighresolution Standards DMM with RMS AC Voltage accuracy of 0 3 or better from 10mV to 3V at 1kHz Example Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC or PC3 5 to 4mm leads Example Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor e Short high quality 4mm leads for connection between the Calibration Adaptor the DMM 10 6 1 3 Calibration Setup 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the DMM aas shownin Fig 10 6 1 overleaf or via a similar BNC or PC3 5 to 4mm adaptor and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Levelled Sine Function LF Gain 10 6 1 Final Width 21
355. le local and or national safety regulations and rules while performing any work First disconnect the instrument from all signal sources then from the AC line supply before removing any cover Any adjustment parts replacement maintenance or repair should be carried out only by the manufacturer s authorised technical personnel WARNING FOR PROTECTION AGAINST INJURY AND FIRE HAZARD USE ONLY MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED PARTS THAT ARE RELEVANT TO SAFETY PERFORM SAFETY TESTS AFTER REPLACING ANY PART THAT IS RELEVANT TO SAFETY Observe any additional safety instructions or warnings given in this manual Moving and Cleaning First disconnect the instrument from all signal sources then from the AC line supply before moving or cleaning See Section 8 2 for Routine Maintenance procedures Model 9500B User s Handbook Safety Section Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND Final Width 215mm Section 1 The Model 9500B High Performance Oscilloscope Calibrator Final Width 215mm Fig 1 1 General View of Model 9500B with an Active Head 1 1 About Section 1 1 2 Introduction to the Model 9500B Section 1 introduces the Model 9500B High Performance Oscilloscope 4 9 4 Functions Calibrator It is divided into the following sub sections 1 2 Introducing the Model 9500B Page D2 WARIS o c2sssssivasssncooiaieedsecctbvaedenesasebendsxoncavnedsnes 11 1 2 1 Functions 1 2 2 Operating Modes 1 2 2 1 Manual Mode
356. le use by the Service Center due due due due due due date date date date date date previous cal data Previous cal outside limits using defaults WARNING Cal data not stored Exit again to abandon data Appendix A to Section 8 9500B Maintenance Error Reporting Subsystem 8 A5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm DAC Compensation 5001 Corrupt 5002 Corrupt 5003 Corrupt 5004 Corrupt 5005 Corrupt 5006 Corrupt 5007 Corrupt 5008 Corrupt 5009 Corrupt main DAC gain trim DAC gain composite DAC zero lookup table Vmax Vmin ve zero DAC ve zero DAC polarity gain DAC LFAC correction 5011 Gain request limited number number ime setting the range 10V and 110V Borderline value must be within the range 10 00 99 99 password entry New string contains illegal characters or values due date due date range 0 1 Hz and 1 1 GHz range 0 1 Hz and 3 2 GHz range 0 1 Hz and 2 2 GHz Ext Ref must be locked for selection to be allowed range 0 1 Hz and 400 MHz range 0 1 Hz and 600 MHz Configuration 4002 Failed to save configuration 7003 Day entry is not a valid number 7004 Day separator is incorrect 7005 Month entry is not a valid number 7006 Month separator is incorrect 7007 Century entry is not a valid 7008 Year entry is not a valid number 7009 Year separator is incorrect 7010
357. lect test using softkeys DISPLAY MEMORY CARD TRACKER PRINTER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT Selecting KEYBRD transfers to the Keyboard test screen This invites a user to press the front panel key to be tested and reports on the screen the details of the last key to be pressed Keyboard test Press key to be tested Last key pressed X Y Z A A Keyboard matrix Key name reference TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT J The Keyboard matrix reference X Y relates to the electronic matrix whichis used to transfer keypress information to the internal processor and does not relate closely to the physical layout of keys The Key name Z is the name in words which describes the last key to be pressed If the reported key name does not coincide with the function of the last key to be physically pressed a failure is implied Rectification will require access to the internal circuitry so no further user action is recommended except to report the result to your Fluke Service Center EXIT returns to the Interface Select test menu screen 8 3 4 4 Display Checks Display checks are initiated by pressing the DISPLAY key on the Select test menu screen DISPLAY Selftest ene F KEYBRD Select test using softkeys DISPLAY MEMORY CARD RACKER PRINTER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT J Selecting DISPLAY transfers to the Display test screen This invites a user to us
358. libration Mode screen 14 Press the BASE CAL screen key to see the Standard Calibration initial default screen the DC Square DC Voltage function Target Selection screen 15 Select the function to be calibrated Standard Calibration can only be carried out for the following functions DC Square Select waveforms via the WAVEFORM soft key Sine Select by pressing the front panel QU key Resistance Measurement Select by pressing the front panel Aux key Note Because in calibrating Resistance Measurement the 9500B does not produce an output it does not conform exactly to the following sequence Instead refer to sub section 10 5 6 16 Select the required output signal channel trigger channel and Trigger Ratio if required via the Target Selection screen Any channel may be used for mainframe calibration 17 Select the required 9500B hardware configuration by choosing the appropriate Cal Range Details of each function s hardware configurations and suitable output values to select them can be found in the detailed procedures provided later in this section 18 a If you wish to use the saved target calibration points used during the previous calibration of the 9500B do not press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key b If you wish to use the default target calibration points defined for this hardware configuration press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key 19 Press the TARGET 1 or TARGET 2 screen key to display the targe
359. lined This is to draw attention to the fact that it is not a data element but represents the EOI line being set true with the last byte NL to terminate the program message Refer to the Standard document IEEE Std 488 2 1992 Sub section 7 7 6 page 78 PUD allows a user to enter up to 63 bytes of data into a protected area to identify or characterize the instrument The two representations above are allowed depending on the message length and the number of digits required to identify this The instrument must be in calibration mode for this command to execute The data can be recalled using the PUD query Execution Errors PUD is executable only when the rear panel calibration switch is in the enabled position and calibration has been enabled Otherwise an Execution Error is returned Command Errors A Command Error is returned if the user message exceeds 63 bytes or if the data does not conform to the standard format Power On and Reset Conditions Data area remains unchanged Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C9 Final Width 215mm 6 C 12 Protected User Data Recall of User Data PUD I This common command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements PUD recalls previously entered user data Refer to program command PUD Response Syntax d 2 digit k EZI J user message k
360. ls of a UUT oscilloscope c Also two cable channels can be precision aligned For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 14 is divided into the following sub sections ATAA MNOGUCHON siise ess 4 14 1 4 14 2 Default Settings wee 414 1 414 3 ManU SQIGCHONS nasunie 4 14 1 4 14 3 1 Signal Channel Selection 4 14 1 4 14 3 2 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll 414 2 4 14 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys umeric Entry 4 14 3 4 Bottom Screen Keys 4 14 4 Zero Skew Operation ou 414 2 414 41 Precision Alignment of 9500B Channel Outputs 414 2 4144 2 Preservation of Alignment 414 2 4 14 5 Measurement of UUT Oscilloscope Channel Skew 4 14 5 1 Introduction 4 14 5 2 Interconnections i 4 14 5 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup 4 14 3 4 14 5 4 Sequence of Operations 414 3 4 14 2 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen The Zero Skew function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the Sf softkey onthe right of the screen Whenever the Zero Skew menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby
361. lt 500ps Frequency 1kHz to IMHz e Reference Frequency Output Pee Frequency Range 1MHz or 10MHz Curent Function Level into 500 gt 1 15V DC Level into 1MQ gt 2 3V Output Current 88 84A to 111 2mA Input Leakage Function Square Short Open Circuit Outputs Allows testing of UUT oscilloscope input leakage Frequencies 10Hz to 100kHz current Output Current 88 84A pk pk to 111 2mA pk pk UUT Scope Trigger Auto trigger at 100Hz 1 2 Section 1 Introducing the Model 9500B Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 1 2 2 Operating Modes In order to be able to calibrate a wide range of different oscilloscope parameters flexibility is built into the design of the 9500B Of the five major modes only two Manual and Procedure determine the everyday front panel use of the instrument The other three are concerned with system configuration 9500B calibration and 9500B selftest 1 2 2 1 Manual Mode In Manual Mode the 9500B is operated entirely from the front panel The operator is in complete charge of the calibration procedure usually interpreted locally from the UUT oscilloscope manufacturer s calibration data Refer to Sections 3 and 4 1 2 2 2 Procedure Mode Procedure Mode involves the use ofa memorized calibration procedure The manufacturer s data for the UUT oscilloscope will have been interpreted into a series of calibration operations which are programmed ontoamemory card When the card is inserted into the PROCEDURE
362. lt cpd gt BLACk selects the black level amplitude GREY selects a mid level amplitude equivalent to a TV grey tone WHITe selects the white level amplitude For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 11 Composite Video Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected amplitude level 6 6 5 21 SOUR PAR TEL POL lt cpd gt POS NEG Purpose This command inverts the polarity of the TV waveform A settings conflict will be reported if the TELevision function has not been selected lt cpd gt The character program data lt cpd gt POS sets the output square wave in a positive direction referred to ground Similarly lt cpd gt NEG sets the output square wave in a negative direction referred to ground For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer to Section 4 Sub Section 4 11 Composite Video Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected polarity 66 6 5 22 SOUR PAR LEAK STAT 2 lt cpd gt OPEN CLOS Purpose This command selects the leakage function The lt cpd gt parameters are used to determine which of the leakage currents are measured A settings conflict will be reported if the LEAKage function has not been selected lt cpd gt OPEN selects open circuit output CLOSe selects short circuit output For details
363. lute accuracies 9 2 2 Verification on Receipt from the Factory Each 9500B is despatched from the factory with a Certificate of Calibration which gives detailed results of its pre shipment performance However organizations may wish to confirm that all instruments perform within published specifications on receipt from their manufacturers Such verification is only possible however if the user s organization possesses suitable standards equipment of the necessary traceable accuracy Without these standards users may rely on an external support organization for verification probably also using these organizations to recalibrate the unit at appropriate intervals 9 2 3 Verification after User Calibration Calibration against standards as detailed in Section 10 of this handbook covers only the possible adjustments used to place corrections in the Mainframe calibration memory Pre calibration and post calibration performance at each adjustment point can be assessed as part of the adjustment procedure However to cover all the required points the procedure in this section should be used to verify pre and post calibration performance Verifying the Model 9500B Specification 9 3 Equipment Requirements As stated earlier the standards required to verify that 9500B is within its published specifications must possess the necessary traceable accuracy Also note that the standards must operate within the optimum output conditions o
364. m Ref 1M Q Meas 1M Q Ref 50 Q Meas 50 Q Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 17 9 8 6 Verifying the Pulse Width Function 9 8 6 1 Summary 9 8 6 4 Verification Setup Equipment requirements are given at para 9 8 6 2 and test 1 Connections Connectthe 9500B to the Counter as shown in Para interconnections at para 9 8 6 3 9 8 4 1 and ensure that both instruments are The Pulse Width Function is verified by carrying out measurements of powered ON and warmed up Period in the sequence given at paras 9 8 6 5 at the verification points 2 Counter Select the required function to measure pulse shown in Table 9 8 6 1 duration and reading average to enhance measurement resolution 9 8 6 2 Equipment Requirements 3 9500B a Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode e The UUT Model 9500B Mainframe with 9510 or 9530 Active and then select the Pulse Width function Head b Selectthe required output Signal Channel 50Q e Digital counter for 0 25ppm clock accuracy measurements load Example Hewlett Packard Model HP53131A with Option 012 9 8 6 3 Interconnections Refer to Fig 9 8 6 1 Verfication Procedure and table overleaf Final Width 215mm Counter Fig 9 8 6 1 Pulse Width Verification Interconnections 9 18 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 8 6 5 Verification Procedure Copy the table 9 8 6 1 Follow the correct sequence o
365. manded while full access to front panel control is also retained The 9500B will act in response to the commands performing any changes in output etc No visible effect will be observed other than the display presentation tracking the changes 6 4 2 3 Programmed Transfer to Local Control GTL or REN False The application program can switch the 9500B into Local Control by sending Command GTL or by setting the REN line false permitting a user to take manual control from the front panel The application program can regain Remote control by sending the overriding command Listen Address with REN true addressing the 9500B as a listener with the Remote Enable management line true Low This will re impose remote control unless the 9500B is in Configuration Procedure or Test Mode 6 4 2 4 Device Clear Either of the commands DCL or SDC will force the following instrument states e all IEEE 488 input and output buffers cleared e with IFC Interface Clear any device dependent message bus holdoffs cleared e the status byte is changed by clearing the MAV bit These commands will not e change any settings or stored data within the device except as listed above e interrupt analog output e interrupt or affect any functions of the device not associated with the IEEE 488 system 6 4 2 5 Levels of Reset Three levels of reset are defined for IEEE 488 2 application programs acomplete sys
366. metrical about ground Rise Time and Aberrations lt 150ns and lt 2 pk Requires 9530 or 9510 Head and BNC Current adaptor 7 9 2 Video Output 7 9 4 Overload Pulse Composite Video Output Overload Pulse Final Width 2 15mm Amplitude 1 0Vpk pk Amplitude 5V to 20V into 50Q Pattern Full Raster White Grey or Black Polarity Positive Negative i ii Duration 0 2s to 100s Sync Polarity Positive or Negative subject to pulse energy limits Stangards te Energy 1 6J to 50J Power in 50 0 5W to 8W Trigger Output Composite Sync or Odd Field start Trigger Manual Max Rep Rate 0 3Hz 9560 50Q only Internally Limited 7 9 3 LF Linear Ramp 7 9 5 Zero Skew Zero Skew LF Linear Ramp Unadjusted Skew lt 50ps ch to ch Waveforms 1V pk pk triangle symmetrical about ground Adjusted Skew lt 5ps ch to ch Linearity lt 0 1 deviation over 10 90 Skew Temp Coef lt 0 2ps C Ramp Time ims 10ms 100ms or 1s Rise and Fall Time 450ps typical The 9560 Head is restricted to 50Q loads only Relative Jitter lt 7ps pk pk 7 8 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 9 6 Input Leakage 7 9 7 Auxiliary Input Input Leakage Function Auxiliary Input Open Circuit Output Leakage lt 50pA Signal Routing Rear SMA input Final Width 215mm a passive and switched 50Q path Short Circuit Output Offset lt 15uV to any Active Head
367. mmand N B This register contains transient states in that its bits are not sticky but are set and reset by the referred operations The response to the query therefore represents an instantaneous Snapshot of the register state at the time that the query was accepted Response A lt dnpd gt inthe form of an Nr1 number is returned The value of the number when converted to base 2 binary identifies the Operation Condition register bits to determine their current status For example refer to Fig 6 2 Tf the 9500B was in the process of performing a selftest only the TESTING bit 8 of the register would be temporarily set and the number 256 would be returned 6 6 16 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 7 STATus Subsystem Conzd 6 6 7 5 STAT QUES EVEN Purpose STAT QUES returns the contents of the Questionable Event register clearing the register Response A lt dnpd gt inthe form of an Nr1 number is returned The value of the number when converted to base 2 binary identifies the Questionable Event register bits to determine their current status For example refer to Fig 6 2 and paras 6 5 4 If an error had been initiated by a doubtful measurement during resistance operations the sticky RESISTANCE bit 12 of the register would be set and if no other Questionable Event bits were enabled the number 4096 would be returned Bit 12 indeed al
368. mmon command CLS clears the queue Bit 4 Execution Error EXE An execution error is generated if the received command cannot be executed owing to the device state or the command parameter being out of bounds The appropriate error message is added to the Error Queue See the Note about the Error Queue above 6 5 4 Section 6 9500B System Operation Retrieval of Device Status Information Bit 5 Command Error CME CME occurs when a received bus command does not satisfy the IEEE 488 2 generic syntax or the device command syntax programmed into the instrument interface s parser and so is not recognized as a valid command The appropriate error message is added to the Error Queue See the Note about the Error Queue on the previous page Bit 6 User Request URQ This bit is not used It is always set false Bit 7 9500B Power Supply On PON This bit is set true only when the Line Power has just been switched on to the 9500B the subsequent Power up Selftest has been completed successfully and the 9500B defaults into Manual mode at Power on If the Power on default is Procedure mode remote operation is not available If the selftest is unsuccessful the 9500B will report the fact in Test mode which also does not permit remote operation Whether or not an SRQ is generated by setting bit 7 true depends on the previously programmed Power On Status Clear message PSC phs Nrf e For an Nrf of 1 the Even
369. mplitude 20 000 mV cna Frequency 1 0000 kHz E TRIGGE NONE D TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT SIGNAL TRIGGER CABLE CHANNEL RATIO SELECT Note that the expected load key in the bottom right corner is now de activated and the trigger state legend in the top central box is fixed on 50Q A further selection is available to choose the trigger ratio 4 5 3 5 Trigger Ratio The Trigger Ratio is the ratio of the trigger frequency to the that of the waveform itself Three ratios are available 1 10 and 100 Pressing the TRIGGER RATIO key presents the following screen 7 OFF 4 5 3 6 Retained Channel Memory Allselections made for Signal Channel Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio are retained in non volatile memory within the 9500B Changing modes and functions and powering the instrument on and off will not alter these selections For this reason there are no true defaults for these parameters although on receipt from manufacture you should find the following selections are already made Signal Channel 1 Trigger Channel NONE Cable Select Not selected Trigger Ratio 1 4 5 3 7 Choosing a Waveshape All waveshapes in this function can be selected on a second menu screen This is activated by pressing the WAVEFORM screen key on the bottom row The screen changes to show the available waveforms Lu Orii 5 00 mV div
370. n mode The 9500B will transfer to the Configuration menu screen alpha numeric keypad security icons will appear on the screen as you type Finally press the J key If the password is incorrect an error i i message will be given and the security mode by personnel author ized by local Config u rat IO n icons will be removed enabling a new iccesstothemeansofalteringthepassword SpIO ZA tes Maco ai Daal aaa i Present Settings The EXIT screen key acts to escape back itself The necessary process is detailed Ref frequency 50 090 kHz E k Safety Voltage 188 20 V to the previous screen later in this sub section Bus Address 1 4 Th A roliosedh i z Rrinter NONE e correct password followe a wi A second different password will be Power up mode Manual x P va re 7 i ane Ext ref in 1 MHz provide entry to the main Configuration required to allow entry to Calibration mode Ext ref in Disabled howing th t setti menu screen showing the present settings as authorized by local management The TOPAY S DATE ule ae amp 5 ets MORE of the parameters which now can be shipment version of the Calibration mode j pa changed using screen keys whose labels password is 23 45 97 as typed on the di front panel keypad when the Password 3 The screen shows the present settings of appear on the display Entry screen for Calibration mode is some of the parameters which can be 5 changed in Co
371. n 7 of this handbook are absolute accuracies which incorporate all the uncertainties involved in calibrating the 9500B up to and including those of National Standards 9 7 Verification Procedure Suitability The procedures given in this section to verify the Model 9500B specification are suitable for verification both after receipt from the factory or when associated with user calibration Traceability Where to conform to quality standards the 9500B is required to be traceable to higher standards then all equipment used to verify the 9500B specification must also be traceable to those standards 9 8 9500B Mainframe Verification by Functions Sub section 9 8 is a guide to the process of verifying the Model 9500B functions from the front panel The following topics are covered 9 8 1 DC Square Function DC Output 9 8 2 DC Square Function Square Output 9 8 3 LF Sine Function 9 8 4 Time Markers Function 9 8 5 Load Resistance Measurement Function 9 8 6 Pulse Width Function The list of topics above are placed in the order in which the 9500B Mainframe functions should be verified Although it is not essential to verify all the functions at any one time functions higher in the list should be verified before those lower in the list 9 8 1 Verifying the DC Square Function DC Voltage 9 8 1 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 8 1 2 and test interconnections at para 9 8 1 3 The DC Function is verified by carrying out measur
372. n the IEEE 488 ADDRESSES screen press the 5 SERIES soft key 95 B 5 SERIES Configuration IEEE 488 ADDRESSES CG5011 emul 22 3 Change by direct edit only TODAY S DATE EXIT SG5030 emul TIME Note that the 9500B contains two IEEE 488 interfaces each of which will respond to a separate address 9500B and CG5011 occupy one IEEE bus address and can be modified either on the 9500B screen or the 5000 series screen SG5030 occupies the other bus address which can be modified only on the 5000 series screen The 5 SERIES selection also switches the interface to accept the emulation commands only The small arrow under the sign indicates which address will be changed when direct editing is used The arrow is toggled between the two addresses using the Tab key The two emulation addresses cannot have the same number Any attempt to write a duplicate address will result in an error message After setting the addresses use EXIT to return to the Config mode Present settings screen screen N i i 9500B i Configuration a 6 F 3 4 Points of Interest IEEE 488 ADDRESSES SERIES e Addressing range is the standard 0 30 9500B address 22 e The message terminator can be either LF EOI or just EOI Ondraddreser nactive e The IEEE 488 Interface Function Capability is the same as for the 9500B SHIAH1T6L4SR1RL1PPODCIDTOCO Change by direct edit only
373. ncy for this purpose being 50kHz In the 9500B for ease of operation in certain functions the output can be changed from the selected frequency to the reference frequency and back by a simple toggle switching action In the 9500B the default reference frequency is set at 5OkHz but users can change this in Configuration mode to match the frequency used in procedures for individual oscilloscopes 1 Foraccess to alter the reference frequency press the REF FREQ screen key at the bottom left of the Present Settings screen 2 This transfers to a configuration screen designed for changing the Ref Frequency The default value is shown Configuration The REFERENCE FREQUENCY can be changed by using direct editing only Ref 50 00 khz TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 5 kHz DEFAULT 3 UseDirecteditto set the required reference frequency After typing the value press the key on the keypad the Direct edit V screen key in the right hand column will perform the same action 4 The 50kHz DEFAULT screen key on the right can be used if 50kHz is required 5 Press the EXIT screen key to return to the Present settings menu screen The new reference frequency appears on the Present Settings list 3 4 3 3 High Voltage Warnings Warning and Interlock Safety voltage In the interests of safety to avoid electric shock the 9500B incorporates a high voltage warning and interlock system for
374. nd the error code number is appended to the Error queue Execution Error Reporting The error is reported by the mechanisms described earlier in Section 6 Sub section 6 5 which deals with status reporting The Execution Error numbers are given below with their associated descriptions 220 Parameter error 221 Settings conflict 222 Data out of range 223 Too much data 224 Illegal parameter value 241 Hardware missing 258 Media protected 8 A 2 2 5 Query Errors QYE Remote operation only Query Error Generation A Query Error is generated when the controller fails to follow the Message Exchange Control Protocol as follows e DEADLOCK State The device has been asked to buffer more data than it has room to store the Output Queue is full blocking the Response Formatter Execution Control and Parser the Input Buffer is full and the controller is waiting to send more data bytes to the device e UNTERMINATED Action The controller attemps to read a Response Message from the device without first having sent a complete Query Message including the Program Message Terminator e INTERRUPTED Action The device is interrupted by anew Program Message before it finishes sending a Response Message Query Error Reporting The QYE bit 2 is set true in the Standard defined Event Status Byte and the error code number is appended to the Error queue The error is reported by the mechanisms describ
375. nd Screen Key Labels The new value is implemented by pressing the Enter key on the keypad or at the top of the right screen keys The display then changes to that shown in Fig 4 4 7 Ly OFF feces none Amplitude 20 000 mV _ Deviation 10 00 A 9 0 P Amplitude 20 000 mV Frequency 1 0000 kHz mo TODAY S DATE TIME SEN WAVE CHANNEL EEA A FORM 7 SELECT eg Fig 4 4 7 Result of Pressing Enter Note that the 9500B has assumed that the typed characters 10 representa deviation of 10 00 in this context For a deviation of 10 00 type the characters 10 using the keypad hyphen as a negative symbol Parameter Context If the Deviation units had been changed to AV absolute voltage instead of the relative A then instead of Fig 4 4 5 this would be indicated as shown in Fig 4 4 8 4 4 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edit Facilities Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 r La OFF mecer wome Amplitude 20 000 mVpk Deviation 0 000 mVoks A O P Amplitude 20 000 mVokk Frequency 1 0000 kHz a TODAY S DATE TIME WAVE CHANNEL EE FORM rh ae a Ly OFF Amplitude 20 000 mV Deviation 2 000 mV A O P Amplitude 22 000 m or Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME A WAVE CHANNEL REA 7
376. nd carry out the following operations 1 to 5 at each stage 1 User s Signal Source Ensure that the correct signal is being output UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display b Observe and record the UUT s response to the user specific signal as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 5 9500B Set Output OFF Pe o SPM 4 15 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Auxiliary Input Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 16 Load Resistance and Capacitance Measurement 4 16 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to using the 9500B to measure the resistive or capacitive load presented by the channel inputs of a UUT oscilloscope For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 16 is divided into the following sub sections 4 16 1 Introduction 4 16 2 Measurement Method vee 4 16 1 4 16 3 Default SOnINGS iisa 4 16 1 4 16 3 1 Load Resistance Defaults 4 16 3 2 Load Capacitance Defaults 4 16 4 Menu Selections 0 cceeecee 4 16 4 1 Load Resistance Menus 416 4 2 Load Capacitance Menus 4 16 4 3 Retained Channel Memory 4 16 5 Measurement Operation sceeceecee 4 16 1 4 16 5 1 Bott
377. nd spinwheel play no part in setting the value Form of Cursor Numeric Entry can be used to alter only those parameter values which are accessed by the triangular form of cursor The cursor can sit on any digit in the number and Numeric Entry will have the same effect Value Editing The controls for Numeric Entry to alter the value are the numeric keys of the alphanumeric keypad highlighted in Fig 4 4 4 Value Entry Box Once a numeric key is pressed an enclosed area box will be provided on the screen below areduced size version of the value to be changed The box can be seen in Fig 4 4 6 Numeric Entry Action Assume that the tab key has placed the cursor on the Deviation value in this case O OO The cursor can be seen in Fig 4 4 5 Ly OEE none Amplitude 20 000 mVpro Deviation 90 00 459 O P Amplitude 20 000 mVrrm Frequency 1 0000 kHz N TODAY S DATE TIME lae N Fig 4 4 5 Numeric Entry Starting Point By typing the number 10 for 10 on the numeric keypad the value entry box appears on the display as shown in Fig 4 4 6 LAS Amplitude 20 000 mVpkx Deviation e O P Amplitude 20 000 mVor r Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME EGA _ _ WAVE CHANNEL RSA gt FORM rH seLecT 14 Fig 4 4 6 Numeric Entry Effect on Deviation Value a
378. nfiguration mode Pressing the MORE key again will showing The necessary process for j sas BUS changing this password is also detailed 4 The screen also indicates which hardware C O n f g u at O n ADDRESS later in this sub section Option 9500B 600 9500B 1100 or 9500B Som Na AOS Rev XXX PRINTER 3200 is fitted These cannot be changed in Options L1 GHz Hi acc gt tal LN POWER Configuration mode Present Settings UP MODE 8 j Ref frequency 5 kHz Safety Voltage 198 06 V aa r Bus Add 1 3 4 3 1 MORE Configuration i NONE EXT REF Power up mode Manual IN 1 To gain access to alter Configuration mode Emenn Ta EXT REF options a password will be required Refer TODAY s DATE TIME to the arrangements made for shipment Ger ee eE core MORE passwords described in Para 3 4 2 provide entry to a second Configuration menu screen showing the present settings of other parameters Refer to para 3 4 3 14 2 The password requirement will be invoked by pressing the MORE screen key on the right of the bottom row The 9500B will transfer to the Password Entry screen 3 When you enter your password using the Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation 3 4 3 2 Use of Reference Frequency Ref Frequency The reference frequency is used mainly in assessments of UUT oscilloscope bandwidth a commonly used freque
379. ng the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor a Ensure that the Active Head output BNC is disconnected from the Model 4955 input b Set the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor switch as shown in Table 10 5 6 1 If not using the Model 4955 set up external circuitry to measure the appropriate load resistor 4 wire connection with the 9500B Active Head output BNC disconnected 10 11 12 Set the Standards DMM to the appropriate Resistance measurement range take a Resistance measurement and note the result Note make sure to allow for any settling time of the external measuring instrument If using the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor a Set the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor switch as shown in Table 10 5 6 1 b Reconnect the Active Head output BNC to the Model 4955 input If not using the Model 4955 disconnect the load resistor from the DMM and reconnect it to the 9500B Active Head output BNC Press the ON key to turn the 9500B output on Set the Target Res to the value measured in operation 7 using the cursor controls and or spinwheel Press the ACCEPT CALIB key to generate and implement the correction factor The Measured Res value will change to the Target Res value and the adjustment of the output amplitude at this target is complete Note Omit operation 13 if you do not wish to save the resistance 13 14 15 value of this target calibration point Press the SAVE TARGET soft key Press the EXIT key
380. nnel is available 4 13 4 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 13 5 Overload Pulse Operation 4 13 5 1 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Keys operate on the value marked by the cursor The key labels do not change regardless of the cursor position ay a Toggles the value between positive and negative pulses TRIG Press to trigger a single shot of PULSE the specified pulse output No further pulse can be triggered within three seconds otherwise a screen message will appear 4 13 5 2 Right Side Screen Keys Direct Edit Right side screen keys operate on the value in the edit box and acting in place of the key exit from Direct Edit back to Digit Edit then set the value as evaluated in the box a Cursor on Amplitude V Evaluates the number in the box in Volts b Cursor on Pulse Energy J Evaluates the number in the box in Joules 4 13 5 3 Bottom Screen Keys Digit and Direct Edit CHANNEL Permits the screen signal setup to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel trigger ratio and cable channel paras 4 5 3 AUTO Produces atrain of triggers at 100Hz TRIG to trigger the UUT oscilloscope continuously continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Overload Pulse Function 4 13 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 13 5 Overload Pulse Operation Contd 4 13 5 4 Value
381. nnel is selected that is already in use has a cable plugged in or is not connected An error message will be generated The optional lt cpd gt also determines which channels will use an active head to deliver the trigger signal and not a plain cable with no head inserted If the ACTive CABLe lt cpd gt is not present then the selected channel type will not change If an active head is inserted into a channel that has been designated a CABLe then the output will be turned off and the CABLe selection will be overridden by the ACTive setting Response to Query Version The 9500B will return the name of the selected trigger channel 6 6 4 8 ROUT TRIG IMP lt dnpd gt Purpose This command chooses between the 50Q or IMQ scope impedance matching levels for the selected trigger channel The value of lt dnpd gt is rounded to select the required impedance values lt 55 select 50Q values gt 55 select IMQ Attempting to set the trigger channel impedance when the trigger has been set to CABLE will cause a settings conflict error Commands setting the trigger channel impedance when the trigger has been set to NONE will be ignored Response to Query Version The 9500B will return 50 if 50Q is selected or 1E6 if IMQ is selected 6 6 4 9 ROUT TRIG RAT lt dnpd gt Purpose This command sets the trigger frequency as a ratio of the selected function There are three distinct values divide by 1 divide by 10 di
382. nnel output to the input of the UUT Signal Channel to be calibrated b Ifa trigger is required use the appropriate active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Trigger for the Channel to be calibrated 4 5 8 3 UUT Scope Amplitude Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source of DC Voltage The following procedure assumes that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read earlier paragraphs 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for amplitude calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in DC Function with Output OFF Ifin any other function press the L soft key at the top right of the screen then press the WAVEFORM screen key Select orf as required Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 8 at each stage continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function 4 5 9 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 5 8 Usin
383. nsists of eleven separate hardware configurations numbered as Cal Ranges 1 888 00mV to 2 10mV 2 2 10mV to 5 56mV 3 5 56mV to 21 00mV 4 21 00mV to 55 60mV 5 55 60mV to 210 00mV 6 210 00mV to 556 00mV TE 556 00mV to 21 0V 8 21 0V to 5 56V 9 5 56V to 22 24V 10 22 24V to 55 60V 11 55 60V to 222 40V Hence hardware configuration 1 can be selected by setting the Cal Range to 1 Hardware configuration 2 can be selected by setting the Cal Range to 2 etc using the A and V cursor keys or spinwheel The full list of Cal Ranges used to establish all the required hardware configurations for each function are given in the detailed calibration procedures contained in Section 10 5 of this handbook Note that in this instance by selecting Cal Range 1 two Saved Calibration targets appear 1 gt 1 0000mV Low and 2 1 9000mV High 10 4 2 3 Channel Selections Connection of the Mainframe to the standards equipment must be routed through a signal channel head with a trigger channel cable if necessary Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio operate in the same way as in normal DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 10 4 2 4 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 10 4 2 5 Default or Saved Targets For each function and Cal Range users can choose Default or Saved calibration targets Pre programmed Default Targets selected by p
384. nter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy and calculate as shown Output Voltage pk pk Tolerance Limits pk pk Lower Higher 7 9500B Output Voltage RMS for the output waveform at 1kHz RMS 0 5 x 0 707107 x pk pk Note This factor applies only when the Standards DMM input is AC Coupled through a large capacitance It is based on the use of a model 4955 set to SQV 50Q 6 Amplitude a b Measure the RMS Output Voltage value Record this value in the Measured Value column of the copy of the Table For SGN1 6 calculate and record the Calculated Values in the copy of the table For SGN1 6 check that the Calculated Value is at or between the RMS Tolerance Limits For SGN7 11 check that the Measured Value is at or between the RMS Tolerance Limits Set Output OFF Tolerance Measured Calculated Limits RMS Value Value Higher RMS Lower 1 0000V 0 35355V SGN8 SGN1 300 00mV 106 066mV SGN9 SGN2 100 00mV 35 3553mV SGN10 SGN3 1 0000V 0 35355V SGN8 SGN4 300 00mV 106 066mV SGN9 SGN5 100 00mV 3 0000V 2 955V 3 045V 35 3553mV 1 06066V 1 04475V SGN10 SGN6 1 07657V 1 0000V 0 985V 1 015V 0 35355V 0 34825V 0 35885V 300 00mV 295 5mV 304 5mV 106 066mV 104 47mV 107657mV 100 00mV 98 50mV 101 5mV 35 3553mV 34 8250mV 35 8856mV 30 000mV 29 55mV 30
385. nts are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for pulse response calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Linear Ramp function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the soft key on the right of the screen 4 12 5 4 Error Code Detection Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope test points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide Follow the sequence of test stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Select the required channel and use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required trigger point ramp time and expected load for the UUT Scope test point UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the test point Select the correct range for the test point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Error Code Check Observe and record the UUT response to the codes at the test point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 2S Mo Ter Spr 4 12 5 5 Trigger Level Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope test calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide Follow the sequence of test s
386. nu screen The Auxiliary Input function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the AUX IN soft key on the right of the screen Whenever the Auxiliary Input screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear as follows for details of non volatility refer also to para 4 5 3 6 ae OFFER CH1 1MQ Auxiliary Input 49 V pk MAX TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL SELECT 4 15 4 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio all operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 Note Without Option 5 only one signal channel and one trigger channel is available 4 15 4 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 15 5 Auxiliary Input Operation 4 15 5 1 Bottom Screen Keys CHANNEL Permits the AUX INPUT signal to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of signal channel and expected load only paras 4 5 3 continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Auxiliary Input 4 15 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 15 6 Using the 9500B for Automated Routing of User Specific Calibration Signals to UUT Oscilloscope Input Channels 4 15 6 1 Introduction The calibration procedure consists of routing a signal from auser s so
387. nufacturer s overload protection test and checking that the protection reacts to open circuit the 50Q input termination The form of input overload indication will vary between oscilloscopes 4 13 6 2 Interconnections a Use an active head to connect from the required 9500B signal output channel to the UUT input channel b Ifa UUT trigger is required use an active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the UUT Trigger input 4 13 6 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for overload pulse protection test 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Overload Pulse Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the ILA soft key on the right of the screen 4 13 6 4 Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope Overload Test points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide Follow the sequence of test stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 5 at each stage 1 9500B a Use
388. number is returned The value of the number when converted to base 2 binary identifies the Questionable Condition register bits to determine their current status For example refer to Fig 6 2 If a doubtful measurement was generating an error during Capacitance operations and the temporary CAPACITANCE bit 11 of the Condition register was set and if no other Questionable Condition bits were set the number 2048 would be returned 6 6 7 8 STAT PRES SCPI Mandated Command The intention behind mandating the STAT PRES command is to enable all bits in the SCPI defined Device dependent and Transition registers in order to provide a device independent structure for determining the gross status of a device Purpose in the 9500B In the 9500B the functions of the Transition registers are not required so no access is given The PRES command therefore affects only the two device dependent enabling registers The Operation Event Enable register The Questionable Event Enable register Refer to Fig 6 2 Sending STAT PRES will set true all bits in both Enable registers This will enable all bits in the two Event registers so that all reportable device dependent events reported in the two registers will be capable of generating an SRQ providing only that bits 3 and 7 in the IEEE 488 2 Status Byte Register are also enabled The use of STAT PRES in the 9500B allows the status reporting structure to be set to a known state not only
389. o TARGETs remain 8 Press NEXT FREQ then select TARGET 1 and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain aw Sa Table 10 6 2 2 Levelled Sine Function HF Flatness Cal Point Voltage Frequency Target 1 3 0000V 50kHz Target 2 1 0072V Target 3 316 49mV Target 4 316 49mV Repeat the process using the Cal Point voltage levels in the Targets 1 4 sequence for each of these frequency points for a total of 28 calibration steps Targets 05 08 10MHz Targets 17 20 550MHz Targets 09 12 50MHz Targets 21 24 800MHz Targets 13 16 250MHz Targets 25 28 1 0GHz 10 6 4 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Levelled Sine Function 10 6 2 6 Calibration Procedure 3GHz Levelled Sine A W a Function HF Linearity 9530 only 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Sine 3GHz Sine mode LIN The following process takes you through all TARGETS in table 10 6 2 3 9500B Set Output ON Power Meter Select a range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the measuring device The conversion from power to pk pk voltage is pk pk Voltage V power 20 Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 2 3 3GHz Levelled Sine Function HF Linearity Cal Point Voltage Frequency Target 1 450 00mV 1 2GHz Target 2 800 00mV 1 2GHz
390. of para 4 5 2 Note When a channel s head is finally connected to the UUT oscilloscope and the 9500B output is turned on the 9500B will measure the UUT load If the measured load is outside the specification for the expected load then an error message will appear on the screen Load Mismatch Detected UUT gt 150 for 50Q selected Load Mismatch Detected UUT lt 50kQ for 1MQ selected continued overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function 4 5 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 5 3 2 UUT Triggers The trigger can be routed via any head except 9550 but a standard SMA to BNC coaxial cable can be used instead to save the cost of an extra head The reason for establishing five channels is to permit use of four signal heads to carry a full range of signals plus an extra channel to accommodate the trigger input if necessary When a cable is fitted instead of a head it cannot carry the full range of signals Pressing the TRIGGER CHANNEL soft key provides a screen which permits a user to assign a channel to trigger outputs As the screen shows as yet no channel has r OFFISENAL CHI 58Q TRIGGER TRIGGER NONE CHANNEL 1 gt 9530 1 1Ghz 150ps RIGGED CHANNEL 2 gt 9530 1 1GHz 150ps CHANNEL 3 gt 9510 1 1GHz 500ps TRIGGER CHANNEL 4 gt No Head CH3 CHANNEL 5 gt No Head O P Amplitude 20 000 mVa RAS Frequ
391. om Screen Keys Resistance 4 16 1 4 16 5 2 Bottom Screen Keys Capacitance 4 16 1 4 16 6 Use the 9500B to Measure the Load Resistance or Load Capacitance 416 2 4 16 6 1 Introduction vee 4 16 2 4 16 6 2 Interconnections 416 2 4 16 6 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup 4 16 2 4 16 6 4 Sequence of Operations Load Resistance csseee 4 16 2 4 16 6 5 Sequence of Operations Load Capacitance 4 16 2 4 16 2 Measurement Method UUT Oscilloscope input load resistance or capacitance can be measured directly via any active head With the 9500B Auxiliary functions and Q or 4 function selected the load resistance or capacitance presented by the UUT oscilloscope input to the active head will be shown on the screen No triggers are provided 4 16 3 Default Settings 4 16 3 1 Load Resistance Defaults The Load Resistance Measurement is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the S2 soft key at the bottom of the screen Whenever the Load Resistance screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear as follows but also refer to para 4 5 3 6 OFF READING CH1 1MQ Load Resistance D JDD Q TODAY S DATE TIME SIGNAL CHANNEL 4 16 3 2 Load Capacitance Defaults The Load Capacitance Measurement is accessed by first pressing the Aux
392. on 6 9500B System Application via IEEE 488 Interface 6 1 About Section 6 and Section 6 Contents 000 eee eee eres sne nnani 6 1 1 6 2 Index of IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Codes used in the Model 9500B ees 6 2 1 6 3 JMrodUGtiON sina EEEa E eO A EAEE REAREA 6 3 1 6 4 Using the 9500B in a System o oo eee eeceeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeceaaeeeneeeseeeeseeeeeeeenaees 6 4 1 6 5 Retrieval of Device Status Information eee eee e eee eee ea ernie 6 5 1 6 6 9500B SCPI Language Commands and Syntax ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaee 6 6 1 Section 6 Appendix A IEEE 488 2 Device Documentation Requirements 0 6 A1 Section 6 Appendix C IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries Implemented in the Model 9500B eccccceesceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 6 C1 Section 6 Appendix D Model 9500B Device Settings after RST amp Power On 6 D1 Section 6 Appendix F Model 9500B Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 oe eens 6 F1 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications TA General nenien an verve sees baetecdey ayite vas TE ETN A ames cases 7 1 1 2 Accuracy SPSCHICALIONS gti cn4cahets castes wenec oavesiecedeanisesrersised cna vie Ea EDE ENE ENEN eE A NEAN REENA 7 1 p 7 3 Voltage Function Specifications seisseen ena e ai aN EEA 7 2 Final Width 215mm CA Edge Function Specifications i ccvscccvesesscesceegevesaeenn an E eaa NE 7 3 75 Tim Markers Function Specification sssr
393. on is a guide to calibrating the Model 9500B s Load Resistance Measurement Function using its front panel controls The following topics are covered 10 5 6 2 Calibration Equipment Requirements 10 5 6 3 Interconnections 10 5 6 4 Calibration Setup 10 5 6 5 Calibration Procedure 10 5 6 2 Calibration Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e Atraceable high resolution Standards DMM used to measure resistance at 50Q 50kQ 1MQ and 19MQ with an accuracy of 0 02 or better For example a Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads incorporating switchable 50Q 50kQ 1MQ and 19MQ loads For example a Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor Final Width 215mm e Short high quality 4mm leads 10 5 16 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Load Resistance Measurement Function 10 5 6 3 Interconnections Standards DMM Q Guard a 230 Vpk Active Head Al 230V PK MA ACTIVE HEAD INPUT WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 10 5 6 1 Load Resistance Measurement Function Calibration 509 Ref Interconnections 10 5 6 4 Calibration Setup 1 Connections 2 Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Standards DMM as shown in Fig 10 5 6 1 or via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and 50Q load and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in BASE CAL mode and then sele
394. on volatile Calibration Memory e Sub section 10 5 details front panel operation to calibrate functions providing connection diagrams and sequenced procedures Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Mainframe and Head Calibration 10 2 1 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND 10 3 The Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 3 1 Introduction This section is a guide to the use of the Model 9500B s Calibration Mode for manual calibration of the 9500B Mainframe The following topics are covered 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 Mode Selection 10 3 2 1 Mode Key 10 3 2 2 Mode Selection Screen Selection of Calibration Mode 10 3 3 1 Calibration Enable Switch 10 3 3 2 Password 10 3 3 3 Calibration Mode Display 10 3 3 4 Calibration Mode Screen Softkeys Special Calibration 10 3 4 1 Selecting Special Calibration 10 3 4 2 When to Characterise 10 3 4 3 How to Characterise 10 3 4 4 Form of Characterisation Special Cal Adjust FREQ 10 3 5 1 When to Adjust 10 3 5 2 Equipment Requirements 10 3 5 3 Interconnections 10 3 5 4 9500B and Counter Setup 10 3 5 5 Sequence of Operations Mainframe Standard Calibration STD CAL 10 3 6 1 Function Selection 10 3 6 2 Cal Mode Function Screens 10 3 6 3 Hardware Configurations 10 3 6 4 Target Calibration Values Overview of Calibration Operations Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 3 1 Final Width 215mm
395. onds to the sequence of the program queries The final response in the string will be followed by the terminator nl newline with EOI Response Decode The value returned identifies the state of the saved flag Zero indicates false The instrument is not programmed to clear the Standard Event Status Enable Register and Service Request Enable Register at Power On so the instrument will generate a Power On SRQ providing that the PON bit in the ESR is enabled at the time of power down by the corresponding bit in its Enable register ESE One indicates true The instrument is programmed to clear the Standard Event Status Enable Register and Service Request Enable Register at Power On so the instrument cannot generate any SRQ at Power On Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions No Change This datais saved in non volatile memory at Power Off for use at Power On 6 C8 amp Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C 11 Protected User Data Eniry of User Data This command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements user message PUD ens j 1 j Hat on user message SEND where phs Program Header Separator digit one of the ASCll coded numerals user message any message up to 63 bytes maximum Note Final Width 215mm The slash delimited SEND box is not out
396. op of the screen shows the two channels selected the Master written first Pressing EXIT will return to the main Dual Channel Sine screen so that other parameters can be set oe 10 5 00 mV div x6 30 000 mV Deviation 00 00 O P Amplitude 30 800 m Voko Frequency 50 000 kHz frer TODAY S DATE TIME CHANNEL FEB 7 SELECT KM 1g Note that the upper sinewave amplitude range limits are halved by invoking Dual Channel Sine function 4 6 4 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Sine Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 6 6 Using the 9500B Levelled Sine Function to Calibrate the Flatness Bandwidth Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 6 6 1 Introduction Two types of procedures for flatness and bandwidth calibration are given a Using the 9500B as a fixed source where the oscilloscope can be adjusted b Using the 9500B as an adjustable source reading oscilloscope deviations via the 9500B screen 4 6 6 2 Interconnections a Use an active head to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Signal Channel tobe calibrated b Ifa trigger is required use an active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Trigger 4 6 6 3 Common Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familia
397. or access from the Present Settings screen press the BUS ADDRESS screen key on the right This action will transfer to the IEEE 488 ADDRESSES screen Configuration EA 5000 IEEE 488 ADDRESSES SERIES 9500B address DP 2nd address inactive Change by direct edit only TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT J The 9500B IEEE 488 bus address can be set to any number within the range 0 to 30 2 Use Digit edit or Direct edit to set the required bus address number If using Direct edit after typing the number press the J key 3 Press EXIT toreturn to the Present Settings screen For second address 5000 series emulation refer to Section 6 Appendix F Note Address Recognition With an address selected in the range 0 to 30 control may be manual or remote as part of a system on the Bus The address must be the same as that used in the controller program to activate the 9500B The 9500B is always aware of its stored address responding to Talk or Listen commands from the controller at that address When the address is changed by the user the 9500B recognizes its new address and ignores its old address as soon as it is stored by the user pressing the EXIT key in the Configuration Bus Address menu Section 6 9500B System Operation Using the 9500B in a System 6 4 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 4 2 Operation via the IEEE 488 Interface 6 4 2 1 General The power up sequence is performed as
398. orm at line frequency For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer earlier to Section 4 Sub Section 4 8 Time Marker Function Response to Query Version The instrument returns the lt cpd gt for the presently selected waveform Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 9 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 5 SOURce Subsystem Contd 6 6 5 10 SOUR PAR MARK HIGH lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 Purpose This selects whether the current edge wave shape has every 10th peak highlighted by increasing the peak s amplitude A settings conflict error will be reported if LINE marker waveshape is selected lt cpd gt The character program data lt cpd gt ONor lt cpd gt 1 turns the highlighted waveform ON Conversely lt cpd gt OFF or lt cpd gt 0 removes the highlight from the waveform For details of local operation and parameter limitations refer earlier to Section 4 Sub Section 4 8 Time Marker Function Response to Query Version The instrument will return ON highlighted or OFF not highlighted as programmed 6 6 5 11 SOUR PAR OPUL AMPL lt dnpd gt SOUR PAR OPUL ENER lt dnpd gt Purpose These commands are used together to set the parameters of the overload test The combination of amplitude and energy set the power contained within the pulse that will be applied to the unit under test The amplitude lt dnpd gt must be si
399. ormat with the same numeric value remaining selected by the two triangles Enter The keypad Enter key can be used instead of one of the units keys to revert to Digit Edit format In this case the 9500B firmware will always impose the basic units not multiples or sub multiples Further Use Either Digit Edit or Numeric Entry Edit can be used for all selectable variables on the screen Selected SIGNAL Selected TRIGGER Channel Channel or A No Trigger State Function Output Icon State P y Barred M Selection Ti TRIGGER CH5 50Q Cursor Deviation A O Numeric O P Amplitude 20 000 mVokrx Output Output Value Units TODAY S DATE TIME gt _ Nam mV divx4 2 mV Values Frequency 1 0808 kHz AEN 3 Scope Mode 1 2 This mode differs from Direct Mode only in that adjustment of many screen variables is constrained to a series of Stepped Values which run in a sequence of 1 2 5 factor steps The Pref facility described overleaf can be used to change the factor sequence to match certain oscilloscopes with 1 2 2 5 4 5 steps Selecting one of these variables places a barred cursor above and below the whole numeric value shown in Fig 3 2 1 and only one method of value adjustment is available Cursor keys lt _ and gt are not used Adjustment is carried out using the A and V keys or spinwheel to increment or decrement the whole value through the
400. ot been included in the SCPI commands for the 9500B e Calibration Mode Remote operation is available but refer to Sub section 6 6 2 for details of entry protection e Test Mode Remote operation is not available but the Full selftest can be initiated by a SCPI command The 9500B will give a Pass Fail response but to investigate further it is necessary to re run Test mode from the front panel Section 6 9500B System Operation Introduction 6 3 1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 3 2 Interconnections Instruments fitted with an IEEE 488 interface communicate with each other through a standard set of interconnecting cables as 24 13 specified in the IEEE 488 1 Standard document IEEE 488 Interface Socket Pin Layout The IEEE 488 interface socket is fitted on the rear panel Itaccommodates the specified connector whose pin designations are also standardized as shown in Table 6 2 Name Description DIO 1 DIO 2 DIO 3 DIO 4 EOI DAV NRFD NDAC IFC SRQ ATN SHIELD DIO 5 DIO 6 DIO 7 DIO 8 REN GND 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 GND 10 GND 11 GND zZz U Data Input Output Line 1 Data Input Output Line 2 Data Input Output Line 3 Data Input Output Line 4 End or Identify Data Valid Not Ready For Data Not Data Accepted Interface Clear Service Request Attention Screening on cable connected to 9500B safety ground Data Input Output Line 5 Data Input Output Line 6
401. ote Calibration of the 9500B Itsel 3 2 1 4 General Arrangement of Front Panel Controls 3 2 2 Front Panel FOAUICS si vicsiecseccccvecsssnscmmanvesrsisecceseees 3 2 2 1 Liquid Crystal Display and Screen Keys 3 2 2 2 OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR Panel 3 2 2 3 Output Connections eceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 3 2 2 4 Procedure and Results Memory Card Slots 3 2 2 5 Standby Push Button 00 cee eeeeeees 3 2 2 6 Power On Off Switch 3 2 3 Output Controls eissis 3 2 3 1 Front Panel Control Sets 3 2 3 2 Entry to Manual Mode 0e 3 2 3 3 Manual Mode Typical Menu Screen 3 2 3 4 Editing on the Screen a 3 3 Preferences 3 3 1 Pref Selection 3 3 1 1 Pref Overview aeee 3 3 1 2 Changing the Parameters 3 3 1 3 Screen Contrast 3 3 1 4 Scope Mode Amplitude Steps 3 3 1 5 Scope Mode Time Steps 3 3 1 6 Deviation Display 3 4 Modes of Operation BA MOMS SSlSCHOM viise errs aos sce cscaus steteecsisceeeserddsteceeste 3 4 1 1 Mod OVGPVIOW viezc s ccscsccsseeencdiectisezesce catsteaenestt2estien 3 4 2 Passwords and Access 3 4 3 Configuration Mode 3 4 3 1 MORE Configuration 3 4 3 2 REF FrOQUGNCY oinen adaa f 3 4 3 3 Safety voltage 3 4 3 4 Bus address 3 4 3 5 Printer 0 3 4 3 6 Power up mode 3 4 3 7 NEW PASSWORD 3 4 3 8 CALIB Password 3 4 3 9 CONFIG Password 3 4 3 10 Extrefin 0 0 3 4
402. ote that the new value must lie within the Max and Min limits specified in Table 10 5 5 1 c Press the SAVE TARGET soft key If using the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor set its switch to SQV 50 Q If not using the Model 4955 ensure that the DMM input is AC coupled using an external 50Q load impedance 10 11 12 13 14 Set the Standards DMM to the appropriate RMS voltage measurement range Calculate the RMS value of the 9500B output pk pk voltage from the following factor RMS 0 5 x 0 70710 x pk pk Note The above figure applies only when the Standards DMM input is AC Coupled Press the ON key to turn the 9500B output on Press the TAB Cy key to return the cursor to the 9500B O P Amplitude display and increment or decrement this value using the cursor controls and or spinwheel until the reading on the Standards DMM is the RMS equivalent of the displayed Target Amplitude pk pk value calculated in operation 8 Note make sure to allow for any settling time of the external measuring instrument approx 60 secs When you are satisfied with the measurement press the ACCEPT CALIB key to generate and implement the correction factor required by the 9500B to ensure that its displayed O P Amplitude value and measured output value coincide The O P Amplitude value will change to the Target Amplitude value and the adjustment of the output amplitude at this target is complete Press the EXIT key to turn the 9500B outpu
403. otected User Data Status Reporting Conditions Status Byte Register Status Byte Enable Register Event Status Register Event Status Enable Register Operation Status Event Register Operation Status Enable Register Questionable Status Event Register Previous entry preserved Depends on state of PSC Depends on state of PSC Depends on state of PSC Depends on state of PSC Depends on state of PSC Depends on state of PSC Depends on state of PSC Questionable Status Enable Register Depends on state of PSC Error Queue Empty until first error is detected Appendix D to Section 6 9500B System Operation Device Settings after RST 6 D1 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 D 3 RST Settings Related to Common IEEE 488 2 Commands Program Coding Condition CLS ESE Nrf ESE ESR IDN OPC OPC OPT PSC 0 1 PSC PUD PUD SRE Nrf SRE STB TST WAI 6 D 4 Not applicable Not applicable Previous state preserved Previous state preserved No Change OPIC state forced OPIQ state forced Not applicable Not applicable No change Data area remains unchanged Data area remains unchanged Not applicable Previous state preserved Previous state preserved Not applicable Not applicable Power On Settings Related to Common IEEE 488 2 Commands Program Coding Condition CLS Not applicable ESE Nrf Not applicable ESE Response depends on state of PSC ESR Res
404. ounded outlet ensuring that the ground lead is connected SEE THE SAFETY ISSUES SECTION AT THE FRONT OF THIS MANUAL 2 7 4 Power Fuse The fuse rating is T 5 0A HBC 250V IEC127 for 220 240V line supply T 10 0A HBC 250V IEC127 for 100 120V line supply It is fitted into the reverse side of the Fuse Drawer in the Power Input module on the rear panel and must be of High Breaking Capacity WARNING MAKE SURE THAT ONLY FUSES WITH THE REQUIRED RATED CURRENT AND OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE ARE USED FOR REPLACEMENT SEE THE SAFETY ISSUES SECTION AT THE FRONT OF THIS MANUAL Fuse Drawer Removed Release Voltage as a Catch Voltage Selector everse Fuse Recess for Indicator Block N Drawer Screwdriver Window Fuse position 2 7 4 1 Power Fuse Replacement When the power fuse is to be replaced proceed as follows 1 Ensure that the POWER CABLE is removed Insert a small screwdriver blade in the narrow recess beneath the catch under the fuse drawer lever gently downwards until the catch releases Pull the drawer out and reverse it to see the fuse Check the fuse and replace if required 3 Check that the desired voltage is visible at the front of the voltage selector block inside the power module cavity 4 Insert the fuse drawer into the module and press until the catch is heard to click into place 2 6 Section 2 Installing the Model 9500B 2 7 5 Line Voltage The 9500B is operative for line voltages in
405. ove 50kHz e Low Edge and Fast Edge functions e Load Capacitance measurement functions e Termination Compensation functions Head calibration involves the use of a verified 9500B Mainframe Note Heads can be calibrated only within the bandwidth of the mainframe e g Head Model 9510 with Mainframe Variant 9500B 400 can only be calibrated to 400MHz 10 2 4 Other Functions Other 9500B functions are either derived directly from functions that are calibrated or are calibrated for life during manufacture e Dual Sine e Current e Composite Video e Linear Ramp e Overload Pulse e Zero Skew e Auxiliary Input e Input Leakage Attempting to select these functions during Mainframe calibration or those in paras 10 2 3 while the Model 9500B is in CAL mode will result in an error message being displayed No calibration for this function 10 2 5 Mainframe Unit Manual Calibration Mainframe Unit Calibration can be performed manually from the front panel and this is the main subject of this Section 10 e Sub section 10 3 covers general access to the processes via Calibration Mode e Sub section 10 4 deals with the general processes of selecting e Hardware configurations Cal Ranges e Target Values within Cal Ranges e Modifying and saving modified Target Values for individual calibration environments e Adjusting the 9500B output values to calibrate Cal Ranges thereby storing correction factors in n
406. owing stage Selftest Power on Test Test completed with X FAILURES TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT PRINT Subsequent action to view the failures and print the results follows as for a Fast selftest which has run to completion paras 8 3 2 2 3 VIEW FAILS EXIT will return to the Select test menu screen where to return to the Mode Selection menu screen press the front panel Mode key PRINTcan be used to print out the results of the power on Fast test Refer also to Sub section 8 4 8 3 4 Interface Test The interface test selectively checks the 9500B front panel operations covering display memory integrity keyboard operation the display itself integrity and formatting of static RAM memory cards for Procedure mode the correct operation of a connected tracker ball and the correct operation of aconnected printer 8 3 4 1 Access to Interface Tests Once the Test mode has been selected Interface Test is selected by pressing the INTERFACE screen key in the Select test menu Selftest Select test using softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME INTER ALL FAST Face BASE HEAD Pressing INTERFACE transfers to the Select test menu screen DISPLAY Selftest ee i KEYBRD Select test using softkeys DISPLAY MEMORY CARD TRACKER PRINTER TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT The required check can be selected from the list on the right of the screen using the corresponding
407. p p Black 0 3Vp p Video Inversion Composite Video can be toggled between upright and inverse using the screen key No further adjustment is available Video Standards Composite Video can be switched between 625 lines 50Hz and 525 lines 60Hz using the g 525 MA cou screen key Trigger Interval Selection Either composite or frame synch can be selected as trigger on the assigned trigger channel using the con AA screen key The key toggles the synch polarity as part of the composite video 4 11 6 Using the 9500B Levelled Composite Video Function to Calibrate Video Trigger Sensitivity of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 11 6 1 Introduction As the 9500B composite video amplitude variation is limited and trigger outputs are not variable except as described in paras 4 11 5 1 procedures for operating the 9500B are essentially simple 4 11 6 2 Interconnections a Use an active head to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the video input of the UUT Signal Channel to be calibrated b Ifa trigger is required use an active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Trigger for the Channel to be calibrated 4 11 6 3 Calibration Procedure The following procedure assumes that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of using front panel controls In the case of difficulty re read the para
408. p parameter variables can be changed and a new procedure card can be inserted MODEL Point 2 The Select MODEL screen offers user selection from all the UUT models for the previously selected manufacturer on the currently loaded procedure card or a new procedure card can be inserted Note For those cards containing procedures for UUTs from more than one manufacturer then in order to change manufacturer return to the Select USER NAME screen by pressing the USER screen key SERIAL Point 3 This choice assumes a wish to select a different unit of the same model The system therefore returns to the Enter SERIAL NUMBER screen PROC Point 4 This choice assumes a wish to select a different procedure for the same model and serial number The system therefore returns to the Select PROCEDURE screen RETRY Point 5 This selection re runs the same procedure which has just ended or been aborted It is assumed that the same unit is being tested so the same serial number will appear on any results print out 5 3 3 13 Common Operations in Procedure Mode Summary of Actions The flow chart in Fig 5 3 1 summarizes the user actions needed to enter Procedure mode and load the procedure card then select the UUT model and its pre programmed procedures Mode Selection Select USER NAME XXXXXX Select OK ABORT ro ae N No Isa card loaded a aaa in PCMCIA SLOT 1 J Nye Te ee 1 How many
409. pk 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in MANUAL mode and then select the Edge function key Select the required output Signal Channel 50Q Load Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio 9 9 3 3 Interconnections High Bandwidth Oscilloscope Trigger Input Y Channel Input Active Head 9510 9520 9530 a A Trigger Cable j Wavetek Part No 630477 supplied Fig 9 9 3 1 Edge FunctionVerification Interconnections Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 29 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 9 9 3 5 Verification Measurement Procedure 1 Copy the Table 9 9 3 1 2 Using Table 9 9 3 1 follow the correct sequence of verification points as shown on the table and carry out operations 3 to 8 at the verification points on the table 3 9500B For the verification point Select Edge type fot Rise time for Model 9510 _1500ps only for Model 9530 500ps or 150ps for Model 9560 70ps for Model 9550 25ps Scope mode or Numeric entry Set O P Amplitude p p O P Frequency Period 4 Oscilloscope a Select the correct channel b Select the correct sweep speed trigger level trigger edge and channel sensitivity to measure at the verification point 5 9500B Set Output ON 6 Oscilloscope a Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display b Check the waveform for correct polarity Rise
410. plier then Deviation finally to the Frequency and back to the Units Division The type of cursor at each position indicates the type of adjustment possible to that value Units Division Scope Mode The type of cursor barred used for the units division signifies that the value can be adjusted only as a step sequence value using the and keys The lt _ and gt keys are inactive From the default 5mV div the value can be raised using the N key by increments through 10mV div 20mV div 50mV div and so on up to 2V div providing that the other contributors will not take the output voltage value above 5 56Vp p lt 550MHz or 3 336Vp p gt 550MHz Similarly the key will reduce the Units Division down to 1mV div unless the output voltage would fall below 4 44mVp p all frequencies Multiplier Scope Mode Again the C x and gt keys are inactive From the default x 6 the value can be changed using the N and V keys by single integer increments to values between 1 and 10 providing that the other contributors do not take the output voltage value out of its limits The product of the units division and multiplier are shown on the right side of the sign 4 6 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Sine Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Deviation Scope and Direct Mode The triangular type of cursor indicates that all the cursor keys can be used as in other functions From the defa
411. point b Select the correct time base speed for the cal point c Select the correct amplitude range for the cal point 3 9500B Set Output ON 4 UUT Scope a Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stated display b Observe and note the accuracy of marker alignment indicating any misadjustment in the UUT s time base speed or linearity 5 Calibration a If calibration adjustments for time base speed and linearity are provided adjust the UUT s time base to be appropriate to the settings on the 9500B screen as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b If no adjustment is provided on the UUT Scope record the timebase condition at the calibration point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 4 8 5 5 UUT Scope Time Base Calibration the 9500B as an Adjustable Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Scope time base calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B output to the required channel expected load impedance trigger channel waveshape period and p p voltage for the UUT Scope time base cal point 2 UUT Scope a Select the correct channel for the cal point b Select
412. ponse depends on state of PSC IDN Not applicable OPC Not applicable OPC Not applicable OPT Not applicable PSC 0 1 Not applicable PSC No change This data is saved at power off for use at power on PUD Data area remains unchanged PUD Data area remains unchanged RST Not applicable SRE Nrf Not applicable SRE Response depends on state of PSC STB Response depends on state of PSC TST Not applicable WAI Not applicable 6 D2 Appendix D to Section 6 9500B System Operation Device Settings after RST 6 D 5 RST amp Power On Settings Related to SCPI Commands Keyword CALTDFACLON 2 siersiscdve access cee OUTPut PESEATST soszierircsrrss SOURce FUNCtion SHAPE 2 sas cease sacs SCOPe SHAPe P PARameter SQUare POLarity sGROuUNG cise esis SKEW oc dees ese ce dee ALIGnment SOURce VOLTage Se wrens tena dunce FREQuency CW FIXed All other settings remain Condition shape ie Medina nde Disabled See hs E SQUare Betta kao semble ts SQUare TEREE DEEE OFF aea deai h Inactive MERETET EE DEFault unchanged Appendix D to Section 6 9500B System Operation Device Settings after RST 6 D3 Final Width 215mm BLANK PAGE LEFT HAND Appendix F to Section 6 of the User s Handbook for Model 9500B Model 9500B Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 6 F 1 6 F 1 1 Pu
413. puts of a UUT oscilloscope to test for input leakage For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 17 is divided into the following sub sections ATTA MrodUC ON i iii 4 17 1 4 17 2 Input Leakage Test we 4 17 1 4 17 3 Default Settings we 4 17 1 4 17 4 Menu Selections AAT 4174 1 Retained Channe a 417 1 4 17 5 Input Leakage Operation vee 417 7 4 17 5 1 Bottom Screen Keys 417 5 2 Open Circuit Output Leakage Specification ees 417 1 4 17 6 Using the 95008 to Test the Input Leakage Current of a UUT Oscilloscope 417 2 4 17 6 1 Introduction wee 417 2 417 6 2 Interconnections vee 417 2 4 17 6 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup 417 2 4 17 6 4 Sequence of Operations 417 2 447 1 4 17 2 Input Leakage Test UUT Oscilloscope input leakage current can be tested by noting the difference in deflection when a channel s input is open circuited and when it is short circuited With the 9500B Auxiliary Input Leakage function selected open and short circuits can be imposed on the selected channel input using 9500B front panel controls Scope triggers at 100Hz are provided if required 4 17 3 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen Th
414. quency of 111 101MHz Period 9 000819ns chosen to avoid normal calibration points Frequency Parameter Resolution Conflict Due to resolution and the step sequence some periods cannot be converted exactly into frequencies In order to direct attention towards period at any point at which its reciprocal cannot be defined exactly the Frequency parameter display is given an approximately equal to symbol Deviation Scope and Direct Mode Note In Time Markers function the Deviation operates onthe Time Marker interval to modify the output Period or Frequency and not modify the O P Amplitude as in the other functions The triangular type of cursor indicates that all the cursor keys can be used The result of combining the Time Marker interval and Deviation are shown as the value of the output Period or Frequency From the default 00 00 the deviation percentage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 45 and 45 providing that the Time Marker interval does not take the output Period or Frequency value out of its limits Output Voltage Amplitude Scope and Direct Mode The O P Amplitude is directly adjustable but only in the step sequence defined by the preferences Pref facility For this reason the O P Amplitude has a barred cursor in both Scope and Direct modes The default 1 0000Vp pis the maximum output available The output voltage can be changed to any step value
415. r Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio operate in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 4 6 3 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to para 4 5 3 6 4 6 3 2 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll Keys operate on the value marked by the cursor The key labels will change depending on the cursor position as indicated in the next column ii A f REF iii Asp AV A f REF iv X10 10 A f REF j SIH e Cursor on Units div Multiplies the Units div by ten Divides the Units div by ten Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Toggles between the marked frequency and the reference frequency Cursor on Multiplier Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Toggles between the marked frequency and the reference frequency Cursor on Deviation Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Press to set Deviation value in absolute units Press to set Deviation value in percent of set value Toggles between the marked frequency and the reference frequency Cursor on Frequency Period Multiplies the marked value by ten Divides the marked value by ten Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Toggles between the marked frequency and the reference frequency Press to change display from Frequency to Period Press to change display from Period to Frequency
416. r with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for flatness calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Sine Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the NS key at the right of the front panel 4 6 6 4 UUT Scope Flatness Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope flatness calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required sine wave p p voltage frequency and load impedance for the UUT Scope flatness cal point UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Observe and note the amplitude response 5 Calibration a If a calibration adjustment is provided adjust the UUT s response to be appropriate to the settings on the 9500B screen as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide
417. rameters are shown as an alternative to the basic 9500B commands 6 6 5 1 SOURce Subsystem Table Note to the SOURce Subsystem Table Many optional keywords are included in the table shown in square brackets as required by the SCPI reference document The structure of the command set is such that in all cases these optional keywords can be omitted Notes about Types of Command Separators The SOURce subsystem has a complex tree structure To clarify descriptions examples of branching are referred to the root so that rather than using the valid short cut branching separator it is shown as returning to the root bya separator This does not mean that valid short cut program message unit separators cannot be used but merely that we are defining the commands in full to avoid confusion The following commands are for 9100 compatibility They are not included in the main source table but do appear in the command descriptions Keyword Parameter Form SOURce SCOpe SHAPe lt cpd gt DC SQUar e EDGE MARKer SI Nusoi d UUT_Z lt dnpd gt TRANsi ti on lt cpd gt RI Si ng FALLi ng SOURce SPERI od CW FI Xed lt dnpd gt 6 6 5 1 SOURce Subsystem Table Contd The following are standard 9500B commands Keyword Parameter Form SOURce FUNCti on SHAPe lt cpd gt DC SQUar e EDGE MARKer SI Nusoi d OPULse TELevi si on LEAKage RAMP SKEW EXTer nal PW Dt h
418. ration 3 4 1 Mode Selection The Mode key is highlighted in Fig 3 4 1 below Fig 3 4 1 Mode Key 3 4 1 1 Mode Overview The Mode key sets up a special menu display offering selection from five primary modes This menu can be exited only by pressing one of the five screen keys ey Mode Selection Select required mode using softkeys TODAY S DATE TIME PROC MANUAL CONFIG CALIB TEST Fig 3 4 2 Mode Selection Menu Four of the modes are described in later sections but because of its wide ranging effects Configuration Mode is dealt with in this section The five modes are PROC Procedure Mode For calibration of a specific type of UUT the sequence of 9500B output selections is determined by a Procedure memory card placed in the left hand PCMCIA SLOT 1 beneath the panel outline Results can be printed or recorded in a second Data card placed in the right hand PCMCIA SLOT 2 Refer to Section 5 MANUAL Manual Mode The output is selected and adjusted entirely from the front panel Refer to Section 4 CONFIG Configuration Mode On entry to Configuration mode parameters are protected by password These include Power On default mode Manual or Procedure modes Present Time and Date Enable Printing Reformat Printed Certificates etc Refer to Sub section 3 4 2 CALIB Calibration Mode This mode is protected by switch and password On entry to Calibration mode the opera
419. ration or handling Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non defective media Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country Fluke s warranty obligation is limited at Fluke s option to refund of the purchase price free of charge repair or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period To obtain warranty service contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return authorization information then send the product to that service center with a description of the difficulty postage and insurance prepaid FOB Destination Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit Following warranty repair the product will be returned to Buyer transportation prepaid FOB Destination If Fluke determines that
420. rature ambient humidity power supply voltage amp frequency maximum terminal voltages or currents altitude ambient pollution level exposure to shock and vibration To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not apply to or subject the instrument to any condition that is outside specified range See Section 6 of this manual for detailed instrument specifications and operating conditions CAUTION CONSIDER DIRECT SUNLIGHT RADIATORS AND OTHER HEAT SOURCES WHEN ASSESSING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CAUTION BEFORE CONNECTING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE SUPPLY MAKE SURE THAT THE REAR PANEL AC SUPPLY VOLTAGE CONNECTOR IS SET TO THE CORRECT VOLTAGE AND THAT THE CORRECT FUSES ARE FITTED continued overleaf Model 9500B User s Handbook Safety Section 0 9 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm The Power Cable and Power Supply Disconnection The intended power supply disconnect device is the ON OFF switch that is located on the instrument s rear panel The ON OFF switch must be readily accessible while the instrument is operating If this operating condition cannot be met the power cable plug or other power disconnecting device must be readily accessible to the operator To avoid electric shock and fire hazard make sure that the power cable is not damaged and that it is adequately rated against power supply network fusing If the power cable plug is to be the accessible disconnect device the power cable must not be longer
421. re Square Waveform Positive Hardware Configurations and Calibration Targets Function Frequency Target Hardware Target 1 low pk pk Target 2 high pk pk Final Width 215mm Waveshape le MMM Configuration Default Minimum Maximum Span Default Minimum Maximum Default Minimum Maximum 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kHz 556 01 2 10mV 800 00uV 744 00uV 856 00WV 1 9000mV 1 7670mV 2 0330mV 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kHz 2 10mV 5 56mV 2 3000mV 2 1390mV 2 4610mV 5 0000mV 4 6500mV 5 3500mV 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kHz 5 56mV 21 00mV 6 0000mV 5 5800mV 6 4200mV 19 000mV 17 670mV 20 330mV 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kHz 21 00mV 55 60mV 23 000mV 21 390mV 24 610mV 50 000mV 46 500mV 53 500mV 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kHz 55 60mV 210 00mV 60 000mV 55 800mV 64 200mV 190 00mV 176 70 203 30mV 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kHz 210 00mV 556 00mV 230 00mV 213 90mV 246 10mV 500 00mV 465 00 535 00mV Z Z Z Z Z Li 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kH 556 00mV 2 10V 600 00mV 558 00mV 642 00mV 1 9000V 1 7671 2 0330V 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kH 2 10V 5 56V 2 3000V 2 1390V 2 4610V 5 0000V 4 650 5 3500V 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kH 5 56V 22 24V 6 0000V 5 5800V 6 4200V 19 000V 17 67 20 330V 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kH 22 24 55 60V 23 000V 21 390V 24 610V 50 000V 46 50 53 500V 1kH 0 9500Bk 1 0500kH 55 60V 222 40 60 000V 59 800V 64 200V 190 00V 176 7 203 30V CONDOR WP i pra
422. reason returns a 1 and an error message is saved in the error queue 6 6 3 OUTPut Subsystem This subsystem is used to configure the output connections of the 9500B and switch the output on and off 6 6 3 1 OUTPut Subsystem Table Keyword Parameter Form OUTPut STATe lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 6 6 3 2 OUTP STAT lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 Purpose This command turns the 9500B output on and off and connects both the output signal and trigger signal to the selected output channels The head connection will only be validated when the output is turned on An error will be generated at this point if the head is not connected to the selected 9500B channel If a head is removed when the output is on then if SRQs are enabled an ON SRQ will be generated e ONor1 will set the output on e OFFor0 will set the output off Response to Query Version The 9500B will return ON if output is on or OFF if output is off 6 6 4 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 4 ROUTe Subsystem This subsystem is used to configure the output channels to be used for signal and trigger outputs 6 6 4 1 ROUTe Subsystem Table Keyword Parameter Form ROUTe FITTed lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 SIGNal PATH lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 IMPedance lt dnpd gt SKEW lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 ON OFF 1 0 DUAL lt cpd gt CH1
423. ressing the DEFAULT TARGETS softkey which becomes highlighted are those considered by Fluke to be generally appropriate for use unless a user decides otherwise shown in the list for DC Positive in para 10 4 2 2 Saved Targets are those previously set and saved in earlier calibrations available when the DEFAULT TARGETS softkey is not highlighted The former user has deemed that for the calibration environment being employed at the time the saved value of a target is more appropriate than the default target The save action is described later in paras 10 4 3 10 4 2 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Standard Calibration Basic Sequences 10 4 3 The Adjustment Screen Using this screen action is taken to perform the adjustment at or close to the selected calibration target having already selected the hardware configuration and committed to default or saved targets on the Target Selection screen refer to paras 10 4 2 10 4 3 1 Setting Target Values Once the correct hardware configuration has been chosen on the Target Selection screen by selecting the Cal Range pressing one of the TARGET softkeys will Transfer to the Adjustment screen similar to the following RESET TRIGGER NONE POINT ICAU O P Amplitude Target Amplitude 1 0000 mV 1 0000 mV TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT PREV SAVE NEXT ACCEPT TARGET TARGET TARGET CALIB This screen
424. rnal FREQuency lt dnpd gt LOCK 6 6 9 2 REF OUTP FREQ lt dnpd gt Purpose This command enables and disables the reference frequency output from the 9500B The lt dnpd gt are used lt 0 9 MHz Reference output will be disabled lt 9 0 MHz Reference output will be set to 1MHz gt 9 0MHz Reference output will be set to 1OMHz Response to Query Version The 9500B will return 0 000000E 00 1 000000E 06 1 000000E 07 6 6 9 3 REF INP SOURce lt cpd gt INTernal EXTernal Purpose This command determines whether the frequency reference for the 9500B is from the internal source or from the external source lt cpd gt INTernal The 9500B will use its internal frequency reference EXTernal The 9500B will use the frequency reference supplied on the external BNC connector Note that in external mode if the 9500B has not locked to the external frequency then the output of the 9500B cannot be turned on Response to Query Version The instrument will return the lt cpd gt for the currently selected frequency source 6 6 9 4 REF INP FREQ lt dnpd gt Purpose This command enables and disables the reference frequency input for the 9500B The lt dnpd gt is used to select the frequency of the external reference The lt dnpd gt must be in the range 1 0E6 and 20 0E6 The 9500B will round the lt dnpd gt to the nearest MHz and uses this as the frequency selection For example a lt dnpd gt of 9 1000E6 would be round
425. rols The front panel is divided into three main areas Standby Normal Center A Menu and Output Display LCD screen with grouped soft keys Right A control panel used to select and adjust operational Functions and Modes with two slots to accept memory cards Left Output Connectors used for connection of the active heads These features are described in the following paragraphs 3 2 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 3 2 2 Front Panel Features 3 2 2 1 Liquid Crystal Display and Screen Keys The 9500B communicates with the operator by presenting essential information on the LCD screen For example the output value generally appears in large characters below the center of the screen accompanied by its units An operator can move through a series of menu screens choosing options from those presented on the screen Eleven soft keys screen keys are grouped below and to the right of the screen These are labelled by characters or symbols representing menu choices which appear in reserved display areas on the screen next to the keys Main functions are selected by buttons on the Oscilloscope Calibrator panel 3 2 2 2 OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR Panel This panel carries the main controls used to select the operational functions and modes of the calibrator a Major Function keys are used mainly in Manual mode Section 4 and Calibration mode Section 10 They
426. rpose The purpose of bus emulation is to minimize reprogramming work in adapting the 9500B into situations where the user already has existing SG5030 CG5010 systems or applications Where the 9500B matches or exceeds the functional capability of the emulated instrument then the command s are emulated Summary 6 F 1 2 Basic Assumptions The 9500B has two IEEE interfaces fitted The emulation is bus only There is no attempt to emulate any manual mode operations Once emulation mode is selected via a configuration screen which allows individual bus addressing the only manual operation available is to return to normal 9500B mode Because the emulation is intended for bus only local operation in Manual mode is limited to 9500B operation There is no ability to mix emulation and SCPI commands Each emulated instrument has an internal virtual state When a command is received for one of the instruments its virtual state will become the active state In other words the 9500B only exists as one instrument at a time The emulated instrument accepts parameter requests within the range of the 9500B not the emulated instrument For instance a9500B 400 variant will clearly not be able to generate 560 MHz as for a SG5030 The application programmer may need to modify the application software in some way to deal with areas where emulation is not supported 6 F 2 Command Compatibility The exact response format of t
427. rpose This command characterizes the instrument s main digital to analogue converter DAC The process takes several minutes to complete Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is put in the error queue 6 6 2 7 CAL SPEC VCO Purpose This command characterizes the instrument s Voltage controlled Oscillator VCO Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is put in the error queue 6 6 2 8 CAL SPEC DCSQ Purpose This command performs calculations to derive the Square function calibration constants from the DC calibration constants Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is put in the error queue 6 6 2 9 CAL SPEC FADJust Purpose This command selects the adjustment facility to allow the frequency generation of the instrument to be calibrated 6 6 2 10 CAL SPEC FADJust lt dnpd gt Purpose This command supplies the lt dnpd gt value that is to be written to the frequency correction DAC Response Operation is successful returns a 0 Operation fails for any reason returns a 1 and an error message is put in the error queue 6 6 2 11 CAL SPEC TMK Purpose This command characterizes the LF timing marker amplitude The process takes several minutes Response
428. rrect and safe use of this instrument operating and service personnel must follow generally accepted safety procedures in addition to the safety precautions specified To avoid injury or fire hazard do not switch on the instrument if it is damaged or suspected to be faulty Do not use the instrument in damp wet condensing dusty or explosive gas environments Whenever it is likely that safety protection has been impaired make the instrument inoperative and secure it against any unintended operation Inform qualified maintenance or repair personnel Safety protection is likely to be impaired if for example the instrument shows visible damage or fails to operate normally WARNING THIS INSTRUMENT CAN DELIVER A LETHAL ELECTRIC SHOCK NEVER TOUCH ANY LEAD OR TERMINAL UNLESS YOU ARE ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN THAT NO DANGEROUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT Explanation of safety related symbols and terms DANGER electric shock risk The productis marked with this symbol to indicate that hazardous voltages gt 30 VDC or AC peak may be present CAUTION refer to documentation The product is marked with this symbol when the user must refer to the instruction manual Earth Ground terminal Functional Earth Ground only must not be used as a Protective Earth i D e WARNING WARNING STATEMENTS IDENTIFY CONDITIONS OR PRACTICES THAT COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH CAUTION CAUTION STATEMENTS IDENTIFY CONDITIONS OR PRACTICES THAT COULD R
429. rt the Card Wheninserting the missing key must be located underneath the card on the right front Socket pins this end Missing key lt underneath Top Insert Write Protect Switch The Static RAM cards can be write protected by means of a small switch on the opposite end to the contact pins Obviously this protection must be switched off before the 9500B can write results If a card is write protected a warning message will appear on the screen Do Not Remove in Mid Procedure It is not necessary to insert a card before enabling but once the card is inserted it must not be removed until the procedure is ended or aborted Such removal will corrupt data 5 2 5 2 Stage by Stage Results Saving The 9500B internal program will generate and save results at the conclusion of each stage in the UUT adjustment or verification procedure The end of each stage is marked by the use of the OK PASS or FAIL screen key on the front panel or of course by the equivalent use of the tracker unit buttons 5 2 5 3 Results Memory Space After a Procedure memory card is created an estimate of the results memory requirement for each procedure is calculated and written on to the card When in use before the first results for a procedure are written into the Results card the 9500B system will review the free memory space on the card If this is less than 150 of the procedure s estimated results requirement the user
430. ry within an Oscilloscope For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 15 is divided into the following sub sections 4 15 1 Introduction 4 15 2 Automated Routing 4 15 3 Default Settings 4 15 4 Menu Selections 4 15 4 1 Retained Channel Memory 4 15 5 Auxiliary Input Operation 4 15 5 1 Bottom Screen Keys 4 15 6 Using the 9500B for Automated Routing of User Specific Calibration Signals to UUT Oscilloscope Input Channels 415 2 4 15 6 1 Introduction 415 2 4 15 6 2 Interconnections ccseee 415 2 4 15 6 3 User s Signal Source 9500B and UUT Scope Setup uu 415 2 4 15 6 4 Sequence of Operations 415 2 4 15 2 Automated Routing Despite the huge flexibility if the 9500B it is sometimes required to apply signals from user s equipment to the inputs of a UUT oscilloscope for specific calibration or test purposes With the 9500B Auxiliary Input selected wideband passive routing is available from a rear panel 50Q SMA input through to the selected 9500B channel output using 9500B front panel controls No trigger pickoff is provided and internal triggers are not available 4 15 3 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial me
431. s f OFF SIGNAL CHE 50Q xig x 10 Pulse Width 50 000 ns O P Amplitude 1 0000 Vew Frequency 1 0000 kHz a TODAY S DATE TIME SIGNAL CHANNEL The above default screen has selected a 50ns Pulse Width at a frequency of 1MHz Output amplitude is fixed at 1 Vpk pk into 500hm 4 18 4 Menu Selections Signal Channel selection operates in the same way as in DC Square function Refer to paras 4 5 3 There is no Trigger Output or selection associated with this function 4 18 4 1 Retained Channel Memory Refer to Para 4 5 3 6 4 18 4 2 Direct Mode Only This function supports Digit Edit Numeric Entry within Direct Mode only Scope Mode entry is not available Refer para 4 4 2 4 18 5 4 18 5 1 ala H 4 18 5 2 SIGNAL CHANNEL Pulse Width Operation Right Side Screen Keys Increases Pulse Width or Frequency by a factor of 10 within max and min limits Decreases Pulse Width or Frequency by a factor of 10 within max and min limits Press to toggle the display waveform Frequency or Period Bottom Screen Keys Permits the screen signal set up to be routed to any of the five heads Final Width 215mm Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Pulse Width Function 4 18 1 Final Width 215mm Left Blank 4 18 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Pulse Width Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Sect
432. s certificate or not e entering or altering the calibration due date e indicate the advance warning period required before the cal due date The following paragraphs show the screens required actions and consequences 10 4 6 1 Exit Mode Key Warning Screen To exit from Calibration press the Mode key on the right of the front panel The 9500B will present a Warning display on the screen WARNING The calibration of the 9500B may now have changed if you wish to date stamp the cal or alter the cal due date select one of the softkeys below The stored cal date is 13 08 1997 The stored due date is 13 08 1998 TODAY S DATE TIME CAL CAL DUE EXIT ate bane 10 4 6 2 Exit Only If you do not wish to alter the date stamp and do not wish to alter the cal due date or its advance warning period press the EXIT key This terminates the calibration session and you will be returned to the Mode Selection screen to select another mode 10 4 6 3 Update the Date Stamp ona Certificate If you wish to update the date stamp to today s date press the CAL DATE key The 9500B presents the Cal Date screen CAL DATE The calibration date of the 9500B has now been set to 13 08 2001 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT DATE The alpha numeric keypad is locked out Ifupdating the date stamp is all that is required without altering the due date press the EXIT screen key to ret
433. s to be disabled 1 On the second Present Settings menu screen press the CAL Alarm key on the bottom row of Softkeys This transfers to the CAL Alarm screen Configuration ae BORDER Ser No 30000 Rev OX UNE Options 3 2 GHz Hiacc tal RESULTS Present Settings CARD Language Engish Border tine 7 o o Nores Panutsa Disabled Engineers Nets Disabled cerr Cerine Sve1 DETALS CLEAR USER TODAY S DATE TIME MST ca stone EXIT ALARM conric Configuration ENABLE The Cal Due alanmstate is indicated by the highlight Use the softkeys to select 9500 TODAY S DATE TIME EXIT 2 The EXIT screen key reverts to the second Present Settings menu screen 3 18 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Manual Mode 4 1 About Section 4 Section 4 is divided into the following sub sections page page page 4 1 About Section 4 4 8 Tine Markers Function 4 13 Overload Pulse Function 4 8 1 ji 4 2 Interconnections 4 8 2 421 4 8 3 4 2 2 4 8 4 Tine Markers Operation 4 13 4 Menu Selecione 2 o ececececcccecesesesceceseeeseeeseees 4 131 4 2 3 4 8 5 Using the 9500B Tine Markers Function to 4 13 5 Overload Pse Operation oo eee 4 131 4 2 4 Calibrate the Tine Base of a UUT 4 13 6 Using the 9500B to Test the Overload Response 4 2 5 QSCHOSCOPS oe eeeeseeseesesesetsstse
434. same Gigahertz Using Zero Skew function CHANNEL head 15 titted SELECT is used to select the channels for Tf one of the heads is removed from its output channel and another substituted the 9500B willrecognize the new head as being unaligned and will not allow it to be used until another precision aligment has been carried out 4 14 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Zero Skew Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 14 5 Measurement of UUT Oscilloscope Channel Skew 4 14 5 1 Introduction The procedure depends on pre alignment of the requisite number of active heads if better than 50ps calibrator alignment is required when UUT specification is lt 200ps or better as broadly described in para 4 14 4 1 4 14 5 2 Interconnections Connect the required active heads to the UUT oscilloscope input channels 4 14 5 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup The following procedure assumes that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with front panel operation In case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for input channel skew test 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Zero Skew function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the _ _ soft key
435. scope deviations via the 9500B screen 4 10 7 2 Interconnections a Usethe appropriate active head and current probe accessory to connect from the required 9500B signal output channel to the UUT current probe b Ifa trigger is required use the appropriate active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the scope input 4 10 7 3 Common Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrument is in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Probe Select the required function for probe pulse response calibration 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Current Function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the Lo A soft key on the top right of the screen 4 10 7 4 UUT Current Probe Pulse Response Calibration using the 9500B as a Fixed Source Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope amplitude calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 950
436. seanss aaa NA EREN EENEN E AENEA EAEEREN 9 2 VERINCALIOMIPFOCEOUES cots epe aoei ipnr dh oe naa E a RAAEN E cas ROERNE ANIO EREE OROEN 9 2 9500B Mainframe Verification by Functions 9 8 1 Verifying the DC Square Function DC Voltage ossesessesessseesesnsrenreresresressrns 9 2 9 8 2 Verifying the DC Square Function Square Voltage ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeteeees 9 6 9 8 3 Verifying the LF Sine Voltage Function 9 8 4 Verifying the Time Markers Function 0 08 i 9 8 5 Verifying the Load Resistance Measurement Function 0 cceeeeeeeeee 9 15 9 8 6 Verifying the Pulse Width Function assisia esnasinda 9 18 9510 9530 9550 9560 Head Verification by Functions 9 9 1 Verifying the Levelled Sine Voltage Function LF Gain ceeeeeseeeeeeeees 9 9 2 Verifying the Levelled Sine Voltage Function Flatness 2 9 9 3 Verifying the Edge Function ccceeseeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeees 9 9 4 Verifying the Load Capacitance Measurement Function Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 About Section 10 and Section 10 Contents 0 0 0 iccccccccceeeeessssteeeeeeeesesseseeeeeeeseeaeee 9500B Mainframe Calibration and Active Head Calibration 10 21 IMtrOGUCHOM iaer 10 2 2 Mainframe Unit Calibration 10 2 3 Active Head Calibration 10 2 4 Other Functions cccceeeeeeeee 10 2 5 Mainframe Unit Manual Calibration The Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 3 1 Introdu
437. selected from a negative potential to ground Fall selected from a positive potential to ground 7 Rise Time a Measure the 10 to 90 combined pulse rise fall time b Calculate the Edge function rise fall time Edge Function Rise fall time Observed Rise Time Scope Pulse Response Time ps c Record the Measured Edge function rise fall time on the copy of the Table d Record the 9500B displayed Rise Time on the copy of the Table 8 9500B Set Output OFF 9 9 3 6 Calculation of Validity Tolerances 1 Introduction The first part of the verification procedure in sub section 9 9 3 5 deals with measurement of rise fall times into an input impedance of 50 Each rise fall time is measured on a wide bandwidth oscilloscope whose pulse response time is taken into account To calculate the validity tolerance limits at each verification point we must take into account the User s Total Measurement Uncertainty and the specified 9500B Speed Tolerance These are combined using an RSS calculation 2 Example Calculation of Validity Tolerance 500ps at 25mV e From the Oscilloscope Specification let us say that its Total Measurement Uncertainty 500ps at 25mV is 20ps e With this we must combine by RSS Method the 9500B Speed Tolerance specification At 500ps the 9500B specification speed tolerance is 50ps to 150ps e Considering the upper limit Validity Tolerance 20ps 50ps 53 85ps e We must now add t
438. ses follow the same rules as for editing square waves refer to para 4 10 6 2 Obviously no frequency adjustment is present and polarity is changed as described in para 4 10 8 1 Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Current Function 4 10 5 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 10 9 Using the 9500B DCI Function to Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope Current Probe 4 10 9 1 Introduction Two types of procedures for amplitude calibration are given a Using the 9500B as a fixed source where the oscilloscope can be adjusted b Using the 9500B as an adjustable source reading oscilloscope deviations via the 9500B screen 4 10 9 2 Interconnections a Usethe appropriate active head and current probe accessory to connect from the required 9500B signal output channel to the current probe at the UUT input b Ifa trigger is required use the appropriate active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the UUT Trigger input 4 10 9 3 Common Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrumentis in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with the methods of editing screen values In the case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 9500B and UUT Oscilloscope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Probe Select the r
439. sion Measurement Ltd Hurricane Way Norwich NR6 6JB U K Fluke Europe B V Final Width 215mm P 0 Box 1186 5602 BD Eindhoven INSIDE REAR COVER The Netherlands www fluke com REAR COVER LEFT HAND
440. solute Tolerance Limits 0 25ppm Lower Higher Measured Period 10 000ns sqr 9 9999975ns 10 0000025ns 100 00ns sqr 99 999975ns 100 000025ns 1 0000us sqr 0 99999975us 1 00000025us 1 0000ms sqr 0 99999975ms 1 00000025ms 10 000ms sqr 9 9999975ms 10 0000025ms 9 14 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 8 5 Verifying the Load Resistance Measurement Function 9 8 5 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 8 5 2 and test interconnections at para 9 8 5 3 The Load Resistance Measurement Function is verified by carrying out measurements of Reference Resistors in the sequence given at paras 9 8 5 5 at the verification points shown in Table 9 8 5 1 9 8 5 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e A traceable high resolution Standards DMM used to measure resistance at 1MQ and 50Q with an accuracy of 0 02 or better For example a Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads incorporating switchable 50Q and 1MQ reference loads For example a Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor e Short high quality 4mm leads 9 8 5 3 Interconnections Refer to Fig 9 8 5 1 overleaf 9 8 5 4 Verification Setup 1 Connections Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the Standards DMM as shown in Fig 9 8 5 1 or via a similar BNC 4mm adaptor and 50Q load and
441. speed outside limits Restricted period for this amplitude Maximum limit Minimum limit Outside amplitude range Maximum amplitude for 50Q load Outside frequency range Outside amplitude range for DC Outside Period range Outside deviation range Deviation restricted by frequency range Deviation restricted by amplitude range Syntax error Outside numeric range Only a restricted setting available Maximum frequency for this waveform is 1 11MHz Minimum highlight period is 20ns No further display ranges available No further options Current probe accessory must be fitted to active head Outside energy range Entered number exceeds limits Channel already in use Outside skew range VCO characterisation failed Invalid number of divisions Invalid units per division Units per div number of div s combination outside range Maximum units per division for 502 load Printer is not responding Printer out of paper Previous test point failed exceeded UUT spec limits Invalid test number No more failures to view No more tests to execute Search procedure NO test point Search procedure Function ID expected Test must be executed first Please wait safety delay Dual channel sine amplitude restricted
442. splay When Calibration mode has been successfully entered by setting the CAL ENABLE switch to the ENABLE position and entering the correct Password the Calibration Mode menu screen shown below will be displayed Calibration Mode TODAY S DATE TIME FACTORY HEAD BASE SPECIAL USE a CAL CAL J 10 3 2 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Calibration Mode 10 3 3 4 Calibration Mode Screen Softkeys The following screen softkeys are active SPECIAL Accesses the Special Calibration menu so that you can perform several Chse Characterise calibration operations which must be done immediately before carrying out routine recalibration of the Model 9500B FACTORY USE ONLY Accesses factory set calibration operations which can only be entered by a special password These calibration operations only need to be performed when the instrument is manufactured or after certain types of repair have been carried out on it The password is not given in this handbook any user who suspects that such calibration may be needed should contact their Fluke Service Center STD CAL Accesses the user control screens for routine external Mainframe calibration of each Model 9500B function able to be calibrated 10 3 4 Special Calibration 10 3 4 1 Selecting Special Calibration Pressing the SPECIAL softkey in the Calibration Mode screen transfers to the Special Calibration screen Chse Special Cal Se
443. ss ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 6 by pressing NEXT TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 3 6 Edge Function 150ps Edge Speed Cal Point Voltage Frequency Target 1 3 0000V Rising Target 2 2 0000V Rising Target 3 1 0000V Rising Target 4 1 0072V Rising Target 5 316 49mV Rising Target 6 316 49mV Rising Target 7 3 0000V Falling Target 8 2 0000V Falling Target 9 1 0000V Falling Target 10 1 0072V Falling Target 11 316 49mV Falling Target 12 316 49mV Falling 10 6 10 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Edge Function Low Edge Gain amp Speed 10 6 3 10 Calibration Procedure 70ps Edge Linearity 1 Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up 2 Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings 3 Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response 4 Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 70ps Edge LIN mode Set 9500B s output ON selecting TARGET 1 from table 10 6 3 4 Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading 7 Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a reading equal to Target Amplitude on the oscilloscope 8 Press ACCEPT CALIB 9 Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 4 by pressing NEXT TARGET and return to s
444. st 1ns lt 4 pk in 20GHz lt 3 pk in 8GHz lt 1 pk in 3GHz first 700ps lt 5 pk in 20GHz lt 3 pk in 10GHz lt 1 pk in 3GHz first 200ps Extended Aberrations lt 0 5 pk 10 ns to Ips lt 0 1 pk beyond tus lt 0 1 pk 500ns to 100ms lt 0 01 pk beyond 100ms lt 1 pk ns to 10ns lt 0 5 pk beyond 10ns lt 1 pk 700ps to 10ns lt 0 5 pk beyond 10ns lt 1 pk 200ps to 10ns lt 0 1 pk beyond 10ns Reflection Absorption gt 30dB NA gt 30dB Frequency 10Hz to 2MHz 10Hz to 100kHz 10Hz to 2MHz 10Hz to 1MHz 10Hz to 1MHz Frequency Accuracy 0 25ppm Trigger to Edge delay Trigger to Edge jitter 25ns typical lt 5ps pk pk typical 1 For Edge amplitudes below 33mV this specification applies in a 3GHz bandwidth Edge speeds faster than 500ps are not recommended for 1MQ input applications The 9560 Head is restricted to 50Q loads only 2 Rise and Fall time definitions in accordance with IEC Standard 60469 1987 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 7 5 Timing Marker Function Specification 7 5 1 Timing Marker Not available via 9550 Active Head Square Narrow Triangle Sine extension of Square Period 9 0091ns to 55s 900 91ns to 55s 900 91ns to 55s 450 5ps to 9 009ns for 9500B 1100 or 9500B 3200 909 1ps to 9 009ns for 9500B 600 1
445. t Status Enable register would have been cleared at power on so PON would not generate the ESB bit in the Status Byte register and no SRQ would occur at power on e If Nrf was zero and the Event Status Enabling register bit 7 true and the Service Request Enabling register bit 5 true a change from Power Off to Power On will generate an SRQ This is only possible because the enabling register conditions are held in non volatile memory and restored at power on This facility is included to allow the application program to set up conditions so that a momentary Power Off followed by reversion to Power On which could upset the 9500B programming will be reported by SRQ Toachieve this the Event Status register bit 7 must be permanently true by ESE phs Nrf where Nrf 2 128 the Status Byte Enable register bit 5 must be set permanently true by command SRE phs Nrf where Nrflies in one of the ranges 32 63 96 127 160 191 or 224 255 Power On Status Clear must be disabled by PSC phs Nrf where Nrf 0 and the Event Status register must be read destructively immediately following the Power On SRQ by the common query ESR 6 5 3 6 Standard Event Status Enable Register The ESE register is a means for the application program to select from the positions of the bits in the standard defined Event Status Byte those events which when true will set the ESB bit true in the Status Byte It contains a user modifiable image of t
446. t amplitude to give a measurement device reading equal to TARGET 1 amplitude in table 0 6 3 1 Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 3 1 Edge Function 500ps Edge Linearity Cal Point Voltage Frequency Edge 10 6 3 5 Calibration Procedure 500ps Edge Gain nw Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 500ps Edge GAIN mode Set the 9500B s output ON Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading Adjust the 9500B s output amplitude to give a measurement device reading equal to TARGET 1 amplitude in table 10 6 3 2 Press ACCEPT CALIB Table 10 6 3 2 Edge Function 500ps Edge Gain Frequency Edge Target 1 1 0000V 100kHz Rising Target 2 2 0000V 100kHz Rising Target 3 2 5000V 100kHz Rising Target 4 1 0000V 100kHz Falling Target 5 2 0000V 100kHz Falling Target 6 2 5000V 100kHz Falling Cal Point Voltage Target 1 2 5000V 100kHz Rising 10 6 8 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Edge Function Linearity amp Gain 10 6 3 6 Calibration Procedure 500ps Edge Speed 1
447. t identifies a specific means of making selections or entering changes on the screen In all editing the Tab key gt is used to select the required variable for adjustment There are two modes selected by the right most soft key on the bottom row beneath the screen which toggles between Direct mode 2 and Scope mode 1 5 encompassing three main ways of adjusting values presented on the screen 1 Direct Mode 2 Once the key has selected the required variable two triangular markers presented above and below a digit in the selected numeric value form a cursor and two methods of value adjustment are available a Digit Edit Cursor keys lt _ and gt control the screen cursor to selecta digit for adjustment then N increments and V decrements the digit selected by the cursor Spinwheel Increments or decrements the selected digit in place of the N and Q keys 3 4 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 b Numeric Entry Edit Key Pad Typing any character on the numeric keypad will set up a box beneath a smaller version of the selected numeric value and place the typed character in the box The right side key labels change to give a choice of units Units After the new value has been typed on the keypad the required units can be chosen from the right side soft keys Pressing one of these keys will cause the display to revert to the Digit Edit f
448. t impedance 5 9500B Set Output ON and wait for the DMM reading to settle Table 9 8 3 1 Sine Verification into 502 Load Please copy the following table Enter the measurements in the Measured Value column on the copy Final Width 215mm Frequency Output Absolute Tolerance Output Absolute Tolerance Measured Voltage Limits pk pk Voltage Limits RMS Value pk pk Lower Higher RMS Lower Higher RMS 4 8000V 4 632V 4 968V 1 69706V 1 6377V 1 7565V 4 8000V 4 632V 4 968V 1 69706V 1 6377V 1 7565V 1 9000V 1 8335V 1 9665V 0 67175V 0 6482V 0 6953V 1 9000V 1 8335V 1 9665V 0 67175V 0 6482V 0 6953V 9 12 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 8 4 Verifying the Time Markers Function 9 8 4 1 Summary Equipment requirements are given at para 9 8 4 2 and test interconnections at para 9 8 4 3 The Time Markers Function is verified by carrying out measurements of Period in the sequence given at paras 9 8 4 5 at the verification points shown in Table 9 8 4 1 9 8 4 2 Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B Mainframe with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e Digital counter for 0 25ppm clock accuracy measurements Example Hewlett Packard Model HP53131A with Option 012 9 8 4 3 Interconnections Refer to Fig 9 8 4 1 Frequency Counter Fig 9 8 4 1 Time Marker Verification Interconnections 9 8 4 4 Verification Setup 1 Connections 2 Counter 3 9500B
449. t off and return to the Target Selection screen Repeat steps 3 to 12 for each of the target values displayed in the Target Selection screen Repeat steps 2 to 13 for each of the Cal Ranges detailed in the Table 10 5 5 1 Note If other functions are being calibrated in addition to Square Waveform refer to Table 10 5 2 1 on page 10 5 5 for information on sequencing calibrations Table 10 5 5 1 LF Sine Function Hardware Configurations and Calibration Targets Function Waveshape Target Frequency Hardware Configuration Target Amplitude Default Minimum Maximum Span Default Minimum Maximum 1 0000kH 0 9000kH 14 1 0000kH 0 9000kH 14 45 000kH 44 000kH 46 45 000kH 44 000kH 46 1 0000kH 0 9000kH 14 1 0000kH 0 9000kH 14 45 000kH 44 000kH 46 45 000kH 44 000kH 46 wre AWN 000k 000k 000k 000k 000k 000k 000k 000k Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz 1 400V 2 224V 1 6000V 1 5500V 1 7000V 1 400V 2 224V 1 9000V 1 8000V 2 0000V 1 400V 2 224V 1 6000V 1 5500V 1 7000V 1 400V 2 224V 1 9000V 1 8000V 2 0000V 2 224 5 56V 2 6000V 2 5500V 3 0000V 2 224 5 56V 4 8000V 4 2000V 5 0000V 2 224 5 56V 2 6000V 2 5500V 3 0000V 2 224 5 56V 4 8000V 4 2000V 5 0000V Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B LF Sine Function 10 5 15 Final Width 215mm 10 5 6 Load Resistance Measurement Calibration 10 5 6 1 Introduction This secti
450. t s Adjustment screen 20 a If you wish to change the amplitude of the target calibration point press the TAB key one or more times until the cursor is positioned on the target amplitude value Now use any editing mode to change this value note that the new value must lie within the limits specified in the detailed procedures provided later in this section b For Square or Sine functions only If you wish to change the frequency of the target calibration point press the TAB key 10 5 2 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Summary of Calibration Process 21 22 23 one or more times until the cursor is positioned on the Frequency value Now use any editing mode to change this value note that the new value must lie within the limits specified in the detailed procedures provided later in this section c Press the SAVE TARGET soft key Press the 9500B s ON key to turn its output on Ensure that cursor control is returned to the 9500B output amplitude display and increment or decrement this value using the cursor controls and or spinwheel until the reading on the measuring instrument connected to the 9500B s front panel active head channel is the same as the displayed target value Note make sure to allow for any settling time required by the external measuring instrument When you are satisfied with the measurement press the ACCEPT CALIB key to generate and implement the correction factor required by
451. tages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Select the required channel and use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required trigger point ramp time and expected load for the UUT Scope test point UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the test point Select the correct range for the test point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Sa 2 TER u Trigger Level Marker Check a Ifa trigger level calibration is provided adjust the UUT s trigger response to the ramp to be appropriate to the settings on the 9500B screen as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide b If no adjustment is provided on the UUT Scope record its trigger response at the test point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF 4 12 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Linear Ramp Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 13 Overload Pulse Function 4 13 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B for generating Overload Pulses for use in testing oscilloscope 50Q terminator Protection For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 13 is divided into the following sub sections
452. tal Measurement Uncertainty Lower Validity Tolerance Limit Upper Validity Tolerance Limit Measured Value 9500B Displayed Rise Time Value t 25 000mV 150ps 50ps ps ps 50 000mV 150ps 50ps ps ps 250 00mV 150ps 50ps ps 500 00mV 150ps 50ps 2 5000V 150ps 50ps A 25 000mV 25ps 25ps 50 000mV 25ps 25ps i 250 00mV 25ps 25ps i 500 00mV 25ps 25ps ae tT GS AR AR TE 2 5000V 25ps 25ps Verification points EDG11 to EDG20 available for Active Head Mode 9530 only 95008 displayed value accuracy specification for ESS 40ps for EA ass for IES ups for sg 4 Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 31 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm Table 9 9 3 1 Edge Function Verification Cont Please copy the following table Enter the calculation results and measurements in the appropriate columns on the copy Nominal Rise Fall Time 10 90 Output Voltage pk pk Lower Tolerance Limit Upper Tolerance Limit User s Total Measurement Uncertainty Lower Validity Tolerance Limit Upper Validity Tolerance Limit Measured Value 9500B Displayed Rise Time Value t 70ps eg 33 00mV 66 00m
453. tance or Load Capacitance 4 16 6 1 Introduction Both measurement procedures consists of connecting an active head to each channel input in turn and checking that the resulting resistance or capacitance reading is within specification limits 4 16 6 2 Interconnections Use the appropriate active head to connect from the required 9500B signal output channel to the UUT input channel No triggers are required or available 4 16 6 3 9500B and UUT Scope Setup 1 Preparation Ensure that both instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function for Load Resistance or Load Capacitance measurementas required 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Load Resistance or Load Capacitance Measurement function with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the C2 or 4qt soft key at the bottom of the screen 4 16 6 4 Sequence of Operations Load Resistance Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope Load Resistance measurement points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of test stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 5 at each stage 1 9500B a Press the SIGNAL CHANNEL screen key on the bottom row Select the required signal channel Select the appropriate load 50 or 1MQ using the toggle screen key in the bottom right corn
454. tant are those of Abort and End 5 3 4 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Access Guide Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 5 3 3 10 ABORT Up to this point of choosing a procedure when an ABORT screen key is pressed the system will revert to the first Procedure mode screen Select USER NAME After the choice of procedure has been confirmed by OK the procedure itself is controlled from the card sequence and when an ABORT screen key is pressed the system will generate a special ABORT message which also ends the procedure overwriting the currently displayed screen fF gt This procedure has been ABORTED Please select one of the softkeys below TODAY S DATE TIME USER MODEL SERIAL PROC RETRY The procedure can be aborted by the 9500B itself for other reasons This will also invoke the ABORT screen For the choices obtained from the five screen keys refer to paras 5 3 3 12 Removal of Active Head If the in use Active Head is removed during a procedure this will be detected and a message will appear on the screen Please ensure that these heads are correctly inserted Channel X Head Num 1234567 Channel Y Head Num 7654321 TODAY S DATE TIME OK ABORT The head serial numbers are given Channel X refers to the selected signal channel and Channel Y is the selected trigger channel If no head was fitted then
455. te Out of Range Indication The valid range of limit values is from 10V to 110V When values outside this range are entered an error message will appear on the screen and the EXIT screen key label will be replaced by OK By pressing OK the original value is reinstated and the message disappears for a second attempt 3 4 3 4 Bus address Remote Operation via the IEEE 488 interface Addressing the 9500B When the 9500B is set for remote operation control is removed from the front panel and given to an external controller Communication is set up between the 9500B and its controller via the IEEE 488 bus connected into an interface within the 9500B Commands from the controller are addressed to the 9SOOB using an address code which can be a number in the range 0 30 For the 9500B to respond this number must be matched by the same number programmed into the 9500B using the procedure given below Remote operation of the 9500B via the IEEE 488 interface is described in Section 6 N B The correct bus address is necessary to use remote commands but remote operation is available only when the instrument is in MANUAL or CALIBRATION mode 1 The 9500B IEEE 488 bus address can be set to any number within the range 0 to 30 For access from the Present Settings screen press the BUS ADDRESS screen key at the top right 2 The 9500B transfers to the TEEE 488 ADDRESSES screen 3 10 Section 3 Model 9500B
456. te response Bit 6 reflects the Request Service state true condition of the interface 6 4 3 3 Incoming Commands and Queries The Input Buffer is a first in first out queue which has a maximum capacity of 128 bytes characters Each incoming character in the I O Control generates an interrupt to the instrument processor which places it in the Input Buffer for examination by the Parser The characters are removed from the buffer and translated with appropriate levels of syntax checking If the rate of programming is too fast for the Parser or Execution Control the buffer will progressively fill up When the buffer is full the handshake is held The Parser checks each incoming character and its message context for correct Standard defined generic syntax and correct device defined syntax Offending syntax is reported as a Command Error by setting true bit 5 CME of the Standard defined Event Status register refer to Sub Section 6 5 Retrieval of Device Status Information Execution Control receives successfully parsed messages and assesses whether they can be executed given the currently programmed state of the 9500B functions and facilities If a message is not viable then an Execution Error is reported by setting true bit 4 EXE of the Standard defined Event Status register Viable messages are executed in order altering the 9500B functions facilities etc Execution does not overlap commands
457. ted that some other calibration may be required contact your Fluke Service Center Test Mode overleaf gt Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 1 Introducing the Model 9500B 1 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 1 2 2 5 Test Mode Three main variants of self test are available for user initiation e Base Test Tests the base unit only No head data is tested e Heads Test Tests the fitted Active Heads only assuming that base tests have been passed All Test Tests both the base unit and active heads fitted Note In the above three tests the 9500B will keep a list of all test failures including the number of the test and its result Any failures can then be recalled using screen keys e Fast Test This is the same as the confidence test carried out at power on checking power supplies basic operation etc e Interface Test This can be used to check the operation of the display and its memory the keyboard and or printer connected to the instrument A blank memory card inserted in either slot on the front panel can also be tested WARNING the stored contents of any memory card subjected to this test will be over written It is possible to print out a set of results of selftests A printer can be connected directly to the 25 way Centronics printer port on the rear panel The printer can be enabled from within Configuration mode Test procedures and error code descriptions are given
458. tem reset being accomplished by resetting at all three levels in order to every device In other circumstances they may be used individually or in combination IFC Bus initialization DCL Message exchange initialization RST Device initialization The effects of the RST command are described in Appendix D to this section 6 4 2 Section 6 9500B System Operation Using the 9500B in a System 6 4 3 Message Exchange 6 4 3 1 IEEE 488 2 Model The IEEE 488 2 Standard document illustrates its Message Exchange Control Interface model at the detail level required by the device designer Much of the information at this level of interpretation such as the details of the internal signal paths etc is transparent to the application programmer However because each of the types of errors flagged in the Event Status Register is related to a particular stage in the process a simplified 9500B interface model can provide helpful background This is shown below in Fig 6 1 together with brief descriptions of the actions of its functional blocks 6 4 3 2 9500B STATUS Subsystem Input Output Control transfers messages from the 9500B output queue to the system bus and conversely from the bus to either the input buffer or other predetermined destinations within the device interface It receives the Status Byte from the status reporting system as well as the state of the Request Service bit which it imposes on bit 6 of the Status By
459. tep 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain num Table 10 6 3 7 Edge Function 70ps Edge Linearity Cal Point Voltage Frequency Edge Target 1 25mV 100kHz Rising Target 2 40mV 100kHz Rising 10 6 3 11 Calibration Procedure 70ps Edge Speed al a Ensure that the 9500B is connected to the oscilloscope as shown in figure 10 6 3 1 and that both instruments are powered on and warmed up Select the required 9500B Trigger Channel Cable Select and Trigger Ratio settings Select the required measurement device function to measure edge response Ensure that the 9500B is in HEAD CAL Edge 150ps Edge SPEED mode Set 9500B s output ON selecting TARGET 1 from table 10 6 3 6 Select a measurement device range that gives an on scale reading Note the rise or fall time of the edge and enter it into the Edge Speed Field on the 9500B Make sure allowance is made for the rise time of the oscilloscope Edge Rise Time Measured Rise Time Scope Rise Time Press ACCEPT CALIB Select the next TARGET in table 10 6 3 6 by pressing NEXT TARGET and return to step 4 repeat until no TARGETs remain Table 10 6 3 8 Edge Function 70ps Edge Speed Cal Point Voltage Frequency Edge Target 1 2 2000V 1MHz Rising Target 2 1 2000V 1MHz Rising Target 3 70mV 100kHz Rising Target 3 750mV 1MHz Rising Target 4 75mV 100kHz Rising Target 4 700mV 1MHz Rising Target 5 120mV 100kHz Rising Target 6 100kHz Rising
460. the 9500B to ensure that its displayed output value and actual output value coincide Note In Operations 23 to 25 the NEXT TARGET and PREV 24 25 26 27 28 28 TARGET keys provide a shortcut to avoid returning to the Target Selection screen Press EXIT to return to the Target Selection screen Repeat steps 17 to 23 for each of the target values displayed in the Target Selection screen Repeat steps 16 to 24 for each of the Cal Ranges associated with the 9500B function that is being calibrated Repeat steps 14 to 25 for each function of the 9500B which is to be calibrated Press the Mode key to exit from Calibration mode refer to Sub section 10 4 paras 10 4 6 for the processes of date stamping altering Cal Due date and setting the advance warning period Press either the PROC or MANUAL screen keys to return the 9500B to normal Procedure Mode or Manual Mode respectively 10 5 2 2 Sequencing Calibrations The table below indicates the order in which the various Model 9500B functions should be calibrated Although it is not essential to calibrate all the functions indicated below at any one time functions higher in the list should be calibrated before those lower in the list Sequence Function Sub Section DC Square DC Voltage Positive DC Square DC Voltage Negative DC Square Square Voltage Positive DC Square Square Voltage Negative DC Square Square Voltage S
461. the Units div by ten A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero p Toggles the value between positive and negative DC only ii Cursor on Multiplier A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Ae Toggles the value between positive and negative DC only iii Cursor on Deviation A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero vA AA Press to set Deviation value in avn A f absolute units A Press to set Deviation value in percent of set value iv Cursor on Frequency Period X10 Multiplies the marked value by ten 10 Divides the marked value by ten A Toggles the Deviation value between the marked value and zero Press to change display from Frequency to Period not DC E Press to change display from Period I to Frequency not DC 4 10 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Current Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 10 5 2 Right Side Screen Keys Direct Edit Right side screen keys operate on the value in the edit box and acting in place of the key exit from Direct Edit back to Digit Edit then set the value as evaluated in the box Cursor on Deviation Evaluates the number in the box in Deviation Percentage A Evaluates the number in the box in Amps mA Evaluates the number in the box in Milliamps uA Evaluates the number in the box in Microamps 4 10 5 3 Bottom Screen Keys Digit and Direct Edit
462. the front panel The error will pull the processor reset line to restart the system as at power on The screen will display a message indicating that there has been a system trip error and thus the processor has been reset A user may continue by use of the resume key or from power on and initiate repair if the fault persists The following is a list of error numbers which will be displayed with their fault descriptions 9501 DAC Default Characterisation Failed 9502 Failed to clear Flash RAM 9504 No ADC ready bit after 160ms 9505 Flash RAM protected by switch 9510 Measurement failed to complete 9512 Output off request did not complete 9514 Output Off Expected 9515 Main unit control loop failure 9516 Internal overheating Check air vents 9517 Internal frequency Failed to re lock 9518 ADC failed to complete measurement 9519 Rf DAC control loop failure 9520 TV waveform control loop failure For the following errors an error number will be allocated at run time UNDEFINED SYSTEM TRIP ERROR OPERATING SYSTEM ERROR 8 A 2 2 Recoverable Errors 8 A 2 2 1 Type of Errors These consist of Command Errors Execution Errors Query Errors and Device Dependent Errors Command Query and Execution Errors are generated due to incorrect remote programming Device Dependent Errors can be generated by manual as well as remote operation Each of the reportable errors is identified by a code number Appendix
463. the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required Overload Pulse and polarity for the UUT Scope test point b If the scope requires a repetitive trigger press the AUTO TRIG soft key at the bottom right corner of the screen UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the test point Select the correct range for the test point If required adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display 9500B Set Output ON b Press the TRIG PULSE screen key once observe and note the UUT scope response c If required repeat pressing the TRIG PULSE screen key as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide observe and note the UUT scope responses 4 UUT Response Record the UUT Scope response at the test point as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Test Guide If required reset the scope protection circuit 5 9500B Set Output OFF So PN Pw 4 13 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Overload Pulse Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 4 14 Zero Skew Function 4 14 1 Introduction Skew is defined as the relative delay between two or more selected channels If the channel delays are equallized then the condition is known as Zero Skew This sub section is a guide to using the 9500B Zero Skew function to a Adjust selected 9500B channels to equallize their delays b Use the same channels as sources for measuring the skew between input channe
464. the number of failures is shown on the screen and an extra selection will be available VIEW FAILS sets up a special screen for detailing the parameters of the failures encountered described later in Paras 8 3 2 3 8 3 2 3 Viewing the Test Results By pressing the VIEW FAILS screen key each of the failed tests can be viewed in turn on a screen which shows the test number pathway measured value upper and lower limits and the value of the error A brief description of the test is also given in a box beneath the values The screen for viewing the test results is shown below This can also appear when a test has been aborted Selftest Test Path no XXX XXX Measured value XXXXXXX Nominal value XXXXXXX Upper Limit XXXXXXX Lower Limit XXXXXXX Error XXXXXXX Description of Test TODAY S DATE TIME PREV NEXT EXIT FAILURE FAILURE N B If the cause of failure is not immediately obvious and it is intended to consult your Fluke Service Center please ensure that you either copy the details from the screen for all the reported failures or print out the results NEXT FAILURE Once the details of the first failure have been noted the next failure in the list can be viewed by pressing the NEXT FAILURE screen key The list of failures remains in memory until the next selftest is started and the PREV FAILURE screen key can be used to help scan the listone at atime Once the last failur
465. tile memory During normal use this figure is recalled and presented on the Rise Time field for the selected head channel and selected type of edge 4 7 4 3 Low Voltage LV and High Voltage HV States Entering and leaving High Voltage state in High Edge Function is governed by the same rules as for Square function refer to para 4 5 5 3 The threshold setting limits are 10Vpk pk and 110Vpk pk 4 7 5 Using Active Heads 4 7 5 1 Introduction Active heads are introduced briefly in paras 4 2 2 Interconnections The front panel operations of Signal Channel selection Trigger Channel selection Cable selection and Trigger Ratio are described earlier in paras 4 5 3 DC Square function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Edge Function 4 7 3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 7 6 Using the 9500B Edge Function to Calibrate the Pulse Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 7 6 1 Introduction Two types of procedures for pulse response calibration use the 9500B as a fixed source where the oscilloscope can or cannot be adjusted 4 7 6 2 Interconnections a Use the appropriate active head to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Signal Channel to be calibrated b Ifa trigger is required use the appropriate active head or trigger cable to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT Trigger for the Channel to be
466. ting Output Period Frequency 4 8 3 5 Bottom Screen Keys Digit and Direct Edit WAVE Provides a second menu screen FORM for selection between three Time Marker waveshapes or their high lighted versions paras 4 8 4 3 With output on the output to the UUT is grounded for any waveform or DC selection CHANNEL Permits the screen signal setup to SELECT be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel trigger ratio and cable channel paras 4 5 3 Press to select Direct Mode paras Ea 4 4 3 4 gt Press to select Scope Mode setting the step sequence to l 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 as chosen using the Preferences key paras 4 4 1 2 At maximum and minimum output period the screen settings of the contributors values Time Marker and Deviation are limited by both the output period frequency and the output voltage For example 100mV 500mV 450 46ps O P Time Marker Period Amplitude Min Max Deviation O P Period Min Max 450 46ps 1V 626 96ps 909 10ps 621 32ns 900 91ns 621 32ns 900 91ns 13 794ns 20 000ns 621 32ns 20 000ns 621 32ns 20 000ns 4 8 2 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B Time Markers Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1100 Provided they do not exceed the O P Period limits shown the contributors have the following adjustments Scope mode a Time Marker Period a
467. tion 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification Standards DMM Q Guard Active Head ACTIVE HEAD INPUT 230 Vpk Meas 50k Q Meas 50 0 Ret 50k WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 9 8 2 1 DC Square Square Voltage Verification Interconnections Continued overleaf Section 9 Verifying the Model 9500B Accuracy Specification 9 7 Final Width 215mm 9 8 2 5 Verification Procedure Copy the three tables 9 8 2 1 9 8 2 2 and 9 8 2 3 Follow the correct sequence of verification points as shown on the tables and carry out the following operations at each verification point 1 Verification Points Refer to Table 9 8 2 1 6 Amplitude a Measure the RMS Output Voltage value 2 DMM Select the correct RMS Voltage range for the b Record this value in the Measured Value verification point RMS Output Voltage column of the copy of the Table 3 9500B Set the O P Volts p p and waveform as required c Check thatthe Measured Value is at or between for the verification point the Absolute Tolerance Limits 4 4955 Ifusing the Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor set its 7 95008 Set Output OFF switch to SQV o c If not using the Model 4955 8 Press the WAVEFORM soft key Select Square negative by ensure that the DMM input is AC coupled at high pressing the M key on the right of the screen Repeat steps 2 impedance to
468. tion of various settings sTOre lt num gt Store front panel settings TESt Performs instrument selftest Failure is reported via the SRQ system gt lt gt lt gt lt USEreq ON OFF Enables or disables the ability to generate an SRQ by pressing the ID button on the front panel USEreq Returns the present status of the instrument ID SRQ a USEREQ OFF 6 F4 Appendix F to Section 6 9500B System Operation Emulation of Tektronix SG5030 and CG5010 5011 6 F 5 6 F 5 1 Command Equivalence Table 6 F 5 1 below and overleaf lists the CG5010 commands as outlined in the manual The 9500B Emulation column indicates whether the 9500B emulates the CG5010 command X indicates that the 9500B does not have an equivalent mapping In this case the 9500B will accept the command and take no further action indicates that the 9500B does not have an equivalent mapping but the command is dealt with For example queries that report a standard answer are mapped indicates that the command is mapped CG5010 5011 Programmable Calibrator 6 F 5 2 Status and Error Reporting The Status Byte coding is the same as the CG5010 5011 but the error numbers returned are those of the 9500B Refer to Section 8 Appendix A Table 6 F 5 1 CG5010 5011 Command Emulation by 9500B CG5010 5011 Command A D lt NR3 gt A Sets mode to Current and sets units per division CG5010 5
469. tion points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide and carry out the following operations 1 to 6 at each stage 1 9500B Use the front panel controls to set the 9500B Output to the required square wave p p voltage polarity frequency and load impedance for the UUT Scope amplitude cal point 2 UUT Scope Select the correct channel for the cal point Select the correct range for the cal point 9500B Set Output ON UUT Scope Adjust the sweep speed and trigger level for a stable display Observe and note the amplitude response pBwoe Calibration Use the 9500B Deviation control to slew the 9500B Output voltage until the UUT s response is appropriate to the 9500B settings as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide b Record the 9500B screen output voltage as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 6 9500B Set Output OFF Pim Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function 4 5 7 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 4 5 7 DC Operation 4 5 7 1 Polarity Waveform Selection Screen From the power on default pressing the WAVEFORM screen key transfers to the waveform menu screen BDD mV div x4 20 000 mvn Deviation 09 00 et O P Amplitude 20 000 mV Eo Frequency 1 kHz P
470. tion screen that contains the Exit and Store Head Cal softkeys Selecting Exit produces the reminder message WARNING Cal data not stored Exit again to abandon data Select Exit to abandon head cal data To store head cal data select the Store Head Cal softkey which produces a new screen labelled Head Calibration CHx where x is the head number Follow the on screen instructions to e select the warning period before recalibration is due e modify the cal due date Below the displayed dates is a message that reads These heads have unsaved data followed by a line that identifies the heads e g CH1 CH4 If there is no cal data to store or if all head cal data storage is complete the NONE indicator appears Selecting the Store softkey displays the message Saving cal factors to head x where x is the head number The save operation may take up to 30 seconds to complete To save any remaining unsaved head data use the Channel Select softkey to change to the appropriate head then select Store Repeat for each unsaved head until the NONE indicator is displayed Select Exit to step back through the menus to the required instrument setting 10 6 16 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Exit from Head Calibration Final Width 215mm Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B 10 6 17 Fluke s Regional Sales and Service Offices Fluke Corporation P 0 Box 9090 Everett WA 98206 9090 U S A Fluke Preci
471. tive immediately Standard accessories associated products and options supplied with the instrument should be as described in Section 1 and on your delivery note 2 4 Storage The instrument should be stored under cover The shipping container provides the most suitable receptacle for storage as it provides the necessary shock isolation for normal handling operations Place the instrument with an active desiccant sachet inside a sealed bag Fit the bag into the cushioning material inside the inner carton place this within the corner cushioning blocks inside the outer shipping container and locate the whole package within the specified storage environment 2 5 Preparation for Shipment Ifthe 9500B is to be transported please consider using the carry case Option 60 The instrument should be transported under cover The original double shipping container should be used to provide shock isolation for normal handling operations Any other container should be double cushioned providing similar shock isolation to the following approximate internal packing dimensions Length Width Depth Outer Box 785mm 675mm 440mm Inner Box 675mm 565mm 315mm Cushioned to 460mm 430mm 145mm Place the instrument with an active desiccant sachet inside a sealed bag Fit the bag into the cushioning material inside the inner carton place this within the corner cushioning blocks inside the outer shipping container and secure the whole packag
472. to 2 78Vv Dual channel sine amplitude restricted to 1 668V Maximum frequency for 1M 352 load 3 Selected head restricts frequency to 1 1GHz Multi channel DC requires 1M 352 impedance Outside Pulse Width range 9560 Dual channel sine frequency restricted to 3 2GHz ALWAYS record the total message content for possible use by the Service Center Appendix A to Section 8 9500B Maintenance Error Reporting Subsystem 8 A3 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 8 A 2 2 8 Device Dependent Errors Reported only Remotely via the IEEE 488 Interface The error list for remote operations which are not reported on the front panel screen is given below 300 Device specific error 312 PUD memory lost 315 Selftest failed 330 Configuration memory lost 350 Queue overflow 8 A 2 2 9 Device Dependent Errors Reported both Locally and Remotely Errors are reported both on the front panel screen and via the IEEE 488 interface Note that the locally presented error message will not include the error number General 1049 CH5 Load mismatch detected UUT lt 50k 352 001 Active head removed with output on 1050 CHI Load mismatch detected UUT gt 150 352 002 Softkey label too long 1051 CH2 Load mismatch detected UUT gt 150 352 003 Confirm with ON 1052 CH3 Load mismatch detected UUT gt 150 352 004 Unknown keycode 1053 CH4 Load mismatch detected UUT gt 150 352 006
473. to Ground Timing Markers gt 10ns Normal 1 19 Pulse Signal div 1 10 100 Rising Edge or Triangle Peak Highlighted 1 199 Pulse Signal div 1 10 100 Rising Edge or Triangle Peak Current DC Square 100Hz Square Square Signal div 1 10 100 Depart from ground 1 64 Period Composite Video Line Composite Sync Line Freq Sync lead edge Field Pulse Frame Freq Frame start Linear Ramp 1 2 Pulse Signal div 1 10 100 Start of rise or fall Overload Pulse Step or Square Single or 100Hz Input Leakage Auxiliary Input and Input Impedance functions have no related trigger output No trigger provided in Pulse Width function Amplitude 1Vpk pk into 509 Rise and Fall Time lt ins Aberrations lt 10 Source VSWR 1 2 1 typ Lead Edge Free running 100Hz signal provided 7 10 Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications Section 8 8 1 About Section 8 Model 9500B Routine Maintenance and Test Section 8 gives first level procedures for maintaining a Model 9500B performing the Selftest operations and dealing with their results We shall recommend maintenance intervals methods and parts and detail the routine maintenance procedures Section 8 is divided into the following sub sections 8 2 Routine Maintenance General Cleaning scceecseeescsseessseseeesteeesseees 8 2 8 2 2 Air Intake Filter Description and Maintenan
474. to turn the 9500B output off and return to the Target Selection screen Repeat steps 2 to 14 for each of the target values displayed on the Target Selection screen also see Table 10 5 6 1 below Note If other functions are being calibrated in addition to Square Waveform refer to Table 10 5 2 1 onpage 10 5 5 for information on sequencing calibrations Table 10 5 6 1 Load Resistance Measurement Function Calibration Targets Function Target Resistance 4955 Switch Positions Default Maximum Op 5 b Op 8 a 45 000Q 45 000kQ 50 000 C 50 000kQ 1 0000MQ 0 9000Ma 19 000MQ 18 000MaQ 55 0009 55 000kQ 1 1000MQ 19 900MQ Ref 50 Q Ref 50k Q Ref 1M Q Ref 19M Q Meas 50 Q Meas 50k Q Meas 1M Q Meas 19M Q 10 5 18 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Load Resistance Measurement Function 10 6 9510 9530 9550 9560 Head Calibration Procedures Sub section 10 6 is a guide to the process of calibrating the Model 9510 9530 9550 and 9560 Head functions from the front panel The following topics are covered 10 6 1 Levelled Sine Function LF Gain Calibration 10 6 2 Levelled Sine Function HF Calibration 10 6 3 Edge Function Calibration 10 6 4 Calibrating the Timing Markers 10 6 5 Load Capacitance Calibration 10 6 6 50Q 1MQ Ratio Calibration 10 6 7 Exit from Head Calibration The list of topics above are placed in the order in which the 9500B Head functions shou
475. tor can process the calibration of the 9500B itself Calibration can be controlled from the front panel or via the IEEE 488 Interface Refer to Section 10 TEST Test Mode This mode permits an operator to initiate and interact with any ofa series of tests as follows Base Heads All Fast or Interface Refer to Section 8 3 8 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 3 4 2 Passwords and Access 3 4 3 Configuration Mode Password Entry Configuration Mode is used to change the s For Configuration settings of those parameters which have been 1 AllConfiguration mode selections require placed under user control a password When the 9500B is shipped Enter password O00000 from new the password requirement is N B A password is required for access to enabled to avoid unauthorized access change settings 2 Itis recommended that both passwords be When changing configuration startas follows 1 Press the Mode key to obtain the Mode TODAY S DATE TIME changed for security purposes at the Selection menu screen 2 Pressthe CONFIG screen key at the center EXIT earliest opportunity The shipment Configuration password is 12321 as typed on the front panel keypad when the Password Entry screen for Configuration mode is showing It is stated here to allow entry to Configuration of the bottom row to progress into Configuratio
476. trast from head on viewing positions To change the contrast 1 Use the tab key to position the cursor on the contrast number 2 Use the spinwheel or up down cursor keys to adjust for your best display contrast by increasing or decreasing the contrast number 3 3 1 4 Scope Mode Amplitude Steps For most UUT oscilloscopes amplitude sensitivity can be increased or decreased at values which run in a sequence of 1 2 5 factor steps The Scope Mode Amplitude step parameter can change the sequence to match certain oscilloscopes with 1 2 2 5 4 5 factor steps To change the Amplitude steps parameter 1 Use the tab key to position the cursor on the Amplitude steps sequence 2 Use the spinwheel or up down cursor keys to toggle between 1 2 S5 and 1 2 2 5 4 5 factor steps 3 3 1 5 Scope Mode Time Steps This operates on the same basis as Amplitude steps but the result is a change in output period and frequency in the chosen factor steps To change the Time steps parameter 1 Use the tab key to position the cursor on the Time steps sequence 2 Use the spinwheel or up down cursor keys to toggle between 1 2 5 and 1 2 2 5 4 5 factor steps 3 6 Section 3 Model 9500B Controls Modes of Operation Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 3 3 1 6 Deviation Display The deviation of an output signal amplitude from the factored output step value is controllable within 1 1 2 from the function screen
477. troller requires the necessary feedback to enable it to progress the task any break in the continuity of the process can have serious results When developing an application program the programmer needs to test and revise it knowing its effects Confidence that the program elements are couched in the correct grammar and syntax and that the program commands and queries are thus being accepted and acted upon helps to reduce the number of iterations needed to confirm and develop the viability of the whole program So any assistance which can be given in closing the information loop must benefit both program compilation and subsequent use Such information is given in the following pages Fig 6 2 Overleaf Two main categories of information are provided Status Summary information and Event Register conditions 6 5 2 1 Status Summary Information and SRQ The Status Byte consists of four summary bits which notify events in the 8 bit latched IEEE 488 2 defined Event Status Register ESB the two 16 bit latched SCPI defined registers OSS amp QSS and the Output Queue MAV Whenever one of these summary bits is enabled and set true the Status Byte summary bit MSS is also set true The buffered bit RQS follows true when MSS goes true and will set the IEEE 488 SRQ line true Note that in Fig 6 2 no arrow points at bit 6 of the Service Request Enable Register bit 6 is always enabled A subsequ
478. trument under calibration Section 7 Model 9500B Specifications 7 1 Final Width 215mm 7 3 Voltage Function Specification 7 3 1 Voltage Function Not available via 9550 Active Head Square Wave Into 1MQ Into 50Q Into 1MQ 9530 into 50Q Note1 9560 into 5022 Note1 Amplitude 1mV to 200V 1mV to 5V 40uV to 200V pk pk 40uV to 5V pk pk 40uV to 5V pk pk Accuracy lt 10kHz 0 025 25uV gt 1mV 0 1 104V gt 1mV 4 0 1 104V gt 1mV 0 2 104V lt mV 1 10uV lt 1MV 1 10uV lt 1MV 1 10uV Ranging Volt div factors of 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 or continuously variable Deviation 11 2 Including over and under range Rise Fall Time lt 100Vpk pk lt 150ns gt 100Vpk pk lt 200ns Aberrations lt 2 peak for first 500ns lt 0 1 after 500ns lt 0 01 after 100us Frequency 10Hz to 100kHz Frequency Accuracy 0 25ppm Frequency Ranging 1 2 50r 1 2 2 5 4 5 or continuous Final Width 215mm DC into 1MQ available at all heads simultaneously for accelerated multi point DC linearity testing Output Current 140mA max for Vout lt 22 24V 20mA max for Vout gt 22 24V Waveform Settling Time 200ms to 0 01 for DC or 2270Hz square wave increasing to 3s for 0 01 at 10Hz extends to 600ms max if instruction crosses a safety threshold or if an Output On is involved Note 1 Accuracy specification excludes variability of res
479. ts of a BNC male connector which is plugged into the BNC output female socket on any model head A loop is connected between the BNC center and shell which is available for insertion into the recess of an oscilloscope current probe The loop presents 50Q loading to the head Fig 4 10 1 Current Probe Accessor we YJ With the 9500B Auxiliary Current function selected and output on the output current in the loop can be set to the UUT oscilloscope s current probe calibration points using 9500B front panel controls 4 10 3 Default Settings When Manual mode is selected the system defaults into DC Square function and shows the DC Square function initial menu screen The Current function is accessed by first pressing the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then pressing the m A soft key on the top right of the screen Whenever the Current menu screen is opened except on recovery from a standby period it will appear with the following default settings by OFFS nO THO mAldiv x4 4 0000 mon Deviation gogo A 8 O P Amplitude 4 0000 mA Frequency 1 0000 kHz TODAY S DATE TIME FORN Eal p The above default screen has auto selected the symmetrical square waveform as indicated by the icon in the top left corner Frequency is variable between 10 000Hz and 100 00kHz Frequency has defaulted to 1kHz deviation A to zero and output current to 4 0000mAp p
480. tsetsetsetseteetees 48 4 OF a UJT OSCIISCOPE eeeeeeteetetestententees 4 13 2 4 3 Mana Mode Function Selection 4 9 Avsiliary Functions 4 14 Zero Skew Function 4 3 1 Introduction 4 3 2 Sdection of Manual Mode 4 14 3 Menu Sdections 4 3 3 Front Pand FUNGON KEYS ooeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeees 4 31 4 14 4 Zero Skew Operation 44 Edt Facilities 4 10 1 4 14 5 Measurerent of UUT Oscilloscope AAT WHATOAUCHON E 44 1 4 10 2 CHAN SKEW eo eececccccsceeseeseeseeseesesseeseeseeses 4 143 4 10 3 4 10 4 MEU SACCHIONS 0 eeecceeeeccssssteeeecsseteeeeeenene 4102 415 Aoiliaryinot 4 10 5 a 4 10 6 Square Operation 4 10 3 4 10 7 Using the 9500B Current Square Function to Calibrate the Pulse Response of a UUT Oscilloscope Qurrent Prb 410 4 4 15 5 Avpiliary INPE Qper ation eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 415 1 410 8 DIQQET nr 4 105 4 15 6 Using the 9500B for Autoneted Routing of 4 10 9 Using the 9500B DCI Function to Calibrate the User Specific Calibration Signals to Using the 9500B Square Function to Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscillascope Input Chamas n n 4 15 2 Anpitude Response of a UUT O dilloscope 4 5 6 UUT Oscillascope Current Probe wo 4 10 6 4 16 Load Resi cic A M 45 7 DC Operation ASS raner 4 16 1 WAOGUCHION occ eseseeessssssseeeeceessneececenesneeeeee 416 1 4 5 8 Using the 9500B DC Function to Calibrate the aad ies 4 162 Amplitude Response of a UJT Oscillascope 4 5 9 4 11 2 Si
481. turned Neither RESistance nor CAPacitance Selected IfneitherRESistancenorCAPacitance is selected this command will return 2E35 Note According to the SCPI spec if a measurement is requested when it is not possible to perform the task i e output off function not selected etc then the message 230 Data corrupt or stale is put in the error buffer NO READING IS RETURNED This may hang the bus if the user application is poorly written because the controller will be expecting an answer to its query command For user friendliness a value of 2E35 is always returned Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 15 Final Width 215mm Final Width 215mm 6 6 7 STATus Subsystem This subsystem is used to enable bits in the Operation and Questionable Event registers The Operation and Questionable Event Enable and Condition registers can be interrogated to determine their state For further information regarding the Status structure refer to Sub Section 6 5 6 6 7 1 STATus Subsystem Table Keyword Parameter Form STATus OPERation EVEN ENABle lt dnpd gt CONDition QUEStionable EVEN ENABle lt dnpd gt CONDition PRESe 6 6 7 2 STAT OPER EVEN Purpose STAT OPER returns the contents of the Operation Event register clearing the register Response A lt dnpd gt in the form of an Nr1 number is returned The value of the number w
482. uare wave in a positive direction referred to ground Similarly lt cpd gt NEG sets the output square wave in a negative direction referred to ground and lt cpd gt SYMM sets the output square wave symmetrically about ground Response to Query Version The instrument will return POS NEG or SYMM as programmed 6 6 8 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 5 6 Purpose This command sets the square wave output of the signal to zero OV when selected ON and will return the output to its previous value when selected OFF Changing function will turn off the ground selection SOUR PAR SQU GRO lt cpd gt ON OFF 1 0 With output ON a settings conflict error will be reported if the SQUare function has not been selected lt cpd gt The character program data lt cpd gt ON or lt cpd gt 1 sets the output voltage to 0V Conversely lt cpd gt OFF or lt cpd gt 0 returns the output to its previous value Response to Query Version The instrument will return ON grounded or OFF not grounded as programmed 6 6 5 7 SOUR PAR EDGE TRAN SOUR SCOP TRAN lt cpd gt RISing FALLing lt cpd gt RISing FALLing Purpose This command applies only to the Edge function It selects the direction of the edge which follows the trigger A settings conflict error will be reported if the EDGE function has not been selected lt cpd gt lt cpd gt RIS sets a positiv
483. uirements OPT ee OPT will recall the instrument s hardware fitment Response Format Character position 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 x1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 s Ss s s ss s_ LN ol Where The data in the response consists of comma separated characters each being either 1 or nl newline with EOI The data element type is Nr as defined in the IEEE 488 2 standard specification Response Decode The character positions represent the following hardware fitment Ch1 Ch5 Active Head Fitment to Specified Channel where ChX No Active Head Fitted ChX 1 Active Head Fitted x1 Option 100 High Stability Crystal Reference where x1 1 indicates that option 100 is fitted x1 0 indicates that option 100 is not fitted Ss Base Frequency Field LN 1 indicates that enhanced multichannel DC is fitted LN 0 indicates that enhanced multichannel DC is not fitted Execution Errors None Power On and Reset Conditions Not applicable 6 C6 Appendix C to Section 6 9500B System Operation IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 6 C 9 Power On Status Clear This common command conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard requirements a O PSC sets the flag controlling the clearing of defined registers at Power On Nrf is a decimal numeric value which when rounded to an integer value of zero sets the power on clear flag false This
484. ult 00 00 the deviation percentage can be changed to any value within its resolution between 11 20 and 11 20 The result of combining the units division multiplier and deviation are shown as the p p value of O P Amplitude Output Voltage Scope and Direct Mode The O P Amplitude is only adjustable by means of its contributors Frequency Scope and Direct Mode The triangular type of cursor indicates that all the cursor keys can be used From the default 50kHz the output frequency can be changed to any value within its resolution between 100mHz and 1 1GHz O P Amplitude lt 3 336Vp p or between 100mMHz and 550MHz any valid O P Amplitude 4 6 4 3 Limitations for UUT Scope input impedance of 1MQ The selection of UUT Oscilloscope input impedance of 50Q is strongly recommended when using the Sine Function at high frequency e g gt LOOMHz This ensures that the 9500B output signal is correctly terminated within the UUT There are however many Oscilloscopes that do not feature an input 50Qterminator To address these instruments the 9500B when configured to drive 1MW applies its own 50Q terminator within the Active Head 9510 9520 9530 only However the effectiveness of this approach is limited by short but finite signal path length to the UUT input amplifiers and their input capacitance Substantial Sine amplitude errors may result from this un terminated transmission line Error magnitude and the frequency at
485. urce to a specified channel input as required by the oscilloscope manufacturer s calibration procedure 4 15 6 2 Interconnections a Use the appropriate active head to connect from the required 9500B signal output channel to the UUT input channel b Connect the user s source to the AUXILIARY INPUT SMA connector on the 9500B rear panel 4 15 6 3 User s Signal Source 9500B and UUT Scope Setup The following procedures assume that the 9500B instrumentis in Manual Mode Itis also assumed that the user will be familiar with front panel operation In case of difficulty re read the paragraphs earlier in this Section 4 1 Preparation Ensure that all instruments are powered ON and warmed up 2 UUT Scope Select the required function requiring the user s specific signal 3 9500B Ensure that the 9500B is in Auxiliary Input with Output OFF If in any other function press the Aux key on the right of the OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR panel then the AUX IN soft key on the right of the screen 4 User s Signal Source Set up the signal source to provide the required signal to the 9500B rear panel Auxiliary Input refer to the Auxiliary Input Routing Specification in para 4 15 5 2 4 15 6 4 Sequence of Operations Refer to the table or list of UUT Oscilloscope calibration points in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Follow the sequence of calibration stages as directed by the guide a
486. urn to the Mode Selection screen 10 4 6 4 Setting the Cal Due Date and Advance Warning Period N B If these parameters are not altered then those which are already stored will be presented on any directly printed certificate To alter the CAL DUE date press the CAL DUE DATE key The 9500B will present the CAL DUE DATE screen CAL DUE DATE The stored cal date is 14 DAYS 13 08 2001 seg cele E 30 DAYS Present due date warning period is highlighted 60 DAYS 13 08 2002 TODAY S DATE TIME CAL CAL DUE EXIT DATE DATE This screen also displays a stored CAL DATE reminder for calculating the cal due date If you do not wish to update the CAL DUE DATE press the EXIT screen key Setting the Cal Due Date To set anew CAL DUE DATE use the alpha numeric keypad to type in the required due date then press the Enter A key Note that the screen presentation uses the DATE TIME format set in Configuration mode and should be observed otherwise the advance warning period could be calculated from an incorrect date refer to User s Handbook Operation Section 3 paras 3 4 3 12 Advance Warning Period In order to inform auser that the future due date for calibration is approaching the 9500B will place a warning on the screen starting at the nominated period of time before the due date every time the 9500B is powered on WARNING Instrument near cal due date After the Cal due date
487. uto trigger the oscilloscope or use the 100Hz Trigger from the 9500B Adjust the UUT for a stable display b Observe and note the DC level change from graticule zero 7 Calibration a Use the 9500B Deviation control to slew the 9500B Output voltage until the UUT s response is appropriate to the 9500B settings as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide Record the 9500B screen output voltage as detailed in the UUT Oscilloscope Manufacturer s Calibration Guide 8 9500B Set Output OFF 4 5 10 Section 4 Using the Model 9500B DC Square Function Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 4 6 Sine Function 4 6 1 Introduction This sub section is a guide to the use of the 9500B to generate sine waves for flatness and bandwidth calibration of oscilloscopes For those users who require more detailed instructions for interconnections and manipulating the front panel controls refer to sub sections 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 Section 4 6 is divided into the following sub sections 4 6 1 Introduction 4 6 2 Default Settings 46 4 6 3 Menu Selections 46 4 6 3 1 Retained Channel Memory 46 1 4 6 3 2 Right Side Screen Keys Digit Edit SEQUENCE Soroll seseris 4 6 1 4 6 3 3 Right Side Screen Keys Numeric ENUY enineering 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 Bottom Screen Keys Digit Edit Sequence Scroll and UIMBAG EMY doiscccoinzesacseessceonesarire 4 6 2 4 6 4 Sinewave Operation 46 4 1 Value Editing 4
488. utput Signal Channel 50Q Load trigger channel and Trigger Ratio if required via the Target Selection screen 10 5 14 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B LF Sine Function 10 5 5 5 Calibration Procedure 1 Starting at Cal Range 1 calibrate at all calibration points listed in Table 10 5 5 1 by performing operations 2 to 13 below Select the required 9500B hardware configuration by choosing the appropriate Cal Range For this Cal Range use a or b a If you wish to use the saved target calibration points used during the previous calibration of the 9500B do not press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key b If you wish to use the default target calibration points defined for this hardware configuration press the DEFAULT TARGETS screen key Press the TARGET 1 TARGET 2 TARGET 3 or TARGET 2 screen key to display the target s Adjustment screen Note Omit operation 5 if you do not wish to change the frequency or 5 amplitude of this target calibration point a Ifyou wish to change the target calibration point frequency use the TAB gt key to position the cursor on the Frequency value Now use any editing mode to change this value note that the new value must lie within the Max and Min limits specified in Table 10 5 5 1 b Ifyou wish to change the target calibration point amplitude use the TAB key to position the cursor on the Target Amplitude value Now use any editing mode to change this value n
489. via 9550 Active Head 9500B 3200 with 9530 Head 0 1 Hz to 3 2 GHz 9500B 3200 with 9560 Head 0 1 Hz to 6 4 GHz Frequency Uncertainty 12kHz 0 25ppm lt 12kHz 3ppm Amplitude pk pk into 50Q 0 1Hz 550MHz 5mV to 5V 0 1Hz to 550MHz 5mV to 5V 0 1Hz to 550MHz 5mV to 5V 0 1Hz to 550MHz 5mV to 5V 550MHz 600MHz 5mV to 3V 550MHz to 1 1GHz 5mV to 3V 550MHz to 2 5GHz 5mV to 3V 550MHz to 2 5GHz 5mV to 3V 2 5GHz to 3 2GHz 5mV to 2V 2 5GHz to 3 2GHz 5mV to 2V 3 2GHz to 6 4GHz 25mV to 2V Amplitude Accuracy 1 5 at single Ref Frequency 50 kHz 10MHz Flatness wrt Ref Freq Into VSWR of 1 6 1 1 2 1 0 1Hz to 300MHz 4 42 0 1Hz to 300MHz 4 42 0 1Hz to 300MHz 4 42 0 1Hz to 300MHz 2 42 300MHz to 550MHz 4 42 5 300MHz to 550MHz 4 2 5 300MHz to 550MHz 4 42 5 300MHz to 550MHz 2 5 2 5 550MHz to 600MHz 5 43 5 550MHz to 1 1GHz 5 43 5 550MHz to 1 1GHz 5 3 5 1 1GHz to 3 2GHz 5 44 550MHz to 3 0GHz 3 5 3 3 0GHz to 6 0GHz 5 44 Source VSWR typical lt 1 35 1 lt 550MHz lt 1 1 1 550MHz to 3 0GHz lt 1 2 1 3 0GHz to 6 0GHz lt 1 35 1 Amplitude Ranging Volts div ranging 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 or continuously variable Deviation 11 2 Including over and under range Harmon
490. vice Request Enable Register bit 7 gt oss MSS RQS bit 5 Summary Bit ESB gt ESB bit 4 MAV bit 3 Questionable Status Register Summary Bit QSS Questionable Status Enable Register bit 15 RESISTANCE CAPACITANCE bit 14 bit 13 pa bit 12 gt bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 ERE bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SSS SS SSS QUEStionable ENABle QUEStionable EVENt MLM hi QUEStionable ENABle lt DNPD gt Not used in 9500B Operation Complete s RQC Standard bit 1 bit 0 OPC Defined Event Status Event Status Register Enable Register p 5 bit 7 Power On PON aN Not used bit 6 in 9500B URQ gt bit 5 Command Error CME bit 4 ue Execution Error EXE bit 3 Device Dependent Error DDE bit 2 Query Error QYE 2 v ESR ESE ESE phs Nrf QSS Not used in 9500B gt gt bit 2 lt bit 1 bit 0 STB Message Available Bit MAV True if one or more messages are present in the Output Queue Fig 6 2 9500B Status Reporting Structure a 4 SRE SRE phs Nrf 6 5 2 Section 6 9500B System Operation Retrieval of Device Status
491. vide by 100 The lt dnpd gt will be rounded in the ranges 0 9 lt dnpd lt 1 1 selects 1 1 ratio 9 0 lt dnpd lt 11 0 selects 1 10 ratio 90 0 lt dnpd lt 110 0 selects 1 100 ratio Values outside these ranges will generate a settings Data out of range error Response to Query Version The 9500B response returns the selected ratio as follows if 1 1 is selected 9500B returns 1 if 1 10 is selected 9500B returns 10 if 1 100 is selected 9500B returns 1E2 6 6 4 10 ROUT SIGN MCH lt cpd gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command provides the capability to select multiple channels for the simultaneous output of a DCV signal only Any changes to the amplitude of this DCV signal will appear on all selected output channels Response to Query Version The 9500B will return all of the selected channels 6 6 6 Section 6 9500B System Operation SCPI Language Commands and Syntax 6 6 5 SOURce Subsystem This subsystem is used to select the sources of 9500B output Note about backward compatibility with programs written for the Model 9100 plus Option 250 For users upgrading to Model 9500B who already have SCPI programs written for Model 9100 a number of 9100 commands have been included in the 9500B command set These SCOPE commands can be used to make the 9500B select functions and parameters corresponding to those of the 9100 Where SCOPE commands are available the keywords and pa
492. wer on Status Clear flag setting e the Protected User Data Query response The Enable Macro Command EMC is not used The Define Device Trigger Command DDT is not used Parallel Poll is not implemented in the 9500B RST enforces the following states e The 9500B reverts to Manual Procedure mode e the 9500B is returned to Operation Complete Command contents of the Status Byte Register the Status Byte Enable Register the Standard Event Status Register the Standard Event Status Enable Register the SCPI Operation Status Register the SCPI Operation Status Enable Register the SCPI Questionable Status Register the SCPI Questionable Status Enable Register e the state of the IEEE 488 1 interface Error Queue Idle State OCIS Appendix D to Section 6 of the User s Handbook for Model 9500B e the 9500B is returned to Operation Complete Query Idle State OQIS e Settings Related to Common IEEE 488 2 Commands are as detailed in paras 6 D 2 overleaf e Settings related to SCPI Commands are as detailed in paras 6 D 3 overleaf 6 D 2 General Active Mode The 9500 can power up in either Manual or Procedure mode but Manual Mode or Calibration mode must be selected for Remote Operation The required mode is selected by pressing Mode key on front panel and choosing from the Mode Menu Calibration mode requires a password Device I D Serial Number Factory serial number preserved Pr
493. which are valid Query Requests both IEEE 488 2 Common Query Commands and 9500B Device specific Commands by sending any required Response Data to the Response Formatter after carrying out the assigned internal operations Device dependent errors are detected in this block Bit 3 DDE of the Standard Event Status register is set true when an internal operating fault is detected Each reportable error number is appended to the Error Queue as the error occurs 6 4 3 5 Outgoing Responses The Response Formatter derives its information from Response Data being supplied by the Functions and Facilities block and valid Query Requests From these it builds Response Message Elements which are placed as a Response Message into the Output Queue The Output Queue acts as a store for outgoing messages until they are read over the system bus by the application program For as long as the output queue holds one or more bytes it reports the fact by setting true bit 4 Message Available MAV of the Status Byte register Bit 4 is set false when the output queue is empty refer to Sub Section 6 5 Retrieval of Device Status Information 6 4 3 6 Query Error This is an indication that the application program is following an inappropriate message exchange protocol resulting in the Interrupted Unterminated or Deadlocked condition Refer to Bit 2 in paras 6 5 3 5 The Standard document defines the 9500B s response part of wh
494. will be prompted by audible warning and error message Confirm with ON that HV State is required This is done by pressing the OUTPUT ON key again then after a short delay the output voltage will be raised to the new voltage in HV state While OUTPUT is ON in HV state a distinctive pulsing tone is emitted Once in HV state OUTPUT can be turned ON and OFF with no need to confirm Decreasing Output Voltage out of High Voltage State When decreasing output value using any method if the new value will be less than the lower limit of HV State then the LV state will be activated No warning will be given except that the pulsing tone will cease This rule applies whether OUTPUT is OFF or ON Applicability to Square Function In Square Function the output voltage can only rise above the minimum threshold setting of 10V when the expected load setting is IMQ High Voltage State cannot be entered when the expected load setting is 50Q 4 5 6 Using the 9500B Square Function to Calibrate the Amplitude Response of a UUT Oscilloscope 4 5 6 1 Introduction Two types of procedures for amplitude calibration are given a Using the 9500B as a fixed source where the oscilloscope can be adjusted b Using the 9500B as an adjustable source reading oscilloscope deviations via the 9500B screen 4 5 6 2 Interconnections a Use the appropriate active head to connect from the required 9500B channel output to the input of the UUT
495. will be warned to insert a different card 5 2 5 4 Static RAM Card Non Rechargeable Battery Condition Battery Voltage Monitoring Each Static RAM card is powered by its own battery which maintains the non volatile status of its RAM While a results card is present in PCMCIA SLOT 2 the 9500B continuously monitors the battery voltage state When the voltage falls to approach a failure condition a warning is given on the 9500B screen Changing the Battery With the card present in PCMCIA SLOT 2 the RAM is powered from 9500B power supplies so it is possible to pull out the battery module from the card and insert anew module without losing the stored data 5 2 5 5 Static RAM Card Rechargeable Battery Battery Charging Each Static RAM card is powered by its own battery which maintains the non volatile status of its RAM While a results card is present in PCMCIA SLOT 2 with the 9500B powered ON the battery will berecharged The specified recharge times are 8 hours to 60 capacity and 40 Hours to 100 capacity If the card battery charge is low when the card is inserted into PCMCIA SLOT 2 a low battery warning may be given on the 9500B screen during the initial charge period of up to 40 seconds Battery Access and Life The battery is not accessible to be changed in these cards but the retention time between chargings is in excess of six months Descriptions assume 9500B 1 100 Section 5 9500B Procedure Mode Sa
496. y no device trigger capability 6 6 6 1 CONFigure RESistance CAPacitance Purpose This command is used to select the UUT input resistance or capacitance measurement function as appropriate Exit from the measurement function via the SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe commands Any command that is received that cannot be executed e g VOLT FREQ etc will generate a settings conflict error 6 6 6 2 CONFigure Response to Query The instrument will return either RES or CAP if the measurement function is selected or NONE if not selected 6 6 6 3 READ Purpose This query only command is used to return the most recent measurement for either the UUT inputresistance or capacitance function as appropriate Response to Query This command will return the last measurement taken for either the resistance or capacitance function as appropriate Resistance In the case of successfully measuring the resistance value of the UUT this command will return a number within the approximate range of 10 to 150 or SOE3 to 20E6 depending on the setting of the 9500B channel impedance Capacitance In the case of successfully measuring the capacitance value of the UUT this command will return a number within the approximate range of 1 0E 12 to 120 0E 12 Value Cannot be Resolved If the resistance or capacitance is selected but the measurement is unable to resolve a value i e no scope connected then the value 2E35 will be re
497. ymmetrical LF Sine Load Resistance Measurement 10 5 3 10 5 3 10 5 4 10 5 4 10 5 4 10 5 5 10 5 6 Table 10 5 2 1 Recommended Sequence of Calibrations Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B Summary of Calibration Process 10 5 3 Final Width 215mm 10 5 3 DC Square DC Voltage Calibration 10 5 3 1 Introduction This section is a guide to calibrating the Model 9500B s DC Square Function DC Voltage using its front panel controls The following topics are covered 10 5 3 2 Calibration Equipment Requirements 10 5 3 3 Interconnections 10 5 3 4 Calibration Setup 10 5 3 5 Calibration Procedure 10 5 3 2 Calibration Equipment Requirements e The UUT Model 9500B with 9510 or 9530 Active Head e A high resolution Standards DMM with DC Voltage accuracy of 0 005 or better from 1mV to 200V For example a Model 1281 Digital Multimeter e An adaptor to convert from BNC to 4mm leads For example a Model 4955 Calibration Adaptor Final Width 215mm e Short high quality 4mm leads 10 5 4 Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square DC Voltage Function 10 5 3 3 Interconnections Standards DMM C Guard Q Guard Final Width 215mm 62 LO av PK MAX A _ Active Head WAVETEK 4955 CALIBRATION ADAPTOR Fig 10 5 3 1 DC Square DC Voltage Calibration Interconnections Section 10 Calibrating the Model 9500B DC Square DC Volt
498. ys Direct Edit Right side screen keys operate on the value in the edit box and acting in place of the J key exit from Direct Edit back to Digit Edit then set the value as evaluated in the box Cursor on Deviation V mV 4 7 3 4 HV 500ps i CHANNEL SELECT Evaluates the number in the box in Deviation Percentage Evaluates the number in the box in Volts Evaluates the number in the box in Millivolts Bottom Screen Keys Digit and Direct Edit Selects High Edge pulse highlighted when selected Selects 500ps Edge pulse highlighted when selected Selects Fast Edge pulse highlighted when selected Permits the screen signal setup to be routed to any of the five heads allowing selection of trigger channel trigger ratio and cable channel paras 4 5 3 Press to select Direct Mode paras 4 4 3 4 Press to select Scope Mode setting the step sequence to 1 2 5 or 1 2 2 5 4 5 as chosen using the Preferences key paras 4 4 1 2 4 7 4 Edge Function Operation 4 7 4 1 Value Editing The section below assumes the use of a 9510 or 9530 Active Head Operating output level and frequency boundaries vary for other Head types Refer para 7 4 1 Amplitude At maximum and minimum output voltages the screen settings of the contributors values units division scaling multiplier and deviation are limited by the output voltage itself refer to Table 4 7 4 1 9510 or 9530 He

Model 9500B

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents